DC Digital Drive

590+ Series
DC Digital Drive
Product Manual
HA466461U003 Issue 5
Compatible with Version 7.x Software
Copyright 2005 SSD Drives Limited (formerly Eurotherm Drives Limited)

All rights strictly reserved. No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by
any means to persons not employed by an SSD Drives company without written permission from SSD Drives Ltd.
Although every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this document it may be necessary, without notice, to
make amendments or correct omissions. SSD Drives cannot accept responsibility for damage, injury, or expenses
resulting therefrom.
WARRANTY
SSD Drives warrants the goods against defects in design, materials and workmanship
for the period of 12 months from the date of delivery on the terms
detailed in SSD Drives Standard Conditions of Sale IA058393C.
SSD Drives reserves the right to change the content and product specification without notice.
Cont.2
Safety Information
Requirements
IMPORTANT: Please read this information BEFORE installing the equipment.
Intended Users
This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to install, configure or
service equipment described herein, or any other associated operation.
The information given is intended to highlight safety issues, and to enable the user to obtain
maximum benefit from the equipment.
Complete the following table for future reference detailing how the unit is to be installed and
used.
INSTALLATION DETAILS
Serial Number
(see product label)
Where installed
(for your own
information)
Unit used as a:
(refer to Certification
for the Converter)
R Component
R Relevant Apparatus
Unit fitted:
R Wall-mounted
; Enclosure
Application Area
The equipment described is intended for industrial (non consumer) motor speed control utilising
dc shunt machines.
Personnel
Installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment should be carried out by qualified
personnel. A qualified person is someone who is technically competent and familiar with all
safety information and established safety practices; with the installation process, operation and
maintenance of this equipment; and with all the hazards involved.
Cont.3
Safety Information
Hazards
WARNING!
This equipment can endanger life through rotating machinery and high voltages.
Failure to observe the following will constitute an ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.
This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to IEC 61800-3.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
This product is designated as professional equipment as defined in EN61000-3-2.
Permission of the supply authority shall be obtained before connection to the low
voltage supply.
The equipment must be permanently earthed due to the high earth leakage current.
The drive motor must be connected to an appropriate safety earth.
Before working on the equipment, ensure isolation of the mains supply from terminals L1,
L2 and L3.
Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the
drive from the circuit being tested.
When replacing a drive in an application and before returning to use, it is essential that all
user defined parameters for the products operation are correctly installed.
This equipment contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts. Observe static
control precautions when handling, installing and servicing this product.
IMPORTANT: Metal parts may reach a temperature of 90 degrees centigrade in operation.
Application Risk
The specifications, processes and circuitry described herein are for guidance only and may need
to be adapted to the users specific application.
SSD Drives does not guarantee the suitability of the equipment described in this Manual for
individual applications.
Risk Assessment
Under fault conditions, power loss or other operating conditions not intended, the equipment
may not operate as specified. In particular:
The motor speed may not be controlled
The direction of rotation of the motor may not be controlled
The motor may be energised
Guards
The user must provide guarding and /or additional safety systems to prevent risk of injury and
electric shock.
Protective Insulation
All control and signal terminals are SELV, i.e. protected by double insulation. Ensure all
wiring is rated for the highest system voltage.
Note: Thermal sensors contained within the motor must be double insulated.
All exposed metalwork in the Converter is protected by basic insulation and bonding to a
safety earth.
RCDs
These are not recommended for use with this product but ,where their use is mandatory, only
Type B RCDs should be used.
Cont.4
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1
Page
GETTING STARTED
Equipment Inspection and Storage .............................................................. 1-2
Packaging and Lifting Details ...................................................................... 1-2
About this Manual ........................................................................................ 1-2
Initial Steps .............................................................................................................1-2
How the Manual is Organised .................................................................................1-3
Chapter 2
AN OVERVIEW
OF THE
CONVERTER
How it Works................................................................................................. 2-1

Control Features ........................................................................................... 2-2
Understanding the Product Code ................................................................. 2-3
Model Number (Europe) ..........................................................................................2-3
Catalog Number (North America) ............................................................................2-4
Door Assembly Product Code ................................................................2-5
Product Identification ................................................................................... 2-5
Component Identification ............................................................................. 2-6
590+ Controller (Frames 1 & 2)............................................................2-6
590+ Door Assembly (Frames 3, 4, 5 & H)...........................................2-7
590+ Controller (Frame 3) ...................................................................2-8
590+ Controller (Frames 4 & 5)............................................................2-9
590+ Product (Frame H).....................................................................2-10
Chapter 3
INSTALLING
THE
CONVERTER
Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 3-1

Unpacking the Converter.........................................................................................3-1
Lifting the Converter ................................................................................................3-1
Product Dimensions.................................................................................................3-2
Mounting the Converter...........................................................................................3-3
Recommended Tools.............................................................................3-3
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements......................................................................3-3
Installing the Fan (Frame H) ..................................................................3-3
Installing the External Vent Kit (Frames 4 & 5).........................................3-4
AC Line Choke........................................................................................................3-5
Filtering ..................................................................................................................3-5
Frame H Additional Information...............................................................................3-6
Removing the Cover (Frame H).............................................................3-6
Changing DC Output Terminals (Frame H) ............................................3-6
Electrical Installation .................................................................................... 3-7
Minimum Connection Requirements .........................................................................3-8
Connection Diagrams ...........................................................................3-9
Power Connections .............................................................................3-12
Control Connections ...........................................................................3-15
Motor Field Options ..............................................................................................3-20
Internal/External Supply (Frames 2, 3, 4 & 5) .......................................3-20
Cont.5
Contents
Contents
Page
DC Contactor - External VA Sensing.......................................................................3-23

Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3) .................................3-23
Power Board PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5) .........................3-23
External Connections (Frame H) ..........................................................3-24
Optional Equipment ................................................................................... 3-25
Fitting the Remote 6901 Operator Station ............................................3-25

Speed Feedback and Technology Options............................................3-26
External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation ............................................3-27
Earth Fault Monitoring Systems ............................................................3-28
Installation Drawings ................................................................................. 3-29

Converter Installation Drawings .............................................................................3-29
Filter Installation Drawings.....................................................................................3-41
Line Choke Installation Drawings ...........................................................................3-48
Chapter 4
OPERATING
THE
CONVERTER
Pre-Operation Checks .................................................................................. 4-1

Control Philosophy........................................................................................ 4-2
Start/Stop and Speed Control....................................................................... 4-2
Selecting Local or Remote Control .........................................................4-3
Reading the Status LEDs ..........................................................................................4-4
Setting-up the Converter .............................................................................. 4-5
Calibrating the Control Board..................................................................................4-5
Selecting Speed Feedback .......................................................................................4-6
Speed Feedback Option Boards ............................................................4-6
Initial Start-up Routine ................................................................................. 4-8
Performance Adjustment........................................................................................4-14
Current Loop - The Autotune Feature ...................................................4-14
Speed Loop ........................................................................................4-14
Starting and Stopping Methods ................................................................. 4-16
Stopping Methods .................................................................................................4-16
Normal Stop (C3) ...............................................................................4-17
Program Stop (B8) ..............................................................................4-19
Coast Stop (B9)...................................................................................4-20
Standstill ............................................................................................4-20
The Trip Condition ..............................................................................4-20
Normal Starting Method ........................................................................................4-21
Advanced Starting Methods ...................................................................................4-21
Starting Several Converters Simultaneously ..........................................4-21
Jog ....................................................................................................4-21
Crawl.................................................................................................4-21
Cont.6
Contents
Contents
Chapter 5
Page
THE OPERATOR STATION

Connecting the Operator Station ................................................................. 5-1
Controlling the Operator Station.................................................................. 5-1
Control Key Definitions............................................................................................5-2
Keys for Programming the Converter .....................................................5-2
Keys for Operating the Converter Locally ...............................................5-2
Indications ..............................................................................................................5-3
Operator Station LEDs ..........................................................................5-3
Operator Station Alarm Messages .........................................................5-3
The Menu System .......................................................................................... 5-4
The Local Menu ......................................................................................................5-5
The L/R Key ..........................................................................................5-5
The PROG Key......................................................................................5-5
Navigating the Menu System....................................................................................5-6
Changing a Parameter Value...................................................................................5-6
The Menu System Map ............................................................................................5-7
Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations.........................................................5-8
Quick Tag Information..........................................................................5-8
Changing the Stack Size (3-button reset) ................................................5-8
Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset) ..........................................5-9
Special Menu Features ............................................................................... 5-10
Selecting a Menu Viewing Level .............................................................................5-10
Selecting the Display Language..............................................................................5-10
Password Protection ..............................................................................................5-11
To Activate Password Protection ...........................................................5-11
To Deactivate Password Protection .......................................................5-12
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings............................................ 5-13
Saving Your Application ........................................................................................5-13
Restoring Saved Settings ........................................................................................5-13
Copying an Application .........................................................................................5-13
Chapter 6
PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

Programming with Block Diagrams ............................................................. 6-1
Modifying a Block Diagram .....................................................................................6-1
Setup and Configuration Modes ............................................................6-1
Making and Breaking Function Block Connections..................................6-1
Programming Rules ..............................................................................6-2
Saving Your Modifications .....................................................................6-2
Understanding the Function Block Description ..........................................................6-2
MMI Menu Maps ..................................................................................6-3
Function Block Descriptions .......................................................................... 6-4
ANALOG INPUTS .................................................................................6-5
ANALOG OUTPUTS..............................................................................6-7
AUX I/O ...............................................................................................6-8
Cont.7
Contents
Contents
Chapter 7
TRIPS
AND
Page
BLOCK DIAGRAM (MMI only) ..............................................................6-13
CALIBRATION ....................................................................................6-14
CONFIGURE DRIVE ............................................................................6-17
CURRENT LOOP.................................................................................6-19
CURRENT PROFILE .............................................................................6-22
DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................................................6-23
DIAMETER CALC. ...............................................................................6-29
DIGITAL INPUTS .................................................................................6-31
DIGITAL OUTPUTS .............................................................................6-34
FIELD CONTROL ................................................................................6-36
INERTIA COMP...................................................................................6-40
INHIBIT ALARMS .................................................................................6-41
INTERNAL LINKS.................................................................................6-44
JOG/SLACK .......................................................................................6-48
MENUS ..............................................................................................6-50
miniLINK ............................................................................................6-51
OP STATION ......................................................................................6-52
PASSWORD (MMI only) .......................................................................6-54
PID ....................................................................................................6-55
PRESET ...............................................................................................6-59
RAISE/LOWER.....................................................................................6-61
RAMPS ...............................................................................................6-63
SETPOINT SUM 1 ...............................................................................6-68
SETPOINT SUM 2 ...............................................................................6-70
SPEED LOOP......................................................................................6-72
SPEED LOOP (ADVANCED).................................................................6-76
SRAMP ...............................................................................................6-78
STANDSTILL .......................................................................................6-81
STOP RATES .......................................................................................6-83
SYSTEM PORT P3................................................................................6-86
5703 SUPPORT ..................................................................................6-87
TAPER CALC.......................................................................................6-88
TEC OPTION......................................................................................6-90
TENS+COMP CALC. ..........................................................................6-91
TENS+COMP CALC. ..........................................................................6-93
TORQUE CALC. .................................................................................6-94
USER FILTER .......................................................................................6-95
FAULT FINDING
Trips .............................................................................................................. 7-1

What Happens when a Trip Occurs..........................................................................7-1
Converter Indications ............................................................................7-1
Operator Station Indications..................................................................7-1
Resetting a Trip Condition........................................................................................7-1
Cont.8
Contents
Contents
Page
Fault Finding................................................................................................. 7-2

Calibration Checks..................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Messages......................................................................................................7-5
LAST ALARM .........................................................................................7-5
HEALTH WORD ....................................................................................7-5
HEALTH STORE ....................................................................................7-5
Hexadecimal Representation of Trips........................................................................7-6
Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4, 5 & H) .................................................7-7
Using the MMI to Manage Trips ...............................................................................7-8
Trip Messages ......................................................................................7-8
Symbolic Alarm Messages ...................................................................7-11
Self Test Alarms ..................................................................................7-11
Setting Trip Conditions ........................................................................7-11
Viewing Trip Conditions ......................................................................7-12
Inhibiting Alarms ................................................................................7-12
Test Points ............................................................................................................7-12
Chapter 8
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
AND
REPAIR
Maintenance ................................................................................................. 8-1

Service Procedures ................................................................................8-1
Preventive Maintenance.........................................................................8-1
Repair ........................................................................................................... 8-1
Saving Your Application Data ..................................................................................8-1
Returning the Unit to SSD Drives ..............................................................................8-2
Disposal .................................................................................................................8-2
Technical Support Checks........................................................................................8-3
Fuse Replacement (Frame H) ...................................................................................8-4
590+ 4Q Product (Regenerative)...........................................................8-4
591+ 2Q Product (Non-Regenerative) ...................................................8-5
Phase Assembly Replacement (Frame H) ..................................................................8-6
Replacing the Fan (Frames 4 & 5) ............................................................................8-8
Chapter 9
CONTROL LOOPS
Principle of Operation .................................................................................. 9-1
Current Loop ..........................................................................................................9-1
Manual Tuning .....................................................................................9-2
Speed Loop ............................................................................................................9-4
Field Control...........................................................................................................9-4
Set-up Notes.........................................................................................9-4
Current Control ....................................................................................9-5
Voltage Control ....................................................................................9-5
Field Weakening...................................................................................9-5
Standby Field........................................................................................9-5
Cont.9
Contents
Contents
Page
Chapter 10 P A R A M E T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N T A B L E
Specification Table: Tag Number Order..................................................... 10-2
Parameter Table: MMI Menu Order ........................................................ 10-19
Chapter 11 T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
Environmental Details............................................................................................11-1
EMC Compliance..................................................................................................11-1
Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit ............................................................................11-2
Power Supply Details .............................................................................................11-3
Auxiliary Power Supply Details................................................................................11-3
AC Line Choke (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5) ..................................................................11-4
AC Line Choke (Frame H)......................................................................................11-5
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters...............................................................................11-5
Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5) ................................11-6
Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frame H) ...................................................11-6
Power Supply Fuses ...............................................................................................11-7
Field Fuses............................................................................................................11-7
Earthing/Safety Details ..........................................................................................11-7
Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs)............................................11-8
Terminal Information - Power Board (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5) ...................................11-9
Terminal Information Control Board..................................................................11-12
Terminal Information (Frame H)...........................................................................11-16
Terminal Information Option Boards .................................................................11-17
Wiring Requirements for EMC Compliance ...........................................................11-17
Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5).................11-18
Termination Tightening Torque (Frame H) ............................................................11-19
Cooling Fans ......................................................................................................11-19
Spares List ..........................................................................................................11-20
Chapter 12 C E R T I F I C A T I O N
FOR THE
CONVERTER
Requirements for EMC Compliance ............................................................ 12-1

Minimising Radiated Emissions ..............................................................................12-1
Earthing Requirements...........................................................................................12-1
Protective Earth (PE) Connections .........................................................12-1
Control/Signal EMC Earth Connections................................................12-2
Cabling Requirements ...........................................................................................12-2
Planning Cable Runs...........................................................................12-2
Increasing Motor Cable Length............................................................12-2
EMC Installation Options .......................................................................................12-3
Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class A) ..................................12-3
Star Point Earthing ..............................................................................12-4
Sensitive Equipment ............................................................................12-5
Cont.10
Contents
Contents
Page
Requirements for UL Compliance ............................................................... 12-6

Motor Overload Protection ..................................................................12-6
Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements ............................12-6
Short Circuit Ratings............................................................................12-6
Field Wiring Temperature Rating .........................................................12-7
Operating Ambient Temperature .........................................................12-7
Field Wiring Terminal Markings ...........................................................12-7
Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals ...........................................12-7
Field Grounding Terminals..................................................................12-7
Field Terminal Kits ..............................................................................12-7
Fuse Replacement Information.............................................................12-7
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frames 1, 2, 4 & 5) ......................................................12-8
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frame H)......................................................................12-8
European Directives and the CE Mark........................................................ 12-9
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive ....................................................................12-9
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible? ...........................................................12-9
Legal Requirements for CE Marking ...................................................12-10
Applying for CE Marking for EMC......................................................12-10
Which Standards Apply?......................................................................................12-11
Certificates .........................................................................................................12-13
Chapter 13 S T A N D A R D
AND
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Standard Equipment................................................................................... 13-1

Power Board Circuit Descriptions ...........................................................................13-1
AH470280U001, U002, U003, U004 (Frame 1) .................................13-1
AH470330 (Frame 2) .........................................................................13-3
AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005 (Frame 3) .................................13-5
AH466701U001, U002, U003 (Frames 4 & 5) ..................................13-10
AH466001U001, U101 (Frame H)....................................................13-13
Optional Equipment ................................................................................. 13-16
Speed Feedback Option Boards...........................................................................13-16
Microtach Option Board....................................................................13-17
Wire-Ended Encoder Option Board....................................................13-17
Tacho Calibration Option Board .......................................................13-17
Combined Tacho and Encoder Feedback...........................................13-18
Communications Technology Options ..................................................................13-18
COMMS Option Technology Box .......................................................13-18
Cont.11
Contents
Contents
Page
Chapter 14 S E R I A L C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
Communications Technology Option .......................................................... 14-3
Config Ed Lite .......................................................................................................14-3
System Port (P3).......................................................................................... 14-3
UDP Support.........................................................................................................14-3
UDP Menu Structure............................................................................14-4
UDP Transfer Procedure ......................................................................14-4
5703 Support .......................................................................................................14-5
Commissioning the 5703/1 ................................................................14-6
Error Codes ................................................................................................. 14-7
ERROR REPORT (EE) ..............................................................................................14-7
Chapter 15 T H E D E F A U L T A P P L I C A T I O N
Block Diagrams .......................................................................................... 15-1
Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1 ..................................................................15-3
Main Block Diagram .............................................................................................15-6
Field Control Block Diagram..................................................................................15-7
Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram.........................................................................15-8
Functional Block Diagram......................................................................................15-9
Cont.12
Getting Started
1-1
GETTING STARTED
1
System Design
The 590+ Series Converter is designed for use in a suitable enclosure, with associated control
equipment. The unit accepts a variety of standard three-phase ac supply voltages depending
upon the model, and is suitable for the powering of DC shunt field and permanent magnet
motors, providing controlled dc output voltage and current for armature and field.
All units are designed for simple and economical panel mounting using keyhole slots. Plug-in
control connectors simplify the fitting and removal of the unit to the panel.
Where possible, standard parts are used throughout the range thereby reducing the variety of
spare parts required to maintain a multi-drive system. For example, the same basic control
boards are used in all types of three-phase armature controller regardless of horsepower or
bridge configuration.
The control circuit is totally isolated from the power circuit thus simplifying the interconnection
of controllers within a system and improving operator safety. The coding circuitry adjusts
automatically to accept supply frequencies between 45-65Hz and possesses high immunity to
supply-borne interference. The armature controllers are phase rotation insensitive.
Control and Communications
The Converter is controlled by a 16 bit Microcontroller providing advanced features such as:
Complex control algorithms which are not achievable by simple analog techniques.
Software-configurable control circuitry built around standard software blocks.
Serial link communications with other drives or a PC for advanced process systems.
The Operator Station gives access to parameters, diagnostic messages, trip settings and full
application programming.
Regenerative and Non-Regenerative Models
The motor armature controllers include both regenerative and non-regenerative models:
Regenerative controllers consist of two fully-controlled thyristor bridges and a field bridge
with full transient and overload protection, together with sophisticated electronic control of
acceleration and deceleration, speed and torque in both directions of rotation.
Non-regenerative controllers consist of one fully-controlled thyristor bridge and a field
bridge with full transient and overload protection, together with its associated electronic
control circuitry, and provide accurate speed and/or torque control in one selected direction
of rotation.
Field Regulator
A field regulator is fitted as standard. The regulator consists of a full-wave half controlled single
phase thyristor bridge with transient and overload protection. It provides either a fixed voltage
or fixed current source, depending upon the selected mode of operation for constant torque
applications. The field current mode of operation can be further enhanced to provide field
weakening for drive control motors which require extended speed or constant horsepower
control.
590+ Series DC Digital Converter
1-2
Getting Started
Equipment Inspection and Storage
Check for signs of transit damage

Check the product code on the rating label conforms to your requirement.
If the unit is not being installed immediately, store the unit in a well-ventilated place away from
high temperatures, humidity, dust, or metal particles.
Refer to Chapter 2: An Overview of the Converter to check the rating label/product code.
Refer to Chapter 8: Routine Maintenance and Repair for information on returning damaged
goods.
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Environmental Details for the storage
temperature.
Packaging and Lifting Details

Caution
The packaging is combustible and, if disposed of in this manner incorrectly, may lead to
the generation of lethal toxic fumes.
Save the packaging in case of return. Improper packaging can result in transit damage.
Use a safe and suitable lifting procedure when moving the drive. Never lift the drive by its
terminal connections.
Prepare a clear, flat surface to receive the drive before attempting to move it. Do not damage
any terminal connections when putting the drive down.
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Mechanical Details for unit weights.
About this Manual

This manual is intended for use by the installer, user and programmer of the 590+ Series
Converter. It assumes a reasonable level of understanding in these three disciplines.
Note: Please read all Safety Information before proceeding with the installation and operation
of this unit.
Enter the Model No from the rating label into the table at the front of this manual. There is
also a column for you to record your applications parameter settings in the table in Chapter 10.
It is important that you pass this manual on to any new user of this unit.
This manual is for the following models from the 590+ Converter Series:
Three phase, regenerative, four quadrant armature controllers:
590+
Three phase non-regenerative, two quadrant armature controllers:
591+
590+ Door
Initial Steps
Use the manual to help you plan the following:
Installation
Know your requirements:
certification requirements, CE/UL/c-UL conformance
conformance with local installation requirements
supply and cabling requirements

Getting Started
1-3
Operation
Know your operator:
how is it to be operated, local and/or remote?
what level of user is going to operate the unit?
decide on the best menu level for the Operator Station (where supplied)
Programming (Operator Station or suitable PC programming tool only)
Know your application:
plan your block diagram programming
enter a password to guard against illicit or accidental changes
learn how to back-up your application data
customise the Operator Station to the application
How the Manual is Organised

The manual is divided into chapters and paragraphs. Page numbering restarts with every
chapter, i.e. 5-3 is Chapter 5, page 3.
Application Block Diagram

You will find this at the rear of the manual. The pages unfold to show a complete block
diagram, this will become your programming tool as you become more familiar with the
software.
Quick-Start Guide
Chapters 3 and 4
install and run
the product
Chapter 5
details the
Operator Station
and menu system
Chapter 11
holds many of the
technical details
1-4
Getting Started
An Overview of the Converter
2-1
AN OVERVIEW OF THE CONVERTER

2
How it Works
Note: Refer to Chapter 9: Control Loops for a more detailed explanation.
In very simple terms, the Converter controls the dc motor with the use of Control Loops - an
inner Current Loop and an outer Speed Loop. These control loops can be seen in the
Application Block Diagram. The block diagram shows all the Converters software connections.
Using the Operator Station, you can select the control loops to be used by the Converter to
provide either:
Current Control
Speed Control (default)
It is usual to supply a Current or Speed Feedback signal to the appropriate loop for more
effective control of the Converter. Current Feedback sensors are built-in, whereas Speed
Feedback is provided directly from the armature sensing circuit (default), or by tachogenerator,
encoder or Microtach connection to the relevant option board.
When in Speed Control,
you can modify the
performance of the
Converter further by
controlling the motor
field, i.e. Field Control.
By weakening the field
current, you can obtain
an increase in motor
speed beyond that
normally achievable for
the rated Armature
Voltage of the dc motor.
speed increase
due to field
weakening
Armature
Voltage 200V
armature voltage
remains constant
Field Current 5.7A
field current
reduced
base
speed
Speed
The Converter is controlled remotely using digital/analog inputs and outputs, or locally using
the Operator Station.
REMOTE
SPEED CONTROL
LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
DEFAULT
LOCAL START/STOP
REMOTE START/STOP
REMOTE CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL
By plugging in a COMMS Option Technology Box, the Converter can be linked into a network
and controlled by a PLC/SCADA or other intelligent device.
2-2
Control Features
Control
Control Circuits
Fully isolated from power circuit (SELV)
Output Control
Fully controlled 3-phase thyristor bridge

Microprocessor implemented phase control extended
firing range
For use on 50 or 60Hz supplies with a frequency
compliance range of 45 to 65Hz
Phase control circuits are phase rotation insensitive
Control Action
Fully digital
Advanced PI with fully adaptive current loops for
optimum dynamic performance
Self Tuning Current Loop utilising "Autotune"
algorithm
Adjustable speed PI with integral defeat
Speed Control
By Armature Voltage feedback with IR

compensation
By Encoder feedback or analog tachogenerator
100 to 1 typical with tachogenerator feedback
Speed Range
Steady State
Accuracy
Adjustments
Protection
0.01 % Encoder Feedback with Digital setpoint

(serial link or P3)
0.1 % Analog Tach Feedback
2 % Voltage Feedback
Absolute (0.0% error) using QUADRALOC Mk II
5720 Digital Controller
Note: Long term analog accuracy is subject to
tachogenerator temperature stability.
All adjustments in software can be altered by
the Operator Station or via serial communications. The
Operator Station provides monitoring and adjustment of
parameters and levels, in addition to diagnostic facilities.
Diagnostics
High energy MOVs

Overcurrent (instantaneous)
Overcurrent (inverse time)
Field failure
Speed feedback failure
Motor overtemperature
Thyristor Stack overtemperature
Thyristor "Trigger" failure
Thyristor Snubber Network
Zero-speed detection
Standstill logic
Stall protection
Fully computerised with first fault latch and

automatic display
Digital LCD monitoring
Full diagnostic information available on
RS422/RS485
LED circuit state indication
Table 2-1 Control Features
2-3
Understanding the Product Code

Model Number (Europe)
The unit is fully identified using an alphanumeric code which records how the Converter was
calibrated, its various settings when despatched from the factory, and the country of origin.
The Product Code appears as the Model No. Each block of the Product Code is identified as
below:
Block
No.
1
Variable
XXXX
Description
Generic product
590P : 590+ 4Q DC Drive
591P : 590+ 2Q DC Drive
XXXX
XXX
Four digits identifying the maximum dc output current rating that may be
calibrated for each size of product:
0015 = 15A
0035 = 35A
(Frame 1)
(Frame 1)
0040 = 40A
0070 = 70A
0110 = 110A
0165 = 165A
(Frame 2)
(Frame 2)
(Frame 2)
(Frame 2)
0180 = 180A
0270 = 270A
(Frame 3)
(Frame 3)
0380 = 380A
0500 = 500A
0725 = 725A
0830 = 830A
1580 = 1580A
(Frame 4)
(Frame 4)
(Frame 4)
(Frame 4)
(Frame 5)
1200 = 1200A
1700 = 1700A
2200 = 2200A
2700 = 2700A
(Frame H)
(Frame H)
(Frame H)
(Frame H)
3 digits identifying the nominal 3 phase ac power, supply voltage:

220
500
600
690
XXXX
XX
110 to 220V (10%) 50/60Hz

220 to 500V (10%) 50/60Hz
500 to 600V (10%) 50/60Hz (Frame 4 & 5 only)
500 to 690V (10%) 50/60Hz (Frame H only)
4 digits describing the mechanical package including livery and mechanical

package style:
First two digits (on the left)
00
05
01-04 and 06-99
Livery
Standard SSD Livery
Distributor Livery
Defined customer liveries TBA
Third digit
1
4
Mechanical Package Style

Standard (IP20), protected panel mounting
Panel Mounting IP20 plus Roof Vent Kit
(Frame 4 only)
Fourth digit
0
1
Operator Station
No operator station
Built-in 6901 operator station
Two characters specifying the user interface language:

UK = English
FR = French
GR = German (refer to Customer Services)
SP = Spanish (refer to Customer Services)
IT = Italian (refer to Customer Services)
2-4

Block
No.
6
Variable
XXX
Description
Up to three characters specifying the feedback option (one must be fitted):
ARM = Armature Voltage
AN = Analog Tacho
ENW = Encoder (wire-ended)
ENP = Encoder (plastic fibre-optic)
ENG = Encoder (glass fibre-optic)
XXXXX
Up to five characters specifying the protocol for the 6055 communications

Tech Box option:
0
EI00
PROF
LINK
DNET
CAN
MBP
ENET
CNET
XXX
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
No Comms option fitted

RS485 (EI BINARY, EI ACSII or MODBUS RTU)
PROFIBUS DP
LINK
DEVICENET
CANOPEN
MODBUS+
ETHERNET
CONTROLNET
Up to three characters specifying the auxiliary mains power supply:

0 = Universal auxiliary supply 115 to 230V (10%) 50/60Hz
(only available on drives below 165A and above 1200A inclusive)
115 = 110V to 120V (10%) 50/60Hz
230 = 220V to 240V (10%) 50/60Hz
XXX
Up to three characters specifying engineering special options:

000 = No special option
Catalog Number (North America)

The unit is fully identified using an alphanumeric code which records how the Converter was
calibrated and its various settings when despatched from the factory.
The Product Code appears as the Cat No. Each block of the Product Code is identified as
below:
Catalog Number (North America)
Block
No.
1
Variable
XXXX
Description
Generic product
590+ : 590+ 4Q DC Drive
591+ : 590+ 2Q DC Drive
XXXX
XXX
Four further digits identifying the maximum dc output current rating that
may be calibrated for each size of product:
0015 = 15A
0035 = 35A
(Frame 1)
(Frame 1)
0040 = 40A
0070 = 70A
0110 = 110A
0165 = 165A
(Frame 2)
(Frame 2)
(Frame 2)
(Frame 2)
0180 = 180A
0270 = 270A
(Frame 3)
(Frame 3)
0380 = 380A
0500 = 500A
0725 = 725A
0830 = 830A
(Frame 4)
(Frame 4)
(Frame 4)
(Frame 4)
1580 = 1580A
(Frame 5)
1200 = 1200A
1700 = 1700A
2200 = 2200A
2700 = 2700A
(Frame H)
(Frame H)
(Frame H)
(Frame H)
3 digits identifying the nominal 3 phase ac power, supply voltage:

220
500
600
110 to 220V (10%) 50/60Hz

220 to 500V (10%) 50/60Hz
500 to 600V (10%) 50/60Hz
2-5
Door Assembly Product Code

The door assembly is identified separately. The Product Code appears on a label displayed
under the terminal cover.
Block
No.
1
Variable
XXXXX
Description
Generic product
590PD : Fits Frame 4 and 5 units
590PXD : Fits Frame 3 and H units
XXXX
XX
4 digits describing the mechanical package including livery and mechanical

package style:
First two digits (on the left)
Livery
00
Standard SSD Livery
05
Distributor Livery
01-04 and 06-99
Defined customer liveries TBA
Third digit
Mechanical Package Style
1
Standard
Fourth digit
Operator Station
0
No operator station
1
Built-in operator station
Two characters specifying the user interface language:
UK = English
FR = French
GR = German (refer to Customer Services)
SP = Spanish (refer to Customer Services)
IT = Italian (refer to Customer Services)
XXX
Up to three characters specifying engineering special options:

0 = No special option
Product Identification
Output Currents (armature):

Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
Frame H
15A
35A
40A
70A
110A
165A
180A
270A
380A
500A
725A
830A
1580A
1200A
1700A
2200A
2700A
All units are available as a:

590+ : 4Q 3-phase, fully controlled, anti-parallel thyristor bridge configuration
591+ : 2Q 3-phase, fully controlled thyristor bridge configuration
2-6
Component Identification
590+ Controller (Frames 1 & 2)
Front View (with items
13
11
14
15
10
1
12
5
9
6
Frame 1, 15A unit illustrated

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Main converter assembly

Terminal cover
Terminal cover retaining screw
Blank cover
6901 operator station (optional)
COMMS technology box (optional)
Speed feedback technology card (optional)
Gland plate
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Power terminal shield

Power terminals
Control terminals
Earthing points
Operator station port
RS232 programming port
Auxiliary power, external contactor and
isolated thermistor terminals
2-7
590+ Door Assembly (Frames 3, 4, 5 & H)

Front View (with items removed)
9
1
10
3
Frames 4 & 5 : Product Code 590PD/.... (illustrated)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main door assembly

Terminal cover
Terminal cover retaining screw
Blank cover
6901 operator station (optional)
COMMS technology box (optional)
7
8
9
10
Speed feedback technology card (optional)

Control terminals
Operator station port
RS232 programming port (P3)
2-8

590+ Controller (Frame 3)
6
1
2
A+
Door
Assembly
5
A-
Product Code 590PXD/....
L1
270A unit illustrated
1
2
3
4

Door assembly
Field wiring terminals
Busbars - main power input
L2
L3
5
6
7
Busbars - main power output

IP20 Top Cover
IP20 Fan Housing (where fitted)
2-9
590+ Controller (Frames 4 & 5)
On the Frame 5,
both the Master and
Slave drives must be
individually earthed
Frame 4
Frame 5
7
1
2
10
Door
Assembly
Product Code 590PD/....
8
3
field & auxiliary

connections
via grommet
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
5
A+
A-
A-
A-
When Frame 5, both terminals are for A+ connections
1
2
3
4
5

Standard door assembly
Motor field terminals
Busbars - main power input
Busbars - main power output
6
7
8
9
10
Auxiliary supply, contactor and motor thermistor terminals

Frame 4 External vent (where fitted)
Contactor Control Select
Frame 5 External vent (where fitted)
Terminal Cover (Frame 5)
2-10

590+ Product (Frame H)
Removable Lifting Brackets
(4 off)
Keyhole Mounting Slots

(8 off for 4Q Regenerative)
(6 off for 2Q Non-Regenerative)
590+
SERIES
A-
EUROTHERM
DRIVES
Power
Control
Terminals
Auxiliary
Power
L
N
Main
Contactor
Coil
N
MC
Armature terminals are

fitted to right hand side
of the drive but can
be moved to the left
hand side if necessary
A+
Motor field
supply and
and output
terminals plus
external armature
voltage sense
Door
Assembly
FL1
FL2
F+
Product Code
590PXD/....
F-
Earth/PE
(On the Back
of the Converter)
MVA+
MVA-
L1
L2
L3
Mains Supply Terminals
Installing the Converter
3-1
INSTALLING THE CONVERTER

3
IMPORTANT: Read Chapter 12: Certification for the Converter before installing this unit.
Refer to Installation Drawings, page 3-29 for further information.
Mechanical Installation
Unpacking the Converter
Caution
The packaging is combustible and this action may produce lethal toxic fumes.
Save the packaging in case of return. Improper packaging can result in transit damage.
Frame H Packaging
Large converters (Frame H) are supplied in special packaging with removable sides. Remove all
fixings from the drive, see Figure 3-1.
Lifting
brackets
(4 off)
Remove fixings
Shipping Plate
591+ 2Q Non-Regenerative
Mounting Positions
Remove fixings
Shipping Plate
590+ 4Q Regenerative
Mounting Positions
Figure 3-1 Lifting Details (Frame H)
Lifting the Converter

Use a safe and suitable lifting procedure when moving the drive. Never lift the drive by its
terminal connections.
Prepare a clear, flat surface to receive the drive before attempting to move it. Do not damage
any terminal connections when putting the drive down.
Frame 4 & 5 converters have lifting eyes and a shipping plate fitted to the base to enable the
drive to be set-on-end by a forklift. Remove the shipping plate before wiring the power
terminals.
Frame H converters require the following:
The drive is supplied with a lifting bracket fitted to each corner for hoisting. Remove the
brackets when the drive is in its final position, however, the fixings MUST be re-fitted.
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Fixing Types and Torques.
A shipping plate is fitted to the base to enable the drive to be set-on-end by a forklift.
Remove the plate before wiring the power terminals.
3-2
Product Dimensions
E2
E2
E1 B
E1 B
180A - 270A
Frame 3
40A - 165A
Frame 2
Weight in Kg (lbs)
15A - 35A
Frame 1
Current Rating (A)
E1
Overall Dimensions
A
Fixing Centres
C
E1
15 - 35
6.4 (14)
200 (7.9)
375 (14.8)
220 (8.7)
140 (5.5)
360 (14.2)
40 - 165
10.5 (23)
200 (7.9)
434 (17.1)
292 (11.5)
140 (5.5)
418 (16.5)
180
20 (44)
250 (9.8)
485 (19.1)
234 (9.2)
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
270
20 (44)
300 (11.8)
485 (19.1)
234 (9.2)
200 (7.9)
400 (15.7)
Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)

Refer to the Installation Drawings
D
A
D
E1
E2
E1
E1
B
E2
380A - 830A
Frame 4
(vent kit assemblies not shown)
1580A
Frame 5
(vent kit assemblies not shown)
Current Rating
Weight
(A)
Kg (lbs)
1200A - 2700A
Frame H
Overall Dimensions
Fixing Centres
E1
E2
380
32 (71)
253 (10.0)
700 (27.6)
358 (14.2)
150 (5.9)
680 (26.8)
500
32 (71)
253 (10.0)
700 (27.6)
358 (14.2)
150 (5.9)
680 (26.8)
725
44 (97)
253 (10.0)
700 (27.6)
358 (14.2)
150 (5.9)
680 (26.8)
830
44 (97)
253 (10.0)
700 (27.6)
358 (14.2)
150 (5.9)
680 (26.8)
1580
90 (200)
506 (20.0)
700 (27.6)
358 (14.2)
150 (5.9)
680 (26.8)
1200 - 2700
See below *
850 (33.5)
1406 (55.3)
417 (16.4)
810 (31.9)
78 (3.1)
4 x 400 (15.7)
1200 - 2700
See below *
850 (33.5)
956 (37.6)
417 (16.4)
810 (31.9)
78 (3.1)
3 x 400 (15.7)
*590+ drive weighs 270Kg (595.4 lbs) without packaging and fan assembly
591+ drive weighs 160kg (352.8 lbs) without packaging and fan assembly
Fan weighs 18.5Kg (40.8 lbs)
Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Refer to the Installation Drawings
3-3
Mounting the Converter

Note:
General installation details are given below for mounting the Converter, however, if you
are installing the unit with an EMC filter refer to External AC Supply EMC Filter
Installation, page 3-27.
Mount the unit vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It is mounted using bolts or screws
into four fixing points (keyhole slots). The design allows the use of 100mm grid fixing.
It must be mounted inside a suitable cubicle. To comply with the European safety standards
VDE 0160 (1994)/EN50178 (1998), the cubicle must require a tool for opening.
Note:
Holes for the mounting bolts or screws must be placed accurately.

Cover any units all ready mounted to the panel to protect them from stray metal filings while
drilling mounting holes.
General Mounting Hints
Insert the mounting studs from the rear of the panel. Attach lock washers and nuts part way on
to the lower mounting studs; these will help to keep the drive in place when mounting.
Caution
Use proper lifting techniques when lifting and moving.
Lift the drive and engage the bottom slots safely on to the studs between the panel and lock
washers/nuts you have just fitted. Engage the top slots with the remaining mounting studs and
finger tighten the drive to the panel with lock washers and nuts. Finally, use the socket wrench
to tighten all nuts securely.
Check the drive and its housing for packing material, mounting debris, or any other material that
could damage and/or restrict the operation of the equipment.
Recommended Tools
Socket wrench
With a 6 Inch extension
Deep sockets
M10, M13, M17, 7/16, 1/2
Screwdrivers
Phillips No.2, flat blade - 0.5 x 3.0mm, 0.8 x 4.0mm
Wire cutters
Small
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements

Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Cooling.
The Converter gives off heat in normal operation and must therefore be mounted to allow the
free flow of air through the air entries and exits. Maintain the minimum air clearances given on
the drawings to ensure that heat generated by other adjacent equipment is not transmitted to the
Converter. Be aware that other equipment may have its own clearance requirements. When
mounting two or more 590+s together, these clearances are cumulative.
Ensure that the mounting surface is normally cool.
Installing the Fan (Frame H)

Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Cooling for fan ratings
The fan unit supplied should be installed on the cubicle, with or without ducting (refer to the
Installation Drawing). The drive is force-cooled using the fan units supplied with the drive. As a
general rule allow at least 150mm (6 inches) of clear space above and below the drive for free
air flow. We suggest the cubicle has an air inlet at the base of the cubicle equivalent to 4ft,
variable depending upon the filter type used, to allow the maximum throughput of air.
The fan assembly provided is permanently wired as shown below.
3-4

PE/GRD
FN4
FN3
FN2
FN1
115V ac
1
2
3
4
Caution
L
N
L
115V ac + 10%
50/60Hz
4.5A
PE/GRD
230V ac
1
2
3
4
L
N
L
N
230V ac + 10%
50/60Hz
2.25A
PE/GRD
Figure 3-2 Frame H Fan Wiring Diagram
Installing the External Vent Kit (Frames 4 & 5)

SSD Part Numbers:
Frame 4 : LA466717U001
Frame 5 : LA466717U002
Refer also to Figure 3-18 page 3-34 and Figure 3-20 page 3-36.
Upper Housing
Foam gasket stretches

over duct prior to
attaching upper housing
Duct slides down between
clip and mounting panel
within the sides of the
drive housing
Fit duct clip

under fasteners
at top of drive
tight against
mounting panel
Figure 3-3 Frames 4 & 5 External Vent Kit

3-5
AC Line Choke
We recommend that you always use the specified ac line choke with the Converter
to provide a known supply impedance for effective operation of the thyristor transient
suppression circuits. At least 1% line impedance should be provided in the supply side of the
converter.
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - AC Line Choke for selection details.
Filtering
Note:
Refer to Chapter 12: "Certification for the Drive" - European Directives and the CE Mark.
For compliance in Europe with EN61800-3 Table 11:
The CE marking of drives whose armature current >100A is applicable without

filtering.
The CE marking of drives whose armature current <100A is only applicable with
filtering. The drive requires one of the following:
1.
The specified filter given in Chapter 11

(also refer to External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation, page 3-27)
2.
Compliant filtering offered by the System
3.
Capacitors fitted between phase and earth (see Figure 3-4)
Start
Contactor
AC
Line
Choke
(must be
fitted)
Suitable Branch
Protection Fuse
or
Circuit Breaker
C1, C2 & C3
C4
PE
Capacitor Reference Number
Capacitor Value/Type
C1, C2, C3
3.0F 400V, EMI suppressor type Class X1
C4
1.0F 400V, EMI suppressor type Class X1

Figure 3-4 AC Line Choke and Capacitors fitted to
Frame 1 (15A & 35A) & Frame 2 (40A & 70A) Drives
Drive
3-6
Frame H Additional Information

Removing the Cover (Frame H)
The cover is manufactured from sheet metal and weighs: 2Q Non-Regenerative = 10kg (22 lbs)
4Q Regenerative = 15kg (33 lbs)
To remove the cover use a flat headed screwdriver to
undo the two screws at the base of the cover.
Now lift the cover base outwards and upwards, once the
cover has been raised two centimetres it can now be
removed.
To replace the cover follow the procedure in reverse,
engaging the locating studs at the top, moving into final
location and tightening fixing screws.
Side
View
2cm
Remove
2 screws
Changing DC Output Terminals (Frame H)

Remove the left-hand cover plate(s) and retain the cover and screws.
Remove and retain the 12 M6 nuts clamping the outgoing terminals to the cross plates.
Remove the 12 M6 bolts securing the outgoing busbar assembly (assemblies). Remove the
assembly (assemblies).
Carefully remove the gasket(s) for use on the left-hand side.
Refit the cover to the right-hand side of the drive.
Refit the gasket to the left-hand side of the drive.
Refit the terminal assemblies.
Note: The 2Q terminal assembly is not polarised and may be fitted in any orientation. The 4Q
terminal assemblies are handed and must be reversed to fit on the left-hand side.
Move the terminal markers as appropriate, the A+ terminal will still be at the bottom or AC
input at the end of the product.
Tighten terminal assembly bolts to the torque given in Chapter 11.
3-7
Electrical Installation
IMPORTANT: Please read the Safety Information on page Cont. 3 & 4 before proceeding.
WARNING!
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made live
unintentionally by other personnel.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications for additional Cabling Requirements and
Terminal Block Wire Sizes.
Cables are considered to be electrically sensitive, clean or noisy. You should already have
planned your cable routes with respect to segregating these cables for EMC compliance.
If not, refer to Chapter 12: Certification for the Converter.
If fitted, the AC filter
MUST be placed
between the supply
and the choke.
Failure to do so will
result in unreliable
operation of the drive
and reduced lifetime
of the filter.
signal/control cable
(sensitive)
Not fitted to
Frame H units
fuse or suitable
circuit breaker
(RCD not
recommended)
(noisy)
power
supply
cable
field cable
external
ac
filter
(clean)
(optional)
contactor
590+
converter
choke
(noisy)
motor cable
motor
Figure 3-5 Cabling Requirements

If the controller is to be operating in a regenerating mode for extended periods acting as a load
generator for another machine, it is advisable to fit additional protection in the armature circuit.
A dc fuse or high speed circuit breaker will provide this protection. If in doubt, contact SSD
Drives.
Cable Gland Requirements

Use a metal gland to
connect to the cubicle
backplate, near the
VSD (variable speed
drive). It must be
capable of securing a
360 degree screened
connection to give
EMC compliance. A
360 degree screened
connection can be
achieved as shown.
We suggest a rubber
grommet should be
fitted on holes where a
cable gland is not used.
rubber grommet
metal cable gland
metal gland must

have 360 degree
screened connection
for EMC compliance
rubber
grommet
PE
International
grounding symbol
PE
Protective Earth
for example
Figure 3-6 Cable and Screen Fixings
Figure 3-7 360 Degree Screened Connection

power wiring
to motor
3-8
Minimum Connection Requirements

IMPORTANT: If in doubt about the connection of the DC motor to the drive, contact SSD Drives.
Note: Because of the complexity of showing all possible configurations, this Chapter deals only
with a `general purpose operation as a basic speed controller. Special wiring options
usually form part of a customer-specific system and connection details will be provided
separately.
Minimum connections to operate the drive safely are shown using bold lines in the
following circuit diagrams. These connections are highlighted in text with the
symbol opposite. The remaining connections are not necessary for a quick startup.
The Converter is using the default Armature Voltage feedback when following the
`minimum connection instructions.
WARNING!
Power terminals carry electrical voltage which can be lethal. Never work on any
control equipment or motors without first removing all power supplies from the
equipment.
Caution
Make sure all wiring connections meet or exceed applicable local and National Electrical
Codes. Be sure to fit branch circuit and motor overload protection.
IMPORTANT: If fitting your own "Power On" indicator lamp, annunciator, etc., this should be switched
by an auxiliary contactor of the main contactor, not by the controller auxiliary relay.
To avoid damaging the drive NEVER carry out high voltage resistance or dielectric
strength tests without first completely disconnecting the drive from the circuit being tested.
Power Cables
Note:
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening
Torques.
minimum rating of 1.1 x full load current (Europe)
minimum rating of 1.25 x full load current (UL)
Control Wiring
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications for Control Terminal information.
Control wiring must have a minimum cross-section area of 0.75mm2 (18AWG).
Use screened control cables to comply with EMC requirements.
Feed the control cables into the drive and connect to the control terminals. Refer to the
connection label on the inside of the terminal cover. Close the terminal cover.
IMPORTANT: All connections made to terminal blocks A, B and C must be isolated signal voltages.
Important Connections
The following connections must be made for the drive to run:
Terminals TH1 and TH2 must be linked if a thermostat is not fitted.
Terminals C1 and C2 must be linked if an External Trip interlock is not required.
TOTAL SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT No. 2/

CURRENT DEMAND
SPEED SETPOINT No. 1
SIGNAL 0V
EMERGENCY
STOP
RELAY
B9
A3
A1
A2
A8
B8
A4
C3
B3
C9
10K
SETPOINT
RAMP
INPUT
B4
C5
ENABLE
PROGRAM START/
RUN
STOP
COAST
STOP
A6
C9
C2
RL S
B5
G1
RL S
B7
G3
RS485 LINK
TECHNOLOGY
BOX
H1-6
E1-6
ENCODER
CON
THERM+ THERM-
TH1 TH2
FF+
(D3) (D4) PE
L1
FIELD OUTPUT
DC
3
N
L FL1 FL2 4
(D7) (D8) (D1) (D2) (D6) (D5)
500VAC MAX
Frames 2 & 3
600VAC MAX
Frame 4
PE
L3
A+
PE
MOTOR
ARMATURE
A-
L2
PROTECTIVE
EARTH
for EMC compliance
use internal
*field
connection
star-point earth
near drive
AC Line Choke
Start
Contactor
High Speed
Fuses
Filter (optional)
Fuses
3-PHASE SUPPLY
110V - 500VAC (Frames 1,2,3)
110V - 600VAC (Frame 4)
3 PH 50/60Hz
3-PHASE
EXTERNAL
Branch
CONTACTOR
Protection
EXTERNAL
AC FIELD
1 PH 50/60Hz
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
(isolated)
# Links required if Thermistor and/or External Trip switch not fitted
DRIVE
HEALTHY
G4
DC
TACHO
DRIVE
READY
RL S
B6
G2
AC
TACHO
ZERO
SPEED
C1
EXTERNAL
TRIP
C1
F1
MICROTACH
select feedback type

from MMI
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
110/240VAC
1 PH 50/60Hz
Figure 3-8 Power Connections: Frames 1, 2, 3 & 4 (`general purpose configuration)
3-9
Connection Diagrams
FRAMES 1, 2, 3 & 4
Bold lines indicate

"minimum connections"
CON
Pilot
Relay
F- F+
(D4) (D3)
PE
L2
M
A+
M
MASTER
A+
M
L3
M
SLAVE
L1
S
PE
AS
L3
S
AS
PE
MOTOR
ARMATURE
L2
S
Slave Start
Contactor
for EMC compliance
use internal
*field
connection
PROTECTIVE
EARTH
star-point earth
near drive
SLAVE
g)
A single dc contactor can be fitted but MUST be used

with an interlock to enable input C5
PE connections MUST be made to both the Master

and Slave drives
Use both of the A+M terminals, and also both A-S terminals
e)
f)
L1M, L2M & L3M are the Master AC Input Busbars

L1S, L2S & L3S are the Slave AC Input Busbars
There are two A+M Master DC Output Busbars
There are two A-S Slave DC Output Busbars
Use separate semiconductor fuses

for Master and Slave
One or two Start Contactors can be used
d)
c)
b)
Notes:
a) You must use two individual line chokes
to guarantee sharing of motor current
MASTER
FRAME 5
FIELD OUTPUT
MOTOR
DC
THERMISTOR
(isolated)
L1
M
AC Line Chokes
Master Start
Contactor
Semiconductor
Fuses
Filter Assemblies (optional)
Bold lines indicate

THERM+ THERM-
TH1 TH2
3
N
L FL1 FL2 4
(D7) (D8) (D1) (D2) (D6) (D5)
EXTERNAL
AC FIELD
600VAC MAX
1 PH 50/60Hz
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
110/240VAC
1 PH 50/60Hz
3-PHASE SUPPLY
110V - 600VAC
3 PH 50/60Hz
3-10
Figure 3-9 Power Connections: Frame 5 (`general purpose configuration)

Control connections are as Frames 1, 2, 3 & 4.
TOTAL SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT No. 2/

CURRENT DEMAND
SPEED SETPOINT No. 1
SIGNAL 0V
EMERGENCY
STOP
RELAY
B9
A3
A1
A2
A8
B8
A4
C3
B3
C9
10K
SETPOINT
RAMP
INPUT
B4
C5
ENABLE
PROGRAM START/
STOP
RUN
COAST
STOP
A6
C9
Figure 3-10 Power Connections: Frame H (`general purpose configuration)

#
C2
RL S
B5
G1
G4
E1-6
H1-6
Refer to
"DC
Contactor External VA
Sensing"
F-
N
(4)
F+
C
(3)
CON
PE
L1
PE
L3
A+
PE
MOTOR
ARMATURE
A-
L2
PROTECTIVE
EARTH
star-point earth
near drive
AC Line Choke
3-Phase
External
Contactor
Filter (optional)
Branch
Protection
Fuses
3-PHASE SUPPLY
110V - 690VAC
3 PH 50/60Hz
FIELD OUTPUT
DC
FL1 FL2
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
(isolated)
# Links required if Thermistor and/or External Trip switch not fitted
DRIVE
HEALTHY
EXTERNAL
AC FIELD
690VAC MAX
1 PH 50/60Hz
TH1 TH2
MVA+ MVA- THERM+ THERM-
ENCODER
RS485 LINK
TECHNOLOGY
BOX
RL S
B7
G3
DC
TACHO
DRIVE
READY
RL S
B6
G2
AC
TACHO
ZERO
SPEED
C1
EXTERNAL
TRIP
C1
F1
MICROTACH
select feedback type

from MMI
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
110/240VAC
1 PH 50/60Hz
3-11
Bold lines indicate

FRAME H
3-12

Power Connections
L1
L2
L3
3
4
3-Phase Supply, 3-Phase External Contactor

Connect the
main ac
power to
busbar
terminals L1,
L2 & L3 via
the Branch
Protection,
AC Filter
(optional),
3-Phase
External
Contactor,
and AC Line
Choke.
Connect the
contactor coil
to terminals 3
(Line) and 4
(Neutral).
DRIVE
Frame 3: Terminals 3 & 4 = D5 & D6 : Frame H: Terminals 3 & 4 = C & N
Main AC Power
There is no specific phase connection to terminals L1, L2 and L3 as the controller is
phase rotation independent.
Branch Protection
AC current = 0.83 x DC Armature Current
You must provide branch circuit protection using a suitable fuse or Type 2 circuit
breaker (RCD, ELCB, GFCI circuit breakers are not recommended, refer to Earth Fault
Monitoring Systems, page 3-28).
Also refer to Chapter 12: Certification for the Converter - Requirements for UL
Compliance.
Semi-Conductor Protection
Frame H drives contain high speed semi-conductor fuses. For all other frame sizes,
always provide high-speed thyristor fusing to protect the thyristor stack in the case of
direct output short circuits. Semiconductor fuses may be used as Branch Protection on
single-drive systems.
IMPORTANT: If a motor becomes completely short-circuited, the current trip
(OVER I TRIP) will not protect the Converter.
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Power Semiconductor Protection
Fuses.
3-Phase External Contactor

CHOKE
CON
FILTER
(optional)
Diagram
shows
correct
placement
of units
The contactor does not switch current and is primarily for disconnection and sequencing
of the power bridge. It must be energised directly from the controller by a coil with a
rating suitable (AC1) for the controller concerned. No additional series contacts or
switches are permitted since they will interfere with the sequencing of the controller and
cause unreliability and possible failure. Connect to main contactor terminals Con L
and Con N only as described in Chapter 11, otherwise unreliable or dangerous
operation may occur - do not connect to a PLC input or sensitive relay.
Slave Relay : If the 3-phase contactor has a coil with an inrush greater than 3A, a slave
relay MUST be used to drive the contactor coil. The contactor and slave relay (if
required) MUST have coil voltages compatible with the controller auxiliary supply
voltage.
DO NOT use a slave relay with a coil current less than 25mA as it may be
energised by the contact suppression network.
Frames 4 & 5 : A relay jumper (CONN1) is provided on the power board enabling
terminals 3 & 4 to be powered (auxiliary supply - default position), or to be volt-free (for
customers own contactor supply). Refer to Chapter 13: AH466701U001, U002, U003
(Frames 4 & 5).
DC Contactor : A DC contactor can be used but the sequencing must be adjusted to
accomodate its use: an auxilliary normally open volt-free contact of the contactor must
be connected in series with the "ENABLE" input (C5) to disable the drive until after the
contactor is closed.
AC Line Choke
IMPORTANT: Always fit the recommended choke. Refer to Chapter 11:
Technical Specifications - AC Line Choke.
We can provide suitable chokes, designed to connect directly to the drive terminals.
Refer to Chapter 11: "Technical Specifications" - AC Line Choke.
3-13
Power Connections cont.
PE
Protective Earth Connections

Connect the
drive's PE
terminal to an
independent
earth/ground
star point.
Connect this
earth/ground
star point to
Protective
Earth.
IMPORTANT: The drive and filter (if fitted) must be permanently earthed. Each
conductor used for permanent earthing must individually meet the
requirements for a protective earth conductor.
For installations to EN 60204 in Europe:
For permanent earthing, the converter requires either two individual incoming
protective earth conductors (<10mm cross-section), or one conductor (10mm
cross-section) connected to an independent protective earth/ground point near the
drive.
Run the motor protective earth/ground connection in parallel with the motor supply
conductors, ideally in the same conduit/screen/armour, and connect to an
independent protective earth/ground point near the drive.
Refer to Chapter 12: Certification for the Converter Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B).
Caution
On the Frame 5, both the Master and Slave drives must be individually earthed.
A+
A-
Motor Armature
Connect the
motor
armature to
terminals A+
and A-.
A+
A - PE
star
point
Connect the cable screen to the motor's PE terminal and the earth/ground star point.
Connect the motor's PE terminal to the earth/ground star point.
For EMC compliant recommended cable lengths refer to Chapter 12: "Certification for
the Converter" - Cabling Requirements.
Note:
If the drive is to operate in regenerating mode for long periods, it is

advisable to fit a dc fuse or high speed circuit breaker in the armature
circuit. If in doubt consult SSD Drives.
PE
M +
F-
F+
Motor Field
Connect the
motor field (-)
to terminal F-,
and connect
field (+) to
terminal F+.
PE
F+
F-
star
point
Frame 3: Terminals F- & F+ = D3 & D4

Connect the cable screen to the independent earth/ground point.
If the motor has no field connections, is a permanent magnet motor, or if the field is
derived externally, you must inhibit the FIELD ENABLE parameter (Tag No. 170) later
during Set-up.
3-14
Th1
Motor Thermistor
Th2
Connect the
motor
thermistor to
terminals Th1
and Th2.
or
link terminals
if sensors are
not fitted
Frames 3 & H: Terminals Th1 & Th2 = THERM1 & THERM 2

Terminals Th1 and Th2 must be linked if sensors are not fitted.
(Thermistor terminals for Frames 3 & H are on the Control Door Board).
We recommend that you protect the dc motor against overtemperature by the use of
temperature sensitive resistors or switches in the field and interpole windings of the
machine. When the motor is fitted with over-temperature sensing devices, such as
thermostats or PTC thermistors, these should be connected (in series) between terminals
TH1 and TH2.
Thermistors must have a combined working resistance of 750 or less, rising to
4k at over-temperature. These thermistors are classified by IEC34-II as Mark A.
Temperature switches must be normally closed, and open at rated temperature.
The over temperature alarm will activate at 3k. It is latched in software and must be
reset by re-starting the Converter.
Note:
FL1
External AC Field
FL2
Connect the
external field
supply to
terminals FL1
and FL2.
The motor temperature alarm (THERMOSTAT) cannot be inhibited in

software.
Frame H only
Frame 3: Terminals FL1 & FL2 = D1 & D2

(Not available on Frame 1 units)
Used if an external field supply is required to the controller for application reasons. The
magnitude of this voltage is determined by the desired field voltage. The supply must be
protected externally with suitable fuses.
IMPORTANT: The connection of the controller and the external field supply
must be consistent when using an externally supplied field
regulator. Always derive the 1phase, 50/60Hz supply from the
L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases of the main power supply,
directly or indirectly through a single-phase transformer, with the
Red phase connected to terminal FL1 and the Yellow phase to
terminal FL2.
Note: You must provide branch circuit and overload protection.
To change the controller from an internal to an external field type refer to "Motor
Field Options", page 3-20.
Auxiliary Supply
Connect the
control supply
to terminals L
(Live) and N
(Neutral).
Frame 3: Terminals L & N = D8 & D7

Single phase, 110/240V ac, 50/60Hz.
Note:
The auxiliary supply chosen must equate to the contactor coil voltage
used.
IMPORTANT: The auxiliary supply terminals must be connected directly to the

incoming supply. No series sequencing switches or contacts are
permitted without consultation from SSD Drives.
Use suitable external fuse protection: the steady state current absorbed by the controller
is nominal, the external fuse is determined chiefly by considering the contactor holding
VA and the controller cooling fans. (Frame H fans are powered separately).
Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Power Supply Fuses.
3-15

Control Connections
A1
A4
B3
B4
Speed Demand
Connect a 10k
potentiometer
between
terminals A1
and B3.
Connect the
wiper to A4.
B4 A4 B3 A6
10K
potentiometer
Uni-directional Speed Demand

This connection provides a Uni-Directional Speed Demand for non-reversing
applications and the 2 Quadrant controller (591+):
+10V
B3
Ramp
A4 Input
Maximum forward speed demand (+100%) = Terminal B3, +10V input

Zero speed demand (0%)
= Terminal B1, 0V input
A1
0V
Thus, zero speed is at the left (anti-clockwise) position on the potentiometer.

Bi-directional Speed Demand
Alternatively, substitute A1 for terminal B4 to scale the input such that:
B3
+10V
Maximum forward speed demand (+100%) = Terminal B3, +10V input

Maximum reverse speed demand (-100%) = Terminal B4, -10V input
Ramp
A4 Input
B4
Thus, zero speed demand is at the centre position on the potentiometer.

Speed
Demand
Controls the
speed of the
motor
-10V
A6
A4
RAMP INPUT
simplified view
I LOOP
SPEED LOOP
I LIMIT
In both cases, the Current Limit is controlled via terminal A6 (ANIN5).

Note:
A6
Current Limit
B3
Connect
terminal A6 to
B3.
Terminals A1, B1 and C1 (Signal 0V) are the common reference points for
all analog signals used in the drive.
This connection provides control of the Main Current Limit via terminal A6 (ANIN5).
The "ANIN 5 (A6)" function block contains parameters to set up maximum/minimum
values for the analog input, and a scaling ratio.
Adjust the main current limit using the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter [Tag No. 15]
Refer to Chapter 6: "Programming Your Application" - CURRENT LOOP.
Current
Limit
Controls the
available
motor
torque
Fixed Current Limit

For normal operation of the main current limit, connect Terminal A6 (ANIN5)
to Terminal B3 (+10V reference) and set the CURR.LIMIT/SCALER parameter
to 200%. This allows the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter to adjust the current
limit between 0 and 200% full load current.
Variable Current Limit
If external control of the main current limit is required, an additional
10K potentiometer connected between Terminal B3 (+10V Ref) and
Terminal B1(0V), with the wiper connected to Terminal A6
(Analog I/P5) gives 0 to 200% of full load current provided that the
MAIN CURR. LIMIT and CUR. LIMIT/SCALER parameters are set
to 200%.
B3
B3
A6
+10V
Current
Limit
+10V
A6 Current
Limit
B1
0V
3-16

Control Connections cont.
B8
B9
C9
Program Stop/Coast Stop

Connect
terminals B8
and B9 to C9
via an
Emergency
Stop relay.
B8 B9 C9
E'
Stop
Relay
PROG COAST
STOP STOP
C5
Enable
C9
Connect
terminal C5 to
C9.
C3
Start/Run
C9
Connect
terminal C3 to
C9 via a
switch.
These connections provide a Program Stop (B8), and a Coast Stop (B9).
Refer to Chapter 4: "Starting and Stopping Methods".
The "Emergency Stop" relay (normally-open, delay on de-energisation) should not be
part of the normal sequencing system which is implemented via the Start contacts, but is
a relay which can be operated in exceptional circumstances where human safety is of
paramount importance.
Removing 24V from B9 opens the main contactor via the relay
Removing 24V from B8 provides regenerative braking for 4 Quadrant 590+ drives
A regenerative drive can be stopped using a Normal Stop, a Program Stop, or an

Emergency Stop. However, a non-regenerative drive can only be made to stop faster
than friction and loading will allow by Dynamic Braking.
Terminal C5 (Enable) must be connected to C9 (+24V) to allow the drive to run.

IMPORTANT: Connection via a switch is useful to inhibit the drive without
opening the main contactor, however, it is not a safe mode of
operation as the drive dc output is only reduced to zero. If the
equipment controlled by the drive is to be serviced, then this
method should be avoided and the drive disabled and isolated.
When the single contact between C3 and C9 is closed the drive will run provided that:
B8 & B9 are TRUE (+24V) - see "Emergency Stop" above
C5 is TRUE (+24V) - see "Enable" above
When the single contact between C3 and C9 is opened the drive will decelerate the
motor to zero speed at a rate determined by the STOP TIME parameters value and the
MAIN CURR. LIMIT value. Refer to Chapter 6: Application Programming - STOP
RATES for further details.
C4
C9
Jog/Slack
Connect
terminal C4 to
C9 via a
switch or
pushbutton.
C1
External Trip
C2
Connect
terminal C1 to
C2
If the drive is stationary this switch provides a Jog facility.
If the drive is running, this switch provides a Take-Up Slack facility.
For other user-definable operating modes, refer to Chapter 6: "Programming Your

Application" - JOG/SLACK for further details.
Terminals C1 and C2 must be linked if an External Trip interlock is not required.

This input terminal provides an external trip facility to any normally-closed trip switch ,
e.g. for vent fan overload protection.
or
link terminals
if not required
3-17
C1
B6
Drive Healthy
Connect
terminal C1 to
B6 via a lamp
(for example).
This is one of three digital output terminals that provide a +24V dc output signal under
certain conditions. They allow for the connection of relays which, in conjunction with
the Enable, Start/Run and Emergency Stop relay, can be used to enhance the safe
starting and stopping of the controller.
The drive is "healthy" (TRUE) if there is no Start command.
These are configurable outputs and can be used as required in the control system design,
i.e. cubicle door lamps, connection to a suitable PLC.
B5
B6
B7
Digital Outputs
User
connection to
external
equipment.
There are three digital output terminals that provide a +24V dc output signal under
certain conditions. They allow for the connection of relays which, in conjunction with
the Enable, Start/Run and Emergency Stop relay, can be used to enhance the safe
starting and stopping of the controller.
i.e. cubicle door lamps, connection to a suitable PLC.
The default actions are:
B5 = Zero Speed Detected
B6 = Drive Healthy
B7 = Drive Ready
Refer to Chapter 11: "Technical Specifications" - Terminal Information - Control Board,

also Chapter 6: "Programming Your Application" - DIAGNOSTICS.
A2
A3
C8
Speed Setpoints
Connect your
external
setpoint(s) to
terminal A2
and/or A3.
Speed Setpoint No. 1 (A2)

Terminal A2 (Analog Input 1) is a direct speed demand by-passing the "Setpoint Ramp
Generator", and should be used if direct control is required.
Speed Setpoint No. 2 / Current Demand (A3)
Terminal A3 (Analog Input 2) is a dual function terminal (either "Speed Setpoint No. 2"
or "Current Demand") as selected by mode switch control "Current Demand Isolate",
Terminal C8. As a speed setpoint, it can be used in the same way as Terminal A2.
If more than one speed setpoint is used, they are additive.
A5
B4
C6
C9
Auxiliary Current Clamp (-ve)

Connect
terminal A5 to
B4 to provide
-10V, or
supply
externally.
Used to allow separate control of positive and negative Main Current Limits, for
example, in Winder applications.
Connect
terminal C6 to
C9 to enable
bipolar
current
clamps.
The "ANIN 4 (A5)" function block contains parameters to set up maximum/minimum

values for the analog input, and a scaling ratio.
Enable bipolar current clamps by providing 24V at terminal C6. Terminal A5 (ANIN4)
is an Auxiliary Current Clamp (-ve), 0 to -10V. If driven positive, it will form a current
demand.
With 24V at terminal C6, Terminal A6 (ANIN 5) acts as the Auxiliary Current Clamp
(+ve), 0 to 10V.
3-18

A7
A8
Analog Outputs
User
connection to
external
equipment.
i.e. connection to a meter, for cascading to another drive.
Terminal A7, Analog Output 1 provides a Speed Feedback value, -10V to +10V
Terminal A7, Analog Output 2 provides a Total Speed Setpoint value, -10V to
+10V
The "ANOUT1" and "ANOUT2" function blocks contain parameters to configure the
values.
A9
Current Meter Output

User
connection to
external
equipment.
C6
Digital Inputs
C7
User
connections to
the drive.
C8
This connection is for a Current Meter.

The "ARMATURE I (A9)" parameter is used to select either unipolar or bipolar output.
Refer to Chapter 6: "Programming Your Application" - CALIBRATION.
These configurable 24V dc digital inputs are used to control the drive.
The default configurations are:
C6 : Current Clamp Select (see A5 and A6 )
C7 : Ramp Hold
C8 : Current Demand Isolate (see A2 )
Refer to Chapter 11: "Technical Specifications" - Terminal Information - Control Board,

also Chapter 6: "Programming Your Application" - DIGITAL INPUTS.
G1
G2
G3
G4
Analog Tachometer
User
connection to
external
equipment.
Fit the Tacho
Calibration
Option Board
to the Drive.
This provides
terminals G1
to G4.
Refer to Chapter 13: Standard and Optional Equipment - Optional Equipment for
further information.
An Analog Tachometer is connected to the Drive using a screened twisted pair cable
throughout its entire length to provide speed feedback via the Tacho Calibration Option
Board. This provides facility for an AC or DC tachometer. The screen is grounded or
earthed only at the drive end, any other grounding arrangement may cause problems.
Terminals G1 & G2 are for AC tacho connections.

Terminals G3 & G4 are for DC tacho connections.
Note:
The speed loop is set-up for an analog tacho by the SPEED FBK SELECT
parameter in the SPEED LOOP function block. Select ANALOG TACH for
this parameter.
If an AC tachogenerator is used the output is rectified to produce the dc
feedback to the speed loop. Consequently, the controller can only be
used with a positive setpoint.
Refer to Chapter 4: Operating the Converter for set-up information.
3-19
F1
C1
C9
Microtach
User
connection to
external
equipment.
Fit the
Microtach
Option Board
to the Drive.
This provides
the fibre optic
terminal F1.
The SSD Drives MICROTACH is available in two versions:
5701 Plastic Fibre Microtach

5901 Glass Fibre Microtach
A Microtach can be connected to provide speed feedback via the Microtach Option
Board using the international standard ST fibre optic system.
F1 is the fibre optic receiver input socket. Terminals C9 (+24V dc) and C1 (0V) are used
to provide the supply and return respectively.
Note:
The speed loop is set-up for the Microtach by the SPEED FBK SELECT
parameter in the SPEED LOOP function block. Select ENCODER for this
parameter.
The maximum Microtach frequency is 50kHz, thus with a standard 1000 lines per
revolution Microtach the motor speed cannot exceed 3000 rpm.
For specification and connection information refer to SSD Drives or the appropriate
Technical Manual.
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
Wire-Ended Encoder
User
connection to
external
equipment.
Fit the
Encoder
Option Board
to the Drive.
Terminals E1 (0V) and E2 (+24V dc) are the return and supply respectively.
This provides
terminals E1
to E6.
The wire-ended encoder is connected to the Drive using a screened cable throughout its
entire length to provide speed feedback.
Note:
The speed loop is set-up for the Encoder by the SPEED FBK SELECT
parameter in the SPEED LOOP function block. Select ENCODER for this
parameter.
The maximum allowable encoder frequency is 100kHz, thus with a standard 1000 lines
per revolution encoder the motor speed cannot exceed 6000 rpm.
For specification and connection information refer to SSD Drives or the appropriate
Technical Manual.
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
Technology Box Option

User
connection to
external
equipment.
Fit the
Technology
Box Option to
the Drive.
This provides
terminals H1
to H6.
The Technology Box Option allows converters to be linked together to form a network.
We can supply Options for most protocols. Refer to Chapter 6: "Programming Your
Application" - TEC OPTION for information about Technology Box Option types.
For detailed information, refer to the appropriate Technical Manual supplied with the
Technology Box.
3-20
Motor Field Options

WARNING!
Isolate the drive before converting to internal/external supply.
The FIELD CONTROL function block controls the motor field. The FLD CTRL MODE
parameter allows you to select either Voltage or Current Control mode.
In Voltage Control mode, the RATIO OUT/IN parameter is used to scale the motor field
output voltage as a percentage of the input supply voltage.
In Current Control mode, the SETPOINT parameter is used to set an absolute motor field
output current, expressed as a percentage of the calibrated field current (IF CAL).
Internal/External Supply (Frames 2, 3, 4 & 5)

Note: The Frame 1 unit uses only an internal motor field supply. The Frame H unit uses only an
external motor field supply. For information about the following terminal/power boards
refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Power Board Types, and Terminal
Information (Power Board).
The internal motor field is more widely used, however, there is provision on the unit for an
external motor field supply to be connected (perhaps for where the field voltage is greater than
the input voltage and therefore not attainable, or where the motor field is switched separately for
convenience).
3-phase supply
110V - 690VAC
3 PH 50/60Hz
external supply
derived from L1 & L2
High Speed
Fuses
High Speed
Fuses
3-phase
external
contactor
Filter
(optional)
Start
Contactor
CON
field
FL1
FL2
F+
AC Line Choke
F-
L1
L2
L3
Figure 3-11 Typical connection diagram
Terminal Board - PCB Reference 470330 (Frame 2)

The position of the jumper selects the board to use either an internal or external motor field.
PLG1 to Power Board
PLG2 to Power Board
PLG3 to Power Board
Motor Vent Fan Circuit Breaker
External Field Selector Plug
L N 3 4 TH1 TH2
FL1 FL2 F+
F-
M1
M2
M3
Terminal Board
Field Bridge
FL1 FL2
Field Bridge
L1
L2
FL1
FL2
L1
L2
fitted pin
non-fitted pin
Jumper selecting external field
Jumper selecting internal field
3-21
Internal Motor Field (default for this board)

Terminals F+ and F-, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply is
connected to L1/L2/L3. Terminals FL1 and FL2 are not required. The internal motor field
supply is fused by 10A fuses, FS5 & FS6.
External Motor Field
Terminals FL1 and FL2 can be used for external ac supply connection for the Motor Field
Supply. You should provide suitably rated external, fast-acting semi-conductor fusing, to a
maximum of 10A.
Caution
When using an external ac input it is important to have the correct phase relationship on
the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly
or indirectly through a single-phase transformer.
L1 must be connected to FL1, and L2 connected to FL2.
The external field supply can now be connected and power restored to the drive.
Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3)

This power board (printed with the above number) can be altered for use with either an internal
or external motor field supply:
Terminals D3 and D4, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply to
L1/L2/L3 is energised and the internal motor field is used. Terminals D1 and D2 are not
energised. The internal motor field supply is fused by the 10A fuses, FS2 & FS3.
External Motor Field Connections
Terminals D1 and D2 on the
Yellow
Power Board can be used for
an external ac supply
connection for the Motor Field
Supply.
A simple re-wiring procedure
disconnects the internal motor
field supply and prepares
terminals D1 and D2 for the
external ac supply connection.
You should provide suitably
rated external, fast-acting
semi-conductor fusing, to a
maximum of 10A.
F8
POWER BOARD AH385851

D1
D2
D3
D4
Red
F19
F18
F16
Re-Wiring Procedure
WARNING!
Isolate all power to the drive.

1. Loosen the control board fixing screws (2 off) and position the control board to allow access
to the power board.
2. Remove the red link from the Faston connector F16 on the left-hand side of the board and
connect it to staging post F19, located below terminal D1.
3. Remove the yellow link wire from the Faston connector F8 on the left-hand side of the
board and connect it to staging post F18, located below terminal D2.
3-22

Caution
or indirectly through a single phase transformer.
L1 must be connected to D1, and L2 connected to D2.
Power Board PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5)

This power board (printed with the above number) can be altered for use with either an internal
or external motor field supply:
Terminals F+ and F-, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply to
L1/L2/L3 is energised and the internal motor field is used. Terminals FL1 and FL2 are not
energised. The internal motor field supply is fused by the 30A fuses FS1 and FS2.
External Motor Field Connections
Terminals FL1 and FL2 on the Power
Board can be used for an external ac
supply connection for the Motor Field
Supply.
A simple re-wiring procedure
disconnects the internal field supply and
prepares terminals FL1 and FL2 for the
external ac supply connection.
You should provide suitably rated
external, fast-acting semi-conductor
fusing, to a maximum of 30A.
red
yellow
F4
F5
F6
F1
F13
F14 F3
EX A- EX A+
EX L2
F2
EX L1
FL1 FL2
F+
F-
Re-Wiring Procedure
WARNING!
Isolate all power to the drive.

1.
2.
3.
Loosen the control board fixing screws (2 off) and position the control board to allow
access to the power board.
Remove the red link from the Faston connector F2 and connect it to the staging post F3
nearby (EX L1).
Remove the yellow link wire from the Faston connector F5 and connect it to the staging
post F6 nearby (EX L2).
Caution
or indirectly through a single phase transformer.
L1 must be in phase with FL1, and L2 must be in phase with FL2.
3-23
DC Contactor - External VA Sensing

Connections are provided for external armature voltage sensing (at the motor) for when a dc
contactor is used between the drive and motor.
Power Board - PCB Reference 385851 (Frame 3)

FL1
EXA+
(F15)
FS2
EXA-
to
terminals
D5 & D6
A+
A-
A+
A-
L1
contactor
Fuses - only necessary for

local leads longer than 3 metres
fuses
Locate fuses close to signal

source when fitted
Power Board PCB Reference 466701 (Frames 4 & 5)
F13
EX A-
F14
EX A+
FL1 FL2
to
busbar
A+
to
busbar
A-
contactor
source when fitted
M
F+ F-
to
terminals
3 & 4 (TB2)
3-24

External Connections (Frame H)
Motor field
supply and
and output
terminals plus
external armature
voltage sense
FL1
FL2
F+
FMVA+
MVA-
to
busbar
A+
to
busbar
Acontactor
source when fitted
to
power
control
terminals
N & MC
3-25
Optional Equipment
Fitting the Remote 6901 Operator Station
The 6052 Mounting Kit is required to remote-mount a 6901 Operator Station. It is possible to
remote-mount the drive-mounted Operator Station using the port illustrated
You can also replace an Operator Station for a PC running ConfigEd Lite (or other suitable PC
programming tool) in all of the options above. Refer to the Software Product Manual: Serial
Communications.
6052 Mounting Kit Parts for the Remote Operator Station
Tools Required
No. 2 Posidrive
screwdriver.
6052 Mounting Kit
1
4
1
No. 6 x 12mm
3m, 4-way
Assembly Procedure
1
RS232 / REM OP STA
mm
Cutout Dimensions
An actual size template is provided with
Operator Station/6052 Mounting Kit.
Figure 3-12 Mounting Dimensions for the
Remote-Mounted Operator Station 6901
Template
3-26

Speed Feedback and Technology Options
The Options are:
1. Speed Feedback (Analog Tacho Calibration Option Board or Microtach/Encoder Feedback
Option Card)
2. Communications Technology Box (6055 - LINK II, Profibus, DeviceNet, Serial RS485)
They are plugged into the two positions, as illustrated.
Earthing
Screw
Speed
Feedback
Option
Comms
Option
You can operate the Inverter with the Speed Feedback and/or Communications Technology
Options.
Refer to the appropriate Technology Option Technical Manual for further information.
Removal
After removing the earthing screw,
remove the COMMS option by carefully
pushing a long screwdriver (for
instance) under the option and gently
levering it out. The pins are protected by
the option moulding.
WARNING!
Isolate the drive before fitting or removing the options.
3-27
External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation

Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - Environmental Details, and External AC
Supply (RFI) Filters and Line Choke for selection details.
A filter is used with the Converter to reduce the line conducted emissions produced by the
Converter. Filters are used in parallel on the higher current Converters. When installed correctly
and used with the specified 2% minimum line chokes, conformance with EN55011 Class A can
be achieved (suitable for both generic environments: RF Emission and Immunity).
Cubicle-Mounting the 590+ Converter with Filter

WARNING!
Do not touch filter terminals or cabling for at least 3 minutes after removing the
ac supply.
Only use the ac supply filter with a permanent earth connection.
The filter should be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.
The Converter must be mounted vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It must be installed
into a cubicle.
The recommended EMC filter is mounted to the left, right, above, below, or spaced behind the
Converter. It can be mounted flat against the surface, or projecting out from the surface if the
filter type has side fixings.
1. Mount the filter securely at the four fixing points (flat or on its side).
2. Mount the Converter next to the filter, allowing for the required airgap between the
Converter, the filter and any adjacent equipment.
Connection Details
The connection between the Converter, choke and filter must always be as short as possible and
must be segregated from all other cables. Ideally, mount the filter and choke onto the same
metallic panel as the Converter. Take care not to obstruct any ventilation spacing.
If this cable/busbar exceeds 0.6m (2 feet) in length, it must be replaced with a
screened/armoured cable. The screen/armour must be earthed at both the filter, choke and
Converter ends with large-area contact surfaces, preferably with metal cable glands.
You should enhance the RF connection between the Converter, choke, filter and panel as
follows:
1. Remove any paint/insulation between the mounting points of the EMC filter, choke,
Converter and the panel. Liberally apply petroleum jelly over the mounting points and
securing threads. This will prevent corrosion. Alternatively, conducting paint could be used
on the panel.
2. If 1 above is not possible, then improve the RF earth bond between the filter and Converter
by making an additional RF earth connection. Use wire braid of at least 10mm crosssectional area.
Note: Metal surfaces, such as anodised or yellow chromed (with cable mounting or 35mm DIN
rails, screws and bolts) have a high impedance which can be very detrimental to EMC
performance.
3. A low RF impedance path must be provided between the motor frame and back panel on
which the drive, choke and EMC filters are mounted. This low impedance RF path should
follow the path of the motor cables in order to minimise the loop area. Failure to do so will
result in increased conducted emissions.
A low RF impedance path will normally be achieved by:
Bonding the armour of the motor supply cables at one end to the motor frame, and at the
3-28

other end to the cubicle back panel. Ideally 360o bonding is required, which can be achieved
with cable glands, refer to Figure 3-7 360 Degree Screened Connection, page 3-7.
Ensuring that conduit containing the motor supply cables are bonded together using braid.
The conduit should also be bonded to the motor frame and the cubicle back panel.
Earthing Details
The protective earth (PE) conductor exiting the filter must be connected to the protective earth
connection of the Converter. Any additional RF earth, such as a cable screen, is not a
protective earth. The EMC filter must be permanently earthed to prevent the risk of electric
shock under abnormal operating instances (such as the loss of one phase of the ac supply).
You can achieve permanent earthing by either:
using a copper protective earth conductor of at least 10mm
installing a second conductor, in parallel connection with the protective conductor, to a
separate protective earth terminal
Each conductor must independently meet the requirements for a protective earth conductor.
Operating Conditions
The recommended EMC filters operate from normal three-phases supplies which are balanced
with respect to earth (earth referenced supplies - TN). This minimises the earth leakage current
due to the filter capacitors between phase and earth.
IMPORTANT: We do not recommend the use of ac supply filters on non earth-referenced supplies - IT.
The supplies cause earth leakage currents to increase, and interfere with the operation of
earth fault monitoring equipment. In addition, EMC performance of the filter is
degraded.
As with all power electronic drives, conducted emissions increase with motor cable length.
EMC conformance is only guaranteed up to a cable length of 50m. The cable length can be
increased. Refer to SSD Drives for more information.
Earth Fault Monitoring Systems

WARNING!
Circuit breakers used with VSDs and other similar equipment are not suitable for
personnel protection. Use another means to provide personal safety. Refer to
EN50178 (1998) / VDE0160 (1994) / EN60204-1 (1994)
We do not recommend the use of circuit breakers (e.g. RCD, ELCB, GFCI), but where their use
is mandatory, they should:
Operate correctly with dc and ac protective earth currents (i.e. type B RCDs as in
Amendment 2 of IEC755).
Have adjustable trip amplitude and time characteristics to prevent nuisance tripping on
switch-on.
Note: When the ac supply is switched on, a pulse of current flows to earth to charge the EMC
filter internal capacitors which are connected between phase and earth. This has been
minimised in SSD Drives filters, but may still trip out any circuit breaker in the earth
system. In addition, high frequency and dc components of earth leakage currents will
flow under normal operating conditions. Under certain fault conditions larger dc
protective earth currents may flow. The protective function of some circuit breakers cannot
be guaranteed under such operating conditions.
Installation Drawings
Converter Installation Drawings
Figure 3-13 Frame 1 : 15A & 35A Stack Assembly Drg. No. HG466465
3-29
3-30
Figure 3-14 Frame 2 : 40A-165A Stack Assembly

Figure 3-15 Frame 3 : 180A Stack Assembly - Drg No. HG466427

3-31
3-32
Figure 3-16 Frame 3 : 270A Stack Assembly - Drg No. HG466428

Figure 3-17 Frame 4 : 380-830A Stack Assembly Drg. No. HG466700U001

3-33
3-34
Figure 3-18 Frame 4 : 380-830A External Vent Kit Installation Drg No. HG466700U002
3-35
On the Frame 5,
both the Master and Slave drives
must be individually earthed
Figure 3-19 Frame 5 : 1580A Stack Assembly Drg No. HG466700U110
3-36
Figure 3-20 Frame 5 : 1580A External Vent Kit Installation Drg No. HG466700U111
3-37
Figure 3-21 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Regenerative) - Drg No. HG466432U000/1
3-38
Figure 3-22 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Regenerative) - Drg No. HG466432U000/2
3-39
Figure 3-23 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Non-regenerative) - Drg No. HG466433U000/1
3-40
Figure 3-24 Frame H : 1200A-2700A Stack Assembly (Non-regenerative) - Drg No. HG466433U000/2
Filter Installation Drawings
Figure 3-25 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U015 for Frame 1 : 15 Amp
3-41
3-42
Figure 3-26 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U040 for Frame 1: 35 & Frame 2 : 40 Amp
3-43
3-44
Figure 3-28 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U110 for 590+ Frame 2 : 110 Amp
3-45
3-46
Figure 3-31 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467843U340

Frame 3 : 270 Amp (1 filter) and Frame 4 : 380-830 Amp (2 filter)
(refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - External AC Supply (RFI) Filters)
3-47
3-48
Line Choke Installation Drawings

IMPORTANT: Always use the specified ac line choke with the Converter.
200mm long
flying leads
E
F
D
B
SSD Part Number
Converter Rating
Weight
Dimensions (mm)
Mtg
Hole
Terminal
(kg)
For use without EMC Filters

Frame 1
CO466448U015
15A
67
60
80
40
64
M8
CO466448U040
35A
2.5
127
70
155
48
140
7.5
M8
CO466448U040
40A
2.5
127
70
155
48
140
7.5
M8
CO466448U070
70A
4.5
127
85
155
63
140
7.5
M8
CO466448U110
110A
7.5
160
100
190
75
170
10
M8
CO466448U165
165A
7.5
160
102
190
76
170
10
M8
CO466449U015
15A
4.5
127
90
155
68
140
7.5
M8
CO466449U040
35A
160
100
190
75
170
10
M8
CO466449U040
40A
160
100
190
75
170
10
M8
CO466449U070
70A
10
160
105
190
83
170
10
M8
CO466449U110
110A
14
160
125
190
103
170
10
M8
CO466449U165
165A
28
225
200
240
176
150
45
15
M8
Frame 2
For use with EMC filters

Frame 1
Frame 2
3-49
D
C1
C
C
E
W
SSD Part
Number
Converter
Rating
Weight
(kg)
Dimensions (mm)
A
C1
80
60
Mtg
Hole
Terminal
13
M8
For use without EMC Filters

Frame 3
CO057960
270A
30
110 110
255 200
40
170 200 280 380
Line Choke (Frames 4, 5 & H)

Contact SSD Drives about suitable chokes for the above frame sizes.
Also refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications - AC Line Choke (Frame H).
3-50
Operating the Converter
4-1
OPERATING THE CONVERTER

6
4
Pre-Operation Checks
Initial checks before applying power:
Mains power supply voltage is correct.
Auxiliary power supply voltage is correct.
Motor is of correct armature voltage and current rating.
Check all external wiring circuits - power, control, motor and earth connections.
Note: Completely disconnect the Converter before point-to-point checking with a buzzer, or
when checking insulation with a Megger.
Check for damage to equipment.
Check for loose ends, clippings, drilling swarf etc. lodged in the Converter and system.
If possible check that the motor can be turned freely, and that any cooling fans are intact and
free from obstruction.
Ensure the safety of the complete system before the Converter is energised:
Ensure that rotation of the motor in either direction will not cause damage.
Ensure that nobody else is working on another part of the system which will be affected by
powering up.
Ensure that other equipment will not be adversely affected by powering up.
Prepare to energise the Converter and system as follows:
Remove the main external HRC fuses to prevent the main 3-phase and single phase auxiliary
supply from being connected.
Disconnect the load from the motor shaft, if possible.
If any of the Converters control terminals are not being used, check whether these unused
terminals need to be tied high or low. Refer to Chapter 11: Technical SpecificationsControl Terminals.
If there is any doubt about the integrity of a particular installation, insert a high wattage
resistor, i.e. fire elements, in series with the motor armature.
Check external run contacts are open.
Check external speed setpoints are all zero.
4-2
Control Philosophy
There are four ways to control the Converter using Remote and Local control:
590+ converter
using
analog
and digital
inputs and
outputs
590+ converter
using
590+ converter
using
590+ converter
using
Technology
Option
DEFAULT
PC running
ConfigEd Lite
or other suitable
software
Operator
Station
to fieldbus,
LINK II network,
Comms link
REMOTE CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL
Figure 4-1 Remote and Local Control Modes
Start/Stop and Speed Control

There are two forms of control in operation at any time: Start/Stop and Speed Control. Each can
be individually selected to be under either Local or Remote Control.
Local or Remote Start/Stop decides how you will start and stop the Converter.
Local or Remote Speed Control determines how you will control the motor speed.
In each case, Local and Remote control are offered by using the following:
Local:
The Operator Station
Remote: Analog and digital inputs and outputs, System Port P3 or the Technology Option
Thus the Converter can operate in two modes:
REMOTE
SPEED CONTROL
LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
DEFAULT
LOCAL START/STOP
REMOTE START/STOP
REMOTE CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL
Figure 4-2 Local and Remote Control

Note: Start/Stop is also known as Sequencing.
Speed Control is also known as Reference Generation.
4-3
Selecting Local or Remote Control

DEFAULT
The default is for the L/R key to be set for Remote control, i.e. both the SEQ and REF LEDs will
be off.
If the default Remote Start/Stop and Speed Control is not suitable for your application, follow
the instructions below using the Operator Station or a suitable PC programming tool to select
Local Start/Stop and Speed Control.
Note: You can only change between Local and Remote control when the Converter is
stopped.
The L/R key on the Operator Station toggles between Local and Remote control, changing both
Start/Stop and Speed Control modes at the same time.
LED Indications
The mode of control is indicated by the
LOCAL LEDs on the Operator Station:
SEQ = Start/Stop
REF = Speed Control
If the LED is illuminated ( ), then LOCAL
mode is in force.
DC DIGITAL DRIVE
DC 4Q 15A
LOCAL
HEALTH
SEQ
REF
Figure 4-3 Control Mode LED Indications
Operation in Local Mode

The converter requires the following power terminals to be connected for operation in Local
control.
3-phase supply via contactor
Auxiliary supply
3-phase contactor coil
Motor thermistor TH1 & TH2
Motor armature
Motor field
The converter requires the following control terminals to be active for operation in Local
control.
Current Limit (jumper A6 to B3)
Program Stop - high (jumper B8 to C9)
Coast Stop - high (jumper B9 to C9)
External Trip - low (jumper C1 to C2)
External Enable - high (jumper C5 to C9)
To run in Local control:
Press the L/R key to enable Local control as detailed above
to start the unit
On the Operator Station press the RUN key
Use the UP
and DOWN
keys to control the speed
On the Operator Station press the STOP key
to stop the unit
4-4
Reading the Status LEDs

These LEDs are used when the blanking cover is fitted
to the drive instead of the Operator Station.
EUROTHERM
DRIVES
OFF
SHORT FLASH
EQUALFLASH
HEALTH
LONG FLASH
Figure 4-4 Blank Cover

showing LEDs
ON
HEALTH
RUN
RUN
Converter State
Re-Configuration, or corrupted non-volatile memory at power-up
Tripped
Auto Restarting
Stopped
Running with zero reference
Running
Stopping
Table 4-1 Status indications given by the Health and Run LEDs
4-5
Setting-up the Converter

The following start-up routine assumes that the Operator Station is fitted and is in default mode,
and that the Converters control terminals are wired as shown in the Minimum Connection
diagrams in Chapter 3.
The following instructions are written in logical order. Complete each stage successfully
before progressing to the next.
Calibrating the Control Board

AUXILIARY POWER ONLY IS CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
You must first calibrate the Converter for use with the motor.
Connect the auxiliary power supply to auxiliary supply terminals L &
N (Frame 3: Terminals L & N = D8 & D7), but do not connect the
main 3-phase power supply at this stage. Check that the correct voltage
appears between these terminals.
The Operator Station will now display the Welcome screen, and the
Health and Overcurrent Trip Operator Station LEDs will be illuminated
(assuming that the Converters control terminals are wired as shown in
Figure 3-4, Minimum Connection Requirements).
Note:
The CONFIGURE DRIVE menu at the top of the menu tree contains
many of the important parameters used during set-up.
Refer to Chapter 5: The Operator Station to familiarise yourself
with the Operator Stations LED indications, and how to use the
keys and menu structure.
MMI Menu Map

1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
ARMATURE CURRENT
FIELD CURRENT
FLD.CTRL MODE
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
AUTOTUNE
SPEED FBK SELECT
ENCODER LINES
ENCODER RPM
ENCODER SIGN
SPD.INT.TIME
SPD.PROP.GAIN
IMPORTANT: You must not exceed the maximum drive and motor ratings. Refer to the Product Code or
maximum rating label, and the motor rating plate.
Set the following parameters:
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Set to ENABLED. This allows you to change parameter values, but the drive cannot run.
NOM MOTOR VOLTS Armature Voltage (VACAL)
If the drive is designed for use on a nominal 3-phase power supply of 220V, set DOUBLE the
Armature Voltage value in the NOM MOTOR VOLTS parameter.
OR
If the drive is designed for use on a nominal 3-phase power supply of 500, 600 or 690V, set the
Armature Voltage value in the NOM MOTOR VOLTS parameter.
Note:
Refer to the Product Code on the drive's Rating Label to confirm the drive's specification.
Also refer to Chapter 2: "An Overview of the Drive" - Understanding the Product Code.
ARMATURE CURRENT (IA CAL)
Note the maximum armature current from the motor rating plate and set this value in the
ARMATURE CURRENT parameter.
FIELD CURRENT (IF CAL)
Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in the FIELD
CURRENT parameter.
Frame H: The factory setting of the power board calibration switches allows for a Field Current
range of up to 20A. If the Field Current is greater than 20A, refer to Chapter 7: "Trips and Fault
Finding" - Current Calibration Switches (Frame H).
4-6

FLD.CTRL MODE
Set the field control mode to Field Voltage or Field Current control. Refer to Chapter 6:
Programming Your Application - Field Control for further information. By default, the drive
is operating in Voltage Control mode.
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
Enter the calculated ratio into the parameter given by the equation:
The default setting of 90% is the maximum value obtainable,
i.e. field output = 0.9 x Vac
100 x
FIELD VOLTS
RMS AC INPUT VOLTS
Selecting Speed Feedback

Using the Operator Station, select the correct speed feedback option.
The default is ARM VOLTS FBK.
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
The selections are ARM VOLTS FBK, ANALOG TACH, ENCODER

and ENCODER/ANALOG.
SPEED FBK SELECT
Note: Refer to Chapter 13: Standard and Optional Equipment - Speed Feedback Option
Boards for further information.
Speed Feedback Option Boards

Analog Tacho Calibration Option Board
WARNING!
Do not fit this Option Board with the drive powered-up.
Note: This option is not required if armature
voltage or encoder feedback is to be used.
link wire
The board plugs into the front of the drive.

Mount it on the 10-pin connector correctly.
This will allow the locating pegs to align with
the mounting holes. It also requires the
connecting link wire to the control board.
This link is inherent but must be connected
for operation.
The board supports AC and DC analog tachos
with a calibration range of 10 to 200V:
For AC tacho feedback, use terminals G1
and G2 with the selector switch in the AC
position.
0123456789
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0
AC
100
DC
+ - + -
G1 G2 G3 G4
AC
DC
For DC tacho feedback, use terminals G3 and G4 with the selector switch in the DC position
Calculate the tacho voltage by multiplying the required maximum speed by the tacho calibration
factor, e.g. motor speed 1500 rpm and tacho calibration factor 60V per 1000 rpm is 90V.
The tacho calibration volts are set using the 2 in-line switches (10-way). The switches set Volts
in units and tens. The hundreds are set by the 1-way switch. The illustration above shows a
setting of 90V. When setting switches for AC tachos, calibrate the switches for 2 x voltage
feedback required, i.e. 2 x 90V = 127V. This adjusts the rms value received from an AC tacho
into the required peak value.
Note: Do not set the calibration volts to greater than 200V, the maximum terminal block rating.
4-7
Calibration for Voltages greater than 200V

For full speed tacho voltages greater than 200V, an external resistor, value RE, is required in
series with the tachogenerator connection to terminal G3.
Set the switches on the Tacho Calibration Option Board to give a value of 200V, as shown
opposite.
RE then is given by the formula:
RE =
(tachovolts 200)
k
5
The power dissipation of this resistor is given by the

formula
0123456789
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0
100
W = (tacho volts - 200) x 5 milliwatts
Microtach and Encoder Feedback Option Boards

WARNING!
Do not fit this Option Board with the drive powered-up.
The board plugs into the front of the drive. Mount it on the
10-pin connector correctly. This will allow the locating
pegs to align with the mounting holes.
IMPORTANT: The Microtach Option Board is fitted with an 11 pin
connector. Fit this as shown in the diagram opposite.
These option boards assume a 1000 lines per rev encoder is
being used. Speed is set directly by the ENCODER RPM
parameter. If you are using an alternative lines per rev
encoder, you must set the ENCODER LINES parameter on
the Operator Station later in the Operating Instructions.
unused connector
Save Your Settings

CONFIGURE ENABLE
Set to DISABLED.
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
PARAMETER SAVE
Perform a Parameter Save to save your settings. Press the (UP)
key, as instructed.
MMI Menu Map

1
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
4-8
Initial Start-up Routine

Complete steps 1 to 18, including steps 16 and 17 as appropriate.
Note: This routine assumes that the Converters control terminals are wired as shown in the
Minimum Connection Requirements drawings in Chapter 3. The field is Enabled and is
in Voltage Control (default settings).
IMPORTANT: Do not change any of the previously made calibration settings once the main contactor is
energised.
Step 1 Normally, the setpoint ramp input at control terminal A4 is the speed reference source.
Use the Operator Station to display the value of the ANIN 3 (A4).
Vary the setpoint potentiometer and observe the input voltage display
change.
MMI Menu Map

1
DIAGNOSTICS
ANIN 1 (A2)
Additional Setpoint Inputs may also appear at ANIN 1 (A2) and ANIN
2 (A3). Check these if present.
ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
MMI Menu Map
The sum of all the setpoints is given by the value of the SPEED
SETPOINT parameter, and is also output at terminal A8.
DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED SETPOINT
Step 2 Use the Operator Station to check the external current clamp settings (refer to Chapter
6: Programming Your Application - ANALOG INPUTS for setting details):
If using a single external clamp, C6 low (0V):
MMI Menu Map

1
Check that ANIN 5 (A6) is +10V or is adjustable up to

+10V.
DIAGNOSTICS
ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
If using dual external clamps, C6 high (+24V):
Check the ANIN 5 (A6) is at +10V or is adjustable up to +10V and that ANIN 4 (A5)
is at -10V or is adjustable up to -10V.
Step 3 If possible, check the speed feedback by rotating the shaft manually in the forward
direction.
MMI Menu Map
Analog Tachogenerator:
1 DIAGNOSTICS
The voltage at G3 (DC Tach Input) should go positive.
TACH INPUT (B2)
MICROTACH/Encoder
MMI Menu Map
The ENCODER parameter should give a positive reading.
1 DIAGNOSTICS
ENCODER
Also check the SPEED FEEDBACK parameter is reading a positive

MMI Menu Map
value. If there is no feedback signal from the Microtach, verify that
1 DIAGNOSTICS
both LEDs on the Microtach Option Board are illuminated. If either
SPEED FEEDBACK
LED is extinguished, check that 24V is applied to the Microtach and
all ancillary products, and that the fibre optic transmission length is not exceeded.
Step 4 Scroll through the SETUP PARAMETERS menu and take a note of the MAIN CURR.
LIMIT parameters value. You will need this later.
MMI Menu Map
Set the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter to 0.00%.
SETUP PARAMETERS
Select the correct setting for the SPEED FBK SELECT.
CURRENT LOOP
Note: Save any parameters that have been changed. Refer to Chapter
5: The Operator Station - How to Save, Restore and Copy your
Settings.
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPEED FBK SELECT

Step 5
4-9
With +24V present at terminals B8 and B9 (Program Stop and Coast Stop):
Apply the "Start/Run" command to C3.

The main 3-phase contactor should pull-in and remain
energised, (it may de-energise almost immediately due to the
3-phase fail alarm).
MMI Menu Map

1
DIAGNOSTICS
PROGRAM STOP
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
Remove the "Start/Run" command from C3.
The main 3-phase contactor should drop-out and remain de-energised.

If the above sequence does not function, remove the auxiliary power and check start/stop
sequencing and contactor wiring.
If the contactor is left energised for an extended time during this check, the controller will detect
that 3-phase is not connected and switch off the contactor, flagging the 3-phase alarm.
IMPORTANT: The main contactor should never be operated by any means other than the drive internal
controls, nor should any additional circuitry be placed around the contactor coil circuit.
WARNING!
Do not continue until the stop/start circuits and contactor operate correctly.
Step 6 Switch off all power supplies to the equipment and, when the whole system is totally
isolated and safe, re-connect the main 3-phase power supply.
Switch on the auxiliary supply.
Switch on the main 3-phase supply.
MAIN & AUXILIARY POWER ARE CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
Step 7 Set the Speed Setpoints to zero so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT parameter
is zero, this is also output at Terminal A8.
MMI Menu Map
1
DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED SETPOINT
8
Verify that the MAIN CURR. LIMIT is set to 0.00%, or that the ANIN 5 (A6)
parameter in the DIAGNOSTICS menu at level 1 is displaying 0.00V.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
MMI Menu Map

1 DIAGNOSTICS
ANIN 5 (A6)
9
Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3-phase mains is applied to Power
Terminals L1, L2 and L3. Initiate "Enable" (C5) and immediately check that the correct field
voltage appears between the auxiliary supply terminals F+ and F-.
Caution
This is high voltage DC, proceed with caution. Do not continue if this is incorrect, switch
off all supplies and check connections. Refer to 9.1 or 9.2 on the next page:
4-10

If the field voltage is not correct, make the following checks:
Step 9.1 Internally Supplied Field:
Check that 3-phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor
is closed.
MMI Menu Map
Check that the coding fuses on the power board or

suppression board are healthy.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 FIELD CONTROL
The FIELD ENABLE parameter should be set to

ENABLE.
FIELD ENABLE
With the FIELD ENABLE parameter in view, press the (DOWN) key. The
display changes to FLD CTRL MODE. Press the M key. Is this set to VOLTAGE
CONTROL or CURRENT CONTROL?
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value
of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this to
65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V supplies.
MMI Menu Map
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD. VOLTS RATIO
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration set-up,

refer back to Calibration.
If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The
field current may initially be lower than the rated value due to a cold
field.)
Step 9.2 Externally Supplied Field: (not available on Frame 1 units)
Refer to Chapter 3: Installing the Converter - Motor Field Connections for
conversion details.
Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.
Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:
MMI Menu Map
FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the

Red phase on main power terminal L1.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the

Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.
FIELD ENABLE
2 FIELD CONTROL
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The FIELD ENABLE should be set to ENABLE.

With the FIELD ENABLE parameter in view, press the
(DOWN) key. The display changes to FLD CTRL
MODE. Press the M key. Is this set to VOLTAGE
CONTROL or CURRENT CONTROL?
2 FIELD CONTROL
3 FLD VOLTAGE VARS
FLD. VOLTS RATIO
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS

RATIO parameter. Set this to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V supplies.
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration set-up,
refer back to Calibration.
Check that 3-phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3.
Step 10 Check that the HEALTH and STOP Operator Station LEDs are now illuminated,
also either the FWD or REV LED. Note that any external interlocks which affect the Enable
input C5 will affect the operation of the drive.
Step 11 If the STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter in the STANDSTILL menu at level 2 is
ENABLED, temporarily set it to DISABLED.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
4-11
Caution
During the following set-up instructions, be ready to STOP the converter should the
motor try to overspeed.
Step 12 Set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED
SETPOINT is about 5%, 0.5V at setpoint input (terminal A8).
MMI Menu Map

1 DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the next operation with ARM VOLTS FBK selected for
the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter (because it is hard-wired
and therefore the sign will be correct). Select it now.
Slowly increase the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter up to a maximum
of about 20%. The motor should begin to rotate if all connections are
made correctly. The motor speed will settle at about 5% of full speed
if the motor is unloaded. Check the feedback from the Tachometer or
Encoder using the appropriate Diagnostic menu.
SPEED SETPOINT
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPEED FBK SELECT
Now stop the drive. Re-instate your selection for the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter (if
other than ARM VOLTS FBK) and perform the same test again.
If the test was successful perform a PARAMETER SAVE and go to 14. If just direction of
rotation is wrong, go to 13, otherwise check as below.
If 5% speed (approx.) is exceeded and the motor continues to
accelerate a reversed connection is implied, decrease the MAIN
CURR.LIMIT parameter to zero.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
Step 12.1 Reversed Connections - Analog Tachogenerator:
Open the main contactor and switch off all supplies, then correct the connections.
If the motor is turning in the correct direction, reverse the tachogenerator

connections only.
If the motor is turning in the wrong direction, reverse the field connections only.
Step 12.2 Reversed Connections - MICROTACH/Encoder:
Open the main contactor.
If the motor is turning in the right direction, change over
the ENCODER SIGN parameter.
MMI Menu Map

1
If the motor is turning in the wrong direction, switch off all

supplies then reverse the field connections only.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
ENCODER SIGN
Re-connect the supplies if disconnected and repeat the test from the beginning.
If the motor still runs out of control, check the tachogenerator and the wiring continuity. In the
case of the MICROTACH there are two LED's on the MICROTACH option board, both LED's
should be ON indicating healthy operation of the wiring and tacho. If in doubt about the
operation of the tachogenerator either Analog or MICROTACH during this test, monitor
terminal A7 with respect to signal ground on a meter. This will show if a feedback is present.
Note: If the drive trips on speed feedback alarm with
tachogenerator feedback of the correct polarity, check the
armature voltage calibration.
Check the SPEED FBK SELECT. This could be set incorrectly
allowing the drive to run open loop.
If the motor does not turn at all when the MAIN CURR.LIMIT is
increased to 20%, check the CURRENT FEEDBACK parameter to
verify that current is flowing into the armature. If no current is
flowing, switch off and check the armature connections.
Is the motor connected to the drive?
Verify that calibration has been carried out correctly.
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPEED FBK SELECT
MMI Menu Map

1 DIAGNOSTICS
CURRENT FEEDBACK
4-12

WARNING!
Do not continue until Step 12 is completed satisfactorily.
Step 13 If the drive has run satisfactorily without any need for reconnection of the field or
tachogenerator but the direction of rotation is wrong, open the main contactor and disconnect
all supplies.
Step 13.1 Analog Tachogenerator:
Reverse both field and tachogenerator connections.
MMI Menu Map
Step 13.2 MICROTACH/Encoder:

1
Reverse the field, re-establish the auxiliary supply and

reverse the ENCODER SIGN parameter.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
ENCODER SIGN
IMPORTANT: When satisfactory operation has been achieved, perform a PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to
Chapter 5: The Operator Station - Saving Your Application.
Step 14 With the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter set to 20% or the level required to achieve
rotation, set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT is about 10%,
1.0V at setpoint input (Terminal A8). The motor will accelerate to this speed setting.
Step 14.1 4 Quadrant Drives which require reverse rotation:
Alter the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED
SETPOINT parameter is about -10% and check that motor
runs in the reverse direction.
MMI Menu Map

1 DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED SETPOINT
Step 14.2 Adjustment of ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter:

MMI Menu Map
(Ensure STANDSTILL is DISABLED as in Step 11)
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
4 Quadrant, non-reversing drives

Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and
adjust the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter for
minimum shaft rotation.
2 CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD.OFFSET
2 Quadrant, non-reversing drives

Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and adjust the ZERO SPEED
OFFSET parameter until the shaft is just rotating then reduce level until the
shaft stops.
MMI Menu Map
4 Quadrant, reversing drives

Set the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter to
balance maximum speed in forward and reverse
directions.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
You can also set the STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter to ENABLE if a stationary shaft
is required.
Step 15 Gradually increase the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT
(DIAGNOSTIC menu) is at maximum. Check the shaft speed is
MMI Menu Map
correct.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
If fine adjustment is required adjust the calibration as appropriate to

the speed feedback selection:
Armature Voltage feedback has a +2/-10% trim, greater changes
outside this range require re-setting of the calibration switches.
2 CALIBRATION
ARMATURE V CAL.
ANALOG TACH CAL.
ENCODER RPM
Analog Tachogenerator has a +2/-10% trim, greater changes outside this range require resetting of the calibration switches.
The MICROTACH/Encoder should give an absolute rotational speed for which adjustment
is unnecessary however the motor speed may not be the relevant factor thus speed of rotation
can be altered by simply adjusting the calibration.
4-13
Step 16 Adjustment for field weakening:

If the drive is to be run with a top speed greater than the base speed then `field weakening is
used to achieve that top speed. (Refer to Chapter 9: Control Loops - Field Control for a more
detailed explanation).
Note: The drive must be operating in Field Current Control. Select
CURRENT CONTROL on the FLD CTRL MODE parameter. Also,
field weakening cannot be used if you have Armature Voltage
feedback selected.
Run the drive up to base speed and check the motor volts are correct.
In the FLD WEAK VARS menu, verify that field weakening is
selected (FIELD WEAK ENABLE) and that the MIN FLD CURRENT
parameter is set appropriately. Adjust the maximum armature volts to
the required scaled level by setting the MAX VOLTS parameter.
Increase the speed above the base speed, checking that the armature
volts remain constant whilst the field current reduces.
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD CTRL MODE
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 FIELD CONTROL
3 FLD CURRENT VARS
4 FLD WEAK VARS
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
MIN FLD CURRENT
MAX VOLTS
Gradually increase to maximum speed. Monitor the armature volts at

maximum speed and trim the speed using the appropriate control as detailed in Step 15.
PROCEED WITH CARE - MAKE SMALL ADJUSTMENTS.
Trim the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter to the appropriate setting (5% lower than the field
current at full speed).
IR COMPENSATION (CALIBRATION function block) is also used in field weakening
applications to improve dynamic response and speed holding stability.
To set up IR COMPENSATION:
Set FIELD ENABLE to DISABLED (FIELD CONTROL function block). Start the drive with a
5% speed demand and ensure the ACTUAL POS I LIMIT is 100% (diagnostic). This should
stall the drive at zero speed and cause it to pass 100% current. Monitor the BACK EMF
diagnostic and note the value (typically anything up to 17% is normal). Stop the drive and enter
this value into IR COMPENSATION and repeat the test to ensure that BACK EMF then reads
zero.
17
Adjustment for reversing drives:
For reversing drives, check the maximum reverse speed.

Imbalance in reversing drives can only be corrected by adjusting the
ZERO SPD OFFSET parameter, which may be to the detriment of
operation at Zero Setpoint.
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD.OFFSET
18
Re-set the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter to the original setting that you previously
noted. If in doubt, set it to 100% to correspond to 100% full load current (FLC).
Note: The controller cannot achieve 200% current unless the CUR.
LIMIT/SCALER parameter is increased to 200% (from its default
setting of 100%). Until this is done, the External Current Clamp
will limit the current to 100%, refer to Chapter 6: Programming
Your Application - CURRENT LOOP.
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
If the current limit is set higher (maximum 200%) and the motor runs into an overload
condition, the current is automatically reduced from the current limit level down to 103%
FLC (continual rating).
If the motor is overloaded, the controller will reduce the current to 103% of the current
calibration. (If the motor continues to rotate it may overheat and thermal protection should
be provided).
If the motor is overloaded and the current provided by the controller is not enough to
maintain rotation, i.e. it stalls, the controller will trip out showing STALL TRIP alarm, if
enabled.
4-14
Performance Adjustment
Current Loop - The Autotune Feature

Now perform an Autotune to identify and store the following Current Loop parameters:
PROP. GAIN
INT. GAIN
DISCONTINUOUS
Initial Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Main contactor open, i.e. no Start/Run signal at terminal C3.

Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to OFF.
Program Stop (terminal B8) and Coast Stop (terminal B9) should be high, i.e. 24V.
If the field is being supplied by a third-party controller, remove the field manually. (If the
field is internally regulated, Autotune automatically quenches the field).
IMPORTANT: The shaft may require clamping for certain motors to prevent rotation >20% during the
Autotune sequence. If the motor is either a compound motor (series field), has some
residual magnetism, or is a permanent magnet motor it WILL rotate and the shaft must
be clamped. If in any doubt, CLAMP OR BE READY TO STOP THE MOTOR.
Performing an Autotune
Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to ON.
Close the main contactor, i.e. Start/Run signal to terminal C3.
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
AUTOTUNE
Energise the Enable terminal (C5).

The Autotune sequence is initiated. When complete (after approximately 10 seconds), the main
contactor is opened automatically signalling the end of the sequence and the AUTOTUNE
parameter is reset to OFF.
Perform a PARAMETER SAVE now. Refer to Chapter 5: The Operator Station - Saving
Your Application.
If necessary, restore field connections and remove the mechanical clamp.
Autotune Failed?
The Operator Station displays the message AUTOTUNE ABORTED
If any one of the Initial Conditions above are removed, or the Autotune sequence times out
(after 2 minutes), then the Autotune sequence is aborted causing the main contactor to drop
out.
The Operator Station displays the message AUTOTUNE ERROR
If during the Autotune sequence the motor speed feedback is greater than 20% of rated
speed, or the field current is detected above 6% of rated field current, then the Autotune
sequence is suspended causing the main contactor to drop out.
Note: Refer to Chapter 9: Control Loops - Current Control for manual tuning instructions.
Speed Loop
You will need to adjust the Speed Loop for your particular application although in most cases
the default settings are acceptable. The optimum Speed Loop performance is achieved by
adjusting the PROP. GAIN and INT. TIME CONST. parameters.
PID is used to control the response of any closed loop system. It is used specifically in system
applications involving the control of drives to provide zero steady state error between Setpoint
and Feedback, together with good transient performance.
Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN)

This is used to adjust the basic response of the closed loop control system. The PID error is
multiplied by the Proportional Gain to produce an output.
Integral (INT.TIME CONST.)

The Integral term is used to reduce steady state error between the setpoint and feedback values
of the PID. If the integral is set to zero, then there will always be a steady state error.
A Method for Setting-up the PID Gains
4-15
The gains should be set-up so that a critically damped response is achieved for a step change in
setpoint. An underdamped or oscillatory system can be thought of as having too much gain, and
an overdamped system has too little.
Underdamped (oscillatory)
Critically Damped
OUTPUT
Overdamped
SETPOINT
To set up the P gain, set the I gain to zero. Apply a step change in setpoint that is typical for the
System, and observe the response. Increase the gain and repeat the test until the system becomes
oscillatory. At this point, reduce the P gain until the oscillations disappear. This is the maximum
value of P gain achievable.
If a steady state error is present, i.e. the feedback never reaches the setpoint value, the I gain
needs to be increased. As before, increase the I gain and apply the step change. Monitor the
output. If the output becomes oscillatory, reduce the P gain slightly. This should reduce the
steady state error. Increasing the I gain further may reduce the time to achieve zero steady state
error.
These values of P and I can now be adjusted to provide the exact response required for this step
change.
Produce a small step-change to the speed setpoint and observe the response on the
tachogenerator feedback. If the drive is using Microtach/Encoder feedback, then the speed
response can be monitored on Terminal A7.
Adjust the two parameters until you have rapid change of speed feedback between the setpoint
values, but with minimum overshoot.
Correct Response
Speed
4%
Time
Critically Damped Response with no more than 4% of

maximum speed from first overshoot to first undershoot
Starting and Stopping Methods

Stopping Methods
Note:
If the Converter is non-regenerative (2-quad - 591+) it effectively coasts to a stop once the
current demand reverses.
4-16

If the Converter is regenerative (4-quad - 590+) then it can stop faster because it uses
energy from the load, i.e. reverse current is allowed to flow.
Normal Stop and Program Stop are only relevant for a regenerative controller.
The parameters STOP TIME and PROG STOP TIME have associated
timers which initiate a Coast Stop after the timed period.
The Coast Stop has direct control of the Run relay with no intervening
electronics.
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STOP RATES
All associated parameters can be found in the STOP RATES menu.

Terminal Description
Function
Parameter
Priority
B9
Coast Stop
Motor coasts to rest
--
Overrides Program
Stop and Normal
Stop
B8
Program Stop Motor decelerates at PROG STOP TIME Overrides Normal

Program Stop rate
Stop
C3
Start/Run
Motor decelerates at STOP TIME
(Normal Stop) Normal Stop rate
--
4-17
Normal Stop (C3)

This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal C3.
MMI Menu Map
The motor speed is brought to zero in a time defined by the STOP

TIME parameter.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STOP RATES
STOP TIME
NORMAL STOP
SPEED SETPOINT (100%)
Control Signals
START / RUN (C3)
0%
SPEED DEMAND
100% = SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
0%
STOP TIME DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
SPEED FEEDBACK
= SPEED SETPOINT
Actual Speed
ACTUAL STOPPING RATE

DEPENDS ON LOAD INTERTIA,
MOTOR HP AND OVERLOAD
CAPABILITY OF MOTOR/DRIVE
STOP ZERO
SPEED
(DEFAULT 2%)
0%
DRIVE IS DISABLED BELOW

STOP ZERO SPEED
IF SET > 0.25%
DRIVE REMAINS ENABLED

FOR CONTACTOR DELAY
IF STOP ZERO SPEED < 0.25%
Enable
DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED

(DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC)
0%
DRIVE ENABLE = DISABLED
DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
Indicators
0%
CONTACTOR DELAY
(DEFAULT 1.0 SECS)
4-18

TIME-OUT IN NORMAL STOP
SPEED SETPOINT
Control Signals
START/RUN (C3)
0%
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
Speed Demand
0%
= SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED FEEDBACK
Actual Speed
CONTACTOR WILL DROP OUT

IF SPEED FEEDBACK > STOP ZERO SPEED
WHEN STOP LIMIT TIMED OUT
STOP ZERO SPEED

(DEFAULT 2% )
0%
STOP LIMIT ( DEFAULT 60.0 SEC )
DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
Indicators
0%
t
DRIVE RUN LED & START CONTACTOR
DRIVE ENABLE =DISABLED

Program Stop (B8)
4-19
MMI Menu Map
This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal B8.

The motor speed is brought to zero under conditions defined by the
PROG. STOP TIME (ramp rate) and PROG. STOP I LIMIT
parameters.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STOP RATES
PROG. STOP TIME
PROG. STOP I LIMIT
PROGRAM STOP TIMING

SPEED SETPOINT ( 100% )
Control Signals
PROGRAM STOP
LED ON ( PROGRAM STOP FALSE )

LED
OFF
(PROGRAM STOP IS A
LATCHED FUNCTION)
0%
SPEED DEMAND
100% = SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
0%
PROG STOP TIME

DEFAULT 0.1 SEC
SPEED FEEDBACK
= SPEED SETPOINT
Actual Speed
STOP ZERO
SPEED
CURRENT LIMIT SET BY

PROG STOP I LIMIT
( DEFAULT 100% )
ACTUAL STOPPING RATE DEPENDS

ON LOAD INERTIA, MOTOR HP AND
OVERLOAD CAPABILITY OF MOTOR/DRIVE
(DEFAULT 2%)
0%
Indicators
DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
0%
DRIVE IS DISABLED
AND CONTACTOR
TURNS OFF BELOW
STOP ZERO SPEED
DRIVE RUN LED AND START CONTACTOR
4-20

TIME-OUT IN PROGRAM STOP
SPEED SETPOINT
Control Signals
LED ON (PROGRAM STOP FALSE )
PROGRAM STOP
0%
LED
OFF
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
0%
SPEED FEEDBACK
SPEED SETPOINT
Actual Speed
STOP ZERO SPEED

( DEFAULT 2% )
0%
Enable
CONTACTOR WILL DROP OUT IF

SPEED FEEDBACK > STOP ZERO SPEED
WHEN PROG STOP LIMIT TIMED OUT
PROG STOP LIMIT

(DEFAULT 60.0 SEC)
DRIVE RUN LED AND START CONTACTOR

0%
DRIVE RUN LED & START CONTACTOR
Coast Stop (B9)

This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal B9.
The stack is automatically quenched and the contactor is opened. The motor coasts to a stop.
Note: The motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor inertia - the drive does not control the
motion.
Standstill
Refer to Chapter 6: Programming Your Application STANDSTILL.
MMI Menu Map

1
SETUP PARAMETERS
STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
The Trip Condition
ZERO THRESHOLD
When a trip condition is detected, a similar stopping method to Coast Stop is used. The power
stack cannot be re-enabled until the trip condition has been cleared and successfully reset.
Refer to Chapter 7: Trips and Fault Finding for further details.
4-21
Normal Starting Method

To achieve a normal start of the Converter:
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable)
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start)
Note: The Converter will not start if there are alarms present, or if Terminals B8 (Program Stop)
or B9 (Coast Stop) are low, 0V.
Ensure that Program Stop and Coast Stop are valid before Start/Run is applied.
Advanced Starting Methods

Starting Several Converters Simultaneously
2. Use Terminal C5 (Enable) to synchronise the start-up of the Converters
Jog
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable)
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Jog Mode)
Note: The Converter will not start if there are alarms present.
The Converter can be started using JOG SPEED 1, JOG SPEED 2 (allowing for two different
setpoints, or perhaps to provide an Inch Forward/Inch Reverse).
Refer to Chapter 6: Programming Your Application - JOG/SLACK for further information.
Also refer to the STOP RATES function block: the CONTACTOR DELAY parameter is used to
prevent multiple operations of the main contactor from rapid use of the Jog switch.
Crawl
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Jog Mode)
Note: The Converter will not start if there are alarms present.
Start the Converter using a crawl speed, in Forward or Reverse.
Refer to Chapter 6: Programming Your Application - JOG/SLACK for further information.
4-22
5-1
THE OPERATOR STATION

5
Connecting the Operator Station

The Operator Station is a plug-in MMI (Man-Machine Interface) option that allows full use of
the Converters features.
It provides local control of the Converter, monitoring, and complete access for application
programming.
Insert the Operator Station into the front of the Converter (replacing the blank cover and
plugging into the RS232 programming port); or mount it up to 3 metres away using the optional
panel mounting kit with connecting lead. Refer to Chapter 3: Installing the Converter - Fitting
the Remote 6901 Operator Station.
D DIGITAL
I G I TA L DC
D C DRIVE
D R I VE
1
DC
DC 4Q
4Q 15A
15A
OK
SEQ
REF
PROG
L
R
JOG
Programming
Keys
Local
Control
Keys
Figure 5-1 Operator Station displaying Welcome screen
Controlling the Operator Station

On power-up, a calibration message is displayed. This is quickly replaced by a default Welcome
screen showing the product description and Product Code (an example code is shown in the
figure above). This screen is at the top of the menu system.
The drive can operate in one of two modes:
Remote Control Mode:
Allowing complete access for application programming
Local Control Mode:
Providing local control and monitoring of the drive
Local control keys are inactive when Remote control mode is selected and vice versa, with one
exception; the L/R key toggles Local or Remote control modes and so is always operative.
The drive always initialises in Remote control mode, and with the Local control keys inactive, it
is unlikely that the motor could be started accidentally.
5-2
Control Key Definitions

Keys for Programming the Converter
Note: See Navigating the Menu, page 5-6 for a quick-start to using the menu.
UP
Navigation - Moves upwards through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.
Command Acknowledge - Confirms action when in a command menu.
DOWN
Navigation - Moves downwards through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.
ESCAPE
Navigation - Displays the previous levels Menu.

Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.
Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges displayed Trip or Error message.
MENU
Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter of the
current Menu.
Parameter - Holding M down when a parameter is displayed shows

that parameters Tag No. Repeated pressing at a writable parameter
moves a cursor across the value to allow rapid increment/decrement of
the parameter value.
PROG
PROG
LOCAL/
REMOTE
L
R
Navigation - When in Local mode, displays the previous MMI menu

whilst remaining in Local mode enabling changes to be made to
parameters not available in Local menu. The key has no function in
Remote mode.
Control - Toggles between Remote and Local Control Modes for both
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref). When toggling, the display
automatically goes to the relevant SETPOINT screen, and the
SETPOINT (LOCAL) screen will have the and keys enabled to alter
the setpoint.
Keys for Operating the Converter Locally

FORWARD/
REVERSE
JOG
JOG
RUN
Control - Changes the direction of motor rotation when in Local

mode, indicated by the display. Selects between two jog speeds
when in Jog mode. This key has no function in Remote mode.
Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the JOG SPEED
1 parameter. When the key is released, the Converter returns to
stopped. Only operates when the Converter is stopped and in
Local mode. This key has no function in Remote mode.
Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the LOCAL
SETPOINT.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and then runs the motor as above. Only
operates when the Converter is in Local mode.
STOP/RESET
Control - Stops the motor. Only operates when the Converter is in

Local mode.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and clears displayed message if trip is
no longer active.
5-3
Indications
Operator Station LEDs
There are seven LEDs that indicate the status of the Converter. Each LED is considered to
operate in three different ways:
OFF
The LEDs are labelled HEALTH, LOCAL (as SEQ

and REF), FWD, REV, RUN, and STOP.
Combinations of these LEDs have the following
meanings:
FLASH
ON
HEALTH
RUN
STOP
Converter State
Re-Configuration
Tripped
Stopped
Stopping
Running with zero reference
Running
Autotuning
FWD
REV
Forward / Reverse State

Requested direction and actual direction are forward
Requested direction and actual direction are reverse
Requested direction is forward but actual direction is reverse
Requested direction is reverse but actual direction is forward
LOCAL
SEQ
LOCAL
REF
Local / Remote Mode

Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the
terminals
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled using the
Operator Station keys
Operator Station Alarm Messages

An alarm message will be displayed on the MMI
when the unit is tripped.
The Converter has tripped.

The top line indicates a trip has occurred while
the bottom line gives the reason for the trip.
See example opposite.
* * * 1 ALARM * * *
1
3 PHASE FAILED
Acknowledge the trip message by pressing the E key. Press the RESET key to restore the
Health LED.
Refer to Chapter 7: Trips and Fault Finding for trip messages and reasons.
5-4
The Menu System

The menu system is divided into a `tree structure
with 9 MENU LEVEL main menus. Consider
these main menus to be at Menu Level 1 (refer to the
Menu System Map on the next page). Parameters
contained in Menu Level 1 are the most frequently
used, as you descend the menu levels the parameters
are less frequently used.
The Operator Station has selectable viewing levels
which can restrict the view of the Remote menu
system, refer to Selecting a Menu Viewing Level,
page 5-10.
Below is a simple description of the main menus:
DIAGNOSTICS: a view of important diagnostic
parameters contained in the FUNCTION
BLOCKS menu.
SETUP PARAMETERS: contains all the
function block parameters for programming your
application, including parameters for tuning the
Converter.
PASSWORD: contains all the Password
parameters required for security.
ALARM STATUS: a view of the alarm
diagnostic parameters contained in the
FUNCTION BLOCKS menu.
MENUS: allows full or reduced menu displays
on the Operator Station.
PARAMETER SAVE: Save the
application/parameters.
SERIAL LINKS: contains all the parameters for
external communications set-up and operation.
SYSTEM: contains all the parameters for I/O
configuration.
CONFIGURE DRIVE: a view of the important
parameters used when setting-up of the drive.
The Menu System

DIGITAL DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 15A
M
DC 4Q 15A
MENU LEVEL
M
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
MENU LEVEL
SETUP PARAMETERS
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
MENU LEVEL
ALARM STATUS
MENU LEVEL
MENUS
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
MENU LEVEL
SERIAL LINKS
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Figure 5-2 The Menu System showing Main Menus and Key Presses
5-5
The Local Menu

There is also a separate Local menu which provides Local Setpoint information. This menu can
be accessed from anywhere in the Menu System by pressing the L/R key. Holding the M key
down in the Local menu will display additional Feedback information.
A toggle to the Local menu displays whichever is in force, Forward or Reverse, previously
selected by the FWD/REV key.
Menu System
Remote Local
Control Control
Mode
Mode
Local Menu
operates from Local mode only
menu/parameter
PROG
FORWARD
REF:
0.00%
HOLD
L/R
FORWARD
FBK.
0.00%
FWD/REV key
REVERSE
REF:
0.00%
HOLD
REVERSE
FBK:
0.00%
Figure 5-3 Viewing the Local Menu
The L/R Key

The L/R key (Local/Remote) only operates when the motor is stopped.
It toggles the drive between Local or Remote control and an appropriate menu on the Operator
Station is displayed; either a Local menu when in Local control, or a main programming menu
from the Menu System when in Remote control.
When in Local control, the Local LEDs, SEQ and REF, are illuminated and the RUN, STOP,
JOG, FORWARD/REVERSE, UP and DOWN local control keys can be used to control the
motor speed and direction.
Pressing the L/R key when in Local control mode selects Remote control mode and returns you
to your previous menu in the Menu System.
The PROG Key

The PROG key only operates when in Local control mode.
It toggles the display between the Local menu and the main Menu System but the drive remains
in Local control.
Thus, the PROG key allows you to make changes to parameters normally available in Remote
control mode whilst remaining in Local mode operation.
HINT: When operating the drive locally, it is quite useful to have a relevant parameter
selected in the main Menu System for easy access.
5-6
Navigating the Menu System

The Menu System can be thought of as a
map which is navigated using the four
keys shown opposite.
Keys E and M navigate through the
menu levels.
scroll
exit to
previous
menu
The up () and down () keys scroll

through the Menu and Parameter lists.
next menu/
select parameter
scroll
NAVIGATING THE MENU
Menus can contain other menus at a lower

level in the tree structure, parameters, or a mixture of both.
The keys are used as above to select a parameter (a parameter has a selection (i.e. ON/OFF) or a
value displayed on the bottom line).
HINT: Remember that because the Menu and Parameter lists are looped, the key can
quickly move you to the last Menu or Parameter in the loop. The keys will repeat if you
hold them down. This is an easy way to step through and view a menus contents.
Changing a Parameter Value

With the Parameter you want on view, three of
the keys now perform different functions:
Change a selection (i.e. ON/OFF) using the
up () and down () keys.
Change a value as follows:
The up () and down () keys
increment/decrement the value at a rate
determined by the right hand character
of the value, indicated by the appearance
of a cursor.
If the cursor is positioned as
100.0 ,then the value will change
by tenths of a unit
If the cursor is positioned as
100.0, then the value will change
in whole units, etc.
increment
exit to
previous
menu
move
the
cursor
decrement
EDITING PARAMETERS
1
RAMP
ACCEL TIME
1
10.0 SECS
A Parameter showing a cursor under the value
The up () and down () keys will repeat if you hold them down and, at a preset point,
the cursor will progressively move one character to the left and increment/decrement the
value at an increased rate.
Alternatively, you can move the cursor manually by pressing the M key. Repeated pressing
moves the cursor right to left along the value.
The cursor times-out after approximately half a second, so use the M key and up () and
down () keys promptly once the cursor is in position.
Note: A cursor appears under all numerical values except for parameters in the Diagnostics and
Alarm Status menus whose values provide information only.
5-7
The Menu System Map

1
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
MENU LEVEL
SETUP PARAMETERS
RAMPS
AUX I/O
OP-STATION
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
SET UP
JOG/SLACK
START UP VALUES
RAISE/LOWER
LOCAL RAMP
PRESET SPEEDS
SRAMP
RATE SET 0
RATE SET 1
MENU LEVEL
ALARM STATUS
SPECIAL BLOCKS
PID
TENS+COMP CALC.
DIAMETER CALC.
MENU LEVEL
MENUS
TAPER CALC.
TORQUE CALC.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
SETPOINT SUM 2
FIELD CONTROL
FLD VOLTAGE VARS
CURRENT PROFILE
FLD CURRENT VARS
FLD WEAK VARS
ADVANCED
ADAPTION
INVERSE TIME
STOP RATES
CALIBRATION
INHIBIT ALARMS
CURRENT LOOP
SPEED LOOP
ZERO SPD.QUENCH
SETPOINTS
INERTIA COMP
STANDSTILL
SETPOINT SUM 1
MENU LEVEL
SERIAL LINKS
TEC OPTION
SYSTEM PORT (P3)
P3 SETUP
PNO CONFIG
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
SOFTWARE
CONFIGURE I/O
ANALOG INPUTS
RESERVED
PEEK
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 5 (A6)
ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANOUT 1 (A7)
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL INPUT C4
MINI LINK
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
5703 SUPPORT
BISYNCH SUPPORT
ANOUT 2 (A8)
DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
CONFIGURE 5703
FULL & REDUCED VIEWS

FULL VIEW ONLY
BLOCK DIAGRAM
INTERNAL LINKS
LINK 1
LINK 12
5-8
Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations

Quick Tag Information
Hold down the M key for approximately second in any Menu System parameter to display the
Tag number for that parameter.
RAMP ACCEL TIME
10.0 SECS
HOLD
RAMP ACCEL TIME

TAG NO = 2
Changing the Stack Size (3-button reset)

Note: This is only necessary if you are installing a new control board on an existing stack.
Power-up the drive holding three keys as described below.
Caution
At this point, the 590+ thinks that it is a 34A model. It is vitally important that it is
configured for the correct power rating or irreparable damage may occur to the drive
when it attempts to run the motor.
Continue to select the correct Product Code rating. Perform a PARAMETER SAVE now (refer
to Saving Your Application, page 5-13).
HOLD
Hold down the keys opposite:

Power-up the
- drive, continue
to hold for at least 2 seconds
PROG
M TO SET PCODE
E TO SAVE PCODE
M
E TO SAVE PCODE
PRODUCT CODE
PRODUCT CODE
DC 4Q 15A
PRODUCT CODE
DC 2Q 15A
E TO SAVE PCODE
PRODUCT CODE
M TO SET PCODE
E TO SAVE PCODE
E
E
E
DIGITAL DC DRIVE
DC 2Q 15A
5-9
This is the preferred way of selecting a new product code. The available product codes are
restricted to the set of codes that match the stack that the control board is fitted to.
If the product code is changed during the 3-button reset, the following parameters are set to their
default value for the new product code:
Tag 523
Tag 524
Tag 201
ARMATURE CURRENT
FIELD CURRENT
REGEN MODE
Note: The 3-button reset does not cause the default configuration to be loaded.
Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset)

Power-up the drive holding two keys as described below.
The drive is now safely configured with the default settings detailed in this manual for the
existing product code.
The default configuration is not automatically saved to non-volatile memory, so you must
perform a PARAMETER SAVE (refer to Saving Your Application, page 5-13).
HOLD
Hold down the keys opposite:

Power-up the
- drive, continue
to hold for at least 2 seconds
INITIALIZING
FACTORY DEFAULTS
DIGITAL DC DRIVE
DC 2Q 15A
Special Menu Features

Cloning Feature
The Operator Station can be used to transfer all parameters from a drive to another of the same
rating. You can also use the Operator Station to store a back-up of the drive's parameter settings.
SAVE TO OP will upload all parameter settings from the drive to the Operator Station.
LOAD FROM OP will download all parameter settings from the Operator Station to the drive.
SYSTEM
SAVE TO OP
SAVE TO OP
UP TO ACTION
SYSTEM
LOAD FROM OP
LOAD FROM OP
UP TO ACTION
SAVE TO OP
SAVING
LOAD FROM OP
SAVING
SAVE TO OP
REQUESTED
LOAD FROM OP
FINISHED
SAVE TO OP
UP TO ACTION
LOAD FROM OP
UP TO ACTION
5-10
Selecting a Menu Viewing Level

For ease of operation there are two `viewing levels` for the MMI: full view or reduced view.
The setting for the viewing level decides how much of the menu
system will be displayed.
MMI Menu Map
Refer to the Menu System Map, page 5-5 to see how the viewing level
changes the displayed menu.
1 MENUS
FULL MENUS
LANGUAGE
To change the viewing level, go to the MENUS menu. The first parameter in this menu, FULL
MENUS selects the viewing level.
Select DISABLED to use the reduced menu system.
Select ENABLED to use the full menu system.
MENUS
FULL MENUS
FULL MENUS
ENABLED
FULL MENUS
DISABLED
MENUS
FULL MENUS
Selecting the Display Language

There is an option to select a different display language.
The choice of display language is selected by the LANGUAGE
parameter in the MENUS menu. Remember to perform a
PARAMETER SAVE if you need the new language to be saved on
power-down.
MMI Menu Map

1 MENUS
FULL MENUS
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH is the default language and is permanently saved (in Read

Only Memory).
A second language is loaded (typically French), however German, Italian and Spanish are
available by contacting SSD Drives. When a new language is downloaded it replaces the current
second language.
MENUS
LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
other
menus
language
Password Protection
When in force, the password prevents unauthorised parameter
modification by making all parameters read-only.
If you attempt to modify a password protected parameter, it will cause
PASSWORD ?? to flash on the display.
5-11
MMI Menu Map

1 PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
The password protection is activated/deactivated using the ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE
PASSWORD parameters.
Activated:
ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are different
Deactivated: ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are the same
To Activate Password Protection

By default, the password feature is disabled, i.e. both parameters have the same value, 0x0000.
1. Set a new password (anything other than the default value of 0x0000) in the CHANGE
PASSWORD parameter, for example 0x0002.
2. The ENTER PASSWORD parameter will now automatically display the new password
(e.g. 0x0002). Enter any number other than the password in the ENTER PASSWORD
parameter.
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
0X0000
CHANGE PASSWORD
0X0002
PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
0X0002
ENTER PASSWORD
0X0000
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
E
E
5-12

To Deactivate Password Protection
With password protection activated, you can no longer edit the CHANGE PASSWORD
parameter until you deactivate the password protection (because the value is hidden by
****).
1. Enter the current password (e.g. 0x0002) in the ENTER PASSWORD parameter.
MENU LEVEL
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
M
M
ENTER PASSWORD
0X0000
ENTER PASSWORD
0X0002
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
E
E
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
Note: Because the ENTER PASSWORD parameter value is always reset to 0x0000 when
powering-up the drive, 0x0000 is the default value for the CHANGE PASSWORD
parameter, i.e. by default, the two parameter values are the same and so password
protection is disabled.
5-13
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings

Saving Your Application
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE I/O
ENABLED
CONFIGURE I/O
DISABLED
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
MMI Menu Map
PARAMETER
UP TO ACTION
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
The PARAMETER SAVE menu, available in both the full and reduced
view levels, is used to save any changes you make to the MMI settings.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER
MMI Menu Map

1
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER
REQUESTED
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER
Pressing the (UP) key, as instructed, saves all parameter values (with one exception, below)
in non-volatile memory, i.e. values are stored during power-down.
Note: The local setpoint parameter value is not saved on power-down.
Restoring Saved Settings

If you are unsure about any changes you have made and you have not yet performed a
PARAMETER SAVE, simply switch the Converter off, and power-up again. The last saved
parameter settings will be restored.
Copying an Application
Copying an application requires a host computer connection to the Converters System Port
(P3). Information can then be downloaded to the computer (and uploaded to the Converter).
Refer to Chapter 14: Serial Communications for further information.
5-14
Programming Your Application
6-1
PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

6
Programming with Block Diagrams

You can program the Converter for specific applications using the MMI or suitable
programming tool, such as ConfigEd Lite which is SSD Drives block programming
software.
The Converter is supplied with a basic set-up which can be used as a starting point for
application-specific programming. This programming could simply involve the inputting of
parameter values, or it may require the making or breaking of programmable links, which is a
feature of this unit.
Block diagram programming provides a visual method of planning the software to suit your
application. The basic block diagram is provided in Chapter 15 and shows the software
connections consisting of function blocks and links:
Each function block contains the parameters required for setting-up a particular
processing feature. Sometimes more than one function block is provided for a feature, i.e.
for multiple digital inputs.
Software links are used to connect the function blocks. Each link transfers the value of an
output parameter to an input parameter of another (or the same) function block.
Each individual block is a processing feature: it takes the input parameter, processes the
information, and makes the result available as one or more output parameters.
Modifying a Block Diagram
Setup and Configuration Modes

There are two modes of operation used while modifying a block
diagram: Setup and Configuration modes.
The CONFIGURE ENABLE command is used to toggle between

these two modes of operation.
MMI Menu Map

1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Setup Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED)

In setup mode you can change parameter values. The Converter can be running or
stopped. Note that some parameters can only be changed when the Converter is
stopped. It is not possible to modify the internal links when the Converter is in setup
mode.
DEFAULT
Configuration Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = ENABLED)

In the configuration mode you can modify connections between the function blocks
in the drive. You can also change parameter values, as above. The Converter cannot
run in this mode. Output values are not updated.
Making and Breaking Function Block Connections

Links can be changed, added or deleted from a block diagram whilst in the Configuration
mode. There are 12 general-purpose links available, each has its own identification number
(link number). You make a link by setting the links source and destination tags to be
the two parameter tag numbers to be linked. The outputs of function blocks are not updated
whilst in this mode.
Note: Links 11 and 12 can be configured to perform one of a number of basic functions upon
the source and/or auxiliary source tag values, to be output at the selected destination
tag.
Special Links
In addition to these 12 general-purpose links, there are some links permanently associated with
particular input parameters. It is only necessary to enter the source tag number to activate
these links. Similarly, there are some links permanently associated with particular output
parameters. It is only necessary to enter the destination tag number to activate these links.
All these links may be found in the SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O menu.
6-2

Programming Rules
The following rules apply when programming:
Setup Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED)
Function block output parameter values cannot be changed (because they are a result of
the function blocks processing)
Function block input parameter values that receive their values from a link cannot be
changed (as the link will overwrite the value when the Converter is running).
Configuration Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = ENABLED)

A links destination tag must be set to an input parameter (only one link per input
parameter).
A links source tag may be set to any parameter. Both input and output parameters can be
used as a source.
Disable a link/function block by setting the destination and source tag to zero.
Saving Your Modifications

Ensure that CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED before performing a PARAMETER
SAVE.
If parameter values or links have been modified, the new settings must be saved. The
Converter will then retain the new settings during power-down. Refer to Chapter 5: The
Operator Station - Saving Your Application.
Understanding the Function Block Description

The following function
blocks show the parameter
information necessary for
programming the Converter.
Input parameters are shown
on the left hand side, and
output parameters are shown
on the right hand side of the
block.
Some parameters are
indicated as Reserved,
these parameters are for use
by SSD Drives' engineers.
Function Name
Tag Number
Default Value
1.0000
100.00 %
-100.00 %
ANIN 1 (A2
OUTPUT [246]
[230] CALIBRATION
[231] MAX VALUE
[232] MIN VALUE
ANIN 1 (A2) [ 50]
100
Output Parameter
Name
0.00V
Tag Number
Input Parameter Name
Default Value
Figure 6-1 Function Block Parameter Information
Function Name
Names the function block
Default Value
The default value of the unmodified factory set-up
Input/Output
Parameter Name
The name shown on ConfigEd Lite
Tag Number
Unique identification used for linking and communications
Note: Decimal Places - some parameters are held in memory with two decimal places but are
displayed with one decimal place. These parameters are indicated in the Parameter
Description tables. The Range parameter highlights these with a (h) suffix.

MMI Menu Map
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
ANALOG INPUTS
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 5 (A6)
CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
MIN VALUE
DESTINATION TAG
6-3
MMI Menu Maps

The function block descriptions include an easy-find menu showing the menu levels and
titles encountered to find the appropriate menu title, and the parameters contained in the
menu(s).
The menu maps are shown as if the full view level is selected.
Where there is more than one sub-menu, i.e. ANALOG INPUTS as illustrated, the
parameters shown will be for the last sub-menu. In many cases, these parameters will reflect
the name and number of the last sub-menu.
MMI parameters are named intuitively to make the keypad easier to use, however, they may
vary slightly from function block names.
A function block may contain more than one MMI menu, for example, FIELD CONTROL.
In contrast, the DIAGNOSTICS function block has many fewer parameters than the
DIAGNOSTICS MMI menu because the parameters are distributed to related function
blocks.
6-4
Function Block Descriptions

Note: Remember to select the correct mode, Setup or Configuration, whilst editing. Refer to
Modifying a Block Diagram, page 6-1. You must select the full view level to see all of
the function blocks (go to the MENUS menu at level 1 on the MMI).
Function Block
Page
Function Block
DIAGNOSTICS
6-23 *
SETUP PARAMETERS continued

SPEED LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS
RAMPS
6-63 *
AUX I/O
6-8 *
OP STATION
6-52
6-72 *
SETPOINTS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
ADVANCED
SET UP
START UP VALUES
LOCAL RAMP
Page
6-76
ADAPTION
ZERO SPD QUENCH
INERTIA COMP
6-40
SETPOINTS
6-72
JOG/SLACK
6-48 *
RAISE/LOWER
6-61 *
STANDSTILL
6-81 *
PRESET SPEEDS
6-59
SETPOINT SUM 1
6-68 *
SRAMP
6-76
SPECIAL BLOCKS
PID
6-55 *
TENS+COMP CALC.
6-91
BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIAMETER CALC
6-29
TAPER CALC
6-88
TORQUE CALC.
6-93
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SETPOINT SUM 2
FIELD CONTROL
6-36 *
FLD VOLTAGE VARS

FLD CURRENT VARS
FLD WEAK VARS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
STOP RATES
6-83 *
CALIBRATION
6-14 *
CONFIGURE DRIVE
INHIBIT ALARMS
6-41 *
ALARM STATUS
CALIBRATION
CURRENT LOOP
CONFIGURE DRIVE
ALARM STATUS
6-41
MENUS
6-50
SERIAL LINKS
6-90
TEC OPTION
6-90
SYSTEM PORT P3
6-86
P3 SETUP
BISYNCH SUPPORT
CONFIGURE I/O
ANALOG INPUTS
6-5 *
ANALOG OUTPUTS
6-7 *
DIGITAL INPUTS
6-31 *
6-22
6-54
SYSTEM
6-70
CURRENT PROFILE
PASSWORD (MMI only)
DIGITAL INPUT
C4 & C5
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
6-34 *
CONFIGURE 5703
6-87
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(MMI only)
6-13
INTERNAL LINKS
6-44
miniLINK
6-19 *
6-51
CONFIGURE DRIVE
(MMI only)
6-17
USER FILTER (Reserved)
6-95
* These function blocks contain parameters from the DIAGNOSTICS menu on the MMI.
6-5
ANALOG INPUTS
MMI Menu Map
1
The analog input block is used to scale and clamp the inputs for terminals A2 to A6.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
ANALOG INPUTS
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 1
1.0000 [230]
100.00 % [231]
-100.00 % [232]
OUTPUT [246] 100

CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
MIN VALUE
ANIN 1 (A2) [ 50] 0.00
VOLTS
1.0000 [233]
100.00 % [234]
-100.00 % [235]
Analog Input 3
OUTPUT [493] 0.00 %

CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
MIN VALUE
ANIN 2 (A3)
[ 51] 0.00
VOLTS
Analog Input 4
OUTPUT [249] 5
1.0000 [236] CALIBRATION
100.00 % [237] MAX VALUE
-100.00 % [238] MIN VALUE
ANIN 3 (A4)
[ 52] 0.00
VOLTS
1.0000 [239]
200.00 % [240]
-200.00 % [241]
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT [250] 48
CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
MIN VALUE
ANIN 4 (A5)
[ 53] 0.00
VOLTS
Analog Input 5
DESTINATION TAG
MIN VALUE
1.0000 [242]
200.00 % [243]
-200.00 % [244]
MAX VALUE
OUTPUT [247] 301

CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
MIN VALUE
ANIN 5 (A6)
[ 54] 0.00
VOLTS
Note: Terminal ANIN 2 (A3) is permanently

connected to SETPOINT 2 (A3) in the SPEED
LOOP function block and to the Current
Demand via I DEMAND ISOLATE (the current demand isolate switch) in the CURRENT
LOOP function block.
To avoid interference with other drive functions when not required: the parameter
RATIO 2 (A3) (Tag 7 in the SPEED LOOP function block) must be set to zero; and the I
DMD. ISOLATE parameter (Tag 119 in the CURRENT LOOP function block) must be set
to DISABLED, i.e. selecting the Speed Loop as shown in the Main Block Diagram.
Because ANIN 2 (A3) is scanned synchronously with the current loop (typically every
3.3/2.6ms, 50/60Hz), it should be used for any signal whose response is critical e.g. a
trim input from an external positioning system or load share.
Parameter
Tag
Range
OUTPUT
246, 249, 250, 247
0 to 639
(DESTINATION TAG)
The destination Tag No. of the scaled analog input value. Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
OUTPUT
493
.xx %
This parameter is the output diagnostic for terminal A3 (ANIN 2). Note by default 10V =
100%. To obtain a different range, adjust the CALIBRATION, MAX VALUE and MIN
VALUE parameters. Use this parameter to access the calibrated value of ANIN 2 (via an
internal link for example).
CALIBRATION
230, 233, 236, 239, 242 -3.0000 to 3.0000
The analog input scaling ratio. For a value of 1.0, 10V = 100%.
MAX VALUE
231, 234, 237, 240, 243 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The maximum value of the scaled analog input.
MIN VALUE
232, 235, 238, 241, 244 -300.00 to 300.00 %
The minimum value of the scaled analog input.
ANIN 1 (A2) to ANIN 5 (A6) 50, 51, 52, 53, 54
xxx.xx VOLTS
Refer to the DIAGNOSTICS function block description, page 6-23.
6-6
ANALOG INPUTS
Functional Description
Configurable Analog Inputs
CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
OUTPUT
MIN VALUE
DIAGNOSTIC
6-7
ANALOG OUTPUTS
MMI Menu Map
1 SYSTEM
This function block converts the demand percentage into 0-10V, suitable for driving the
analog output electronics of the drive.
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 ANALOG OUTPUTS
4 ANOUT 1 (A7)
% TO GET 10V
SOURCE TAG
OFFSET
MODULUS
Analog Output 2
Analog Output 1
62
100.00 %
0.00 %
FALSE
[251] INPUT
[245] 10V CAL
[464] OFFSET
[362] MODULUS
ANOUT 1 (A7)
Parameter
63
100.00 %
0.00 %
FALSE
[ 55]
0.00 V
Tag
INPUT
251, 252
(SOURCE TAG)
The source Tag No. of the output value.
[252] INPUT
[248] 10V CAL
[465] OFFSET
[363] MODULUS
ANOUT 2 (A8)
[ 56] 0.00 V
Range
0 to 639
10V CAL
245, 248
-300.00 to 300.00 %
(% TO GET 10V)
Scaler value which produces 10V output. Set 10V CAL to be 50% to get 10V out for
50% in.
OFFSET
464, 465
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Offset value added to the normal output value after the scaler and before the modulus.
MODULUS
362, 363
FALSE / TRUE
Unipolar analog output enable. If TRUE, then -10% gives +1V out.
ANOUT 1 (A7) to
ANOUT 2 (A8)
55, 56
xxx.xx V (h)
Configurable Analog Outputs
MODULUS
OFFSET
INPUT
DIAGNOSTIC
10V CAL
6-8
AUX I/O
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 AUX I/O
AUX START
AUX JOG
ENABLE
AUX DIGOUT 1
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
The auxiliary I/O parameters are primarily

intended to extend the functionality of the
serial links by allowing them access to the
drive analog and digital terminals.
START, JOG and ENABLE from digital input
terminals C3, C4 and C5 respectively connect
directly to the AUX I/O block. Output signals
are then sent to the drive start and drive enable
logic and the JOG/SLACK function block.
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 2
JOG/SLACK
AUX ENABLE
REM.SEQUENCE
REM.SEQ.ENABLE
Aux I/O
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.00 %
0.00 %
OFF
OFF
FALSE
START (C3) [ 68]

DIGIN (C4) [ 69]
DIGIN (C5) [ 70]
SEQ STATUS [537]
REM SEQUENCE [536]
[161] AUX START
[227] AUX JOG
[168] AUX ENABLE
[ 94] AUX DIGOUT 1
[ 95] AUX DIGOUT 2
[ 96] AUX DIGOUT 3
[128] ANOUT 1
[129] ANOUT 2
[496] JOG/SLACK
[497] ENABLE CURRENT
[535] REM. SEQ. ENABLE
OFF
OFF
OFF
0x0000
0x0000
SEQ STATUS
Parameter
Tag
Range
START (C3)
68
OFF / ON

DIGIN (C4)
69
OFF / ON

DIGIN (C5)
70
OFF / ON

SEQ STATUS
537
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
An input data word that reports the status of the important system flags that can be read over a
filed bus. (Refer to Remote Sequencing Command below).
REM. SEQUENCE
536
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
(REM.SEQUENCE)
A control word that allows the device to be operated remotely over a field bus.
REM. SEQ. ENABLE must be TRUE to enable this function. (Refer to Remote Sequencing
Command below).
AUX START
161
OFF / ON
Software Start/Run command. Auxiliary Start is ANDed with the Start input , C3, to generate
Drive Start. This should normally be left ON.
AUX JOG
227
OFF / ON
Software Jog command. Auxiliary Jog is ANDed with the Jog input , Tag 496 (by default
C4), to generate Drive Jog. This should normally be left ON.
AUX ENABLE
168
OFF / ON
Software Enable command. Auxiliary Enable is ANDed with the Enable input , Tag 497 (by
default C5), to generate Drive Enable. This should normally be left ON.
6-9
AUX I/O
Parameter
Tag
Range
AUX DIGOUT 1
94
OFF / ON
Software digital output 1. For example, to directly drive the configurable digital output
DIGOUT1, connect the Source of DIGOUT1 to this parameter, Tag 94.
AUX DIGOUT 2
95
OFF / ON
AUX DIGOUT 3
96
OFF / ON
ANOUT 1
128
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Software analog output 1. For example, to directly drive the configurable analog output
ANOUT1, connect the Source of ANOUT1 to this parameter, Tag 128.
ANOUT 1 can also be used as a general "staging post" for connecting inputs to outputs.
For example, connect Analog Input 1 (A2) directly to Analog Output 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2
129
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Software analog output 2. For example, to directly drive the configurable analog output
ANOUT2, connect the Source of ANOUT2 to this parameter, Tag 129.
ANOUT 2 can also be used as a general "staging post" for connecting inputs to outputs.
For example, connect Analog Input 1 (A2) directly to Analog Output 2 (A8)
JOG/SLACK
496
OFF / ON
Main jog input which is connected to DIGITAL INPUT C4 by default. The Jog input is
ANDed with Auxiliary Jog input , Tag 227, to generate Drive Jog.
ENABLE CURRENT
497
OFF / ON
(ENABLE)
Enable input which is connected to DIGITAL INPUT C5 by default. The Enable input is
ANDed with Auxiliary Enable input , Tag 168, to generate Drive Enable.
REM. SEQ. ENABLE
535
FALSE / TRUE
(REM.SEQ.ENABLE)
(Refer to Remote Sequencing below). When enabled, the drive will accept Sequencing
commands exclusively from the REM. SEQUENCE parameter, Tag 536.
FALSE - disables REM. SEQUENCE
TRUE - enables REM. SEQUENCE
6-10
AUX I/O
AUX I/O
TAG #
START
C3
68
JOG
C4
69
ENABLE
C5
70
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
SETTING
161 AUX START
ON
227 AUX JOG
ON
168 AUX ENABLE
ON
CONFIGURABLE AUX I/O POINTS

NOTE (1)
94
95
96
128
129
AUX DIGOUT 1
OFF
94
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
OFF
OFF
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 2
0.00%
0.00%
95
96
128
129
NOTE (1) 3 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL AND 2 CONFIGURABLE

ANALOG AUX POINTS ARE AVAILABLE. THESE AUX
I/O POINTS ALLOW INPUTS OR SERIAL INFORMATION
TO BE CONNECTED TO OUTPUTS. (INPUTS MAY BE
SENT TO THESE TAG DESTINATIONS AND OUTPUTS
MAY READ THESE LOCATIONS AS SOURCE TAGS).
JOG
RUN
TO DRIVE START
TO JOG/SLACK
TO DRIVE ENABLE
Remote Sequencing Command

REM. SEQUENCE : Tag 536, Mnemonic "ow", Default = 0x0000 ("0x" denotes a
Hexadecimal value)
Note: Refer to the RS485 Communications Interface Technical Manual, HA463560 on the
website, for information about the EI Bisynch ASCII communications protocol.
Reserved bits are undefined when read and should be set Zero when written.
Bit Number
0 (lsb)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Mask
0x0001
0x0002
0x0004
0x0008
0x0010
0x0020
0x0040
0x0080
0x0100
0x0200
10
11
12
13
14 (msb)
15 (msb)
0x0400
0x0800
0x1000
0x2000
0x4000
0x8000
Name
Remote Enable
Remote Start
Remote Jog
Remote Jog Mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Remote Alarm Ack
Remote/Remote
Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Comment
Selects Jog Speed
Alarm Acknowledge
Remote Trip (High for OK)
6-11
AUX I/O
Useful Commands using EI Bisynch ASCII - REM. SEQUENCE
Tag 536, Mnemonic "ow", for example:
/Remote
Trip
Alarm
Ack
Jog
Mode
Jog
Start
Enable
Command
Start Drive
ow>0203
Stop Drive
ow>0201
Disable Drive
ow>0200
Jog Setpoint 1
ow>0205
Jog Setpoint 2
ow>020D
Remote Trip
ow>0000
Reset Alarm a)
ow>0300
Healthy
Output Bit 11
goes high
Reset Alarm b)
ow>0200
Sequence Status
SEQ STATUS : Tag 537, Mnemonic "ox" (Read Only)
Reserved bits are undefined when read.
Bit Number
0 (lsb)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mask
0x0001
0x0002
0x0004
0x0008
0x0010
0x0020
0x0040
Name
Coast Stop
Program Stop
Disable
Run
Jog
Reserved
Alarm
7
8
0x0080
0x0100
Reserved
Running
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 (msb)
0x0200
0x0400
0x0800
0x1000
0x2000
0x4000
0x8000
Enabled
Zero Speed
Healthy Output
Ready
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Comment
Coast Stop demanded
Program (Fast) Stop demanded
/Enable demanded
Drive Start demanded
Drive Jog demanded
Undefined
Unacknowledged alarm
(Health Store != 0)
Undefined
Contactor in and drive ready to be
enabled
Drive is enabled.
Zero speed Output TAG 17
Healthy Output TAG 12
Ready Output TAG 559
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Useful Bit Patterns using SEQ STATUS

Tag 537, Mnemonic "ox" (Read Only) - for example:
Sequence Status
0x1B0B
0x044B
0x0447
0x0C47
Comment
Running
Tripped, Run High
Tripped, Run Low, Enable Low
Trip Acknowledged, Healthy output TRUE Alarm stays
high until drive is restarted.
6-12
AUX I/O
Drive Enable
To Enable the drive in remote mode the following diagnostic must be TRUE:
REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 1.
Drive Start
To Start the drive in remote mode the following diagnostic must be TRUE:
Drive Jog
To Jog the drive in remote mode the following diagnostic must be TRUE:
Jog Mode
To select the jog setpoint in remote mode the following diagnostic must be TRUE:
ACK Alarm
Alarms are latched while ACK ALARM is FALSE.
To Acknowledge an alarm when in Remote Sequencing, use REM. SEQUENCE [536] BIT 8.
Remote Trip Alarm

The Remote trip alarm is designed to signal a network fault to the drive. When using the
Profibus interface, all outputs are set to zero on link fail. If one of the outputs is REM
SEQUENCE [536 ] the drive will trip after a delay specified by REM TRIP DELAY (541).
The Drive will then need a low - > high transition on ACK Alarm and Start before the drive
may run again.
REM TRIP INHIBIT
[540]
REM TRIP DELAY

[541]
REMOTE TRIP [542]
Disable remote
trip.
Delay before trip

becomes active
after bit being
cleared.
Status of the Remote trip alarm, OK, Warning

(Remote Seq Bit 9 FALSE and delay not
expired), Active (Trip active, timer expired and
remote not inhibited).
6-13
BLOCK DIAGRAM (MMI only)

MMI Menu Map
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
RAMP O/P DEST
SPT SUM 1 DEST
PID O/P DEST
Use this menu to execute the named function blocks.

The parameters in Block Diagram connect the outputs of RAISE/LOWER, RAMPS,
SETPOINT SUM 1, and the Special Blocks (MMI menu) function blocks to destinations as
required.
These function blocks are only executed when the destinations are connected to a non-zero
tag. If a function block is not required, set its destination tag to zero. This causes the processor
to ignore the function and reduces processor loading.
DIAMETER
Parameter
Tag
Range
POS. I CLAMP
RAMP O/P DEST
293
0 to 639
NEG. I CLAMP
Refer to RAMPS, page 6-63.

294
0 to 639
TAPER
SETPOINT SUM 2
TENS+COMP CALC.
RAISE/LOWER DEST
SPT SUM 1 DEST
PRESET DEST
Refer to SETPOINT SUM 1, page 6-68.
SRAMP DEST
PID O/P DEST
400
0 to 639
431
0 to 639
Refer to PID, page 6-55.

DIAMETER
Refer to DIAMETER CALC., page 6-29.

TAPER
442
0 to 639
Refer to TAPER CALC., page 6-88.

SETPOINT SUM 2
450
0 to 639
Refer to , SETPOINT SUM 2, page 6-70.

POS. I CLAMP
435
0 to 639
Refer to CURRENT LOOP, page 6-19.

NEG. I CLAMP
436
0 to 639

TENS+COMP CALC.
478
0 to 639
Refer to TENS+COMP CALC., page 6-91.

RAISE/LOWER DEST
260
0 to 639
Refer to RAISE/LOWER, page 6-61.

PRESET DEST
573
0 to 639
590
0 to 639
Refer to PRESET, page 6-59.

SRAMP DEST
Refer to SRAMP, page 6-78.
6-14
CALIBRATION
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CALIBRATION
CONFIGURE ENABLE
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
ARMATURE
CURRENT
This function block contains motorspecific parameters.

When CONFIGURE ENABLE = TRUE,
the operation of the Block Diagram is
suspended and all Operator Station LEDs
will flash.
Calibration
TERMINAL VOLTS [ 57] 0.00%
TACH INPUT (B2) [ 58] 0.0%
ENCODER [ 59] 0 RPM
BACK EMF [ 60] 0.00%
FIELD FBK. [181] 0.0%
1.0000 [ 20] ARMATURE V CAL.
0.00 % [ 21] IR COMPENSATION
FIELD CURRENT
ARMATURE V CAL.
1.0000 [ 23] ANALOG TACH CAL
IR COMPENSATION
0.00 % [ 10] ZERO SPD. OFFSET
ENCODER RPM
BIPOLAR [ 25] ARMATURE I (A9)
ENCODER LINES
50.0 % [180] SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
ANALOG TACH CAL
95.00 % [263] STALL THRESHOLD
ZERO SPD. OFFSET
480.0 s [224] STALL TRIP DELAY
ARMATURE I (A9)
125.00 % [188] OVERSPEED LEVEL
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
1.0000 [182] FIELD I CAL
STALL THRESHOLD
0x0000 [267] POSITION COUNT
STALL TRIP DELAY
1 [275] POSITION DIVIDER
REM TRIP DELAY

OVERSPEED LEVEL
FIELD I CAL.
MMI Menu Map

1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
ARMATURE
CURRENT
FIELD CURRENT
ENCODER LINES
ENCODER RPM
Parameter
Tag
Range
TERMINAL VOLTS
57
xxx.xx % (h)
TACH INPUT (B2)
58
xxx.xx % (h)
(RAW TACH INPUT)
ENCODER
59
xxxxx RPM
(RAW ENCODER RPM)
BACK EMF
60
xxx.xx % (h)
FIELD FBK.
181
xxx.xx %
(RAW FIELD FBK)
ARMATURE V CAL.
20
0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor armature volts to give exactly 100% at the required actual
voltage value (e.g. 460V etc.).
Note: - Primary voltage calibration is achieved by adjusting the NOM MOTOR VOLTS
parameter (CONFIGURE DRIVE function block).
IR COMPENSATION
21
0.00 to 100.00 %
Compensation for motor IR drop to improve regulation when using armature voltage
feedback as the speed feedback. This is also used in field weakening applications to
improve dynamic response and speed holding stability, refer to Initial Start-up Routine in
Chapter 4, Item 16.
ANALOG TACH CAL
23
0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor speed to give exactly 100% at the required actual speed value
(e.g. 1500 RPM etc). Note: Primary tacho calibration is achieved by adjusting SW1 - 3 on
the tacho calibration board.
ZERO SPD. OFFSET
10
-5.00 to 5.00 %
If the speed feedback is not zero when the drive is stationary (possibly due to hardware
offsets etc.) the setting of this parameter to the value of the offset will result in a zero
reading from the speed feedback.
6-15
CALIBRATION
Parameter
Tag
Range
ARMATURE I (A9)
25
UNIPOLAR / BIPOLAR
Selects operation of the current meter output (terminal A9), either bipolar or unipolar.
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
180
0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
The speed feedback alarm compares speed feedback to armature voltage. The alarm level is
the threshold which the difference between the two signals should exceed for the alarm to
activate.
STALL THRESHOLD
263
0.00 to 200.00 %
Stall comparator current feedback threshold level.

STALL TRIP DELAY
224
0.1 to 600.0 s
Stall comparator time-out delay before stall output becomes true.

AT ZERO SETPOINT
CURRENT FEEDBACK
Comparator
DELAY
STALL TRIP
STALL THRESHOLD
STALL TRIP DELAY
OVERSPEED LEVEL
188
0.00 to 200.00 %
Overspeed alarm threshold.

Note: SPEED FEEDBACK is internally clamped to 110%. when ARM VOLTS FBK or
ANALGO TACH are selected.
FIELD I CAL
182
0.9800 to 1.1000
(FIELD I CAL.)
Trim adjustment of the motor field current to give exactly 100% at the required actual
current value (e.g. 1.5A etc.). Note:- Primary field calibration is achieved by adjusting the
FIELD CURRENT parameter (CONFIGURE DRIVE function block).
POSITION COUNT
267
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Reserved parameter for use by SSD Drives.

The POSITION COUNT and POSITION DIVIDER parameters allow basic position control
using a PLC (programmable logic controller), the optional COMMS techbox, and a speed
feedback encoder mounted on the motor shaft.
The position counter counts pulses is hexadecimal format. It begins incrementing from
0000 when you start the drive in the forward direction, then rolls over to 0000 on the count
after FFFF. If you start and run the drive in reverse, the counter begins at 0000, rolls over to
FFFF and then counts down to 0000. On reaching 0000, the counter rolls over to FFFF on
the next count. After the drive is stopped and/or restarted, the counter retains its count.
To read the position count using a PLC, enable CONFIGURE ENABLE and connect the
POSITION COUNT output in the CALIBRATION function block to a free serial PNO slot
(PNO 112 to 120) using ConfigEd Lite or the MMI. The PNO parameters are located in the
SERIAL LINKS::PNO CONFIG menu.
POSITION DIVIDER
275
1 to 30000

The divider provides scaling capability. The divider scales the 1000 pulses per revolution
provided by the encoder before the pulses reach the position counter. A separate register
accumulates the remainders.
6-16
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
DEFAULT
SETTING
0.00%
0001
1000 RPM
TO SPEED LOOP
SPEED FEEDBACK
SELECTION
PARAMETER
TAG#
ZERO SPD. OFFSET
10
ENCODER LINES
24
ENCODER RPM
22
ENCODER
206
ENCODER
59
INTERFACE
OPTION PCB
1.0000
ANALOG TACH CAL
TACH INPUT (B2)
23
308
TECHNOLOGY
58
BOX
OPTION
1.0000
ARMATURE V CAL.
20
BACK EMF
TO FIELD
REGULATOR
TERMINAL VOLTS
60
100 VOLTS
SPEED FEEDBACK
FROM SPEED LOOP
NOM MOTOR VOLTS 521

IR COMPENSATION
21
50.0%
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
180
2.0 AMPS
ARMATURE CURRENT 523
0.00%
TO INHIBIT ALARMS
SPEED FEEDBACK ALARM
VA
57
480.0 SECS
STALL TRIP DELAY
224
95.00%
STALL THRESHOLD
263
CAL CIRCUIT
STALL
TRIP
TO INHIBIT ALARMS
112
ARMATURE
ACCT
FROM
POWER
BOARD
AT ZERO SPEED
FROM STANDSTILL
BIPOLAR
ARMATURE I (A9 )
25
ARMATURE CURRENT
ia
-10V -0 +10V A9
OR 0- +10V
ia
1.0000
FIELD I. CAL
182
FIELD
ACCT
TO FIELD
CONTROL
300
FIELD I FBK
181
0.2 AMPS
FIELD CURRENT
524
6-17
CONFIGURE DRIVE
MMI Menu Map
1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
ARMATURE
CURRENT
FIELD CURRENT
FLD.CTRL MODE
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
AUTOTUNE
SPD FBK SELECT
ENCODER LINES
ENCODER RPM
ENCODER SIGN
SPD.INT.TIME
SPD.PROP.GAIN
This block contains many of the parameters

required for configuring the drive.
CONFIGURE ENABLE: The operation of the
Block Diagram is suspended and all Operator
Station LEDs will flash whilst CONFIGURE
ENABLE = TRUE.
Note: The CONFIGURE ENABLE
parameter is also available in the
following MMI menus for ease of
use:
CALIBRATION
CONFIGURE I/O
Parameter
Tag
Configure Drive
100 VOLTS [521] NOM MOTOR VOLTS
2.0 AMPS [523] ARMATURE CURRENT
0.2 AMPS [524] FIELD CURRENT
VOLTAGE [209] FIELD CONTROL MODE
90.00% [210] FIELD VOLTAGE RATIO
ARM VOLTS FBK [ 47] SPEED FBK SEL
1000 RPM [ 22] ENCODER RPM
1000 [ 24] ENCODER LINES
POSITIVE [ 49] ENCODER SIGN
Range
NOM MOTOR VOLTS

521
100 to 875 VOLTS
Sets the 100% value for Armature Volts VA. Set this value to match the motor in use.
(Refer to ARMATURE V CAL in the CALIBRATION function block).
ARMATURE CURRENT
523
drive dependent AMPS
Sets the 100% value for Armature Current IA. Set this value to match the motor in use.
FIELD CURRENT
524
drive dependent AMPS
Sets the 100% value for Field Current IF. Set this value to match the motor in use. Note:
this should be set to a minimum value if in Field Voltage control - see FLD. CTRL MODE.
FLD. CTRL MODE
209
See below
(FLD.CTRL MODE)
There are two field control modes:
(a) Field Voltage Control is an open loop phase angle control to give a
certain voltage output.
(b) Field Current Control is a closed loop current control for accurate field
control or expansion to field weakening.
VOLTAGE CONTROL
CURRENT CONTROL
FIELD VOLTAGE RATIO 210
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
(FLD. VOLTS RATIO)
This parameter controls the output voltage from the open loop voltage control. The ratio is
defined as the DC output voltage over the AC RMS input voltage.
The default setting is equivalent to a single-phase diode rectifier.
SPEED FBK SEL
47
See below
(SPEED FBK SELECT)
Determines the source of the speed feedback signal. The default, ARM VOLTS FBK, uses
internal circuitry to derive the speed feedback. The other selections require the appropriate
external device to provide the feedback signal.
0 : ARM VOLTS FBK
1 : ANALOG TACH
2 : ENCODER
3 : ENCODER/ANALOG - for SSD Drives use
ENCODER RPM
22
0 to 6000 RPM
Motor top speed setting (100%) when using encoder feedback.
ENCODER LINES
24
10 to 5000
The 5901 Microtach has 1000 lines per revolution as standard. Proprietary encoders of
other specifications can be normalised by setting this parameter as appropriate.
ENCODER SIGN
49
NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
Since the encoder feedback cannot be reversed electrically, the signal polarity can be
reversed by the control software.
6-18
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Parameter
Tag
Range
CONFIGURE ENABLE
39
DISABLED / ENABLED
Selects Setup Mode (DISABLED) or Configuration Mode (ENABLED). Refer to
Modifying a Block Diagram, page 6-1.
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
421

AUTOTUNE
18

INT. TIME CONST.
13
(SPD. INT. TIME)

Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-72.
PROP. GAIN
14
(SPD.PROP.GAIN)
Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-72.
6-19
CURRENT LOOP
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
PROP. GAIN
INT. GAIN
AUTOTUNE
FEED FORWARD
DISCONTINUOUS
ADDITIONAL DEM
BIPOLAR CLAMPS
REGEN MODE
MASTER BRIDGE
POS. I CLAMP
NEG. I CLAMP
I DMD. ISOLATE
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
AUTOTUNE
Use this to setup the drive's conventional

current/torque loop.
Current Loop
It takes the current demand, imposes limits

through four clamps, and then uses a PI loop
to control the output.
The four separate clamps - current profile,
inverse time overload, bipolar clamps and
main current clamp - the clamps are in
series and lowest clamp takes effect. The
resultant clamp value can be seen in the
diagnostics ACTUAL POS I LIM and
ACTUAL NEG I LIM.
The inputs to this block are: the current
demand from the speed loop or terminal A3
(selected via I DMD. ISOLATE); the
current limit clamps from CURRENT
PROFILE and INVERSE TIME (note that
the bipolar clamps and main current clamp
are resident in the CURRENT LOOP block);
current feedback from CALIBRATION.
100.00 %
110.00 %
45.00
3.50
2.00
12.00 %
0.00 %
DISABLED
ENABLED
100.00 %
-100.00 %
DISABLED
AT CURRENT LIMIT [ 42]

IA DEMAND [ 66]
IA FEEDBACK [ 65]
IA FEEDBACK [538]
IF FEEDBACK [539]
AUTOTUNE [ 18]
ILOOP SUSPEND [ 46]
MASTER BRIDGE [527]
[ 15] CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
[421] MAIN CURR. LIMIT
[ 16] PROP GAIN
[ 17] INT. GAIN
[136] FEED FORWARD
[137] DISCONTINUOUS
[ 30] ADDITIONAL DEM
[ 90] BIPOLAR CLAMPS
[201] REGEN MODE
[301] POS. I CLAMP
[ 48] NEG. I CLAMP
[119] I DMD. ISOLATE
FALSE
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.0 AMPS
0.0 AMPS
OFF
FALSE
OFF
The default configuration uses DIGIN 1 and DIGIN 3 for switching modes (BIPOLAR
CLAMPS and I DMD. ISOLATE respectively), ANIN 4 and ANIN 5 for setting current
clamps (NEG. I CLAMPS and POS. I CLAMPS respectively).
A non-regenerative controller should have REGEN MODE set to DISABLED for proper
motor control.
Parameter
Tag
Range
AT CURRENT LIMIT
42
FALSE / TRUE
IA DEMAND
66
xxx.xx % (h)
(IaDmd UNFILTERED)
IA FEEDBACK
65
xxx.xx % (h)
(IaFbk UNFILTERED)
IA FEEDBACK
538
xxxx.x AMPS
(CURRENT FBK.AMPS)
IF FEEDBACK
539
xxxx.x AMPS
(FIELD I FBK.AMPS)
AUTOTUNE
18
OFF / ON
Turns the AUTOTUNE procedure on. Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Converter" Performance Adjustment.
ILOOP SUSPEND
46
FALSE / TRUE
MASTER BRIDGE
527
OFF / ON
A diagnostic indicating currently active bridge; master = ON, slave = OFF.
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
421
0.00 to 200.00 %
Independent symmetric current clamp. Sets symmetric clamps outside scaling from the
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER parameter.
PROP GAIN
16
0.00 to 200.00
(PROP. GAIN)
Proportional gain control for armature current PI loop. This parameter is set during the
autotune function.
6-20
CURRENT LOOP
Parameter
Tag
Range
INT. GAIN
17
0.00 to 200.00
Integral gain control for armature current PI loop, set during the autotune function.
FEED FORWARD
136
0.10 to 50.00
Set by Autotune but not used by the default I-Loop mode.
DISCONTINUOUS
137
0.00 to 200.00 %
Sets the boundary between the discontinuous and continuous regions of the current signal.
This is set during the autotune function and affects the performance of the adaptive
algorithm.
ADDITIONAL DEM
30
-200.00 to 200.00 %
Additional current demand input.
BIPOLAR CLAMPS
90
DISABLED / ENABLED
Selects between bipolar (asymmetric) or unipolar (symmetric) current clamps for the 4
quadrants of operation. Default setting of DISABLED means UNIPOLAR clamps selected.
DISABLED - unipolar (symmetric)
ENABLED - bipolar (asymmetric)
With BIPOLAR CLAMPS disabled, the clamps are symmetrical and are set by POS. I
CLAMP. With BIPOLAR CLAMPS enabled, the clamps are assymmetrical, bipolar. In
bipolar mode, POS. I CLAMP sets the maximum positive current and NEG. I CLAMP sets
the maximum negative current. POS. I CLAMP must always be set algebraically higher than
NEG. I CLAMP. As a result, NEG. I CLAMP can be set to a positive value. CUR.
LIMIT/SCALER scales both POS. I CLAMP and NEG. I CLAMP.
REGEN MODE
201
DISABLED / ENABLED
When disabled, sets the drive for non-regenerative (2-quadrant) operation.
Note: We recommend that this parameter is not changed whilst the machine is running.
DISABLED - non-regenerative (2-quadrant)
ENABLED - regenerative (4-quadrant)
When REGEN MODE is DISABLED, negative current demands are clamped to zero.
Current feedback is subtracted from the current demand and the result is controlled by the PI
loop. The result provides SCR phase angle control.
POS. I CLAMP
301
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Positive current clamp when BIPOLAR CLAMPS is ENABLED.
NEG. I CLAMP
48
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Negative current clamp when BIPOLAR CLAMPS is ENABLED.
Note on bipolar current clamps: these clamps in bipolar mode can cross-over onto the same
quadrant as long as the POS. I CLAMP is always greater (algebraically) than the NEG. I
CLAMP.
I DMD. ISOLATE
119
DISABLED / ENABLED
Speed loop bypass; the current demand is taken from ANIN 2 (A3).
With I DMD. ISOLATE disabled, the current loop uses the current demand from the speed
loop. With I DMD. ISOLATE enabled, ANALOG I/P 2, terminal A3, supplies the current
demand. With default scaling, 10V dc on terminal A3 is 100% current demand. An additional
current input, ADDITIONAL DEM, can be added to the current demand. The simplified
diagram below shows how the I DMD ISOLATE parameter selects the controlling loop.
Current Feedback
I DMD ISOLATE
Speed Demand
Speed Feedback
shown ENABLED
SPEED LOOP PI
Current Demand
CURRENT LOOP PI
Motor
Analog I/P2 (A3)

Digital I/P3 (C8)
6-21
CURRENT LOOP
Parameter
Tag
Range
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
15
0.00 to 200.00 %
(CUR.LIMIT/SCALER)
Current limit scaler. It scales bipolar/unipolar clamps. To achieve 200% current limit, the
current limit scaler should be set to 200%.
CURRENT LOOP
FROM
CURRENT
PROFILE
TAG# PARAMETER
16
AUTOTUNE
PROP.GAIN
16
INT. GAIN
17
137 DISCONTINUOUS
201
REGEN MODE
30
ADDITIONAL DEM
FROM
INVERSE TIME
OVERLOAD
DEFAULT
SETTING
OFF
45.00
3.50
12.00
ENABLED
0.00%
FROM
ANALOG
I/P 2
ACTUAL
POS I LIM
67
CURRENT
DEMAND
66
299
+
FROM
SPEED
LOOP
NOTE (2)
10+
10-
61
DRIVE
ENABLED
ACTUAL
NEG
I LIM
ANALOG I/P 3
C8
119
42
NOTE (1)
I DMD. ISOLATE
DIGITAL I/P 3
PROGRAM STOP
SELECTS PROG STOP
I LIM SET IN
"STOP RATES" MENU
DIGITAL I/P 1
C6
90
BIPOLAR CLAMPS
DIGITAL I/P 1
AT CURRENT
LIMIT
CURRENT LIMIT
SWITCH
NEG I
CLAMP
88
87
POS I
CLAMP
CURRENT
FEEDBACK
-1
ANALOG I/P 4
A5
PHASE
ANGLE
CONTROL
P1
48
NEG I CLAMP
15
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
301
POS. I CLAMP
421
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
ANALOG I/P 4
100.00%
ANALOG I/P 5
A6
ANALOG I/P 5
200.00%
298
65
ARMATURE CURRENT
FROM CALIBRATION BOARD
Note 1:
Note 2:
I DMD. ISOLATE removes speed loop demand and selects analog I/P 2 as current
regulator demand.
I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by program stop and stop to return drive to speed
regulation.
Regen mode disable prevents negative current demand. Non-regenerative drives
should have regen mode disabled.
6-22
CURRENT PROFILE
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT PROFILE
SPD BRK1 (LOW)

SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
Use this to clamp the current limit for applications

where motors have a reduced ability to commutate
armature current at low field currents.
Normally this is required when using Field Weakening,
although some motors exhibit commutation limitations
at higher speeds even with rated field current.
Current Profile
100.0
100.0
200.0
200.0
%
%
%
%
[ 32]
[ 31]
[ 93]
[ 33]
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)

SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
The input to the block is SPEED FEEDBACK from the SPEED LOOP function block. The
output of the block changes the current limit clamp in the current loop.
When SPEED FEEDBACK exceeds SPD BRK 1 (LOW), the current profile begins
scaling the current limit as set by IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1).
As the SPEED FEEDBACK increases toward SPD BRK2 (HIGH), the current limit is
reduced linearly toward IMAX BRK2 (SPD2).
When the speed exceeds SPD BRK2 (HIGH), the current limit remains at the IMAX
BRK2 (SPD2) setting.
Current Limit
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
Speed Feedback
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
Parameter
Tag
Range
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
32
0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
(SPD BRK1 (LOW))

This is the motor speed at which current limit profiling begins.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
31
0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
(SPD BRK2 (HIGH))

This is the upper speed limit at which current limit profiling ends.
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
93
0.0 to 200.0 % (h)
(IMAX BRK1(SPD1))
This sets the current limit value at or below speed break-point 1, provided the other current
limit clamps (inverse time overload, bipolar clamps and main current clamps) are greater
than this setting.
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
33
0.0 to 200.0 % (h)
(IMAX BRK2(SPD2))
This sets the current limit value at or above speed break-point 2, provided the other current
limit clamps setting (inverse time overload, bipolar clamps and main current clamps) are
greater than this.
6-23
DIAGNOSTICS
MMI Menu Map
1
DIAGNOSTICS
MMI Menu Map cont.

1
DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED DEMAND
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
SPEED FEEDBACK
ENCODER
SPEED ERROR
UNFIL.ENCODER
SPD LOOP OUTPUT
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
CURRENT DEMAND
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
CURRENT FEEDBACK
CONTACTOR CLOSED
CURRENT FBK AMPS
HEALTH LED
IAFBK UNFILTERED
READY
IADMD UNFILTERED
DRIVE RUNNING
POS. I CLAMP
SYSTEM RESET
NEG. I CLAMP
ACTUAL POS I LIM
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
INVERSE TIME O/P
AT CURRENT LIMIT
AT ZERO SPEED
AT ZERO SETPOINT
AT STANDSTILL
RAMPING
PROGRAM STOP
COAST STOP
DRIVE START
DRIVE ENABLE
OPERATING MODE
FIELD ENABLED
FIELD DEMAND
FIELD I FBK.
FIELD I FBK. AMPS
UNFIL.FIELD FBK
FLD. FIRING ANGLE
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
ANOUT 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2 (A8)
START (C3)
DIGITAL INPUT C4
DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
RAISE/LOWER O/P
PID OUTPUT
PID CLAMPED
PID ERROR
SPT SUM OUTPUT
RAMP OUTPUT
PRESET O/P
SRAMP OUTPUT
This block contains

parameters used to
monitor the status of
the drive, internal
variables, and its
inputs and outputs.
The Parameter
Descriptions table on
this page describes the
parameters contained
in the DIAGNOSTICS
function block.
Diagnostics
SPEED FEEDBACK
SPEED ERROR
CURRENT DEMAND
CURRENT FEEDBACK
POS. I CLAMP
NEG. I CLAMP
ACTUAL POS I LIM
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
DRIVE START
DRIVE ENABLE
FIELD I FBK.
TACH INPUT (B2)
ENCODER
DRIVE RUNNING
CONTACTOR CLOSED
[207]
[297]
[299]
[298]
[ 87]
[ 88]
[ 67]
[ 61]
[ 82]
[ 84]
[300]
[308]
[206]
[376]
[ 83]
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
OFF
DISABLED
0.00 %
0.0 %
0 RPM
FALSE
OFF
The MMI DIAGNOSTICS Menu listing on the

next page describes all the parameters in the
MMIs DIAGNOSTICS menu, with references in brackets where parameters appear in other
function blocks.
Parameter
Tag
Range
SPEED FEEDBACK
207
xxx.xx %
Speed loop feedback. (Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-72)
SPEED ERROR
297
xxx.xx %
Speed loop error.
CURRENT DEMAND
299
xxx.xx %
Current loop demand (speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the
current limits).
CURRENT FEEDBACK
298
xxx.xx %
Scaled and filtered armature current.
POS. I CLAMP
87
xxx.x % (h)
Positive current clamp.
NEG. I CLAMP
88
xxx.x % (h)
Negative current clamp.
ACTUAL POS I LIM
67
xxx.x % (h)
Overall positive current limit value.
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
61
xxx.x % (h)
Overall negative current limit value.
DRIVE START
82
OFF / ON
Controller start/run command.
DRIVE ENABLE
84
DISABLED / ENABLED
Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched.
FIELD I FBK.
300
xxx.xx %
Scaled field current feedback.
TACH INPUT (B2)
308
xxx.x % (h)
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.
ENCODER
206
xxxxx RPM
Encoder speed feedback in RPM.
DRIVE RUNNING
376
FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, the stack is switched on and enabled.
CONTACTOR CLOSED
83
ON / OFF
When ON, the main contactor coil is energised. Refer to Terminal Information for D5 & D6
in Chapter 11.
OUTPUT FPM
SPEED SETPOINT
TERMINAL VOLTS
BACK EMF
ARM VOLTS FBK
TACH INPUT (B2)
6-24
DIAGNOSTICS
The MMI DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Many more signals can be monitored using the MMI display. The diagnostic parameters are
"read-only" and are very useful for tracing configuration problems.
Parameter
Tag
Range
XXX.XX%
SPEED DEMAND
89
Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp-to-zero
block.
(Refer to STOP RATES, page 6-83)
SPEED FEEDBACK
Speed loop feedback.
207
XXX.XX%
(Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-72)
SPEED ERROR
Speed loop error.
297
XXX.XX%
SPEED LOOP OUTPUT

Output from speed loop PI.
356
CURRENT DEMAND
299
Current loop demand (speed error PI output or
external current demand clamped by all the current
limits).
CURRENT FEEDBACK
298
Scaled and filtered current feedback.
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
XXX.XX%
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
IA FEEDBACK (AMPS)
538
Scaled and filtered armature current in Amps.
XXX.XX AMPS
(Refer to CURRENT LOOP,
page 6-19)
IA FEEDBACK
65
Scaled current feedback (unfiltered).
XXX.XX%
(Refer to CURRENT LOOP

page 6-19)
IA DEMAND
66
Scaled current demand (unfiltered).
XXX.XX%
page 6-19)
POS I CLAMP
Positive current clamp.
87
XXX.XX%
NEG I CLAMP
Negative current clamp.
88
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
ACTUAL POS I LIM

67
Overall positive current limit value.
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
61
Overall negative current limit value.
INVERSE TIME O/P
Inverse time clamp output level.
203
XXX.XX%
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
XXX.XX%
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
XXX.XX%
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
XXX.XX%
(Reference to INVERSE TIME reserved menu)
AT CURRENT LIMIT
42
Current demand is being restrained by the overall
current clamp.
FALSE / TRUE
page 6-19)
AT ZERO SPEED
At zero speed feedback.
77
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to STANDSTILL page 6-81)
AT ZERO SETPOINT
At zero speed demand.
78
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to STANDSTILL page 6-81)
AT STANDSTILL
79
AT ZERO SPEED and AT ZERO SETPOINT.
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to STANDSTILL, page 6-81)
6-25
DIAGNOSTICS
Parameter
Tag
Range
RAMPING
113
The SETPOINT ramp function block is limiting the
rate of change of Speed Setpoint.
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to RAMPS, page 6-63)
PROGRAM STOP
80
State of program stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at
24V, then PROGRAM STOP is FALSE.
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to STOP RATES, page 6-83)
COAST STOP
525
State of coast stop (Terminal B9). When B9 is at
24V, then COAST STOP is FALSE.
FALSE / TRUE
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
DRIVE START
Controller start/run command.
ON / OFF
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
82
DRIVE ENABLE
84
Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched.
ENABLED / DISABLED
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
OPERATING MODE
212
Indicates whether the drive is in RUN, JOG
1....STOP etc.
0 : STOP
1 : STOP
2 : JOG SP. 1
3 : JOG SP. 2
4 : RUN
5 : TAKE UP SP. 1
6 : TAKE UP SP. 2
7 : CRAWL
0 to 7
(Refer to INERTIA COMP,
page 6-40)
FIELD ENABLED
169
Drive field loop is enabled/quenched.
ENABLED / DISABLED
(Refer to FIELD CONTROL,
page 6-36)
FIELD DEMAND
183
The meaning of field demand depends upon which
mode of field control is in force; in current control
FIELD DEMAND is the current setpoint to the
field loop, in voltage mode FIELD DEMAND is
the voltage ratio to the field controller.
xxx.xx%
page 6-36)
FIELD I FBK
300
Scaled and filtered field current feedback.
xxx.xx%
page 6-36)
FIELD I FBK AMPS

539
Scaled and filtered field current feedback in Amps.
xxxx.x AMPS
page 6-36)
UNFIL.FIELD FBK
Scaled field current (unfiltered).
xxx.xx%
(Refer to CALIBRATION,
page 6-14)
81
FLD. FIRING ANGLE

184
Field firing angle in degrees: 155 degrees is the
value for back stop (min field) and 5 degrees is the
value for front stop (max field).
xxx.xx DEG
page 6-36)
ANIN 1 (A2)
Speed setpoint no. 1.
xxx.xx VOLTS
(Refer to ANALOG INPUTS,
page 6-5)
50
6-26
DIAGNOSTICS
Parameter
Tag
Range
ANIN 2 (A3)
51
Hardwired. Speed setpoint no. 2 or current demand
if C8 = ON.
xxx.xx VOLTS
page 6-5)
ANIN 3 (A4)
Speed setpoint no. 3 (ramped).
xxx.xx VOLTS
page 6-5)
52
ANIN 4 (A5)
53
Speed setpoint no. 4 or negative current clamp if
C6 = ON.
xxx.xx VOLTS
page 6-5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
54
Main current limit or positive current clamp if C6
= ON.
xxx.xx VOLTS
page 6-5)
ANOUT 1 (A7)
Scaled speed feedback.
55
xxx.xx VOLTS
(Refer to ANALOG OUTPUTS
page 6-7)
ANOUT 2 (A8)
Total speed setpoint.
56
xxx.xx VOLTS
(Refer to ANALOG OUTPUTS,
page 6-7)
START (C3)
Start/Run terminal.
68
ON / OFF
(Refer to AUX I/O, page 6-8)
DIGITAL INPUT C4
Jog/Take-up Slack terminal.
69
ON / OFF
(Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS,
page 6-31 and AUX I/O, page 6-8)
DIGITAL INPUT C5
70
Electronic enable/disable (quench) terminal
(ON = Enabled).
ON / OFF
page 6-31 and AUX I/O, page 6-8)
DIGIN 1 (C6)
71
Symmetrical current clamps/Asymmetrical
(bipolar) current clamps (ON = Bipolar).
ON / OFF
page 6-31)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
Ramp hold input (ON = Hold).
ON / OFF
page 6-31)
72
DIGIN 3 (C8)
73
Current demand isolate; giving speed or current
mode of operation. (ON = Current mode).
ON / OFF
page 6-31)
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
At zero speed.
ON / OFF
(Refer to DIGITAL OUTPUTS,
page 6-34)
74
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
75
Drive healthy. Health is also displayed on the front
panel LED, always ON when the start is low.
ON / OFF
page 6-34)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
76
Drive ready to run (all alarms healthy and mains
synchronisation achieved).
ON / OFF
page 6-34)
RAISE/LOWER O/P
264
(OUTPUT) Value of the raise/lower ramp function.
xxx.xx%
(Refer to PRESET, page 6-59)
6-27
DIAGNOSTICS
Parameter
Tag
Range
PID OUTPUT
Output of the PID function block.
417
xxx.xx%
(Refer to PID, page 6-55)
PID CLAMPED
416
Indicates the PID output has reached either the
positive or negative limit.
FALSE / TRUE
PID ERROR
415
Displays the difference between the setpoint
(INPUT 1) and the feedback signal (INPUT 2) in
the PID function block.
xxx.xx%
SPT SUM OUTPUT

Setpoint summation output.
86
xxx.xx%
(Refer to SETPOINT SUM 1,
page 6-68)
RAMP OUTPUT
Setpoint ramp output.
85
xxx.xx%
(Refer to RAMPS, page 6-63)
SPEED SETPOINT
63
Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output
before the ramp-to-zero function.
xxx.xx%
TERMINAL VOLTS
Scaled armature terminal volts.
xxx.x%
page 6-14)
57
BACK EMF
60
Calculated motor back EMF including IR.
compensation. (Armature Volts Feedback)
xxx.x%
page 6-14)
ARM VOLTS FBK

605
Back EMF scaled by NOM MOTOR VOLTS
(CALIBRATION function block).
xxxV
TACH INPUT (B2)

308
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.
xxx.x%
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
58
Analog tachogenerator feedback (unfiltered).
xxx.xx%
page 6-14)
ENCODER
Encoder speed feedback in RPM.
xxxxx RPM
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
206
UNFIL.ENCODER
59
Encoder speed feedback in RPM (unfiltered).
xxxxx RPM
page 6-14)
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
Unfiltered speed feedback.
62
xxx.xx%
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
Unfiltered speed error.
64
xxx.xx%
CONTACTOR CLOSED
Main contactor control signal.
83
ON / OFF
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
HEALTH LED
122
State of Health LED on Operator Station.
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to INHIBIT ALARMS,
page 6-41)
READY
125
The drive is ready to accept an enable signal.
FALSE / TRUE
(Refer to INHIBIT ALARMS,
page 6-41)
6-28
DIAGNOSTICS
Parameter
Tag
Range
DRIVE RUNNING
376
Drive is enabled and may make current when
TRUE. A diagnostic for those parameters that can
only be written to when the drive is stopped
(parameters marked with Note 2 in the Parameter
Specification Table).
FALSE / TRUE
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
SYSTEM RESET
374
Set for one cycle as the drive is enabled.
FALSE / TRUE
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
6-29
DIAMETER CALC.
MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP PARAMETERS
SPECIAL BLOCKS
DIAMETER CALC.
LINE SPEED
REEL SPEED
MIN DIAMETER
MIN SPEED
RESET VALUE
EXTERNAL RESET
RAMP RATE
DIAMETER
MOD OF LINE SPD
MOD OF REEL SPD
UNFILT DIAMETER
This block is used to calculate roll

diameters in winder applications.
The block is ignored by the drive unless the
DIAMETER parameter (Tag 431) in the
"BLOCK DIAGRAM" MMI menu is set to
a non-zero tag value. This is performed
automatically using ConfigEd Lite: when
the DIAMETER parameter in the
"DIAMETER CALC" block is connected to
another block, the destination tag value is
written to Tag 431.
Diameter Calc.
0.00 %
0.00 %
10.00 %
5.00 %
10.00 %
DISABLED
5.0 s
DIAMETER
MOD OF LINE SPEED
MOD OF REEL SPEED
UNFILTERED DIAMETER
[424] LINE SPEED
[437] REEL SPEED
[425] MIN DIAMETER
[426] MIN SPEED
[462] RESET VALUE
[463] EXTERNAL RESET
[453] RAMP RATE
[427]
[428]
[429]
[430]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
%
%
%
%
DIAMETER CALC calculates the diameter of a reel as a function of the reel speed and the
line speed. The resulting diameter is a percentage of the maximum full roll diameter. A lead
section, adjacent line section, or surface driven speed sensing device is required to supply the
line speed signal. The winder or unwind drive's motor speed feedback provides the reel speed
input.
The ratio of the minimum core diameter to the maximum roll diameter determines the
operating range of the diameter calculator. Set MIN DIAMETER to that ratio using the
expression:
Minimum Core Outside Diameter Maximum Full Roll Diameter x 100%
The magnitude of LINE SPEED is compared with MIN SPEED to determine when the
diameter calculator will operate:
When LINE SPEED is above MIN SPEED the calculator is on
When LINE SPEED is below MIN SPEED, DIAMETER is held at the last calculated
diameter
When EXTERNAL RESET is ENABLED, RESET VALUE is used as the diameter output.
Note: In turret winder applications, LINE SPEED will usually be above MIN SPEED. During roll
changes, EXTERNAL RESET must be held ENABLED for the new spindle until the web has
been transferred and the diameter is calculated properly. RESET VALUE must be set to
the appropriate new core value for a rewind, or new roll diameter for an unwind.
RAMP RATE adjusts the filtering of the diameter output. Its setting is the time it takes for a
100% change in DIAMETER. For example, at the default setting of 5.0 seconds, a 50% step
change in diameter would take 2.5 seconds for the output diameter output to display the
change.
Parameter
Tag
Range
DIAMETER
427
xxx.xx %
This is the output of the block and it can be connected to the appropriate points in the
winder block.
MOD OF LINE SPEED
428
xxx.xx %
429
xxx.xx %
430
xxx.xx %
(MOD OF LINE SPD)

Modulus of line speed.
MOD OF REEL SPEED
(MOD OF REEL SPD)
Modulus of reel speed.
UNFILTERED
DIAMETER
(UNFILT DIAMETER)
Unfiltered value of diameter (before RAMP RATE filter).
LINE SPEED
424
-105.00 to 105.00 %
This will usually be configured to be the analog tacho input and scaled appropriately during
calibration.
6-30
DIAMETER CALC.
Parameter
Tag
Range
REEL SPEED
437
-105.00 to 105.00 %
This will usually be configured to be the drive's own speed feedback, i.e. encoder or
armature volts feedback.
MIN DIAMETER
425
0.00 to 100.00 %
Set to the minimum core diameter (normally the empty core diameter) as a percentage of
the maximum roll diameter.
MIN SPEED
426
0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the minimum LINE SPEED level below which the diameter calculation is frozen.
RESET VALUE
462
0.00 to 100.00 %
Normally for winders this will be set to the MIN DIAMETER value. It is the diameter
preset used when changing rolls. This value will be preloaded into the ramp (filter) output
when EXTERNAL RESET is enabled.
EXTERNAL RESET
463
DISABLED / ENABLED
Sets and holds the diameter to the RESET VALUE when ENABLED.
RAMP RATE
453
0.1 to 600.0 s
This is used to smooth the output of the diameter calculator.
DIAMETER CALC.
MIN SPEED [426]
X<Z
x
RAMP RATE [453]
Hold
|X|
LINE SPEED [424]
[428]
aX/Y
MIN DIAMETER [425]

|Y|
REEL SPEED [437]
DIAMETER [427]
[429]
[430]
RESET VALUE
[462]
EXTERNAL RESET
[463]
Line Speed (S)
r
Reel Diameter
(D)
Core Diameter (d)
Circumference = D or Line Speed (S) = Reel Speed (r) x D

Thus D =
S
r
i.e. D
Line Speed (S)

Reel Speed (r )
Therefore with the web intact we can calculate the diameter from the two speeds.
6-31
DIGITAL INPUTS
MMI Menu Map
1
Use this block to control the digital operating parameters of the software.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
VALUE FOR TRUE
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
OUTPUT [102] 90
0.01 % [103] VALUE TRUE
0.00 % [104] VALUE FALSE
DIGIN 1 (C6) [ 71] OFF
The digital input can be configured to point

to a destination location, and to set that
destination TRUE or FALSE depending
upon programmable values.
OUTPUT [105] 118

0.01 % [106] VALUE TRUE
Digital Input 3
OUTPUT [108] 119

0.01 % [109] VALUE TRUE
VALUE FOR FALSE

DESTINATION TAG
Parameter
Tag
Range
MMI Menu Map
OUTPUT
102, 105, 108
0 to 639
SYSTEM
(DESTINATION TAG)
CONFIGURE I/O
The destination Tag Number of the assumed value. Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL INPUT C4
DIGITAL INPUT C5
VALUE TRUE
103, 106, 109
-300.00 to 300.00 %
(VALUE FOR TRUE)

The assumed value sent to the destination Tag Number when input is TRUE, that is:
Digital Input 1, terminal C6 = 24V (True)
DESTINATION TAG
VALUE FALSE
104, 107, 110
-300.00 to 300.00 %
(VALUE FOR FALSE)

The assumed value sent to the destination Tag Number when input is FALSE, that is:
Digital Input 1, terminal C6 = 0V (False)
DIGIN 1 (C6) to DIGIN 3
(C8)
71, 72, 73
OFF / ON
Digital Input Examples

Using Digital Inputs with LOGIC Parameters
Logic parameters have values of 1/0: TRUE/FALSE, ON/OFF, ENABLED/DISABLED etc.
For example, the default connections in the drive allow the Digital Inputs to switch LOGIC
parameters. These are the connections from:
Terminal C6 to Tag 90 (BIPOLAR CLAMPS)
Terminal C7 to Tag 118 (RAMP HOLD)
Terminal C8 to Tag 119 (I DMD. ISOLATE)
In each case, the state of the terminal (24V or 0V) switches the destination parameter by
sending a 1 or 0.
The format for the VALUE TRUE and VALUE FALSE parameters is in percent, thus 0.00%
= 0 and 0.01% (or any other non-zero number) = 1.
6-32
DIGITAL INPUTS
Inverting the Input Signal
The default setting is for VALUE TRUE to be 0.01% and VALUE FALSE to be 0.00%.
Inverting the digital input is therefore simple; set VALUE TRUE to 0.00% and VALUE
FALSE to 0.01% (or any other non-zero number).
To do this:
1. Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE
2. Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR TRUE to 0.00%
3. Set VALUE FOR FALSE to 0.01%
4. Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to DISABLE
Digital Input 1 now sends a 0 when the input signal is TRUE, and 1 when it is FALSE.
Using Digital Inputs with VALUE Parameters
Value parameters have values such as 100.00, or with units like 50.00%, 10.0 SECS etc.
You can use a Digital Input to send two fixed values to a VALUE parameter depending upon
the state of the input terminal, 24V or 0V. You set the two fixed values you require in the
VALUE TRUE and VALUE FALSE parameters.
For example, to connect Digital Input 1 to SPEED LOOP::SPD.PROP.GAIN :
1.
2.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE

Find the tag number for SPD.PROP.GAIN either from the function block detail in
this chapter, or from the Parameter Table: MMI Order - refer to Chapter 10. (It is 14).
3. Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::DESTINATION TAG to 14
4. Set VALUE FOR TRUE to 10.00%
5. Set VALUE FOR FALSE to 30.00%
6. Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to DISABLE
Digital Input 1 will now set SPD.PROP.GAIN to two values depending upon the state of the
input signal:
When the input terminal is at 24V, SPD.PROP.GAIN is set to 10.00

When the input terminal is at 0V, SPD.PROP.GAIN is set to 30.00
DIGITAL INPUT C4 and DIGITAL INPUT C5

You can configure digital input terminals C4 (Jog) and C5 (Enable) for your own use when
you do not need the external jog or current loop enable functions.
You can only configure the DESTINATION parameter for each of these blocks. Internally,
VALUE TRUE is fixed at 0.01% (+24V dc), and VALUE FALSE is fixed at 0.00% (0V).
This makes them suitable for switching LOGIC parameters only.
DIGITAL INPUT C4
To use terminal C4 as a spare digital input, remove the link between the output JOG
INPUT (C4) and the input JOG/SLACK in the AUX I/O function block, using
ConfigEd Lite. You can then tag the block's output JOG INPUT (C4) to a digital
parameter. Or, you may re-tag the parameter using the MMI.. The destination tag for
DIGITAL INPUT (C4) can be found in the SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL
INPUTS menu in the MMI.
OUTPUT (DESTINATION TAG), Tag Number 494
Destination of DIGITAL INPUT C4
Range:
0 to 639
Default:
496 (AUX I/O::JOG/SLACK)
6-33
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL INPUT C5
Caution
If you are isolating power on the drive output using a DC contactor, you must
use an auxiliary, normally-open contact connected to terminal C5 to
immediately disable the drive's current loop when the contactor coil deenergises. Free-up terminal C5 for other uses only when isolating main power
on the input side of the drive using an AC contactor.
Note: Some 590 DRV models isolate power on the 590 drive output using a DC contactor, so
you cannot use terminal C5 as an additional digital input.
To use terminal C5 as a spare digital input you must release it from its default duty.
To do this, remove the link between the output ENABLE (C5) and the input
ENABLE, both in the AUX I/O function block, using ConfigEd Lite. If using the
MMI, set the ENABLE parameter in the AUX I/O function block to ON. The drive
is now permanently enabled, other than for a normal stop, coast stop or drive fault
override. ENABLE (C5) can then be tagged to any digital parameter. The destination
tag for ENABLE (C5) can be found in the SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL
INPUTS menu in the MMI.
OUTPUT (DESTINATION TAG), Tag Number 495
Destination of DIGITAL INPUT C5
Range:
0 to 639
Default:
497 (AUX I/O::ENABLE)
Additional Digital Inputs

It is possible to use an Analog Input as a Digital Input to extend the number of Digital Inputs
available. Again, 0.00% is regarded as Logic 0 and 0.01% (or any other non-zero value) is
regarded as Logic 1.
Using Analog I/P as Digital I/P

100%
100%
0%
DIAGNOSTIC
Digital Destination Tag
6-34
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
MMI Menu Map
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
4 DIGOUT 1 (B5)
This function block allows you to output digital parameters within the software to other
equipment.
[ 97]
[359]
[195]
[ 43]
4 DIGOUT 2 (B6)
4 DIGOUT 3 (B7)
THRESHOLD (>)
MODULUS
SOURCE TAG
Digout 2 (B6)
Digout 1 (B5)
77
FALSE
0.00 %
TRUE
INPUT
INVERTED
THRESHOLD
MODULUS
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
122
FALSE
0.00 %
TRUE
[ 98]
[360]
[196]
[ 44]
[ 74] OFF
A digital output can be configured to point

to any digital value within the software
system and output information depending
upon the status of that value.
INPUT
INVERTED
THRESHOLD
MODULUS
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
[ 75] OFF
Digout 3 (B7
125
FALSE
0.00 %
TRUE
INVERTED
[ 99]
[361]
[197]
[ 45]
INPUT
INVERTED
THRESHOLD
MODULUS
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Parameter
Tag
Range
INPUT
97, 98, 99
0 to 639
[ 76] OFF
(SOURCE TAG)
Enter the tag number providing the source of the variable to control the digital output. Refer
to Special Links, page 6-1.
INVERTED
359, 360, 361
FALSE / TRUE
Selects to invert the output when TRUE.

THRESHOLD
195, 196, 197
-300.00 to 300.00 %
(THRESHOLD (>))
The threshold which the input value must exceed to set the output to TRUE.
MODULUS
43, 44, 45
FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, the absolute value of the source value is used for the threshold test.
DIGOUT 1 (B5) to
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
74, 75, 76
OFF / ON
Configurable Digital Outputs
INVERTED
MODULUS
X
INPUT
1
|X|
IP
THRESHOLD
OP
%
DIAGNOSTIC
6-35
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Digital Output Examples
Using Digital Outputs with LOGIC Parameters
Logic parameters have values of 1/0: TRUE/FALSE, ON/OFF, ENABLED/DISABLED etc.
For example, the (logic) default connections in the drive allow the Digital Outputs to provide
(source) 24V or 0V dc depending upon the state of following tag connections:
Terminal B5, Digital Output 1 is linked to Tag Number 77 (AT ZERO SPEED)
Terminal B6, Digital Output 2 is linked to Tag Number 122 (HEALTH LED)
Terminal B7, Digital Output 3 is linked to Tag Number 125 (READY)
In each case, the state of the source parameter defines the voltage available at the terminal
(TRUE = 24V, FALSE = 0V when INVERTED = FALSE). Inverting the digital output is
simple; set INVERTED to TRUE.
Using Digital Outputs with VALUE Parameters (Up-to-speed Detector)
Value parameters have values such as 100.00, or with units like 50.00%, 10.0 SECS etc.
For example, to connect Digital Output 1 to read UNFIL.SPD.FBK:
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE
2.
Find the tag number for UNFIL.SPD.FBK either from the function block detail in
this chapter, or from the Parameter Table: MMI Order - refer to Chapter 10. (It is 62).
3.
Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::SOURCE TAG to 62
4.
Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::THRESHOLD(>) to 50.00%
5.
Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::MODULUS to TRUE
6.
Set DIGITAL OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)::INVERTED to FALSE
7.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to DISABLE
This option is useful for generating an "up-to-speed" output. The MODULUS removes the
sign from the value (so -100 becomes 100). The THRESHOLD(>) parameter determines when
the output is 24V or 0V dc (the input signal must exceed this setting for the output to go high).
Set INVERTED to TRUE to invert the result of the output.
6-36
FIELD CONTROL
MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP PARAMETERS
FIELD CONTROL
FIELD ENABLE
FLD. CTRL MODE
FIELD I THRESH
UP TO FIELD
FLD.QUENCH DELAY
FLD. QUENCH MODE
MMI Menu Map

1
SETUP PARAMETERS
FIELD CONTROL
FLD.VOLTAGE VARS
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
This function block contains all

the parameters for the field
operating mode.
It controls the drive's full wave,
single phase, motor field thyristor
bridge circuit.
The FIELD CONTROL function
block is viewed in three submenus on the MMI: FLD
VOLTAGE VARS, FLD
CURRENT VARS and FLD
WEAK VARS.
In the FIELD CONTROL menu,
you select the field operating
mode: open loop voltage control
or closed loop current control.
Field Control
ENABLED
VOLTAGE CONTROL
90.00%
100.00 %
0.10
1.28
DISABLED
2.00
40.00
0.30
10.00 %
100.00 %
100
100
0.0 s
QUENCH
80.00 %
FIELD ENABLED [169]

FIELD DEMAND [183]
FLD. FIRING ANGLE [184]
FIELD I FBK [300]
FIELD I FBK.AMPS [539]
UP TO FIELD [618]
[170] FIELD ENABLE
[209] FLD. CTRL MODE IS
[210] RATIO OUT/IN
[171] SETPOINT
[173] PROP. GAIN
[172] INT. GAIN
[174] FLD. WEAK ENABLE
[175] EMF LEAD
[176] EMF LAG
[177] EMF GAIN
[179] MIN FIELD CURRENT
[178] MAX VOLTS
[191] BEMF FBK LEAD
[192] BEMF FBK LAG
[185] FLD. QUENCH DELAY
[186] FLD. QUENCH MODE
[617] FIELD I THRESHOLD
SETUP PARAMETERS
FIELD CONTROL
The inputs to the FIELD

CONTROL block come from
FLD VOLTAGE VARS and FLD
CURRENT VARS.
FLD.CURRENT VARS
The input to FLD VOLTAGE VARS is the AC field voltage.
MMI Menu Map
SETPOINT
PROP. GAIN
INT. GAIN
MMI Menu Map
DISABLED
0.00 %
0 DEG
0%
0 AMPS
FALSE
FIELD ENABLE disables the field thyristor bridge and is used in permanent motor
applications. Disabling the field automatically overrides the field fail alarm. If FIELD
ENABLE is enabled, you can select between voltage and current control using the FLD CTRL
MODE parameter. The default is VOLTAGE CONTROL.
The diagnostic DRIVE ENABLE (Tag 84) is also used by the FLD. QUENCH DELAY to
delay disabling the field when Run is removed.
SETUP PARAMETERS
FIELD CONTROL
FLD.CURRENT VARS
Contains the parameter for the open loop VOLTAGE CONTROL mode.
FLD.WEAK VARS
In VOLTAGE CONTROL mode, set the value of RATIO OUT/IN (FLD.VOLTS RATIO) to
provide the correct field voltage. This control mode provides open-loop phase angle control of
the thyristor bridge. To calculate RATIO OUT/IN, divide the desired DC field voltage by the
AC input voltage and multiply by 100.
FLD. WEAK ENABLE

EMF LEAD
EMF LAG
EMF GAIN
MIN FLD.CURRENT
FLD CURRENT VARS : MMI Sub-Menu
MAX VOLTS
Contains the parameters for the closed loop current control mode.
BEMF FBK LEAD

BEMF FBK LAG
MMI Menu Map

1
FLD VOLTAGE VARS : MMI Sub-Menu
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD.CTRL MODE
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
CURRENT CONTROL mode uses actual field current feedback for closed-loop control giving
accurate motor field control independent of motor temperature. This is a pre-requisite for field
weakening.
FLD WEAK VARS : MMI Sub-Menu

In certain applications of a DC motor controller, high speeds can only be achieved by reducing
the field current and therefore the resultant torque. This is termed as the Constant-Horsepower
region or Field-Weakening region, and the speed at which it begins is known as the Base
Speed.
6-37
FIELD CONTROL
Parameter
Tag
Range
FIELD ENABLED
169
DISABLED / ENABLED
FIELD DEMAND
183
xxx.xx %
FLD. FIRING ANGLE
184
xxx.xx DEG
(FLD.FIRING ANGLE)
FIELD I FBK
300
xxx.xx %
Calibrated field current feedback.
Note: if the current feedback is calibrated correctly the FIELD I FBK and UP TO FIELD
diagnostics will operate.
FIELD I FBK.AMPS
539
xxx.xx A
FIELD I FBK calibrated in Amps.
UP TO FIELD
618
FALSE / TRUE
Field current feedback is above FIELD I THRESHOLD when TRUE. This may be used as
part of a mechanical brake release strategy.
FIELD ENABLE
170
DISABLED / ENABLED
Enables and disables the drive motor Field Control.
FLD CTRL MODE IS
209
See below
(FLD CTRL MODE)
Selects between open-loop VOLTAGE CONTROL or closed-loop CURRENT CONTROL.
RATIO OUT/IN
210
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
(FLD.VOLTS RATIO)
Sets the output dc field voltage as a ratio of the RMS FIELD supply voltage when FLD
CTRL MODE is set to VOLTAGE CONTROL.
SETPOINT
171
0.00 to 100.00 %
Field current setpoint as percentage of calibrated value.
PROP. GAIN
173
0.00 to 100.00
This is the proportional gain adjustment of the field current PI loop. The default of 0.10 is
equivalent to a real gain of 10.
INT. GAIN
172
0.00 to 100.00
This is the integral gain adjustment of the field current PI loop.
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
174
DISABLED / ENABLED
Activates the additional motor back emf PID loop for field weakening (field spillover)
control.
EMF LEAD
175
0.10 to 50.00
With field weakening control enabled, a PID loop is brought into operation. This is the lead
time constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop.
With a default of 2.00, real time constant = 200ms.
6-38
FIELD CONTROL
Parameter
Tag
Range
EMF LAG
176
0.00 to 200.00
This is the lag time constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop
With a default of 4.00, real time constant = 4000ms.
EMF GAIN
177
0.00 to 100.00
This is the gain adjustment of the field weakening PID loop.
With a default of 3.00, real gain = 30.
MIN FIELD CURRENT
179
0.00 to 100.00 %
(MIN FLD.CURRENT)
The field weakening loop reduces the field current to achieve speed control above base
speed. At top speed the field reaches a minimum value. MIN FIELD CURRENT should be
set below this minimum value to allow reasonable margin for transient control near the top
speed but not lower than 6% as this could then cause the "Field Fail" alarm to operate.
MAX VOLTS
178
0.00 to 100.00 %
Maximum volts is the voltage level at which field weakening begins. It is also known as
"Spillover Bias". The default value is 100% of the nominal value as set by the armature
voltage calibration value. For commissioning purposes this value can be set to another
(lower) desirable level. Subsequently, it is advisable to return it to 100% for normalisation.
BEMF FBK LEAD
191
10 to 5000
This is the lead time constant of the back emf feedback filter which is used for reducing
armature voltage overshoots when accelerating fast through base speed.
BEMF FBK LAG
192
10 to 5000
This is the lag time constant of the above feedback filter. If the filter is active, the ratio of
lead / lag should always be greater than 1 to give an overall lead action which reduces the
voltage overshoot and less than, typically, 3 for stable control. The default values 100/100 =
1 cancel each other and make the filter inactive.
FLD. QUENCH DELAY
185
0.0 to 600.0 s
(FLD.QUENCH DELAY)
If dynamic breaking is used the field must be maintained for a period after the drive is
disabled until the motor reaches zero speed. The field quench delay is the period of time
that the field is maintained for when the drive is disabled.
FLD. QUENCH MODE
186
QUENCH / STANDBY
After the field quench delay has expired, the field can be entirely quenched or put into a
standby mode at 50% of rated current or volts depending whether in current or voltage
control mode respectively. (The default standby value of 50% can be modified through the
"SYSTEM / Reserved" Menu which is primarily for factory use only and requires the
super password.)
FIELD I THRESHOLD
617
0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold for UP TO FIELD diagnostic.
6-39
FIELD CONTROL
FIELD CONTROL
DEFAULT
SETTING
ENABLED
NOTE (2)
TAG# PARAMETER
FIELD ENABLE
170
FLD VOLTAGE VARS

210
FIELD
AC VOLTAGE
[VF (AC) RMS]
RATIO OUT/IN
OUTPUT IN VOLTAGE MODE:

SUPPLY RATIO FIELD OUTPUT
90%
410V
460V
300V
460V
67%
90%
200V
230V
67%
230V
150V
90.00%
VOLTAGE
CONTROL
FROM FIELD
CURRENT LOOP
(FLD CURRENT
VARS)
TO FIELD
SCR FIRING
O/P
CURRENT
CONTROL
169
FIELD ENABLE
209 FLD CTRL MODE
VOLTAGE
186 FLD QUENCH MODE

185 FLD QUENCH DELAY
QUENCH
0.0 SECS
QUENCH
STAND BY
____
=O/P
2
NOTE [2]
DISABLING FIELD ENABLE PARAMETER
WILL AUTOMATICALLY OVERRIDE FIELD
FAILURE ALARM.
DRIVE RUN
FLD CURRENT VARS

DEFAULT
SETTING
0.10
1.28
TAG# PARAMETER
173
172
FIELD CURRENT
FEEDBACK
PROP. GAIN
INT. GAIN
-
FIELD WEAKENING
CURRENT DEMAND
(FROM FLD WEAK VARS)
183
SETPOINT
184
PI
+
FIELD DEMAND
171
TO FIELD CONTROL
MODE SELECT
(CURRENT / VOLTAGE)
FLD FIRING
ANGLE
100.00%
FLD WEAK VARS

TAG#
NOTE [1]
174 FLD WEAK ENABLE

175
176
177
EMF LEAD
EMF LAG
EMF GAIN
191
192
BEMF FBK LEAD

BEMF FBK LAG
BACK EMF
FEEDBACK
CALIBRATION
178 MAX VOLTS
179 MIN FLD CURRENT
NOTE [1]
STABLE FIELD WEAKENING
OPERATION REQUIRES ENCODER
OR ANALOG TACH FEEDBACK
DEFAULT
SETTING
DISABLED
PARAMETER
2.00
40.00
0.30
100
100
MOTOR
BEMF
FILTER
100.00%
100.00%
CLAMP
PID
+
TO FIELD
CURRENT LOOP FLD
CURRENT VARS
6-40
INERTIA COMP
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
3 ADVANCED
4 INERTIA COMP
INERTIA
This function block directly compensates

for load inertia during acceleration.
Inertia Comp
INERTIA COMP OUTPUT [602] 0.00 %

UNSCALED OUTPUT [603] 0.00 %
DELTA [601] 0.00 %
0.00 [556] INERTIA
0 [557] FILTER
100.00 [558] RATE CAL
This is particularly useful in high accuracy

applications such as positioning systems and
elevators.
The block calculates its output at the same
rate as the current loop for maximum performance.
FILTER
RATE CAL
DELTA
Parameter
Tag
Range
UNSCALED OUTPUT
INERTIA COMP OUTPUT
602
x.xx %
INERTIA COMP O/P
Inertia compensation directly added to the speed loop output.

UNSCALED OUTPUT
603
x.xx %
Unscaled inertia compensation.

DELTA
601
x.xx %
2
Rate of change of speed demand in %/s .

INERTIA
556
0.00 to 200.00 %
The value of current necessary to accelerate load to 100% speed in 1 second.

FILTER
557
0 to 20000
Low pass filter acting on the DELTA parameter.

RATE CAL
558
0.00 to 200.00
Inertia compensation scaling factor.
DELTA
SPEED DEMAND
dt
INERTIA
UNSCALED OUTPUT
FILTER
INERTIA COMP OUTPUT

to Speed Loop
RATE CAL
6-41
INHIBIT ALARMS
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 INHIBIT ALARMS
FIELD FAIL
5703 RCV ERROR
STALL TRIP
This allows you to disable certain

alarms and leave drive operation
un-interrupted if the related fault
occurs.
It also provides a view into current
and past trip conditions.
TRIP RESET
SPEED FBK ALARM
ENCODER ALARM
REM TRIP INHIBIT
MMI Menu Map
Caution
Do NOT inhibit any alarms if this
might result in danger to
personnel or equipment.
1 ALARM STATUS
LAST ALARM
HEALTH WORD
HEALTH STORE
Alarms
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
TRUE
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
10.0 SECS
READY [125]
HEALTHY [122]
HEALTH WORD [115]
HEALTH STORE [116]
REMOTE TRIP [542]
STALL TRIP [112]
LAST ALARM [528]
[ 19] FIELD FAIL
[111] 5703 RCV ERROR
[ 28] STALL TRIP INHIBIT
[305] TRIP RESET
[ 81] SPEED FBK ALARM
[ 92] ENCODER ALARM
[540] REM TRIP INHIBIT
[541] REM TRIP DELAY
FALSE
TRUE
0x0000
0x0000
FALSE
OK
NO ACTIVE ALARMS
The function block is contained in

three menus on the MMI:
INHIBIT ALARMS, ALARM STATUS and CALIBRATION.
THERMISTOR STATE
SPEED FBK STATE
STALL TRIP
REMOTE TRIP
Parameter
Tag
Range
READY
125
FALSE / TRUE

MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP PARAMETERS
CALIBRATION
REM TRIP DELAY
HEALTHY
122
FALSE / TRUE
(HEALTH LED)
HEALTH WORD
115
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The hexadecimal sum of any alarms present. Refer to Chapter 7: Trips and Fault Finding
- Alarm Messages.
HEALTH STORE
116
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
The hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm. Refer to Chapter 7: Trips and Fault
Finding - Alarm Messages.
REMOTE TRIP
542
FALSE / TRUE
112
OK / FAILED
The state of Remote Trip.

STALL TRIP
Armature current is above STALL THRESHOLD and AT ZERO SPEED but not AT
ZERO SETPOINT.
6-42
INHIBIT ALARMS
Parameter
Tag
Range
LAST ALARM
528
See below
The hexadecimal value of the last (or only) alarm. Refer to Chapter 7: Trips and Fault
Finding - Alarm Messages.
0x0000 : NO ACTIVE ALARMS
0x0001 : OVER SPEED
0x0002 : MISSING PULSE
0x0004 : FIELD OVER I
0x0008 : HEATSINK TRIP
0x0010 : THERMISTOR
0x0020 : OVER VOLTS (VA)
0x0040 : SPD FEEDBACK
0x0080 : ENCODER FAILED
0x0100 : FIELD FAILED
0x0200 : 3 PHASE FAILED
0x0400 : PHASE LOCK
0x0800 : 5703 RCV ERROR
0x1000 : STALL TRIP
0x2000 : OVER I TRIP
0xF005 : EXTERNAL TRIP
0x8000 : ACCTS FAILED
0xF001 : AUTOTUNE ERROR
0xF002 : AUTOTUNE ABORTED
0xF200 : CONFIG ENABLED
0xF400 : NO OP-STATION
0xF006 : REMOTE TRIP
0xFF05 : PCB VERSION
0xFF06 : PRODUCT CODE
FIELD FAIL
Inhibits the field fail alarm.
19
ENABLED / INHIBITED
5703 RCV ERROR

111
ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits 5703 serial communications receive error. Only active in Slave Mode.
STALL TRIP INHIBIT
28
ENABLED / INHIBITED
(STALL TRIP)
Inhibits the stall trip alarm from tripping out the contactor. This is useful in applications
requiring extended operation at zero speed.
TRIP RESET
305
FALSE / TRUE
When FALSE: the faults are latched permanently and the HEALTHY output remains
inactive, even when toggling the Start/Run input (C3) off/on. This feature can be used in
applications where you want to reset the faults under your own control, rather than
automatically with the Start/Run command To reset the drive, TRIP RESET must be set
TRUE.
When TRUE: faults are cleared whenever a Run signal is given to terminal C3.
SPEED FBK ALARM
81
Inhibits the speed feedback alarm.
ENABLED / INHIBITED
6-43
INHIBIT ALARMS
Parameter
Tag
Range
ENCODER ALARM
92
ENABLED / INHIBITED
Inhibits the encoder option board alarm.

REM TRIP INHIBIT
540
ENABLED / INHIBITED
541
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Inhibits the remote trip.

REM TRIP DELAY
The delay between the remote trip alarm being activated and the drive tripping.
INHIBIT ALARMS
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
SETTING
FIELD FAIL
ENABLED
111
5703 RCV ERROR
ENABLED
28
STALL TRIP INHIBIT
ENABLED
TAG#
19
FIELD CURRENT
LESS THAN 6% [1]
TO ALARM STATUS
FIELD FAIL
5703 RCV ERROR
5703 IN SLAVE MODE

AND COMMS ERROR
STALL TRIP
FROM CALIBRATION
STALL DELAY
AND STALL THRESHOLD
81 SPEED FBK ALARM
ENABLED
92
ENABLED
FROM CALIBRATION
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
ENCODER ALARM
ENCODER FEEDBACK
SELECTED AND ERROR
DETECTED
305
TRIP RESET
TRUE
DRIVE
START
NOTE [1]:
FIELD FAIL THRESHOLD IS 6% IN CURRENT CONTROL
12% IN VOLTAGE CONTROL
SPEED FBK ALARM
ENCODER ALARM
HEALTH RESET
6-44
INTERNAL LINKS
MMI Menu Map
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
INTERNAL LINKS
LINK 11
LINK 12
SOURCE TAG
DESTINATION TAG
ADVANCED
MODE
AUX. SOURCE
Use internal links to connect an internal input to an internal output, and to connect an
input terminal to multiple destinations.
Link 11
0
0
OFF
SWITCH
[390]
[394]
[392]
[393]
Link 12
OUTPUT DEST [391] 0

INPUT SOURCE
AUX INPUT SOURCE
ADVANCED
MODE
0
0
OFF
SWITCH
[395]
[399]
[397]
[398]
OUTPUT DEST [396] 0

INPUT SOURCE
AUX INPUT SOURCE
ADVANCED
MODE
None of the links are connected in the default configuration.
LINKS 1 to 10
Each link has a SOURCE TAG and DESTINATION TAG parameter. The default value for all
parameters is 0 (zero).
Parameter
Tag
LINK 1
OUTPUT DEST
365
(DESTINATION TAG)
Enter the tag number for the destination output value.
Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
INPUT SOURCE
364
(SOURCE TAG)
Enter the tag number of the source input value.
Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
LINK 2
OUTPUT DEST
367
INPUT SOURCE
366
LINK 3
OUTPUT DEST
369
INPUT SOURCE
368
LINK 4
OUTPUT DEST
371
INPUT SOURCE
370
LINK 5
OUTPUT DEST
455
INPUT SOURCE
454
LINK 6
OUTPUT DEST
457
INPUT SOURCE
456
LINK 7
OUTPUT DEST
459
INPUT SOURCE
458
LINK 8
OUTPUT DEST
461
INPUT SOURCE
460
LINK 9
OUTPUT DEST
468
INPUT SOURCE
467
LINK 10
OUTPUT DEST
470
INPUT SOURCE
469
Range
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
0 to 639
6-45
INTERNAL LINKS
LINKS 11 & 12
Special links 11 and 12 allow further functionality within the block diagram by using three
additional parameters: ADVANCED, AUX SOURCE and MODE. They can perform seven
functions, depending upon the values of the MODE and ADVANCED parameters.
Parameter
Tag
Range
OUTPUT DEST
391, 396
0 to 639
(DESTINATION TAG)
Enter the tag number for the destination output value. Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
INPUT SOURCE
390, 395
0 to 639
(SOURCE TAG)
Enter the tag number of the source input value. Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
AUX INPUT SOURCE
394, 399
0 to 639
(AUX.SOURCE)
Enter the tag number of a source input value to provide a second input for the two-input
functions of the MODE selection. Refer to Special Links, page 6-1.
ADVANCED
392, 397
OFF / ON
When OFF the link operates as a standard link (links 1 to 10), i.e. it copies INPUT to
OUTPUT. When ON the link's functionality changes depending on the MODE parameter
setting.
MODE
393, 398
See below
This determines which operation is performed on the INPUT (and sometimes also the AUX
INPUT) before copying the result into the OUTPUT. It can be combined with
ADVANCED to dynamically switch the OUTPUT between two inputs (INPUT and AUX
INPUT). The functionality of the various MODE selections are shown in the table.
0 : SWITCH
1 : INVERTER
2 : AND (logic)
3 : OR (boolean)
4 : SIGN CHANGER
5 : MODULUS
6 : COMPARATOR
MODE
Description
SWITCH - switches the signal source

between auxilliary and source analog or
logic tags
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
DESTINATION = SOURCE
DESTINATION = AUX SOURCE
INVERTER - inverts the source logic signal
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
DESTINATION = Logic Inversion of SOURCE
AND - gives AND-ed result of source logic

signal and an auxilliary source logic signal
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
DESTINATION = SOURCE AND AUX SOURCE
OR - gives OR-ed result of source logic

signal and an auxilliary source logic signal
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
DESTINATION = SOURCE OR AUX SOURCE
SIGN CHANGER - reverses the sign of the

source logic signal
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
DESTINATION = Value sign change of SOURCE
MODULUS - produces the modulus of the

source logic signal
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
DESTINATION = Modulus of SOURCE
COMPARATOR - changes destination logic

signal to TRUE when source analog signal is
greater than auxilliary analog signal
If ADVANCED = OFF
If ADVANCED = ON
If SOURCE < AUX SOURCE DESTINATION = 0
If SOURCE > AUX SOURCE DESTINATION = 1
6-46
INTERNAL LINKS
The following diagram shows the internal schematic for a special link.
Link 11 & Link 12

Mode
Inverter
Aux Source
Switch
AND
OR
-1
x
|x|
Sign Chg
Modulus
Comparator
Source
Dest
Advanced
6-47
INTERNAL LINKS
Internal Links - Example
Controlling both the acceleration and deceleration times of the drive ramp
through analog input 1 (default terminal A2)
This example is similar to the first example in ANALOG INPUTS, page 6-5.
As before, the ends of the external potentiometer are connected to the drive's 0V and +10V dc
supply (terminals A1 and B3). The wiper of the potentiometer is connected to terminal A2.
The CALIBRATION parameter of ANALOG INPUT 1 (Tag 230) is set to 5.00%. This scales
the input signal (from 0.1 to 600 seconds) to 30 seconds maximum.
However, in this example INTERNAL LINK is used to allow the external potentiometer to
control both the acceleration and deceleration times of the ramp.
To do this:
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE.
2.
Find the tag number for RAMP ACCELTIME and RAMP DECEL TIME either from
the RAMPS function block detail in this chapter, or from the Parameter Table: MMI
Order - refer to Chapter 10. (They are 2 and 3 respectively).
3.
Set ANIN 1 (A2)::DESTINATION TAG (OUTPUT) to 2 (for RAMP ACCEL

TIME).
4.
Set ANIN 1 (A2)::CALIBRATION to 0.500 (5.00%).
5.
Set ANIN 1 (A2)::MAX VALUE to 100.00%.
6.
Set ANIN 1 (A2)::MIN VALUE to 0.00%.
7.
Exit the ANALOG INPUTS sub-menu and scroll down to INTERNAL LINKS. Enter
the INTERNAL LINKS sub-menu.
8.
Set LINK 1::SOURCE TAG to 2 (for RAMP ACCEL TIME), which is also the
destination tag for the output of the ANIN 1 (A2) function block.
9.
Set LINK1::DESTINATION TAG to 3 (for RAMP DECEL TIME).
10. Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to DISABLE.

Analog Input 1 (terminal A2) now controls both the speed ramp acceleration and deceleration
times, over a range of 0 to 30 seconds. An input of 10V dc sets the ramp up and down times to
30 seconds.
Analog Input 1
OUTPUT [246] 2
100.00 % [231] MAX VALUE
0.00 % [232] MIN VALUE
ANIN 1 (A2)
[ 50] 0.00 VOLTS
LINK 1
10.0 s
10.0 s
ENABLED
OFF
FALSE
0.00 %
2.50 %
0.50 %
ENABLED
DISABLED
0.00 %
0.00 %
[ 2]
[ 3]
[ 4]
[118]
[620]
[ 5]
[266]
[286]
[287]
[288]
[422]
[126]
Ramps
RAMP OUTPUT [ 85] 0.00 %
RAMPING [113] FALSE
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP DECEL TIME
CONSTANT ACCEL
RAMP HOLD
INVERT
RAMP INPUT
% S-RAMP
RAMPING THRESH.
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
MIN. SPEED
6-48
JOG/SLACK
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 JOG/SLACK
JOG SPEED 1
JOG SPEED 2
TAKE UP 1
TAKE UP 2
CRAWL SPEED
MODE
RAMP RATE
This block can be used to provide jog, take

up slack and crawl speed functions.
The inputs to this block are the Start and Jog
signals via AUX I/O, and the speed demand
from the RAMPS function block. The output of
this block is connected to the RAMPS function
block.
Jog/Slack
5.00 %
-5.00 %
5.00 %
-5.00 %
10.00 %
FALSE
1.0 SECS
OPERATING MODE [212] STOP

[218] JOG SPEED 1
[219] JOG SPEED 2
[253] TAKE UP 1
[254] TAKE UP 2
[225] CRAWL SPEED
[228] MODE
[355] RAMP RATE
The JOG/SLACK parameters modify or replace

the ramp input speed demand. You should use a
spare digital input to switch between modes to achieve full functionality.
The ramp input speed demand from RAMPS is modified as required by MODE, Start, and
Jog. These settings are shown in the Setpoint Selection table.
Jog: With the Start signal OFF, the jog speed demand replaces the ramp input speed
demand. MODE selects between jog setpoints 1 and 2. The jog RAMP RATE replaces
the RAMP ACCEL TIME and RAMP DECEL TIME in the RAMPS function block. % SRAMP is also set to 0.00%.
Take Up Slack: With the Start signal ON, the jog signal performs a "take up slack"
function. When a jog signal is received, the take up slack setpoint is added to the ramp
input speed demand. MODE and Jog settings, from the table, select between the two takeup slack setpoints.
Crawl: CRAWL SPEED replaces the ramp input speed demand as the output signal when
both Start and Jog signals are ON, and MODE is TRUE.
Parameter
Tag
Range
OPERATING MODE
212
See below
0 : STOP
1 : STOP
2 : JOG SP. 1
3 : JOG SP. 2
4 : RUN
5 : TAKE UP SP. 1
6 : TAKE UP SP. 2
7 : CRAWL
JOG SPEED 1
218
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed setpoint 1.
JOG SPEED 2
219
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed setpoint 2.
TAKE UP 1
253
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Take-up slack speed setpoint 1.
TAKE UP 2
254
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Take-up slack speed setpoint 2.
CRAWL SPEED
225
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Crawl speed setpoint.
MODE
228
FALSE / TRUE
Selects jog speed setpoints, take up setpoints, and the crawl setpoint. To achieve full
functionality, connect MODE to a spare digital input.
RAMP RATE
355
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
The ramp rate used while jogging. This is independent of the main ramp rate during normal
running. The acceleration and deceleration times in jog are always equal.
6-49
JOG/SLACK
Note: The setpoint column in the table below refers to the Ramp Input ONLY, as indicated in
the table. Any "direct" setpoints present will also add to this setpoint to make the total
speed setpoint. If you don't want this to happen, for example during jogging, then
disconnect the direct setpoint(s) during the appropriate conditions.
Setpoint Selection Table
Operating Mode Start
C3
Jog
C4
Mode Ramp Input

Tag No (see Note above)
228
Ramp Time
Contactor
0 : Stop
OFF
False
Setpoint
Default
OFF
OFF
OFF
1 : Stop
OFF
OFF
True
Setpoint
Default
2 : Inch / Jog 1
OFF
ON
False
Jog Speed 1
Jog Ramp Rate ON
3 ; Inch / Jog 2
OFF
ON
True
Jog Speed 2
Jog Ramp Rate ON
4 : Run
ON
OFF
False
Setpoint
Default
ON
5 : Take-Up
Slack 1
ON
ON
False
Setpoint + Take-Up Slack 1 Default
ON
6 : Take-Up
Slack 2
ON
OFF
True
Setpoint + Take-Up Slack 2 Default
ON
7 : Crawl
ON
ON
True
Crawl Speed
ON
Default
RAMP INPUT
RUN (C3)
JOG (C4)
JOG (C4)
0%
RAMP INPUT + TAKE UP 1
RAMP INPUT
JOG SPEED 1
0%
RAMP RATE
set in JOG/SLACK
RAMP ACCEL TIME

set in RAMPS
RAMP DECEL TIME

set in RAMPS
Block Diagram
TAKE UP 1
0
TAKE UP 2
MIN SPEED
RAMP INPUT
(from RAMPS
function block)
(see RAMPS
function block)
% S-RAMP
(see RAMPS
function block)
JOG 1
CRAWL SPEED
JOG 2
RAMP RATE
Jog/Slack Function
6-50
MENUS
MMI Menu Map
1
MENUS
FULL MENUS
LANGUAGE
Use this block to select either the full MMI menu

structure, or a reduced menu structure for easier
navigation.
Menus
ENABLED [ 37] FULL MENUS

ENGLISH [304] LANGUAGE
You can also select the display language for the MMI.
Parameter
Tag
Range
FULL MENUS
37
DISABLED / ENABLED
When enabled, the full MMI menu structure is displayed on the MMI.
LANGUAGE
304
ENGLISH / OTHER
Selects the MMI display language. Other languages are available, please contact SSD
Drives. Refer also to Chapter 5: The Operator Station - Selecting the Display Language.
6-51
miniLINK
MMI Menu Map
1
SYSTEM
miniLINK
VALUE 1
VALUE 2
VALUE 3
VALUE 4
These parameters are general purpose tags.

By using a VALUE or LOGIC as a staging post, a
function block destination may be connected to a
function block source.
These parameters are used extensivley by Tech Boxes
in order to map the field bus parameters into the
drive. Refer to the appropriate Tech Box manual.
VALUE 5
0.00 % [340] VALUE 2

0.00 % [341] VALUE 3
0.00 % [342] VALUE 4
0.00 % [343] VALUE 5
0.00 % [344] VALUE 6
0.00 % [345] VALUE 7
0.00 % [379] VALUE 8
VALUE 6
VALUE 7
miniLINK
0.00 % [339] VALUE 1
0.00 % [380] VALUE 9
VALUE 8
0.00 % [381] VALUE 10
VALUE 9
0.00 % [382] VALUE 11
VALUE 10
0.00 % [383] VALUE 12
VALUE 11
0.00 % [384] VALUE 13
VALUE 12
0.00 % [385] VALUE 14
VALUE 13
OFF [346] LOGIC 1
VALUE 14
OFF [347] LOGIC 2
LOGIC 1
OFF [348] LOGIC 3
LOGIC 2
OFF [349] LOGIC 4
LOGIC 3
OFF [350] LOGIC 5
LOGIC 4
OFF [351] LOGIC 6
LOGIC 5
LOGIC 6
OFF [352] LOGIC 7
LOGIC 7
OFF [353] LOGIC 8
LOGIC 8
Parameter
Tag
Range
VALUE 1 to VALUE 14
339 to 385
-300.00% to 300.00%
LOGIC 1 to LOGIC 8
346 to 353
OFF / ON
For example, an ANALOG I/P may be connected directly to an ANALOG O/P via VALUE 1.
ANIN 1
ANOUT 1
writes ANIN1 to VALUE 1
DESTINATION TAG
SET TO 339
VALUE 1
TAG 339
reads ANIN1 from VALUE 1

SOURCE TAG
SET TO 339
6-52
OP STATION
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 OP-STATION
3 SET UP
MMI Set-up options and Local setpoint

information.
This function block is viewed in three
separate menus on the MMI: SET UP,
START UP VALUES and LOCAL RAMP.
SETPOINT
JOG SETPOINT
LOCAL KEY ENABLE
MMI Menu Map
Op Station
TRUE
0.00 %
5.00 %
10.0 SECS
10.0 SECS
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
0.00 %
5.00 %
ERROR REPORT
[158] 0x0000
[511] LOCAL KEY ENABLE
[512] SETPOINT
[513] JOG SETPOINT
[514] RAMP ACCEL TIME
[515] RAMP DECEL TIME
[516] INITIAL FWD DIRECTION
[517] INITIAL LOCAL
[518] INITIAL PROGRAM
[519] INITIAL SETPOINT
[520] INITIAL JOG SETPOINT
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 OP-STATION
Parameter
3 START UP VALUES
ERROR REPORT
158
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
(OP STATION ERROR)
The last communication error.
LOCAL KEY ENABLE
511
FALSE / TRUE
Enables the LOCAL/REMOTE control key on the op-station. Set to TRUE to allow the
operator to toggle between local and remote modes.
SETPOINT
512
0.00 to 100.00 %
SET UP menu - Actual value of local setpoint. This value is not persistent.
JOG SETPOINT
513
0.00 to 100.00 %
SET UP menu - Actual value of local jog setpoint. This value is not persistent.
RAMP ACCEL TIME
514
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Acceleration time used while in Local mode.
RAMP DECEL TIME
515
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Deceleration time used while in Local mode.
INITIAL FWD DIRECTION
516
FALSE / TRUE
(FORWARD)
Start-up mode of local direction on power-up. Set to TRUE for Forward.
INITIAL LOCAL
517
FALSE / TRUE
(LOCAL)
Start-up mode of Operator Station LOCAL/REMOTE control key on power-up. Set to
TRUE for Local mode.
INITIAL PROGRAM
518
FALSE / TRUE
(PROGRAM)
Start-up mode of Operator Station PROG key on power-up. Set to TRUE for Program mode
to see the local setpoint.
INITIAL SETPOINT
519
0.00 to 100.00 %
(SETPOINT)
START UP VALUES menu - Default value of local setpoint on power-up.
INITIAL JOG SETPOINT
520
0.00 to 100.00 %
(JOG SETPOINT)
START UP VALUES menu - Default Value of local jog setpoint on power up.
SETPOINT
JOG SETPOINT
FORWARD
PROGRAM
LOCAL
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 OP-STATION
3 LOCAL RAMP
RAMP ACCEL TIME

RAMP DECEL TIME
Tag
Range
6-53
OP STATION
Local Setpoint
Local Ramp
Stop Ramp
Up Key
Down Key
Reset Value
Accel Time
Decel Time
% S-Ramp
Local Setpoint (only active when the drive is in Local mode)
6-54
PASSWORD (MMI only)

MMI Menu Map
1 PASSWORD
Use this MMI menu to activate or deactivate the password protection feature.
Refer to Chapter 5: The Operator Station - Password Protection for further instruction.
ENTER PASSWORD
BY-PASS PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
Parameter
Tag
ENTER PASSWORD
Default = 0x0000.
120
Range
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
BY-PASS PASSWORD
526
Default = FALSE
FALSE / TRUE
CHANGE PASSWORD
Default = 0x0000.
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
121
6-55
PID
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 PID
PROP. GAIN
INT.TIME.CONST
DERIVATIVE TC
POSITIVE LIMIT
NEGATIVE LIMIT
O/P SCALER(TRIM)
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
RATIO 1
RATIO 2
DIVIDER 1
DIVIDER 2
ENABLE
INT. DEFEAT
FILTER T.C.
MODE
MIN PROFILE GAIN
PROFILED GAIN
This is a general purpose PID block which

can be used for many different closed loop
control applications.
The PID feedback can be loadcell tension,
dancer position or any other transducer
feedback such as pressure, flow etc.
This block is ignored by the drive unless
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK
DIAGRAM::PID O/P DEST is connected to a
non-zero tag.
Pid
1.0
5.00 s
0.000 s
100.00 %
-100.00 %
0.2000
0.00 %
0.00 %
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
ENABLED
OFF
0.100 s
0
20.00 %
PID OUTPUT [417]

PID CLAMPED [416]
PID ERROR [415]
[404] PROP. GAIN
[402] INT. TIME CONST.
[401] DERIVATIVE TC
[405] POSITIVE LIMIT
[406] NEGATIVE LIMIT
[407] O/P SCALER (TRIM)
[410] INPUT 1
[411] INPUT 2
[412] RATIO 1
[413] RATIO 2
[418] DIVIDER 1
[414] DIVIDER 2
[408] ENABLE
[409] INT. DEFEAT
[403] FILTER T.C.
[473] MODE
[474] MIN PROFILE GAIN
PROFILED GAIN [475]
Features:
Independent adjustment of gain and time
constants.
Additional first-order filter (F).
Functions P, PI, PD, PID with/without F
individually selected.
Ratio and divider for scaling each input.
Independent positive and negative limits.
Output scaler (Trim).
Gain profiled by diameter for centre-driven winder control.
Parameter
Tag
Range
PID OUTPUT
417
xxx.xx %
0.00 %
FALSE
0.00 %
0.0

PID CLAMPED
416
FALSE / TRUE

PID ERROR
415
xxx.xx %

PROP. GAIN
404
0.0 to 100.0
The maximum limit of the proportional gain. This is a pure gain factor which shifts up or
down the whole Bode PID transfer function leaving the time constants unaffected. A value
of P = 10.0 means that, for an error of 5%, the proportional part (initial step) of the PID
output will be: 10 x [ 1 + (Td/Ti) ] x 5 %, i.e. approx. 50% for Td << Ti.
INT. TIME CONST.
402
0.01 to 100.00 s
401
0.000 to 10.000 s
The integral time constant (Ti)

DERIVATIVE TC
The derivative time constant (Td). Set this value to 0.000 to remove the derivative term.
POSITIVE LIMIT
405
0.00 to 105.00 %
The upper limit of the PID algorithm.

NEGATIVE LIMIT
406
The lower limit of the PID algorithm.
-105.00 to 0.00 %
6-56
PID
Parameter
Tag
Range
O/P SCALER (TRIM)

407
-3.0000 to 3.0000
(O/P SCALER(TRIM))
The ratio that the limited PID output is multiplied by in order to give the final PID Output.
Normally this ratio would be between 0 and 1.
INPUT 1
410
-300.00 to 300.00 %
PID setpoint input. This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.
INPUT 2
411
-300.00 to 300.00 %
PID feedback input. This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset
RATIO 1
412
-3.0000 to 3.0000
This multiplies Input 1 by a factor (Ratio 1).
RATIO 2
413
-3.0000 to 3.0000
This multiplies Input 2 by a factor (Ratio 2).
DIVIDER 1
418
-3.0000 to 3.0000
This divides Input 1 by a factor (Divider 1).
DIVIDER 2
414
-3.0000 to 3.0000
This divides Input 2 by a factor (Divider 2).
ENABLE
408
DISABLED / ENABLED
Enables or disables the PID output.
INT. DEFEAT
409
OFF / ON
When ON, the Integral term is disabled. The block transfer function then becomes P+D
only.
FILTER T.C.
403
0.000 to 10.000 s
A first-order filter for removing high frequency noise from the PID output. When set to
0.000 the filter is removed. The high frequency lift of the transfer function is determined by
the ratio k of the Derivative Time Const (Td) over the Filter Time Constant (Tf) - typically
4 of 5.
MODE
473
0 to 4
This determines the shape of the proportional gain profile. The higher the setting, the
steeper the curve of the profiled gain.
For Mode = 0, Profiled Gain = constant = P.
For Mode = 1, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter - min diameter) + B.
For Mode = 2, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter - min diameter)^2 + B.
MIN PROFILE GAIN
474
0.00 to 100.00 %
This expresses the minimum gain required at minimum diameter (core) as a percentage of
the (maximum) P gain at full diameter (100%), when MODE > 0.
PROFILED GAIN
475
xxxx.x
The proportional gain after profiling by a profiler block which varies the gain versus
diameter. This is primarily to be used with Speed Profiled Winders for compensation
against varying diameter and therefore inertia.
When MODE is not ZERO (see above) this overrides the P gain above.
When MODE = 0, then PROFILED GAIN = PROP. GAIN.
6-57
PID
The following block diagram shows the internal structure of the PID block.
PID is used to control the response of any closed loop system. It is used specifically in system
applications involving the control of drives to allow zero steady state error between Reference
and Feedback, together with good transient performance.
The block executes a Proportional Gain + Integral + Derivative control algorithm, with an
added filter to attenuate high-frequency noise. You can select P, PD, PI or PID as required.
Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN)
This is used to adjust the basic response of the closed loop control system. It is
defined as the portion of the loop gain fed back to make the complete control loop
stable. The PID error is multiplied by the Proportional Gain to produce an output.
Integral (INT. TIME CONST.)
The Integral term is used to give zero steady state error between the setpoint and
feedback values of the PID. If the integral is set to a small value, this will cause an
underdamped or unstable control system.
Derivative (DERIVATIVE TC)
This is used to correct for certain types of control loop instability, and therefore
improve response. It is sometimes used when heavy or large inertia rolls are being
controlled. The derivative term has an associated filter to suppress high frequency
signals.
The algorithm modifies the error between the setpoint and the feedback with the proportional,
integral, and derivative terms. The error is clamped internally to 105% maximum.
The proportional, integral, and derivative terms are scaled by PROP. GAIN, INT. TIME
CONST., and DERIVATIVE TC respectively. An additional gain profiler can modify the
proportional gain as the roll diameter changes. The block diagram shows how the proportional
gain changes when using the profiler.
Proportional Gain
Proportional gain scales the
output based upon the input
error. Increasing PROP.
GAIN will improve the
response time while
increasing overshoot. MODE
selects the proportional gain
profile. When set to 0, the
proportional gain remains
constant over the entire roll.
Changing the value of
MODE increases the profile
as shown opposite.
You should try to achieve a
critically damped response
which allows the mechanics
to track as precisely as
possible a step change on the
setpoint.
Integral Gain
Critically Damped Response

Underdamped
Setpoint
Value
Overdamped
Critically damped
Time
Setpoint
Time
Integral eliminates steady-state error. Reducing INT. TIME CONST. improves the response,
however, if it is set too short it will cause instability. The integral value is clamped internally
by the settings of POSITIVE LIMIT and NEGATIVE LIMIT. It is also held at the last value
when the PID CLAMPED output is TRUE. Setting INT. DEFEAT to ON will disable the
integral gain term.
6-58
PID
Derivative Gain
Derivative gain instantaneously boosts the PID output signal. Increasing DERIVATIVE TC
decreases the damping, which in most cases causes overshoot and oscillations resulting in an
unacceptable system response.
Note: For most applications, derivative gain is never used and is usually left at its default value
of 0.000 seconds.
Derivative gain can improve response in some dancer tension controlled systems, particularly
those systems with high inertia dancers which need an instantaneous response to overcome the
weight of the dancer roll. For loadcell controlled tension systems, derivative gain is almost
never used.
The block diagram below shows the types of system responses possible, MODE = 0 to MODE
= 4.
In underdamped systems, the output oscillates and the settling time increases.
Critically damped systems have no overshoot or oscillations. They reach the setpoint
within the desired response time.
Overdamped systems do not oscillate but do not reach the setpoint within the desired
response time.
Prop
[404]
Integral Defeat
[409]
Gain Profiler
PID Gain
Mode = 0
Mode
Profiled Gain
[475]
[473]
1
Pmin
[474]
Block Diagram
Enable
[408]
4
Diam*
Dmin
Dmax
Ratio 1
[412]
Divider 1
[418]
O/P Scaler
(Trim) [407]
P
Input 1
[410]
[402]
I
[401]
Input 2
[411]
D
Ratio 2
[413]
Divider 2
[414]
PID Error
[415]
Pos limit
[405]
Reset
+
+
+
[403]
PID Output
[417]
F
+
0%
Neg Limit
[406]
PID Clamped
[416]
* - Linked internally to Diameter Calculator
Operators can read the PID error, PID output, setpoint and feedback on the drive's MMI by
monitoring the following values:
PID ERROR : displayed in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
PID OUTPUT : displayed in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
SETPOINT : monitored at SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID::INPUT 1
FEEDBACK : monitored at SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID::INPUT

2
6-59
PRESET
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The Preset block allows you to select one of

eight preset inputs, which in turn may be
connected to other blocks of inputs.
2 PRESET SPEEDS
SELECT 1
SELECT 2
SELECT 3
INVERT O/P
MAX SPEED
LIMIT
GRAY SCALE
INPUT 0
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
Preset
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
100.0
FALSE
FALSE
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PRESET OP (%) [572] 0.00 %

OUTPUT [593] 0.0
[560] SELECT 1
[561] SELECT 2
[562] SELECT 3
[563] INVERT
[559] MAX SPEED
[600] LIMIT
[610] GRAY SCALE
[564] INPUT 0
[565] INPUT 1
[566] INPUT 2
[567] INPUT 3
[568] INPUT 4
[569] INPUT 5
[570] INPUT 6
[571] INPUT 7
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
PRESET O/P
OUTPUT
Parameter
Tag
PRESET OP (%)
572
Range
x.xx %
Scales the selected preset input by MAX SPEED.

OUTPUT
593
x.x
Outputs the selected INPUT value.

SELECT 1
560
FALSE / TRUE
561
FALSE / TRUE
562
FALSE / TRUE
563
FALSE / TRUE
Select inputs 1
SELECT 2
Select inputs 2
SELECT 3
Select inputs 3
INVERT
Changes the sign of the output. If TRUE, the output is of the opposite sign to the selected
input.
MAX SPEED
559
0.1 to 3000.0
600
FALSE / TRUE
Scaler for PRESET OP (%).

LIMIT
Clamp output to MAX SPEED if TRUE.

GRAY SCALE
610
FALSE / TRUE
Selects Gray Scale encoding when TRUE, Binary encoding when FALSE. When gray scale
is selected, only one input changes between state preventing the mis-selection of
intermediate states.
INPUT 0 to INPUT 7
Pre-set input variables.
564, 565, 566, 567,

568, 569, 570, 571
-3000.0 to 3000.0
6-60
PRESET
INPUT 0
INPUT 1
OUTPUT
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
100%
INPUT 4
MAX SPEED
PRESET OP %
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INVERT O/P
SELECT 1
SELECT 2
SELECT 3
Selection Table
Three Boolean variables used to select between one of the 8 preset values.
BINARY ENCODING
Select 3
Select 2
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
Select 1
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GRAY SCALE ENCODING

Select 3
Select 2
Select 1
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6-61
RAISE/LOWER
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 RAISE/LOWER
RESET VALUE
INCREASE RATE
DECREASE RATE
RAISE INPUT
LOWER INPUT
MIN VALUE
MAX VALUE
EXTERNAL RESET
This function block acts as an internal

motorised potentiometer (MOP).
DIAGRAM::RAISE/LOWER DEST is
connected to a non-zero tag
The OUTPUT is not preserved when the drive
is powered-down.
Raise/Lower
0.00 %
10.0 s
10.0 s
FALSE
FALSE
-100.00 %
100.00 %
FALSE
[255]
[256]
[257]
[261]
[262]
[258]
[259]
[307]
OUTPUT [264] 0.00 %

RESET VALUE
INCREASE RATE
DECREASE RATE
RAISE INPUT
LOWER INPUT
MIN VALUE
MAX VALUE
EXTERNAL RESET
By default, this block has no inputs or outputs

connected.
Parameter
Tag
Range
OUTPUT
264
xxx.xx %
(RAISE/LOWER O/P)
RESET VALUE
255
-300.00 to 300.00 %
This reset value is pre-loaded directly into the output when EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE,
or at power-up. It is clamped by MIN VALUE and MAX VALUE.
INCREASE RATE
256
0.1 to 600.0 s
Rate of change of an increasing output value.

DECREASE RATE
257
0.1 to 600.0 s
Rate of change of a decreasing output value.

RAISE INPUT
261
FALSE / TRUE
Command to raise the output value. When TRUE, increases the output at the rate
determined by INCREASE RATE.
LOWER INPUT
262
FALSE / TRUE
Command to lower the output value. When TRUE, decreases the output at the rate
determined by DECREASE RATE.
MIN VALUE
258
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Minimum ramp output clamp. This is a plain clamp, not a ramped "min speed" setting.
MAX VALUE
259
-300.00 to 300.00 %
307
FALSE / TRUE
Maximum ramp output clamp.

EXTERNAL RESET
When TRUE, sets the output of the Raise/Lower block to the RESET VALUE.
6-62
RAISE/LOWER
EXTERNAL RESET
RAISE INPUT
TRUE
LOWER INPUT
RAISE INPUT
t
FALSE
RAISE/LOWER
INPUT
100%
100%
X%
0%
RAISE/LOWER
OUTPUT %
t
RESET VALUE
INCREASE RATE
DEFAULT=0.00% DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
DECREASE RATE
DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
The diagram above illustrates the raise/lower functionality.

When EXTERNAL RESET is set TRUE, the raise/lower output resets to RESET VALUE
(default = 0.00%).
When RAISE INPUT is TRUE, the output increases at INCREASE RATE. The output cannot
exceed MAX VALUE.
The reverse is true when LOWER INPUT is TRUE: LOWER INPUT reduces the output at
DECREASE RATE. The output cannot drop below MIN VALUE.
The ramp is held at its last value when the RAISE and LOWER INPUT are removed.
Setting both RAISE INPUT and LOWER INPUT to TRUE at the same time creates a ramp
hold condition.
(256)
INCREASE RATE
(257)
DECREASE RATE
(255)
RESET VALUE
(261)
RAISE INPUT
(262)
LOWER INPUT
(307)
EXTERNAL RESET
RAISE / LOWER
RAMP
OUTPUT
Dest. Tag.
(260)
(259)
MIN VALUE
(258)
MAX VALUE
If Reset, Output = Reset Value (Clamped)
6-63
RAMPS
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 RAMPS
RAMP ACCEL TIME

RAMP DECEL TIME
RAMP HOLD
INVERT
RAMP INPUT
% S-RAMP
RAMPING THRESH.
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
MIN SPEED
The RAMPS parameters set the shape and

duration of the ramp used for starting and
changing speeds.
DIAGRAM::RAMP O/P DEST is connected to
a non-zero tag
Note: The STOP RATES menu contains a
separate deceleration rate for
controlled stopping of the drive.
The default inputs are ANIN 3 (A4) for a
ramped speed input, and DIGIN 2 (C7) to
switch RAMP HOLD. The default output
connection is to SPEED LOOP::SETPOINT 3.
Ramps
10.0 s
10.0 s
ENABLED
OFF
FALSE
0.00 %
2.50 %
0.50 %
ENABLED
DISABLED
0.00 %
0.00 %
[ 2]
[ 3]
[ 4]
[118]
[620]
[ 5]
[266]
[286]
[287]
[288]
[422]
[126]
RAMP OUTPUT [ 85] 0.00 %

RAMPING [113] FALSE
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP DECEL TIME
CONSTANT ACCEL
RAMP HOLD
INVERT
RAMP INPUT
% S-RAMP
RAMPING THRESH.
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
MIN. SPEED
The input signal to the block is clamped by MIN SPEED, which sets the minimum ramp input
speed when the drive is enabled.
RAMP INPUT is routed to the JOG/SLACK function block to be modified as determined by
the JOG inputs. The RAMPS block then shapes the signal to produce the RAMP OUTPUT
signal.
The RAMPING output becomes TRUE when the absolute value of the difference between
RAMP OUTPUT and the JOG/SLACK function block output exceeds RAMPING THRESH.
RAMP ACCEL TIME and RAMP DECEL TIME set the acceleration and deceleration times
taken for input changes. % S-RAMP adds a "S" shaped section to the linear ramp. When set to
0.00%, the ramp will be linear. As the percentage is increased, 350% of the ramp time is
added to the linear ramp creating more gradual starting and stopping. The formula for the
actual ramp time is shown below. Ramp time is the value of parameters RAMP ACCEL TIME
or RAMP DECEL TIME.
Actual Ramp Time = RAMP TIME x (3.5 x % S-RAMP/100 + 1)
RAMP HOLD stops the ramp from changing. When DIGIN 2 (C7) is ON, the ramp stays at
the last ramp value.
The reset signal can have two sources, a RUN signal or an external reset signal. When AUTO
RESET is ENABLED, the ramp resets whenever a Run signal is given at terminal C3.
Connecting a digital input to EXTERNAL RESET allows an external source to reset the ramp.
6-64
RAMPS
Parameter
Tag
Range
RAMP OUTPUT
85
xxx.xx %

RAMPING
113
FALSE / TRUE

RAMP ACCEL TIME
0.1 to 600.0 s
The acceleration time for 100% change.

RAMP DECEL TIME
0.1 to 600.0 s
The deceleration time for 100% change.

CONSTANT ACCEL
DISABLED / ENABLED

RAMP HOLD
118
OFF / ON
When ON, the ramp output is held at its last value. This is overridden by a ramp reset.
INVERT
620
FALSE / TRUE
Inverts the RAMP INPUT signal.

RAMP INPUT
-105.00 to 105.00 %
266
0.00 to 100.00 %
Input value.
% S-RAMP
Percentage of ramp with S-shaped rate of change. A value of zero is equivalent to a linear
ramp. Changing this value affects the ramp times.
RAMPING THRESH.
286
0.00 to 100.00 %
Ramping flag threshold level. The threshold is used to detect whether the ramp is active.
AUTO RESET
287
DISABLED / ENABLED
When ENABLED, the ramp is reset whenever SYSTEM RESET is TRUE. (SYSTEM
RESET Tag 374 is an internal flag that is set TRUE for one cycle after the Speed/Current
loop is enabled, i.e. every time the drive is started).
6-65
RAMPS
Parameter
Tag
Range
EXTERNAL RESET
288
DISABLED / ENABLED
When ENABLED, the ramp is reset to RESET VALUE. EXTERNAL RESET does not
depend on AUTO RESET for its operation.
RESET VALUE
422
-300.00 to 300.00 %
The ramp output value at power-up, or when the ramp is reset. In order to catch a spinning
load smoothly (`bumpless transfer) connect SPEED FEEDBACK Tag No. 62 (source) to
RESET VALUE Tag No. 422 (destination).
MIN. SPEED
126
0.00 to 100.00 %
(MIN SPEED)
The minimum speed clamp is fully bi-directional and operates with a 0.5% hysterisis. This
clamp operates on the input to the ramp and it can therefore be overridden by the RESET
VALUE as far as the ramp output is concerned.
Minimum Speed
Output
Input
-0.5 0
0.5
RAMPING THRESH.
I/P
O/P
% S-RAMP
RAMPING
INVERT
I/P
RAMP INPUT
Jog /
Slack
O/P
0
RAMP OUTPUT
t
"S" RAMP
MIN. SPEED
RAMP DECEL TIME
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP HOLD
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
6-66
RAMPS
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION RATES
RAMP INPUT (+ 100%)
0%
+100%
RAMP OUTPUT
0%
RAMP DECEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%)
RAMP ACCEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%)
ACTUAL DECEL TIME

WITH S RAMP
ACTUAL ACCEL TIME

WITH S RAMP
0%
RAMP INPUT (-100%)
0%
RAMP OUTPUT
-100%
RAMP ACCEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%)
RAMP DECEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%)
ACTUAL ACCEL TIME

WITH S RAMP
ACTUAL DECEL TIME

WITH S RAMP
RAMP HOLD
RAMP HOLD ON
100%
0%
RAMP INPUT %
RAMP HOLD OFF
RAMP HOLD OFF
100%
0%
RAMP OUTPUT %
The ramp will function when a ramp input is present. When DIGIN 2 (C7) is ON, RAMP
HOLD stops the ramp from changing. Even when the ramp input signal is removed, RAMP
HOLD keeps the ramp output from changing. Once RAMP HOLD is OFF, the ramp resumes.
6-67
RAMPS
100%
AUTO RESET
DRIVE ENABLED
DRIVE ENABLED
RAMP INPUT = X%
X%
DRIVE DISABLED
0%
RAMP INPUT %
100%
X%
= RAMP INPUT X %
RAMP OUTPUT
0%
RAMP OUTPUT %
When AUTO RESET is ENABLED, ramp output resets to RESET VALUE each time the
drive is enabled. In this example RESET VALUE is 0.00%. It does not reset if the drive is
disabled.
EXTERNAL RESET
100%
X%
RAMP INPUT X%
EXTERNAL RESET ENABLED
0%
RAMP INPUT %
100%
X%
= RAMP I/P X%
Y%
0%
RAMP OUPUT %
The ramp input is set to X% at time t0. The ramp output will increase at the ramp rate.
While EXTERNAL RESET is ENABLED, the ramp output resets to RESET VALUE (Y%).
When EXTERNAL RESET is DISABLED, the ramp output continues to follow the input
signal.
MIN SPEED
100%
DRIVE ENABLED (AND AUTO RESET ENABLED)

RAMP INPUT
X%
0%
RAMP INPUT %
100%
RAMP INPUT
X%
Y%
0%
RAMP OUTPUT %
MIN. SPEED = Y%
t
NOTE: THE POLARITY OF SPEED SETPOINT DETERMINES THE DIRECTION OF MIN. SPEED
This figure shows the effect of setting MIN. SPEED above 0.00%. When the drive is enabled,
the ramp output cannot fall below the value set by MIN. SPEED. Notice the ramp rates are
used when changing the output from minimum speed to zero speed. Notice also that in this
example the ramp output only increases to X% since the ramp input signal is limited to X%.
6-68
SETPOINT SUM 1
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SETPOINT SUM 1
RATIO 1
RATIO 0
SIGN 1
SIGN 0
DIVIDER 1
DIVIDER 0
DEADBAND WIDTH
LIMIT
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
INPUT 0
Use this block to sum and scale up to three

analog inputs to produce the SPT. SUM
output.
DIAGRAM::SPT SUM 1 DEST is connected
to a non-zero tag. The default connection is to
Tag 289, SETPOINT 1.
Analog Input 1, terminal A2 is the default
input. By default, the output SPT. SUM
connects to SETPOINT 1 in the speed loop.
Setpoint Sum 1
1.0000
1.0000
POSITIVE
POSITIVE
1.0000
1.0000
0.0 %
105.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
[ 6]
[208]
[ 8]
[292]
[419]
[420]
[131]
[375]
[423]
[100]
[309]
SPT. SUM
RATIO 1
RATIO 0
SIGN 1
SIGN 0
DIVIDER 1
DIVIDER 0
DEADBAND
LIMIT
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
INPUT 0
[ 86] 0.00 %
INPUT 0 and INPUT 1 have individual ratio

and divider scalers, and signs. INPUT 1 has an additional deadband function set by
DEADBAND WIDTH. When the input is within the deadband, the output clamps to zero to
ignore any noise. This parameter is useful when digital setpoints are used (for example from a
5703, serial communications, or the RAISE/LOWER function block). The inputs have
symmetrical limits set by LIMIT. INPUT 2 has no scaling or limits.
The output, after INPUT 0, INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 are summed, is also clamped by LIMIT
before producing the SPT. SUM output.
Parameter
Tag
Range
SPT. SUM
86
xxx.xx %
(SPT SUM OUTPUT)

RATIO 1
-3.0000 to 3.0000
208
-3.0000 to 3.0000
NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
292
NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
419
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Multiplier term for INPUT 1.

RATIO 0
SIGN 1
Polarity for INPUT 1.
SIGN 0
Polarity for INPUT 0.
DIVIDER 1
Divider scaling for INPUT 1. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.

DIVIDER 0
420
-3.0000 to 3.0000

DEADBAND
131
0.0 to 100.0 % (h)
(DEADBAND WIDTH)
Range within which the output is clamped at zero.
6-69
SETPOINT SUM 1
Parameter
Tag
Range
LIMIT
375
0.00 to 200.00 %
The Setpoint Sum programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range 0.00% to 200.00%.
The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of the RATIO calculation and the total
output.
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
INPUT 0
LIMIT
INPUT 2
423
-1
-200.00 to 200.00 %
Input 2 value. By default this is not connected to any analog input.

INPUT 1
100
-200.00 to 200.00 %
Input 1 value. By default this is connected to Analog Input 1 (terminal A2).

INPUT 0
309
-200.00 to 200.00 %
Input 0 value. By default this is not connected to any analog input.
6-70
SETPOINT SUM 2
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 SETPOINT SUM 2
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
INPUT 0
RATIO 1
RATIO 0
DIVIDER 1
DIVIDER 0
LIMIT
SPT SUM OUTPUT
STPT SUM 2 OUT 0
STPT SUM 2 OUT 1
Setpoint Sum 2 is a general purpose

summing and ratio block that allows two
scalable inputs and one unscalable input to
be combined.
DIAGRAM::SETPOINT SUM 2 is connected
to a non-zero tag.
This block may be used for friction
compensations in Current Program Winders
(CPW) and Speed Program Winders (SPW).
Setpoint Sum 2
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
100.00 %
SPT SUM OUTPUT [451] 0.00 %

OUTPUT 0 [491] 0.00 %
OUTPUT 1 [492] 0.00 %
[444] INPUT 0
[443] INPUT 1
[445] INPUT 2
[447] RATIO 0
[446] RATIO 1
[448] DIVIDER 0
[466] DIVIDER 1
[449] LIMIT
INPUT 0 and INPUT 1 can be scaled individually using their respective ratio and divider
parameters. LIMIT sets the symmetrical clamps for INPUT 0, INPUT 1 and the final output.
Parameter
Tag
Range
SPT SUM OUTPUT

451
xxx.xx %
Main output of Setpoint Sum 2.
OUTPUT 0
491
xxx.xx %
(STPT SUM 2 OUT 0)
An additional output provided to gain access to Input 0 channel sub-calculations. The result
of (INPUT 0 x RATIO 0) / DIVIDER 0 clamped to within LIMIT.
OUTPUT 1
492
xxx.xx %
(STPT SUM 2 OUT 1)
An additional output provided to gain access to Input 1 channel sub-calculations. The result
of (INPUT 1 x RATIO 1) / DIVIDER 1 clamped to within LIMIT.
INPUT 0
444
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 0 scaled value. By default this is not connected to any analog input.
INPUT 1
443
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 1 scaled value. By default this is connected to Analog Input 1 (A2).
INPUT 2
445
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 2 unscaled value. By default this is not connected to any analog input.
RATIO 0
447
-3.0000 to 3.0000
RATIO 1
446
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Multiplier term for INPUT 1
DIVIDER 0
448
-3.0000 to 3.0000
DIVIDER 1
466
-3.0000 to 3.0000
LIMIT
449
0.00 to 200.00 %
The Setpoint Sum programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range 0.00% to 200.00%.
The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of the RATIO calculation and the total
output.
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
INPUT 0
LIMIT
-1
6-71
SETPOINT SUM 2
RATIO 0 [447]
INPUT 0 [444]
OUTPUT 0 [491]
DIVIDER 0 [448]
MAIN OUTPUT [451]
INPUT 2 [445]
RATIO 1 [446]
INPUT 1 [443]
DIVIDER 1 [466]
LIMIT [449]
OUTPUT 1 [492]
6-72
SPEED LOOP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Use this block to tune the speed loop PI

to produce a current demand.
2 SPEED LOOP
The speed loop has four inputs:
MMI Menu Map
SPD.PROP.GAIN
1.
SPEED DEMAND from STOP

RATES.
2.
Speed feedback as either armature

volts, analog tach, or ENCODER from
CALIBRATION.
3.
ZERO SPD. OFFSET from

CALIBRATION.
4.
DRIVE ENABLE from the drive

enable logic.
SPD.INT.TIME
INT. DEFEAT
PRESET TORQUE
PRESET T SCALE
ENCODER SIGN
SPEED FBK SELECT
SPD.FBK.FILTER
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
3 SETPOINTS
SETPOINT 1
SIGN 2 (A3)
RATIO 2 (A3)
SETPOINT 2 (A3)
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
MAX DEMAND
MIN DEMAND
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPEED FBK SELECT
ENCODER SIGN
SPD. INT. TIME
The two outputs are the diagnostic

parameter CURRENT DEMAND and
SPEED ERROR.
Speed Loop
10.00
0.500 SECS
OFF
0.000
3
0.00 %
POSITIVE
1.0000
0.00 %
0.00 %
105.00 %
-105.00 %
0.00 %
100.00 %
OUTPUT [356]
SPEED FEEDBACK [ 62]
SPEED SETPOINT [ 63]
SPEED ERROR [ 64]
[ 14] PROP. GAIN
[ 13] INT. TIME CONST.
[202] INT. DEFEAT
[547] SPEED FBK FILTER
[554] ENCODER FILTER
[289] SETPOINT 1
[ 9] SIGN 2 (A3)
[ 7] RATIO 2 (A3)
SETPOINT 2 (A3) [290]
[291] SETPOINT 3
[ 41] SETPOINT 4
[357] MAX DEMAND
[358] MIN DEMAND
[595] PRESET TORQUE
[604] PRESET T SCALE
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
%
%
%
%
0.00 %
The block is viewed in three menus on the

MMI: SPEED LOOP, SETPOINTS and ADVANCED.
SETPOINTS: MMI Sub-Menu
This MMI menu contains the setpoint parameter reference inputs for the function block.
ADVANCED: MMI Sub-Menu
Refer to page 6-76.
SPEED DEMAND is summed algebraically with SPEED FEEDBACK to produce SPEED
ERROR. When the drive is enabled, SPEED ERROR is controlled by the PI loop. Proportional
and integral profiling is performed in the ADVANCED::ADAPTION function block.
The resulting current demand signal is routed to the CURRENT LOOP function block and to
the ADVANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH sub-menu.
SPD PROP GAIN
Parameter
Tag
Range
OUTPUT
356
xxx.xx %
(SPD LOOP OUTPUT)

SPEED FEEDBACK
62
xxx.xx %
(RAW SPEED FBK)

The speed feedback value from the source chosen by SPEED FBK SEL.
SPEED SETPOINT
63
xxx.xx %

SPEED ERROR
64
xxx.xx %
(RAW SPEED ERROR)

PROP. GAIN
14
0.00 to 200.00
(SPD.PROP.GAIN)
Speed loop PI proportional gain adjustment.
6-73
SPEED LOOP
Parameter
Tag
Range
INT. TIME CONST.
13
0.001 to 30.000 SECS
(SPD.INT.TIME)
Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment.
INT. DEFEAT
202
OFF / ON
When ON it inhibits the integral part of the speed loop PI control to give proportional only
control.
SPEED FBK FILTER
(SPD.FBK.FILTER)
547
0.000 to 1.000
A simple filter function that is applied to speed feedback to reduce ripple caused by low
line count encoders and noisy tachos. A value of 0 disables the filter action ,and 1.00 is the
maximum value. A typical value would be between 0.5 and 0.75.
INCREASING THE FILTER VALUE MAY MAKE THE SPEED LOOP UNSTABLE.
The filter time constant in milliseconds can be calculated from the following equation:
3..3
1
Log e

Where is the value of SPD FBK FILTER. A value of 0.5 equates to a filter time of 4.8ms,
0.8 to 14.7ms, and 0.9 to 31.2ms.
ENCODER FILTER
554
See below
SETPOINT 1
289
Speed Setpoint 1 (Default Setpoint Sum 1 O/P).
-105.00 to 105.00 %
SIGN 2 (A3)
Speed Setpoint 2 Sign.
NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
RATIO 2 (A3)
Speed Setpoint 2 Ratio.
-3.0000 to 3.0000
SETPOINT 2 (A3)
290
xxx.xx %
Speed Setpoint 2 - Fixed (non-configurable) setpoint scanned synchronously with the
current loop
SETPOINT 3
291
Speed Setpoint 3 (Default Ramp O/P).
-105.00 to 105.00 %
SETPOINT 4
41
Speed Setpoint 4 (Default 5703 I/P).
-105.00 to 105.00 %
MAX DEMAND
0.00 to 105.00 %
357
Sets the maximum input to the speed loop. It is clamped at 105% to allow for overshoot in
the external loops.
MIN DEMAND
358
Sets the minimum input to the speed loop.
-105.00 to 105.00 %
6-74
SPEED LOOP
Parameter
Tag
Range
PRESET TORQUE
595
-200.00 to 200.00 %
The PRESET TORQUE is pre-loaded into the speed loop integral store as the speed loop in
enabled. This is scaled by PRESET T SCALE.
This may be used to pre-load the output of the speed loop in elevator/hoist applications to
prevent the load from falling back when the brake is released. PRESET T SCALE may be
used in situations where the load may vary.
PRESET T SCALE
604
-200.00 to 200.00 %
Scaler for PRESET TORQUE.
Speed Loop PI Output
The PI output is accessible via Tag No. 356. This point is before the I Limit clamps and the
summing of the additional current demand.
This Tag is not visible on the MMI.
Speed Loop PI with Current Demand Isolate
The speed loop output is still valid (active) with the I DMD. ISOLATE parameter enabled.
Note: 1
The speed loop is reset by unquenching the speed loop/current loop.
I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by Program Stop (B8) or Normal Stop (C3).
The speed loop PI is holding the integral term as soon as the PI output reaches
current limit. This is true even in Current Demand Isolate mode where it may
interfere depending on the way the speed PI is used. This feature is currently not
suppressible.
105% Speed Demands

The speed demand clamping allows the speed setpoint to reach 105%. This applies only to the
final summing junction immediately before the speed loop and also to the Setpoint Sum 1
output. Individual speed setpoints are still clamped to 100%.
6-75
SPEED LOOP
SPEED LOOP
NOTE [1]
TO CURRENT LOOP
SETPOINTS
(I DEMAND ISOLATE
SWITCH)
DEFAULT
SETTING
TAG# PARAMETER
7 RATIO 2 (A3)
1,0000
ANALOG I/P 2
A3
9 SIGN 2 (A3)
FROM CURRENT LOOP

I DMD ISOLATE
POSITIVE
290 SETPOINT 2
FROM
5703 SUPPORT
FROM
SETPOINT SUM
FROM
RAMPS
41 SETPOINT 4
5703 RATIO
289 SETPOINT 1
NOTE [1]
SPT. SUM O/P
291 SETPOINT 3
RAMP OUTPUT
357 MAX DEMAND
105.00%
358 MIN DEMAND
-105.00%
ONLY THE SETPOINTS

SUB MENU SHOWN HERE,
SEE SPEED LOOP FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
SPEED
SETPOINT
63
TO STOP RATES (PROGRAM STOP AND NORMAL STOP RAMPS TO ZERO SPEED
SPEED LOOP
ADVANCED
DEFAULT
SETTING
TAG# PARAMETER
13 INT. TIME CONST
SPEED
DEMAND
OFF
(SPEED SETPOINT
AFTER STOP RATES
RAMP TO ZERO
GAIN AND INTEGRAL

PROFILING
0.500 SECS
202 INT. DEFEAT

+
TO CURRENT LOOP
IDMD ISOLATE
SWITCH I/P
SPEED
ERROR
64
297
PI
SPEED
FEEDBACK
207
DRIVE
ENABLE
62
47 SPEED FBK SELECT
ARM VOLTS
ARM
VOLTS
ANALOG
TACH
ENCODER
356
NOTE (1)
ENCODER/ANALOG FEEDBACK SELECTION USED
ANALOG TACH FEEDBACK FOR THE PROPORTIONAL
TERM OF THE SPEED LOOP PI, AND ENCODER
FEEDBACK FOR THE INTEGRAL TERM. THIS FEEDBACK
SELECTION REQUIRES A COMBINATION ANALOG TACH/
ENCODER FITTED TO THE MOTOR.
THIS SELECTION CANNOT BE USED WHEN 590 SWITCHABLE
TACHO CARD IS FITTED.
NOTE (2)
SEE ADVANCED SUB MENU FOR ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION.
ENCODER/ANALOG
NOTE (1)
49 ENCODER SIGN
POSITIVE
FROM
CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD OFFSET
FROM CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD. QUENCH
ADAPTION
10.00
14 PROP. GAIN
NOTE (2)
6-76
SPEED LOOP (ADVANCED)

MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP PARAMETERS
SPEED LOOP
ADVANCED
I GAIN IN RAMP
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
3 ADVANCED
4 ADAPTION
MODE
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
Contains parameters for the advanced user.

These parameters change the proportional and
integral profiles, and can disable SCR/thyristor
firing when the drive is stopped.
The ADVANCED function block is viewed in two
sub-menus on the MMI : ADAPTION and ZERO
SPD. QUENCH.
For details of the third MMI sub-menu, INERTIA
COMP, refer to page 6-40.
Advanced
0
1.00 %
5.00 %
5.00
0.500 s
1.0000
0.00 %
0.50 %
1.50 %
[268]
[269]
[270]
[271]
[272]
[274]
[273]
[284]
[285]
MODE
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
PROP. GAIN
INT. TIME CONST.
I GAIN IN RAMP
POS. LOOP P GAIN
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
ZERO IAD LEVEL
The input to the ADVANCED block is RAMPING from the RAMPS function block.
Inputs for ADAPTION are PROP. GAIN and INT. TIME CONST. from the SPEED LOOP
function block. Its outputs are profiled proportional and integral gains for the speed loop.
Inputs for ZERO SPD. QUENCH are SPEED DEMAND (STOP RATES function block),
SPEED FEEDBACK (SPEED LOOP function block) and CURRENT DEMAND
(DIAGNOSTICS function block).
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)

PROP. GAIN
SPD. INT. TIME
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
ADAPTION : MMI Sub-Menu

This menu allows you to profile the drive's speed loop proportional and integral gains to
certain drive parameters. The gains change when the motor speed feedback reaches the
thresholds set by SPD BRK 1 (LOW) and SPD BRK 2 (HIGH).
At or below SPD BRK 1 (LOW), the speed loop uses the PROP. GAIN and INT. TIME
CONST. values in ADAPTION as its PI loop gains.
Between SPD BRK 1 (LOW) and SPD BRK 2 (HIGH), profiling occurs and the speed
loop gains are determined by another parameter value (according to the selection of the
MODE parameter).
Above SPD BRK 2 (HIGH), the PROP. GAIN and INT. TIME CONST. settings in the
SPEED LOOP function block are used.
2 SPEED LOOP
3 ADVANCED
4 ZERO SPD. QUENCH
ZERO SPD. LEVEL

ZERO IAD LEVEL
MODE selects the parameter for profiling the speed loop PI gains when the motor speed is
between the two speed breakpoints.
ZERO SPD. QUENCH : MMI Sub-Menu

When ZERO SPD. QUENCH is TRUE, the current loop is disabled when SPEED DEMAND,
SPEED FEEDBACK and CURRENT DEMAND have all dropped to the threshold levels set
by ZERO SPD. LEVEL and ZERO IAD LEVEL.
This is similar to Standstill logic (it stops making current but the contactor stays energised)
except that the speed loop remains enabled and this will cause the current loop to unquench
very quickly.
6-77
SPEED LOOP (ADVANCED)

Parameter
Tag
Range
MODE
268
See below
Selects the speed breakpoint input signal.

0 - Disabled
1 - Speed Feedback Dependent
2 - Speed Error Dependent
3 - Current Demand Dependent
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
269
0.00 to 100.00 %
(SPD BRK1 (LOW))

Speed breakpoint 1 to start gain profiling.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
270
0.00 to 100.00 %
(SPD BRK2 (HIGH))

Speed breakpoint 2 to stop gain profiling.
PROP. GAIN
271
0.00 to 200.00
Proportional gain used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)

INT. TIME CONST.
272
0.001 to 30.000 s
(SPD.INT.TIME)
Integral time constant used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
I GAIN IN RAMP
274
0.0000 to 2.0000
This scales the integral gain when the drive is ramping. When RAMPING (Tag No. 113) is
TRUE, the integral gain from ADAPTION is switched through the I GAIN IN RAMP
scaler. This can be used to help prevent integral wind-up while the drive is ramping
(particularly high inertia loads).
POS. LOOP P GAIN
273
-200.00 to 200.00 %
Reserved parameter for use by SSD Drives. Not recommended for new applications.
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
284
0.00 to 200.00 %
Sets the threshold of SPEED DEMAND and SPEED FEEDBACK for suspending the
current output.
ZERO IAD LEVEL
285
0.00 to 200.00 %
Sets the current demand threshold for suspending the current output.
6-78
SRAMP
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
This function block limits the rate of

change of an input by limiting the
acceleration and the jerk (rate of
change of acceleration).
3 SRAMP
INPUT
SRAMP OUTPUT
ACCEL OUTPUT
AT SPEED
AT SPEED LEVEL
QUENCH
RESET VALUE
EXTERNAL VALUE
AUTO RESET
RATE SET 1
RATE SET 0
RATE SELECT
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 SRAMP
4 RATE SET 1
ACCEL 1
DECEL JERK 2
DECEL JERK 1
ACCEL JERK 2
ACCEL JERK 1
DECEL 1
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 SRAMP
4 RATE SET 0
ACCEL 0
DECEL JERK 2
DECEL JERK 1
ACCEL JERK 2
ACCEL JERK 1
DECEL 0
Parameter
Tag
SRamp
0.00 %
0
TRUE
FALSE
0.00 %
FALSE
1.00 %
5.00 %
0.50 %
60.00 %
60.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
30.00 %
30.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
[574]
[575]
[582]
[583]
[584]
[585]
[586]
[591]
[592]
[576]
[577]
[578]
[611]
[596]
[613]
[579]
[580]
[581]
[612]
[597]
[614]
OUTPUT [589] 0.00 %

ACCEL OUTPUT [588] 0.00 %
AT SPEED [587] FALSE
INPUT
RATE SELECT
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
QUENCH
AT SPEED LEVEL
OVER SHOOT THRESHOLD
ERROR THRESHOLD
ACCEL 0
DECEL 0
ACCEL 0 JERK 1
ACCEL 0 JERK 2
DECEL 0 JERK 1
DECEL 0 JERK 2
ACCEL 1
DECEL 1
ACCEL 1 JERK 1
ACCEL 1 JERK 2
DECEL 1 JERK 1
DECEL 1 JERK 2
Range
OUTPUT
589
.xx %
(SRAMP OUTPUT)
Diagnostic, ramp output.
ACCEL OUTPUT
588
.xx %
Accleration diagnostic.
AT SPEED
587
FALSE / TRUE
Diagnostic output indicating the Abs (input - output) is less than AT SPEED LEVEL.
INPUT
574
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Input value.
RATE SELECT
575
0 to 1
Selects between one of two parameter sets. This allows you to have two operating modes
(RATE SET 0 or RATE SET 1) with independent ramp parameters.
AUTO RESET
582
FALSE / TRUE
The ramp is reset automatically when the drive is enabled if set to TRUE.
EXTERNAL RESET
583
FALSE / TRUE
Resets the ramp output.
RESET VALUE
584
-100.00 to 100.00 %
The output value while RESET is TRUE also used as initial value on start up. If this is
linked to speed feedback, the initial ramp output will be set to the current value of speed
feedback.
QUENCH
585
FALSE / TRUE
If TRUE forces the ramp input to zero.
AT SPEED LEVEL
586
0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold for AT SPEED diagnostic output.
OVER SHOOT
591
-100.00 to 100.00 %
THRESHOLD
(OVERSHOOT THRESH)
ERROR THRESHOLD
592
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Hysterisis level before s-ramp operates.
6-79
SRAMP
Parameter
Tag
ACCEL 0
576
Range
0.00 to 100.00 %
2
Acceleration rate, in units of percent per second . i.e. 75.00 % means that the maximum
acceleration will be 75.00% per second2 if the full speed of the machine is 1.25ms then the
acceleration will be 1.25 * 75.0% = 0.9375ms2 .
DECEL 0
577
0.00 to 100.00 %
Deceleration rate, only active if SYMMETRIC = TRUE.

ACCEL 0 JERK 1
578
0.00 to 100.00 %
3
Rate of change of acceleration, in units of percent per second .

For example: 75.00 % means that the maximum acceleration will be 50.00% per second3 if
the full speed of the machine is 1.25ms then the acceleration will be 1.25 * 50.0% =
0.625ms3.
If SYMMETRIC = TRUE then this value will be used for each of the four segments of the
profile.
If SYMMETRIC = TRUE then this value will be used only for the first acceleration
segment.
ACCEL 0 JERK 2
611
0.00 to 100.00 %
3
Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second for segment 2. Only
applicable if SYMMETRIC = FALSE.
DECEL 0 JERK 1
596
0.00 to 100.00 %
3
DECEL 0 JERK 2
613
0.00 to 100.00 %
3
ACCEL 1
579
0.00 to 100.00 %
580
0.00 to 100.00 %
581
0.00 to 100.00 %
612
0.00 to 100.00 %
597
0.00 to 100.00 %
614
0.00 to 100.00 %
Refer to ACCEL 0.
DECEL 1
Refer to DECEL 0.
ACCEL 1 JERK 1
Refer to ACCEL 0 JERK 1.
ACCEL 1 JERK 2
Refer to ACCEL 0 JERK 2.
DECEL 1 JERK 1
Refer to DECEL 0 JERK 1.
DECEL 1 JERK 2
Refer to DECEL 0 JERK 2.
6-80
SRAMP
Useful Equations
Note: These only hold true if Jerk = Jerk2 for acceleration or Jerk 3 = Jerk 4 for deceleration.
V is the maximum speed the drive must reach. In % / sec
A is the maximum allowable acceleration in %/sec2
J is the maximum allowable value for jerk, in %/sec3
The time needed to stop or accelerate is:
V A
+ [Seconds]
A J
t=
as the speed is symmetrical the average speed is V/2, therefore the stopping / acceleration
distance can be calculated.
s=
V V A
+ [Meters]
2 A J
S-Ramp
60
Jerk 2
Jerk 3
50
40
30
Jerk
Acceleration
Jerk 4
20
%
Deceleration
-30
Time (secs)
Example acceleration graph for a velocity 60 %/s maximum Acceleration

of 20 %/s2 and a jerk of 10 %/s3
6-81
STANDSTILL
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
ZERO THRESHOLD
Set a ZERO THRESHOLD, defining when

the speed setpoint is at zero, to inhibit motor
rotation.
The inputs to this block are SPEED
FEEDBACK from the SPEED LOOP function
block and SPEED SETPOINT from setpoints.
Standstill
AT ZERO SETPOINT [ 78] FALSE

AT ZERO SPEED [ 77] FALSE
AT STANDSTILL [ 79] FALSE
89 [306] ZERO SETPOINT
DISABLED [ 11] STANDSTILL LOGIC
2.00 % [ 12] ZERO THRESHOLD
The outputs are AT ZERO SPEED, AT

STANDSTILL, and AT ZERO SETPOINT. AT ZERO SPEED is connected to DIGOUT 1
(B5) in the default configuration. A "not at standstill" signal is sent to the drive enable logic.
When SPEED FEEDBACK is less than ZERO THRESHOLD, AT ZERO SPEED is TRUE.
When SPEED SETPOINT is less than ZERO THRESHOLD, AT ZERO SETPOINT is
TRUE. When both AT ZERO SPEED and AT ZERO SETPOINT are TRUE, AT
STANDSTILL is TRUE signalling the motor has stopped.
If AT STANDSTILL is TRUE and STANDSTILL LOGIC is ENABLED, then the speed and
current loops are quenched. The SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier)/thyristor firing circuits are
disabled, the main contactor remains energised and the RUN LED stays on when the drive is
at standstill. The drive remains in this state until standstill drops out. That is, when the speed
setpoint or speed feedback rise above the zero threshold.
STANDSTILL LOGIC is useful in maintaining absolute zero speed and aids in preventing
gearbox wear due to chattering.
However, it can cause problems in web handling applications using tension feedback: at zero
speed, the SCR/thyristors turn off allowing the web tension to pull the driven roll in reverse.
When the drive no longer senses it is at zero speed, the SCR/thyristors turn back on causing
the motor to move forward and regulate tension. An oscillation condition can result as the
drives SCR/thyristors turn on and off trying to maintain a fixed position.
Parameter
Tag
Range
AT ZERO SETPOINT
78
FALSE / TRUE

AT ZERO SPEED
77
FALSE / TRUE

AT STANDSTILL
79
FALSE / TRUE

ZERO SETPOINT
306
0 to 639
(SOURCE TAG)
Do not alter.
STANDSTILL LOGIC
11
DISABLED / ENABLED
If ENABLED, the Converter is quenched (although the contactor remains in) when the
Speed Feedback and Speed Setpoint values are less than ZERO THRESHOLD.
ZERO THRESHOLD
12
0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold level which defines zero setpoint and zero speed diagnostic outputs and also
controls the zero speed relay output.
6-82
STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL
ENABLED
t
DISABLED
0
STANDSTILL LOGIC
SPEED
SETPOINT
2%
0%
SPEED
FEEDBACK
CURVE DEPENDS ON LOAD
CHARACTERISTICS
ZERO THRESHOLD
(DEFAULT = 2.00%)
-2%
SPEED FEEDBACK %
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
0%
DRIVE ENABLE
STANDSTILL
TAG# PARAMETER
11 STANDSTILL LOGIC
DEFAULT
SETTING
SPEED
FEEDBACK
FROM
SPEED LOOP
AT ZERO SPEED
12 ZERO THRESHOLD
SPEED
SETPOINT
FROM
SETPOINT
TO
DRIVE ENABLE
DISABLED
D:12
D:14
2.00%
AT STANDSTILL
AT ZERO SETPOINT D:13
DIGITAL O/P1
77
79
B5
( DEFAULT
CONFIGURATION )
78
6-83
STOP RATES
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STOP RATES
STOP TIME
STOP LIMIT
CONTACTOR DELAY
CURR DECAY RATE
PROG STOP TIME
PROG STOP LIMIT
PROG STOP I LIM
STOP ZERO SPEED
These parameters are used by a regenerative

drive when stopping with Normal Stop or
Program Stop.
The stopping methods of the converter are
described in more detail in Chapter 4:
Operating the Converter - Starting and
Stopping Methods.
Stop Rates
10.0 s
60.0 s
1.0 s
0.0
0.1 s
60.0 s
100.00 %
2.00 %
The inputs to this block are SPEED

SETPOINT and SPEED FEEDBACK from the
SPEED LOOP function block, the Run signal
from terminal C3, and PROGRAM STOP from terminal B8.
SPEED DEMAND [ 89] 0.00 %

PROGRAM STOP [ 80] FALSE
[ 27] STOP TIME
[217] STOP LIMIT
[302] CONTACTOR DELAY
[594] CURR DECAY RATE
[ 26] PROG STOP TIME
[216] PROG STOP LIMIT
[ 91] PROG STOP I LIM
[ 29] STOP ZERO SPEED
The outputs are SPEED DEMAND to the speed loop, PROG STOP I LIM to the current loop,
and signals to the coast stop and drive enable logic.
Normal Stop
A Normal Stop occurs when the Run signal is removed from terminal C3. It ramps the speed
demand to zero at a rate set by STOP TIME.
Non-regenerative drives can stop no faster than the coast stop rate.
Regenerative drives use STOP TIME to set the duration of the stop.
After the stop, the contactor de-energises and the drive disables.
The STOP LIMIT timer starts when C3 goes to 0V (the Run signal is removed). If the drive
speed has not reached STOP ZERO SPEED within the STOP LIMIT time, the contactor deenergises and the drive disables.
During Normal Stops after the motor reaches zero speed, CONTACTOR DELAY delays the
de-energising of the contactor. When STOP ZERO SPEED is set above 0.25%, the drive
disables during the contactor delay. Below 0.25%, the drive disables after the contactor delay.
This is useful when using the Jog function to prevent multiple operations of the contactor.
CONTACTOR DELAY is overridden when terminal C5 (Enable Input) is at 0V.
Program Stop
PROGRAM STOP provides a controlled fast stop for regenerative drives. The stop time is set
by PROG STOP TIME. This timer starts once terminal B8 (Program Stop) goes to 0V. When
the drive reaches STOP ZERO SPEED, the contactor de-energises and the drive disables.
PROG STOP LIMIT sets the maximum time the Program Stop can take before the contactor
de-energises and the drive disables.
PROG STOP I LIM sets the current limit in the current loop during a Program Stop. Other
current limits can override it.
Parameter
Tag
Range
SPEED DEMAND
89
xxx.xx %

PROGRAM STOP
80
FALSE / TRUE

STOP TIME
27
0.1 to 600.0 s
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in normal stop mode (terminal C3 = 0V).
STOP LIMIT
217
0.0 to 600.0 s
The maximum time a controlled stop can take in a Normal Stop (regenerative breaking)
before the drive will coast to stop. The timer is triggered when terminal C3 = 0V.
6-84
STOP RATES
Parameter
Tag
Range
CONTACTOR DELAY
302
0.1 to 600.0 s
This defines the time the contactor stays energised for after the STOP ZERO SPEED limit
is reached. Maintain zero speed during contactor delay.
CURR DECAY RATE
594
0.00 to 200.00
This is the rate at which the current is quenched when the current loop is disabled.
PROG STOP TIME
26
0.1 to 600.0 s
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in Program Stop mode (B8 = 0V).
PROG STOP LIMIT
216
0.0 to 600.0 s
The maximum time a Program Stop (regenerative breaking) can take before the contactor is
de-energised and the drive is disabled. The timer is triggered when terminal B8 = 0V.
PROG STOP I LIM
91
0.00 to 200.00 %
Main current limit level (assuming current limit not overridden by I Profile or Inverse Time
limits) when performing a Program Stop.
STOP ZERO SPEED
29
0.00 to 100.00 %
The threshold at which the CONTACTOR DELAY timer starts in Program Stop and
Normal Stop modes. See also CONTACTOR DELAY above.
Stop Hierarchy
Coast Stop - Terminal B9
Disables the drive and opens the contactor via the pilot output
Enable - Terminal C5
Suspends and resets the Control Loops
Program Stop - Terminal B8
Independent ramp time
Stop Timer
Independent Current Limit that may be higher than normal Current Limit
Independent zero speed
Normal Run/Stop - Terminal C3
Independent ramp time
Contactor Delay
Note: The Converters reaction to commands is defined by a state machine. This determines
which commands provide the demanded action, and in which sequence. Consequently,
COAST STOP and PROGRAM STOP must be FALSE, i.e. the drive is not in Coast or
Program mode, before a Run signal is applied otherwise the controller assumes a Stop
mode and remains disabled. Refer to Chapter 4: Operating the Converter - Stopping
Methods for descriptions of Coast Stop and Program Stop.
6-85
STOP RATES
SPEED
SETPOINT
SPEED
DEMAND
TO/FROM SPEED LOOP
STOP RATES
89
TAG#
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
SETTING
27
STOP TIME
10.0 SECS
26
PROG STOP TIME
0.1 SECS
91
PROG STOP I LIM
100.00%
217
STOP LIMIT
60.0 SECS
216
PROG STOP LIMIT
60.0 SECS
29
STOP ZERO SPEED
2.00 %
CONTACTOR DELAY
1.0 SECS
RAMP TO ZERO
RAMP TO ZERO
TO CURRENT LOOP
CURRENT LIMIT SWITCH
TO COAST
STOP LOGIC
t
t
t
302
TO DRIVE ENABLE
PROGRAM STOP IS TRUE

WHEN TERMINAL B8 LOW
(STATUS LED OFF)
PROGRAM
STOP
STOP (RUN)
SPEED
FEEDBACK
6-86
SYSTEM PORT P3
MMI Menu Map
1
SERIAL LINKS
SYSTEM PORT P3
UDP XFER (RX)
VERSION NUMBER
Use this block to configure the drive's RS232

programming port (P3).
Refer to Chapter 14: Serial Communications System Port P3 for further information.
System Port P3
0x00C0
CELite (EIASCII)
0x0000
0x0000
[332]
[130]
[329]
[330]
ERROR REPORT
MODE
GROUP ID
UNIT ID
The block is viewed in three menus on the MMI:

SYSTEM PORT P3, P3 SETUP and BISYNCH SUPPORT.
SYSTEM PORT P3
MMI Menu Map
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 SYSTEM PORT (P3)
3 P3 SETUP
MODE
5703 SUPPORT
This MMI menu contains parameters for transferring data to and from a PC. Refer to Chapter
14.
P3 SETUP
This MMI menu contains the communication set-up parameters for System Port P3. Refer to
page 6-87 and Chapter 14 for information on the 5703 SUPPORT sub-menu.
BISYNCH SUPPORT
This MMI menu contains parameters for supporting the BISYNCH protocol.
P3 BAUD RATE
MMI Menu Map

1 SERIAL LINKS
2 SYSTEM PORT (P3)
3 P3 SETUP
4 BISYNCH SUPPORT
GROUP ID (GID)
The P3 port is a non-isolated serial communications port built in to the drive's Control Board.
It is used off-line (while the drive is stopped) for transferring and saving drive configuration
files using a personal computer (PC) running a serial communications program, or on-line
(while the drive is running) when using the SSD Drives 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit.
You can also use the P3 port to transfer configuration files by connecting to a PC running the
Windows TM compatible software package "ConfigEd Lite". Refer to the ConfigEd Lite
manual RG352747.
UNIT ID (UID)
ERROR REPORT
Parameter
Tag
Range
ERROR REPORT
332
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set
the value to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Chapter 14: Serial Communications - Reference
for a list of codes.
MODE
130
See below
Determines the function of the 5703 unit if present. Four options are available:
0 : DISABLED
1 : 5703 MASTER
2 : 5703 SLAVE
3 : CELite (EIASCII)
P3 BAUD RATE
198
See below
Transmission rate. Four options are available:
0 : 300
1 : 600
2 : 1200
3 : 2400
4 : 4800
5 : 9600 (default)
6 : 19200
GROUP ID
329
0x0000 to 0x0007
(GROUP ID (GID))
The SSD Drives protocol group identity address.
UNIT ID
330
0x0000 to 0x000F
(UNIT ID (UID))
The SSD Drives protocol unit identity address.
VERSION NUMBER
155
0x0000 to 0x000F
The drive's version number as seen over the System Port (P3).
Serial communications mnemonic = V0. The version number cannot be changed, and is
software version dependent.
6-87
5703 SUPPORT
MMI Menu Map
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 SYSTEM PORT (P3)
3 P3 SETUP
4 5703 SUPPORT
This function block contains the parameters

for connecting a SSD Drive 5703 Setpoint
Repeater Unit.
The 5703 peer-to-peer communication option
transfers parameters from drive-to-drive
through the serial port, P3.
5703
SCALED INPUT [189] 0.00 %

RAW INPUT [187] 0.00 %
89 [134] OUTPUT
0.0000 [132] SETPT. RATIO
POSITIVE [133] SETPT. SIGN
SETPT. RATIO
SETPT. SIGN
RAW INPUT
SCALED INPUT
Parameter
Tag
Range
SCALED INPUT
189
xxx.xx %
1 SYSTEM
The scaled value received by the 5703 unit. This value is updated upon reception of a new
message. If the drive is in Slave mode and no new messages have arrived, a 5703 RCV
ERROR will occur.
2 CONFIGURE I/O
Note: in software versions prior to 5.17, this input is not updated when in Master mode.
MMI Menu Map
RAW INPUT
3 CONFIGURE 5703
187
SOURCE TAG
The unscaled value received by the 5703 unit.
DESTINATION TAG
OUTPUT
134
xxx.xx %
0 to 639
(SOURCE TAG)
The source tag of the value to be sent to the 5703 unit. The default is 89, SPEED DEMAND.
When in Master mode, this value will be sent every block diagram cycle. When in Slave
mode, this value is sent upon reception of a new input.
SETPT. RATIO
132
-3.0000 to 3.0000
133
NEGATIVE / POSITIVE
Input scaler.
SETPT. SIGN
Input sign.
Note: DESTINATION TAG (MMI only) is the destination tag of the value received from the
5703. The default is SETPOINT 4 in the speed loop.
6-88
TAPER CALC.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 TAPER CALC.
TAPER
TENSION SPT.
TAPERED DEMAND
TENSION TRIM
TOT.TENS.DEMAND
Use this block to profile the tension demand

with diameter.
Taper Calc.
TAPERED DEMAND [452] 0.00 %

TOT. TENS DEMAND [441] 0.00 %
0.00 % [438] TAPER
0.00 % [439] TENSION SPT.
0.00 % [440] TENSION TRIM

DIAGRAM::TAPER is connected to a nonzero tag.
The function block uses two inputs, tension setpoint and taper setpoint, to create the tension
demand. The operator usually controls these setpoints.
Taper is a common requirement for winders. It reduces the tension as the roll diameter
increases.
A profiler adjusts the tension using the equation:
Tapered Demand = Tension Spt 100%
Taper
(Diameter Min Diameter )

Diameter
to yield a hyperbolic taper output. MIN DIAMETER and DIAMETER are linked internally to
the DIAMETER CALC function block. The taper tension characteristics are shown below:
Tension
Torque
-100% Taper
-100% Taper
0% Taper
0% Taper
100% Taper
100% Taper
Min
Diameter
100%
Diameter
Min
Diameter
100%
Diameter
The result is multiplied by TENSION SPT. to get TAPER DEMAND. When the taper setpoint
is at 100%, the motor produces constant torque. That is, a constant torque from core to full
roll, and the tension falls off as the roll builds.
TENSION TRIM allows the tension demand to be adjusted, for example, when using closed
loop trim. The result is TOT. TENS DEMAND.
6-89
TAPER CALC.
Parameter
Tag
Range
TAPERED DEMAND
452
xxx.xx %
This is the output of the TAPER calculation on the TENSION SPT (before adding
TENSION TRIM).
TOT. TENS DEMAND
441
xxx.xx %
(TOT.TENS.DEMAND)
This is the final output of this block (total tension demand) which can be connected to the
appropriate points in the block diagram.
TAPER
438
-100.00 to 100.00 %
This defines the amount of tapering in the tension demand with diameter variation. When
TAPER is positive, the tension demand is hyperbolically decreased as diameter increases.
TENSION SPT.
439
0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the required tension setpoint.

TENSION TRIM
440
-100.00 to 100.00 %
This is the additional tension demand in the form of a trim.
TAPER CALC.
*Permanently linked
to Diameter Calc.
100
Tension Spt. [439]

0
100
Tapered Demand
[452]
Diameter*
0
Taper Function
Min Diameter*
100
Taper [438]
-100
Tension Trim
[440]
100
-100
Total Tension Demand

[441]
6-90
TEC OPTION
MMI Menu Map
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 TEC OPTION
TEC OPTION TYPE

TEC OPTION IN 1
TEC OPTION IN 2
TEC OPTION IN 3
TEC OPTION IN 4
TEC OPTION IN 5
TEC OPTION FAULT
This function block is used to configure the

inputs and outputs of the various
Technology Options that can be fitted.
The Technology Option provides a
communications interface for external control
of the Converter.
Refer to the appropriate Technology Option
Technical Manual supplied with the option for
further details.
Tec Option
NONE
0
0
0
0
0
[500]
[501]
[502]
[503]
[504]
[505]
FAULT
VERSION
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
TYPE
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
[506]
[507]
[508]
[509]
NONE
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
TEC OPTION VER

TEC OPTION OUT 1
TEC OPTION OUT 2
Parameter
Tag
Range
FAULT
506
See below
(TEC OPTION FAULT)

The fault state of the Technology Option.
0 : NONE
1 : PARAMETER
2 : TYPE MISMATCH
3 : SELF TEST
4 : HARDWARE
5 : MISSING
6: VERSION NUMBER
no faults
parameter out-of-range
TYPE parameter mismatch
hardware fault - internal
hardware fault - external
no option fitted
older than Version 2.x
If the VERSION NUMBER error message is displayed, the Technology Option is using
software that doesnt fully support the drive; refer to SSD Drives.
VERSION
507
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
(TEC OPTION VER)

The version of the Technology Option. If no option is fitted then the version is reset to zero.
OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 2
508, 509
xxxxx
(TEC OPTION OUT 1 to TEC OPTION OUT 2)

The use of these output parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option fitted. Refer
to the Technology Option Technical Manual.
TYPE
500
See below
(TEC OPTION TYPE)

Selects the type of Technology Option.
0 : NONE
1 : RS485
2 : PROFIBUS
3 : LINK
4 : DEVICE NET
5 : CAN OPEN
6 : LONWORKS
7 : CONTROLNET
8 : MODBUS PLUS
9 : ETHERNET
INPUT 1 to INPUT 5
10 : TYPE 10
11 : TYPE 11
12 : TYPE 12
13 : TYPE 13
14 : TYPE 14
15 : TYPE 15
501, 502, 503, 504, 505
-32768 to 32767
(TEC OPTION IN 1 to TEC OPTION IN 5)

The use of these input parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option fitted. Refer
to the Technology Option Technical Manual.
6-91
TENS+COMP CALC.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 TENS+COMP CALC.
STATIC COMP
DYNAMIC COMP
REWIND
FIX.INERTIA COMP
VAR.INERTIA COMP
ROLL WIDTH/MASS
LINE SPEED SPT
FILTER T.C.
RATE CAL
NORMALISED dv/dt
INERTIA COMP O/P
TENSION SCALER
MMI Menu Map

1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
TENS+COMP CALC.
This block provides additional torque to

compensate for static and dynamic friction,
as well as the load inertia.
Add these losses to the diameter-scaled tension
demand to produce a compensated torque
demand for open loop winder applications.
The inputs to this block are DIAMETER from
the DIAMETER CALC. function block, TOT.
TENS. DEMAND from the TAPER CALC.
function block, and SPEED FEEDBACK from
the SPEED LOOP function block.
Tension & Comp
0.00 %
0.00 %
ENABLED
0.00 %
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.00 %
10
10.00
0.00 %
1.0000
TENS+COMP [478] 0
INERTIA COMP O/P [485] 0.00 %
[487] STATIC COMP
[488] DYNAMIC COMP
[489] REWIND
[479] FIX. INERTIA COMP
[480] VAR. INERTIA COMP
[481] ROLL WIDTH/MASS
[498] LINE SPEED SPT
[482] FILTER T.C.
[483] RATE CAL
[484] NORMALISED dv/dt
[486] TENSION SCALER
You should output TENS+COMP to TORQUE

DEMAND (Tag 432) in the TORQUE CALC. function block for open loop winder
applications.
Static and Dynamic Frictional Losses
Static and dynamic friction are due to gearbox resistance and mechanical binding in the winder
spindle and motor bearings. Both absorb motor output torque and require compensation to
maintain accurate winder tension.
Static friction, or "stiction", is a constant offset most noticeable at or near zero speed. The
compensation torque required to overcome static friction is fixed over an entire operating
speed range. You can ignore "stiction" for winders which do not normally operate at zero
speeds.
Torque
Dynamic friction results from friction
(Armature Current)
losses within the drive train, which
includes gearboxes and chain belting
linkages. The oil viscosity in
gearboxes and windage losses in the
Dynamic
motor armature fans also contribute to
Compensation
dynamic frictional losses.
The effects of static and dynamic

friction are shown opposite.
Inertia Compensation
Many winders need inertia compensation
to add or subtract torque during
acceleration and deceleration to maintain
constant tension, especially at large roll
diameters. Without compensation, the
tension holding capability of open loop
winders diminishes during speed changes
causing tension sag.
The inertia compensation characteristics
is shown opposite.
For winder applications, inertia
compensation is split into two
components:
1.
2.
Fixed inertia compensation for the

fixed motor, transmission and load
components.
Variable inertia compensation for the
changing roll inertia. This is
especially necessary for high
diameter build unwinds and winders.
Static
Compensation
Motor Speed
Speed
Line Speed
acceleration
deceleration
100%
Time
Forward Torque
(positive armature current)
large diameter roll
small diameter roll
Time
Reverse Torque
(negative armature current)
6-92
TENS+COMP CALC.
Parameter
Tag
Range
TENS+COMP
478
0 to 639
(TENS+COMP CALC.)
The sum of the diameter-scaled TENSION DEMAND after the TENSION SCALER
scaling and the compensation losses. For open loop winder applications, connect this output
to the TORQUE DEMAND (Tag 432) in the TORQUE CALC. function block. (This output
is located in the SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM menu).
INERTIA COMP O/P
485
Monitors the sum of all inertia compensations.
xxx.xx %
STATIC COMP
487
Static friction compensation set-up parameter.
-300.00 to 300.00 %
DYNAMIC COMP
488
Dynamic friction compensation set-up parameter.
-300.00 to 300.00 %
REWIND
489
DISABLED / ENABLED
Switches the sign of the friction compensations when the motor changes direction. Set to
DISABLED only when the winder reverses.
FIX. INERTIA COMP
479
(FIX.INERTIA COMP)
Fixed inertia compensation set-up parameter.
-300.00 to 300.00 %
VAR. INERTIA COMP

480
(VAR.INERTIA COMP)
Variable inertia compensation set-up parameter.
-300.00 to 300.00 %
ROLL WIDTH/MASS
481
0.00 to 100.00 %
Scales the inertia fixed and variable compensations based on roll width.
100% = maximum roll width.
LINE SPEED SPT
498
-105.00 to 105.00 %
Used to calculate the line speed acceleration rate value for the fixed and variable inertia
compensations.
FILTER T.C.
482
0 to 20000
The line speed acceleration rate value is calculated from the line speed input. The calculated
rate value may have a large ripple content that can disturb the motor torque. The rate signal
is therefore filtered, and this filter has a time constant set by this parameter.
RATE CAL
483
-100.00 to 100.00
Scales the inertia compensation acceleration/deceleration rate value to 100% of the
maximum line ramp rate. This parameter should be set to the maximum time required to
ramp from zero to full speed in seconds. If RATE CAL = 0.00, then this parameter is set
externally through NORMALISED dv/dt, otherwise, RATE CAL sets the inertia
compensation acceleration/deceleration rate.
Note - Inertia compensation does not work well for line ramp rates above 100 seconds and
therefore this parameter is limited to 100.00.
NORMALISED dv/dt
484
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Useful for large line ramp rates (>100 Secs). Tag an external signal to NORMALISED
dv/dt to set the inertia compensation acceleration/deceleration rate externally from the
drive. Useful for ramp rates exceeding 100 seconds. The external signal must be normalised
to 100% = the maximum line ramp rate. Active only when RATE CAL = 0.00.
TENSION SCALER
486
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Scales the TENSION DEMAND which is directly connected from the TAPER CALC.
function block.
6-93
TENS+COMP CALC.
Tension Scaler
[486]
Tension &
Demand
Torque Demand
(Internal Variable)
Diameter*
Static Comp
[487]
|Nw|*
Dynamic Comp
[488]
Rewind (Forward)
[489]
Fixed Inertia Comp
[479]
Variable Inertia Comp
[480]
Roll Width/Mass
[481]
Line Speed Setpoint
[498]
Rate Cal
[483]
Normalised dv/dt
[484]
Filter TC
[482]
+
+/-
1/D
1/D
[478]
Total Torque Demand

TENS+COMP
[485]
Inertia Comp Output
& - Internally connected to Taper Calculator

* - Internally connected to Diameter Calculator
TENS + COMP Internal Block Diagram
6-94
TORQUE CALC.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 TORQUE CALC.
TORQUE DEMAND
TENSION ENABLE
This block switches the drive between Speed and

Tension mode. It also switches the current limits
as required for over and under winding.
DIAGRAM::POS I CLAMP and/or NEG I CLAMP
is connected to a non-zero tag.
Torque Calc.
POS. I CLAMP [435] 0

NEG. I CLAMP [436] 0
0.00 % [432] TORQUE DEMAND
ENABLED [433] TENSION ENABLE
ENABLED [434] OVER WIND
OVER WIND
Parameter
Tag
Range
1 SYSTEM
POS. I CLAMP
435
0 to 639
2 CONFIGURE I/O
Positive clamp output destination. Set to 301 in use.
MMI Menu Map
3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
NEG. I CLAMP
436
0 to 639
POS. I CLAMP
Negative clamp output destination. Set to 48 in use.
NEG. I CLAMP
TORQUE DEMAND
432
-200.00 to 200.00 %
This is the TORQUE CALC function block input.

TENSION ENABLE
433
DISABLED / ENABLED
When TENSION ENABLE is ENABLED , the tension demand is set by the TORQUE
DEMAND signal , tag 432. When DISABLED, it is set by the default current limit. Switch
using a free digital input.
OVER WIND
434
DISABLED / ENABLED
Reverses the sign of the output clamps for over/under winding. Switch using a free digital
input.
200%
Pos. I Clamp
Link to [301]
Overwind
[434]
-200%
200%
Current Demand
[432]
-1
Neg. I Clamp
Link to [48]
Tension
Enable
6-95
USER FILTER
A floating function block used to filter
control signals.
This is an internal function block and does not
appear as a menu on the MMI.
User Filter
OUTPUT [296] 0.00 %

0.00 % [295] INPUT
A noisy signal that requires smoothing is connected to INPUT. The OUTPUT is connected to
the destination function block.
Parameter
Tag
INPUT
Range
-300.00 to 300.00 %

OUTPUT
xxx.xx %
6-96
Trips and Fault Finding
7-1
TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING

7
Trips
What Happens when a Trip Occurs
When a trip occurs, the Converters power stage is immediately disabled causing the motor and
load to coast to a stop. The trip is latched until action is taken to reset it. This ensures that trips
due to transient conditions are captured and the Converter is disabled, even when the original
cause of the trip is no longer present.
Converter Indications
If a trip condition is detected the unit displays and performs the following actions.
1.
The HEALTH LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. (Investigate, find
and remove the cause of the trip.)
2.
Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).
Operator Station Indications

If a trip condition is detected the MMI displays and performs the following actions.
1.
The HEALTH LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. The MMI displays
the activated alarm. (Investigate, find and remove the cause of the trip.)
2.
Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).
3.
The alarm message(s) can be acknowledged by pressing the E key, however, the unit will
not restart at this point.
Resetting a Trip Condition

All trips must be reset before the Converter can be re-enabled. A trip can only be reset once the
trip condition is no longer active, i.e. a trip due to a heatsink over-temperature will not reset
until the temperature is below the trip level.
Note: More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the
HEATSINK TRIP and the OVERVOLTS (VA) trips to be active. Alternatively it is possible for
the Converter to trip due to a FIELD OVER I error and then for the HEATSINK TRIP trip to
become active after the Converter has stopped (this may occur due to the thermal time
constant of the heatsink).
You can reset the trip(s) in one of two ways:
1. Power-up, or remove and re-apply the auxiliary power supply.
2. Stop and start the converter, i.e. remove and re-apply the Start/Run signal (terminal C3 or
C4, or the STOP and RUN keys on the MMI).
Success is indicated by the HEALTH LED (on the unit or MMI) illuminating. The MMI will
return to its original display.
7-2
Fault Finding
Problem
Possible Cause
Remedy
Converter will not

power-up
Fuse blown
Check supply details, replace with

correct fuse.
Check Product Code against Model No.
Faulty cabling
Check all connections are correct and

secure.
Check cable continuity
Converter fuse keeps

blowing
Faulty cabling or connections

wrong
Check for problem and rectify before

replacing with correct fuse
Faulty Converter
Contact SSD Drives
Cannot obtain
HEALTH state
Incorrect or no supply
available
Check supply details
Motor will not run at

switch on
Motor jammed
Stop the Converter and clear the jam
Motor runs and stops
Motor becomes jammed
Stop the Converter and clear the jam
Motor runs at full

speed only
Reversed tachogenerator or
open circuit tachogenerator
Check tachogenerator connections
Open circuit speed reference

potentiometer
Check terminal
Table 7-1 Fault Finding
Calibration Checks
The drive leaves the factory with the following calibration switches correctly set. Inappropriate
settings will prevent the drive from operating correctly. For your reference, the correct settings
are given below.
IMPORTANT: If you change the settings for any of these switches you MUST re-calibrate the Control
Board. Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Converter" - Calibrating the Control Board.
Control Board Calibration Scaling Switch (all Frames)

NO POWER IS CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
1
The switch is viewed through the Speed Feedback option tray on the front of the
drive (left-hand side). The switch is set to "1" (ON) for all frames, except for the
15A Frame 1 where it is set to "OFF".
OFF
Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frame 2)

View the switches with the drive door open:
SW1 - Product Identity Switch
This switch is always set to HI.
SW2 - Burden Switch
This switch is always set to HI.
SW2
HI
LO
Burden Switch
Power Board
SW1
HI
LO
Product Indentity
7-3
Adaptor Board Current Calibration Switch (Frame 3)

View the switch with the terminal cover removed:
IA CAL - Armature Current Calibration Switch
This switch is always set to "1" (ON).
OFF
Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frames 4 & 5)

View the switches with the drive door open:
Power Board
IA CAL Armature Current Calibration Switch (SW1)

This switch is always set to LO on Frame 4 & 5 drives of 500A or
less, and HI for drives greater than 500A.
IF CAL Field Current Calibration Switch (SW2)
This switch is always set to HI for Frame 4 & 5 drives. The
maximum field current calibration is 30A.
IF CAL
SW2
IA CAL
SW1
HI
LO
HI
LO
Power Board Current Calibration Switches (Frame H)

To access the power board remove the terminal cover, unscrew the two fixings on the right hand
side of the control door. Open the door to reveal the power board.
ON
SW1 - 6
Armature Current Calibration

500A stages (factory setting = 2000A)
thus switches 1 to 4 = ON
SW7
Reserved (factory setting = ON)
SW8 - 9
Field Current Calibration
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Calibration Switches
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Power Board
SW10
9 Multiplier Field Current Range

8
0
0
x1
up to 20A (factory setting)
0
1
x2
up to 40A
1
0
x3
up to 60A
1
1
x4
up to 80A
(not used on standard build)
Armature Voltage Calibration
OFF = VA / 100 (for VA up to 875V) (factory setting)
Figure 7-1 Calibration Switches
7-4

IA CAL - Armature Current
Calibration switches 1 to 4 are always set to ON, and 5 to 6 are always set to OFF.
Armature Voltage
Calibration switch SW10 is always set to "OFF".
IF CAL - Field Current
For field currents greater than 20A, set the Field Current calibration switches 8 and 9 to give the
required Field Current range. The drives Product Code includes the value for Field Current. If
you change the Field Current from the 20A factory setting to another value, you must now select
the correct Product Code rating:
Apply auxiliary power. Note the current Product Code which is displayed on the MMIs
Welcome screen at the top of the menu, e.g. DC 4Q 1700A 20 D (20 = 20A Field Current range)
Set the following parameters, but first select CONFIGURE ENABLE to be ENABLED.
Now, for instance, to set the Field Current range for 40A, you must select the appropriate
Product Code for a Field Current range of 40A, e.g. DC 4Q 1700A 40 D
To do this, refer to Chapter 5: The Operator Station Changing the Stack Size (3-button
reset).
Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set
this value in the FIELD CURRENT parameter.
MMI Menu Map

1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FIELD CURRENT
Now select CONFIGURE ENABLE to be DISABLED and perform a PARAMETER SAVE.

You MUST re-calibrate the Control Board.
Refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Converter" - Calibrating the Control Board.
Adaptor Board Current Calibration Switch (Frame H)

View the switch with the terminal cover removed:
IA CAL - Armature Current Calibration Switch
This switch is always set to "1" (ON).
OFF
7-5
Alarm Messages
When a trip occurs an alarm message is displayed on the MMI, and information about the trip is
stored in the ALARM STATUS menu.
The alarm message and the LAST ALARM parameter are displayed in the selected language of
the MMI.
The HEALTH STORE and HEALTH WORD parameters display information as hexadecimal
values, or the sum of the hexadecimal values when more than one alarm is active. Thus the
unique value can represent one or more alarms.
Note: Hexadecimal refers to the common practice of counting to the base of 16 in computing
rather than the base of 10. The sixteen `numbers used being 0 to 9, A to F. Thus an 8
bit byte is represented by two characters in the range 00 to FF, while a 16 bit word is
represented by four characters in the range 0000 to FFFF.
LAST ALARM
(Tag 528). This display shows the last alarm message to have been displayed. To reset the
parameter simply press the (DOWN) key to clear the alarm. Alternatively, you can switch the
auxiliary supply off and on, causing NO ACTIVE ALARMS to be
MMI Menu Map
displayed.
1 ALARM STATUS
HEALTH WORD
LAST ALARM
HEALTH WORD
HEALTH STORE
(Tag 115).This parameter is used to continuously monitor the status of
the Converter. As alarms are added or removed, the display will immediately update to show the
hexadecimal sum of these alarms.
The value reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V), and when no trip
condition is present.
HEALTH STORE
(Tag 116).This displays the hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm to occur causing the
trip condition.
The display reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V).
7-6
Hexadecimal Representation of Trips

The LAST ALARM, HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE parameters use a four digit
hexadecimal number to identify individual trips. Each trip has a unique corresponding number
as shown below.
LAST ALARM, HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE
Trip
Trip Code
First Digit
Digit
Digit
Last Digit
NO ACTIVE ALARMS
0
OVERSPEED
MISSING PULSE
FIELD OVER I
HEATSINK TRIP *
THERMISTOR
OVER VOLTS (VA)
SPD FEEDBACK
ENCODER FAILED
FIELD FAILED
3 PHASE FAILED *
10
PHASE LOCK
11
5703 RCV ERROR
12
STALL TRIP
13
OVER I TRIP
14
OTHER
15
ACCTS FAILED *
* Refer to Power Board LED Trip below

For the LAST ALARM parameter, OTHER is replaced with the trip codes below.
LAST ALARM only

14
AUTOTUNE ERROR
14
AUTOTUNE ABORTED
14
EXTERNAL TRIP
14
REMOTE TRIP
14
CONFIG ENABLED
14
NO OP-STATION
14
PCB VERSION
14
PRODUCT CODE
When more than one trip is to be represented at the

same time then the trip codes are simply added together
to form the value displayed. Within each digit, values
between 10 and 15 are displayed as letters A to F
Decimal number
Display
10
11
For example, if the HEALTH WORD parameter is

01A8 then this represents a 1 in digit 3, an 8 and a
2 in digit 2, (8+2 = 10, displayed as A) and an 8 in
digit 1. This in turn represents the active trips FIELD
FAILED, ENCODER FAILED, OVER VOLTS (VA)
and HEATSINK TRIP (an unlikely situation).
12
13
14
15
7-7
Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4, 5 & H)

The HEATSINK TRIP, 3 PHASE FAILED and ACCTS FAILED trips are associated with the
following LED indications:
Frame 4
Check the LEDs on the power board for more HEATSINK TRIP information.
The LEDs light to indicate a problem.
Trips
HEATSINK TRIP
3 PHASE FAILED
field heatsink overtemperature
FLD HS OT
armature heatsink overtemperature ARM HS OT

phase loss
PHASE LOSS
Frame 5
The master power board (on the left hand side of the unit) is fitted with a Parallel Expansion
Board. This board has four additional LEDs providing information about the slave power board
(on the right hand side of the unit), and about the general status of the unit.
The LEDs light to indicate a problem.
Master Power Board
Trips
HEATSINK TRIP
3 PHASE FAILED
ACCTS FAILED
field heatsink overtemperature
FLD HS OT
Slave Power Board

(indicated by the
Parallel Expansion Board)
armature heatsink overtemperature ARM HS OT
ARM HS OT
phase loss
PHASE LOSS
PHASE LOSS
phase rotation fault
PH ROT FLT
current imbalance
CUR IMBALANCE
It is essential that the phase sequence applied

to the two stacks are identical otherwise the
converter will trip on 3 PHASE FAILED.
If there is a current imbalance between the
stacks which exceeds 10% the converter will
trip on ACCTS FAILED.
MASTER
SLAVE
Frame H
The power board has six LEDs indicating further trip information, and general status of the unit.
The LEDs go out to indicate a problem (note that LED1 may also flash as the SMPS attempts to
power-up repeatedly, indicating a fault).
Trips
Power Board
switched mode power supply on
trigger board connection status
ACCTS FAILED
3 PHASE FAILED
HEATSINK TRIP
SMPS OK
TRIGGER BOARD PRESENT
ac current transformer connection status ACCTS PRESENT
LED4
LED3
thyristor fuses status
THYRISTOR FUSES
LED6
field heatsink temperature normal
FIELD HEATSINK
LED2
armature heatsink temperature normal
STACK THERMOSTATS
LED5
LED1
7-8
Using the MMI to Manage Trips

Trip Messages
Most of the alarms have a delay timer so that the Converter only trips if the condition persists
for the whole of the delay period.
If the Converter trips, then the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for
the trip. The possible trip messages are given in the table below.
Trip Message and Meaning
Possible Reason for Trip
OVERSPEED
Motor overspeed - the speed feedback
signal has exceeded 125% of rated
speed.
Badly adjusted speed loop (alarm only operates with

encoder or armature volts feedback selected)
Alarm time delay : 0.1 seconds
MISSING PULSE
A missing pulse from the 6-pulse
armature current waveform. Trips when
the motor loading exceeds 1.5 times the
DISCONTINUOUS parameter value.
Firing plug failure

Connection failure
Alarm time delay : 60 seconds
FIELD OVER I
The motor field current has exceeded
120% of the calibrated value
Regulator failure
Badly tuned control loop (alarm only operates with
field current control mode selected)
HEATSINK TRIP
The Converter heatsink temperature is
too high
The ambient air temperature is too high

Poor ventilation or spacing between Converters
Fan failure, check fuse on power board, wrong
rotation (models above 70A bridge rating)
Blocked ventilation slots
Clogged air filters
Excessive armature current - nominal armature
current on motor nameplate should be checked
against the current calibration for the Converter.
Note: The stack must be allowed to cool in

order to re-start the Converter.
THERMISTOR
The motor temperature is too high
Inadequate ventilation
Blower failure -check for direction, clogged air filters
(models above 70A bridge rating)
Excessive armature current - check nominal armature
current on nameplate against current calibration)
Note: The motor must be allowed to cool in

order to re-start the Converter.
OVER VOLTS (VA)
Motor armature voltage has exceeded
120% of rated volts
Loose armature connection

Badly adjusted field voltage setting
Badly adjusted field current loop
Badly adjusted field-weakening bemf loop
Badly adjusted speed loop

7-9
SPEED FEEDBACK
The difference between speed feedback
and armature voltage feedback is
greater than the SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
parameter value
If FLD WEAK ENABLE parameter is
enabled, speed feedback is less than
10% when in the field weakening region
Analog tacho feedback polarity incorrect (terminals

G3 and G4)
The ENCODER SIGN parameters polarity is incorrect
Disconnection of wiring, including fibre optics
Tachogenerator failure
Tachogenerator coupling failure
ENCODER FAILED
No speed feedback signal
The SPEED FBK SELECT parameter is set to ENCODER

but an optional Encoder board is not fitted
Where applicable, check fibre optic cable for
damage, bend radius, operating length - refer to
Microtach handbook.
Check cable and connections on wire-ended encoder
FIELD FAIL
Field current is less than 6% of rated
current when in Current Control mode
Open circuit motor field - check connection and

measure field resistance
Field current is less than 50mA when in

Voltage Control mode (with default
current burden of 15K)
Faulty operation of field controller

Where an ac supply feeds the onboard field
regulator, check connections FL1 & FL2 for line-to-line
voltage (rather than line-to-neutral) - L1 into FL1, L2
into FL2. Note that the 3-phase supply must be
present for mains synchronisation purposes.
For loads where no field supply is required, e.g. a
permanent magnet motor, set the FIELD ENABLE
parameter to disable to suspend this alarm.
3-PHASE FAILED
3-phase supply failure
Total failure of supply, or missing phase of 3-phase

supply (detected under most circumstances) - check
supply to the controller, check high-speed thyristor
stack protection fuses, check power chassis coding
fuses.
Check the mains voltage of the Converter (refer to
Product Code). This alarm may not operate properly
with controller if the voltage is incorrect, i.e. wrong
unit or controller.
PHASE LOCK
Supply frequency is outside the
frequency band limits 45 - 65Hz
Check supply frequency

Synchronisation errors caused by distorted supply
5703 RCV ERROR

Invalid data received via P3 port from
another Converter
(Alarm only operates when MODE parameter is set to

5703 SLAVE)
STALL TRIP
With motor stationary (AT ZERO SPEED
parameter shows TRUE), current has
exceeded the STALL THRESHOLD
parameter value for longer than the
STALL TRIP DELAY parameter value
(Alarm only operates when the STALL TRIP parameter

is enabled).
7-10

OVER I TRIP
Current feedback value has exceeded
280% of rated current
(300% loading not exceeding 15ms or 325% not

exceeding 6.6ms is acceptable)
Motor armature windings failure - check insulation
resistance.
Badly tuned current loop
Faulty Converter - refer to SSD Drives
ACCTS FAILED
AC current transformer plug connection
to Converter power board missing
Check armature current transformer plug for correct

installation.
Frame 5 only : Load imbalance between the two
parallel power stacks
Note: The trip prevents the contactor closing

and the current loop activating without
armature current feedback - important
in the case of external stack controllers
where the thyristor stack is remote from
the control board.
AUTOTUNE ERROR
Speed feedback has exceeded 20% of
rated speed, or field current feedback
has exceeded 6% of rated field current
(Alarm only operates during the Autotune sequence).
AUTOTUNE ABORT
The Autotune sequence has been
aborted.
Coast Stop, Program Stop, Enable or Start Run

terminal(s) disabled during Autotune sequence
The AUTOTUNE parameter reset during the Autotune
sequence
Autotune sequence has timed-out (approximately 2
minutes).
EXTERNAL TRIP
REMOTE TRIP
CONFIG INHIBIT
CALIB INHIBIT
COMMS FAULT CODE x
OP STATION
0xF100 ERROR CAM FULL INIT

0xFF02 UNIMPLEMENTED OPCODE
0xFF03 ERROR NMI
0xFF04 ERROR TRAP
0xFF05 ERROR PCB VERSION
0xFF06 ERROR PRODUCT CODE
0xFF07 ERROR HSO FULL
Customer alarm! Trip operates if input open or high

impedance. Alarm time delay : 15 seconds
Device not wired to drive or device open circuited :
check C1 to C2 connections to drive - connect C1 to
C2 if customer device not fitted.
REM. SEQUENCE parameter Remote Trip flag set to
zero.
The drive was requested to start whilst in
Configuration mode.
Calibration fault
Operator Station faulty
Operator Station has been disconnected from
Converter whilst Converter is running in local control.
These are internal software errors. If these should
occur please contact SSD Drives Technical Support.
Table 7-1 Trip Messages

7-11
Symbolic Alarm Messages

These are generally internal software or hardware. If these should occur please investigate, or
contact SSD Drives Technical Support.
Number
Description
0xF003 Pre-Ready Fault

0xF004 Aux Contactor Open
0xF005 External Trip

0xF006 Remote Trip
0xF008 Calibration Scaling
Switch
0xFF03 Aux Power Fail
Action
Coding not present. Replace power board or chassis.
The internal auxiliary 3-phase contactor failed to close.
Check the position of the Calibration Scaling Switch refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the Converter" Calibration.
Ext Trip (C2) open circuit.
REM. SEQUENCE parameter Remote Trip flag set to zero.
Control Board Calibration Scaling Switch should be in

the "ON" (1) position.
Check Aux. Supply and/or Mains Input.
Self Test Alarms

Self Test Alarm and Meaning
Possible Reason for Alarm
(EEPROM) CHECKSUM FAIL

Parameters not saved, or are corrupted.
(The alarm appears at power-up or at the end of

Upload UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded - press the E key and
perform a PARAMETER SAVE. The Converter will be
returned to its factory default values.
ENABLE CONFIG.
The ENABLE CONFIG. parameter has
been left in the Enable state.
Select Disable for the ENABLE CONFIG. parameter
LANGUAGE CHECKSUM FAIL

Incorrect language selected, or
corrupted
(The alarm appears at power-up or at the end of

Upload UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded - press the E key and
reload the correct language or de-select the second
language.
INIT CAL FAIL

Self calibration of analog inputs has
exceeded normal tolerance
(The alarm appears at power-up)

As a temporary measure, the tolerance can be
increased by 0.1% with each press of the E key,
however, this indicates a hardware fault - refer to SSD
Drives.
IA FBK CAL FAIL / IA INST CAL FAIL

The self calibration of the armature
current has failed
(The alarm appears at power-up)

If powering the unit off and on does not remove the
problem, a hardware failure is suspected. Refer to
SSD Drives.
Setting Trip Conditions

The following parameters in the CALIBRATION menu are used to set trip conditions:
OVER SPEED LEVEL
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
STALL THRESHOLD
STALL TRIP DELAY
REMOTE TRIP DELAY
7-12

Viewing Trip Conditions
The following parameters in the ALARM STATUS menu can be viewed to investigate trip
conditions:
LAST ALARM
HEALTH WORD
HEALTH STORE
THERMISTOR STATE
SPEED FBK STATE
STALL TRIP
REMOTE TRIP
Inhibiting Alarms
The following alarms can be inhibited in the INHIBIT ALARMS menu.
SPEED FBK ALARM
ENCODER ALARM
FIELD FAIL
5703 RCV ERROR
STALL TRIP
TRIP RESET
REM TRIP INHIBIT
Note: The STALL TRIP parameter in the DIAGNOSTICS menu is set regardless of the state of
STALL TRIP inhibit. The flag is set after the stall time-out expires. The relevant bit (bit 12)
in the HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE parameters is only set when STALL TRIP is
enabled.
Test Points
The following test points are located on the control board and can be accessed through the
Technology Option housing. When used with a meter, they will provide valuable information in
the event of a fault. Refer to SSD Drives for further information.
IF
Technology Box
Option
IA
0V
PEEK
VA
Test Point
Description
IF
Field current feedback 0.0V = 0% 4.0V =100% (mean voltage),

value of FIELD I FBK diagnostic, Tag No. 300
IA
Armature current feedback 1.1V 100% (mean current),

value of CURRENT FEEDBACK diagnostic, Tag No. 298
VA
Armature volts feedback 10V 100% calculated VA (mean voltage),

value of TERMINAL VOLTS diagnostic, Tag No. 57
0V
0V
PEEK
PEEK software (SSD Drives use)
Routine Maintenance and Repair

0
1
8-1
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Maintenance
Because of its solid state design, the 590+ Digital drive has few items requiring service or
maintenance. Service typically is a matter of replacing fuses, checking electrical contacts, and
isolating problems in the overall system application.
Caution
Service procedures must be performed by qualified personnel with an understanding of
the dangers inherent in high voltage applications and the precautions necessary when
servicing industrial equipment. The customer is responsible for assessing the technical
competency of in-house service personnel.
Service Procedures
Required Tools and Equipment
Tools needed for routine service operations include basic hand tools screwdrivers, wrenches,
etc.
WARNING!
Only qualified service personnel should attempt to repair or replace parts in the
590+.
Isolate the entire 590+drive from electrical power before attempting to work on
it.
Preventive Maintenance
You should perform regular preventive maintenance every six months to ensure long life and
continued usefulness of the 590+. Keep the drive and its components clean, check auxiliary
fans if fitted, and make sure connections and mounting bolts have not loosened from vibration.
The control and field wires can be checked by gently attempting pulling the wires out of the
terminals. The terminals should hold the wires firmly in place.
All the remaining wires should be checked with a torque wrench. Refer to Chapter 11:
Technical Specifications - Termination Tightening Torque tables.
Repair
There are no user-serviceable components.
IMPORTANT: MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE UNIT - RETURN IT TO EUROTHERM DRIVES.
Saving Your Application Data

The Converter retains saved settings during power-down. You can download and upload this
back into the repaired unit, if necessary. You may, depending upon your knowledge of the fault,
attempt the back-up of your application data now, refer to Chapter 5: The Operator Station Copying an Application.
If the fault clearly lies within the MMI, then return the unit for repair.
8-2
Returning the Unit to SSD Drives

Before calling SSD Drives Customer Service, make sure you have the following information
available:
Information
Source
Model number and serial number
590+Digital drive rating label
Motor horsepower, armature current and

voltage, field current and voltage, base and
top speed ratings
Motor nameplate
Speed voltage feedback per 1000 RPM (analog

device), or counts per revolution(digital device)
Speed feedback device nameplate
Applications information and operating

environment
System drawings.
Contact your nearest SSD Drives Service Centre to arrange return of the item.
You will be given a Returned Material Authorisation. Use this as a reference on all paperwork
you return with the faulty item.
Pack and despatch the item in the original packing materials; or at least an anti-static enclosure.
Do not allow packaging chips to enter the unit.
Warranty Information
Warranty information precedes the Contents at the front of this manual.
Disposal
This product contains materials which are consignable waste under the Special Waste
Regulations 1996 which complies with the EC Hazardous Waste Directive - Directive
91/689/EEC.
We recommend you dispose of the appropriate materials in accordance with the valid
environmental control laws. The following table shows which materials can be recycled and
which have to be disposed of in a special way.
Material
metal
plastics material
printed circuit board
Recycle
yes
yes
no
Disposal
no
no
yes
The printed circuit board should be disposed of in one of two ways:

1. High temperature incineration (minimum temperature 1200C) by an incinerator authorised
under parts A or B of the Environmental Protection Act
2. Disposal in an engineered land fill site that is licensed to take aluminium electrolytic
capacitors. Do not dispose of in a land fill site set aside for domestic waste.
Packaging
During transport our products are protected by suitable packaging. This is entirely
environmentally compatible and should be taken for central disposal as secondary raw material.
8-3
Technical Support Checks

The results of the following checks will be very useful to SSD Drives Technical Support.
Caution
Please only attempt these checks if you are electrically competent.
Miscellaneous Checks
or
Check 24V present at Terminals C1 to C9 (C1 is 0V) - dc

Check 10V present at Terminals B3 and B4 (B1 is 0V) - dc
Check auxiliary supply present at Neutral & Line, 110/240V ac
Check the fans rotate, where applicable
WARNING!
Now isolate the unit completely from all supplies. It may be necessary to remove
an armature and field connection to carry out the following checks.
Continuity Test on Fuses Using a Meter

Check the coding fuses on the power board
Check the auxiliary fuses etc. (fan fuse, if applicable)
Diode Check on Power Terminals Using a Meter
or
A+ to L1, L2, L3 and Earth Terminal = Open Circuit

A- to L1, L2, L3 and Earth Terminal = Open Circuit
Internal Field Check Using a Meter
or
All the coding fuses must be OK before continuing with the following checks since
the fuses are in the circuit.
-ve to L1 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to L2 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to F- & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to L1 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
-ve to L2 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
External Field Check Using a Meter

-ve to FL1 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to FL2 & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to F- & +ve to F+ = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to FL1 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
-ve to FL2 & +ve to F- = Open Circuit
Make a note of the Serial No. and Model No.
Serial No.
Model No.
Re-establish all connections. All terminals should be secure and not over-torqued.
or
8-4
Fuse Replacement (Frame H)

1. Remove the front cover.
2. Unplug the ribbon cables to the trigger boards.
3. Open the swing-frame using the two quick-release fixings at the right hand end.
590+ 4Q Product (Regenerative)

FRONT VIEW
Current
Transformer
Upper Phase Assembly
SIDE VIEW
Phase Assembly
Connection Screws
Screw
Fuse
Handles
A
Fuse
CT Plate
Lower Phase Assembly
Phase Assembly
Connection Screws
AC Incoming
Busbar
Figure 8-1 590+ (Frame H) Fuse Replacement Diagram

IMPORTANT: When re-assembling the unit, apply a `zinc-loaded jointing compound between the
fuses and busbars, and between the busbars and phase assemblies (BICC BX1 - SSD
Part No. EA466241)
Observe all tightening torque levels, refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications Fixing Types and Torques.
Bench-Top Replacement Procedure
1. Disconnect the relevant fuse microswitch assembly by unplugging the lead assembly from
the rear trunking.
2. Remove the M12 (A).
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the four M10 screws (B, C, D, E).
4. Hold the fuse assembly handle in one hand and remove the two screws (D, E) from the lower
phase assembly.
CAUTION: The fuse assembly weighs 9kg maximum.
5. Hold the fuse assembly handles and remove the two screws (B, C) from the upper phase
assembly.
6. With the fuse assembly on the bench, remove the M12 screws (F, G, H, I) holding the fuses
to the busbars. Take a note of the fuse microswitch position on the fuse assembly, do not
forget, as the lead assembly will not fit if mounted in the wrong position.
Reverse the above procedure for replacement. Remember to re-connect the fuse microswitches.
8-5
In-Situ Replacement Procedure

1. Disconnect the relevant fuse microswitch assembly by unplugging the lead assembly from
the rear trunking.
2. Remove the M12 screw (A), and the 4 screws (F, G, H, I). Remove the CT plate and
handles.
3. Remove the relevant screws (B, C or D, E) and lift the fuse busbar assembly from the phase
assembly.
4. Replace the fuse on the busbar and re-connect the microswitch. Fully tighten the fuse to the
busbar.
5. Fit the fuse busbar assembly on to the phase assembly. Dont fully tighten the screws yet.
6. Position the CT plate on top of the fuses. The slack in the fuse busbar assembly will allow
the fixing holes to be aligned. Insert the screws.
7. Fully tighten all screws (including those in 5 above).
8. Re-connect the fuse microswitches.
591+ 2Q Product (Non-Regenerative)

FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
Phase Assembly
D
E
Fuse Assy/Phase Assy
Fixing Screws
C
Fuse
CT Plate/Fuse
Fixing Screws
CT Plate/CT Boss
Fixing Screw
Current
Transformer
AC Incoming
Busbar
Figure 8-2 591+ Fuse Replacement Diagram

fuses and busbars, and between the busbars and phase assemblies (BICC BX1 - SSD
Part No. EA466241)
Bench-Top Replacement Procedure
Working on the relevant fuse assemblies:
1. Remove the M12 screw (A).
2. Release the two M12 screws (B, C) and remove the CT plate.
3. Remove the two M10 screws (D, E) fixing the fuse assembly to the phase assembly.
4. On the bench, replace the relevant fuse on the fuse assembly.
8-6

5. Reverse the procedure for re-fitting.
Phase Assembly Replacement (Frame H)

Phase Assembly
Dummy Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
Busbar
Stack of
interconnecting
plates
A-
Trigger Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
4Q
(upper phase assemblies only shown)

Phase Assembly
Thyristor
Suppression
Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
A-
Stack of
interconnecting
plates
Busbar
A+
Trigger Board
(one only shown
for clarity)
2Q
Figure 8-3 Front View of Phase Assemblies
fuses and busbars, between the busbars and phase assemblies and between the
interconnection plates and the heatsink (BICC BX1 - SSD Part No. EA466241)
8-7
Phase Assembly Removal Procedure

1. Referring to Figure 8-1 (590+) or Figure 8-2 (591+), remove the M12 screw (A). Undo the
four screws (B, C, D, E) which allows the CT plate and fuse assembly to be removed.
2. Unplug the thyristor gate leads and the heatsink overtemperature leads from the relevant
phase assembly trigger board. Remove the same leads from the adjacent phase assembly or
assemblies (this is necessary to gain complete access to the interconnecting plates.) If you
are removing the phase assembly from a 591+ (2Q) product, also disconnect the thyristor
suppression lead from the trigger boards.
3. Remove the trigger board by releasing the four M6 Sems nuts fixing the PCB to the
assembly. If you are working on a 590+ (4Q), remove the dummy trigger board, or if
working on a 591+ (2Q) remove the thyristor suppression board. Remove the air duct from
the top of the phase assembly to gain access to the DC interconnection plates.
Do not remove the trigger board support spacers.
4. Remove the DC interconnection plates between the phase assembly and its adjacent
assemblies, either output terminals or phase assemblies.
5. If changing an upper phase assembly on a 590+ or 591+ remove the top baffle. This is
achieved by pushing out the two end flaps of the plenum chamber and unclipping the top
baffle from the top cover baffle stops and the top of the phase assemblies. Remove the
vertical baffles between phase assemblies.
6. If changing a lower phase assembly on a 590+, remove the lower air duct.
7. Remove the complete phase assembly by removing the four M6 Sems nuts at the top and
bottom of the phase assembly.
Note: On the 591+ 2Q, the left hand screw retains the phase coding connection which should
be pushed to one side before lifting the phase assembly.
Phase Assembly Fitting Procedure
1. Position the repaired or spare phase assembly on to the back panel spacer. (Remember to reconnect the coding lead to the bottom of the phase assembly when working on a 591+ 2Q).
Check for correct orientation of the assembly. Fix in position with 4 x M6 Sems nuts and
tighten to the correct torque level.
Refit the interconnecting plate stacks between the phase assemblies. A stack of three plates
are used on a 1200 Amp unit, four on a 1700 Amp unit, five on a 2200 Amp unit and six on
a 2700 Amp unit. On a 4Q unit the plates interconnect both the upper and lower thyristors
and adjacent phase assemblies. On the 2Q unit the plates interconnect adjacent phase
assemblies. Tighten to the correct torque level.
Note: a) When fitting a spare phase assembly there may be some misalignment to the new
phase where the interconnection plates do not fit easily. In this case, loosen the trigger
support spacers which will allow adjustment of the support bars. Fit the interconnecting
plates and re-tighten all units, including spacers.
b) When re-assembling the interconnection plates it is important that a good electrical
contact is made between the plates and the aluminium heatsink. Apply a layer of `zincloaded jointing compound between the interconnection plates and the heatsink.
3. Refit the air duct on the phase assembly ensuring that the duct fits inside the side ducting of
the phase assembly.
4. Refit the trigger board (thyristor suppression board or dummy board as appropriate) and
secure with the M6 Sems nuts.
5. Reconnect the gate leads, thermostat and suppression lead as necessary. The gate leads
cannot be fitted incorrectly as they are polarised by the plugs.
6. Re-fit the top baffle (either plenum cover or lower 4Q air duct) and vertical baffles.
7. Replace the fuse.
8. Re-close the swing-frame.
9. Replace the trigger board connectors.
8-8
Replacing the Fan (Frames 4 & 5)
WARNING!
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made live
unintentionally by other personnel.
Remove the terminal cover. Unscrew the three screws securing the baffle and remove.
Disconnect the fan supply cable. Remove the two M8 earth/ground screws on the back of the
drive (Frame 5). Remove the fan cover. Remove the fan assembly and screws as detailed above.
Reverse the procedure for refitting the fan assembly refer to the refitting note in the diagram
above. The replacement fan assembly includes the fan, cover and capacitor, requiring just a
simple connection of the supply cable.
Heatsink Cooling Fan Connections

These fans are connected on the power board to the cooling fan supplies, CONN 2 or 3 as
described below:
380, 500, 725, 830A models have a single fan matched to the auxiliary supply and connected
to CONN 2.
1580A models have two fans matched to the auxiliary supply connected to CONN 2 & 3.
Control Loops
9-1
CONTROL LOOPS
9
Principle of Operation
Note: Selection between Current Control or Speed Control (default) is
made by the I DMD ISOLATE (current demand isolate) parameter
using Digital I/P3 (Terminal C8). If ENABLED the Converter
operates as a current controller, and if DISABLED (the default) it
operates as a speed controller.
MMI Menu Map

1
SETUP PARAMETERS
CURRENT LOOP
I DMD ISOLATE
Current Loop
The current loop accepts a demand from either the speed loop, or directly from the plant, and
forms an error signal which is the difference between demand and average value of feedback.
The error signal is fed into a Proportional + Integral compensator which produces the output of
the current loop, i.e. the firing angle signal.
In the Converter, the error signal is created in two different forms:
1. The average error is computed as the difference between demand and average value of
feedback and fed into the Integral part of the P + I algorithm.
2. The instantaneous error is computed as the difference between demand and instantaneous
value of feedback and is fed into the Proportional part of the P + I algorithm. This gives
higher transient performance since it does not contain any time lag, unlike the average which
has a built-in lag of 1/6 of mains cycle. However, the average is the true measurement of
torque which is the objective of the current control and this is not affected by the small time
lag in achieving zero steady-state error.
The firing angle signal is translated into a certain time delay from the mains zero cross point
(obtained via a Phase-Lock-Loop) and this results in a firing command being issued to the
thyristor stack every 1/6 of a mains cycle in steady-state.
Some special features of the current controller are discussed separately below.
Adaptive Current Control

The gain of a thyristor 6-pulse converter (voltage-time area over firing angle) drops dramatically
at discontinuous values of armature current. Therefore a gain boost is required in the current
controller to compensate for that.
In the Converter, this is handled by an adaptive algorithm which allows the current to follow the
demand in one step (firing) within the discontinuous region of operation.
Back EMF (BEMF) Estimate

With the motor at standstill, the firing angle for zero current is 120 degrees. When the motor is
rotating at different speeds the firing angle for zero current follows a cosine locus.
It is of paramount importance to track this locus as close as possible throughout the speed range
if the current loop bandwidth is to be maintained at its highest possible level during current
reversals from master to slave bridge and visa-versa.
There are two reasons for the loss of bandwidth at current reversals.
Firstly, the loss of converter gain needs to be compensated in an accurate way which is the
objective of the adaptive algorithm.
Secondly, the above algorithm also relies on the right start-up value of firing angle in the
incoming bridge in order to minimise both the "dead-time" (time interval of zero current referred
to below) as well as the rise time to the required current demand.
In order to get the right start-up value of firing angle the knowledge of the operating BEMF is
necessary. In the Converter, this is achieved by a combination of a hardware peak current
detector and appropriate software algorithm.
9-2
Control Loops
Bridge Changeover Delay
The bridge changeover "dead-time", i.e. time interval of zero current, is programmable from 1 to
1500 (via Reserved Menu) with a default value of 1.
For values from 1 to 6:
The delay can be set at multiples of 1/6 mains period, i.e. max. 6 x 3.33 = 20ms at 50Hz. This is
relevant for use with large power converters where it is advisable to allow more time for
snubber currents to subside before reversal is enabled. It is also relevant for motors with very
large armature inductance where zero current detection is more sensitive and therefore a "factor
of safety" in the bridge changeover delay is advisable.
For values from 7 to 1500:
The delay corresponds to 7 x 1.33s up to 1500 x 1.33s = 2ms maximum.
Manual Tuning
Note: This procedure is rarely used or required, if possible use Autotune.
You may need to perform a manual tuning as Autotune does have two limitations:
1. It requires the field to be switched off and therefore the shaft will need clamping when
autotuning a permanent-magnet motor or very rarely with a wound-field motor of relatively
high permanent magnetism.
2. Part 1 of Autotune determines the discontinuous to continuous boundary level, i.e. the
average value at which the armature current becomes "just" continuous. This is achieved by
automatically disabling the field and advancing the firing angle at small steps until the slope
of the current "envelope" changes substantially indicating continuous region of operation.
Part 2 of Autotune applies a step change in the current demand within the continuous region
as determined by Part 1. When the current feedback approaches the final settling value
within 1 to 2 steps, the autotune function terminates and returns the "FIELD ENABLE" to its
previous state. The P & I gains and the value of discontinuous boundary current should then
be saved.
If the value of boundary current (Part 1) is very high (larger than 150% or so), then the
Autotune Part 2 step change will be in the region above 200% which might result in
overcurrent trip. In this case it is advisable to set the I gain to a large enough value (typically
10) to give fast response throughout the discontinuous region, a low value for the P gain
(typically 1, not important since there is no effective armature time constant in the
discontinuous region to compensate for) and finally eliminate the adaptive mode by setting
"Discontinuous" to zero. At the same time though, one must disable the Missing Pulse alarm;
this is activated when the load current is above the "Discontinuous" level and in this case it
would give erroneous trips if left enabled. In order to disable this alarm the special "superpassword" reserved for SSD Drives personnel needs to be entered. Next in the "Reserved"
menu, which will then appear as a submenu of "SYSTEM", a parameter called SYS
HEALTH INHIB should be set to the hexadecimal value 0x0002.
The above suggestion assumes that the current limit will prevent the motor from operating in the
continuous region, i.e. above 150% in the example above. If this is not the case, as for example
when the current limit is set at 200%, then a manual tuning will be necessary.
Set the DISCONTINUOUS parameter to the correct value by disabling or disconnecting the
field, set the current limit to zero and start the drive. Gradually increase the current limit
observing the current feedback waveform (see Diagnostics below) on an oscilloscope beam.
When the pulses "just come together", with no zero interval between them, read the value of
current limit (or indeed current demand) and set the DISCONTINUOUS parameter to this value.
If this value is very high (above the current limit), then it should be set to zero and follow the
suggestion in 2 above. In this case the drive will not perform any adaption in the discontinuous
region, so some loss in performance may be noticed in the current loop response.
Control Loops
9-3
Subsequently either
a squarewave signal should be applied to the current demand input (Terminal A3) with
Current Demand Isolate (terminal C8) on
or "toggle" between two values of current limit into terminal A6 and operate in normal speed
loop mode.
Ideally this input signal should be offset above the Discontinuous level, such that the drive is
operating in the continuous current region. Then you could increase the value of I gain to give a
fast rise with no more than 10% overshoot and subsequently increase the P gain towards
critically damped response, i.e. practically no overshoot.
Current Loop controls incorrectly set.

Integral Time Constant too short
increase Current Loop Integral Time
Constant
Current Loop controls incorrectly set.

Proportional Gain too low - increase
Current Loop Proportional Gain
Current Loop response

correctly adjusted.
Tuning Hints
If the I gain is too high, the response will be underdamped (overshoot will be excessive with
long oscillatory settling). If the I gain is too low, the response will be overdamped (long
exponential rise).
With the I gain optimally set, if the P gain is too low the response will be overdamped. If P is
too high the response will revert to underdamped with the tendency to go totally unstable.
Diagnostics
The diagnostic point for "real" armature current is the first (left-hand side) test point below the
calibration panel. This will give 1.1V average for 100% current. It will also give the operating
bridge, i.e. it will be negative for the Master bridge (positive current demand) and positive for
the Slave bridge (negative current demand).
9-4
Control Loops
Speed Loop
The speed loop accepts a demand from either an outside loop (i.e. position loop) or directly from
the plant and forms the error signal which is the difference between demand and feedback. The
error signal is fed into a Proportional + Integral compensator which produces the output of the
speed loop, i.e. the current demand signal.
The integral gain is translated into a Time Constant (secs) in the MMI which defines more
clearly the function of the compensator against a certain load time constant.
Speed Loop Synchronised with Current Loop

The proportional part of the P+I algorithm is executed immediately before each run of the
current loop, thus ensuring minimum time lag and therefore maximum bandwidth.
Combined Analog Tacho / Encoder Feedback

By using the analog tacho f/b on the Proportional part of the P + I algorithm and the encoder f/b
on the Integral part (using similar principle as in the current loop), the Converter combines
maximum transient response with the increased steady-state accuracy of the digital feedback.
Please refer to SSD Drives Engineering Department for assistance in the use of this feature.
Current Demand Rate Limit (di/dt)

Access to the di/dt limit is currently reserved for SSD Drives personnel only in the Reserved
Menu.
This is a limit imposed on the rate of change of the current demand. It is to be used for motors
with commutation limitations, mechanical systems that cannot absorb rapid torque transients and
also as a means of limiting current overshoot for large current swings (e.g. 0 200%). The
default value is set at 35% (i.e. maximum allowable change is 35% of FLC in 1/6 mains cycle)
which has no practical effect on the current response between 0 and 100%.
Field Control
Set-up Notes
The setting of the P + I gains for the current controller is done manually in much the same way
as described in Chapter 4: Current Loop - Manual Tuning, and one convenient way is to
switch several times from "quench" to "standby" mode and observe the current response 0
50% for rise time and overshoot.
The setting of the field weakening gains is achieved by observing the armature voltage feedback
for overshoot and settling time. The EMF GAIN parameter defaults to 0.30 (real gain of 30) and
normally lies in the region 0.20 to 0.70 (larger settings normally lead to instability). The EMF
LEAD parameter should be set at around the time constant for the field current loop. It defaults
to 2.00 (200ms). Finally, the EMF LAG parameter defaults to 40.00 (4000ms) and it should
generally lie in the region of 10 to 50 times the "emf lead".
The tuning of the field weakening loop is also very dependent on the acceleration rate through
base speed and visa-versa. If armature voltage overshoot is a problem for rapid acceleration
rates, then the use of the "feedback lead/lag" compensator is recommended to limit the
overshoot as discussed above. If not, then the default values for the above bemf fbk gains are
recommended (i.e. disabled) which will probably allow further increase in the forward path
transfer function gains ("emf gain" and "emf lead") for faster field response.
In summary, the increased attenuation at the higher frequencies will allow an increase in the
gain whilst maintaining the desired phase margin. Bearing in mind that the negative angle of the
compensator lowers the angle curve, in order to maintain the desired phase margin (45 to 60
degrees) a reduction in the phase-margin frequency is required. This is the frequency at which
the log magnitude curve crosses the 0db line. Since the phase-margin frequency is indicative of
the speed of response of the system, its reduction should be kept to a minimum. This is
achievable by trying to keep the value of the corner-frequency 1 / T1 as low as possible by
setting T1 at values greater than 100ms or so. The upper limit for T1 will be dictated by the
settling time requirement.
Control Loops
9-5
Current Control
The field current loop can accept a demand directly from the plant and/or an outside field
weakening loop and forms the error signal which is the difference between demand and
feedback. The error signal is fed into a P + I compensator which produces the output of the field
loop, i.e. the field firing angle signal.
The firing angle signal is translated into a certain time delay from the mains zero cross point
(obtained via the same Phase-Lock-Loop as for the armature) and this results into a firing
command being issued to the field bridge every 1/2 of a mains cycle in steady-state.
Voltage Control
This offers the facility of an open-loop voltage control for motors which do not provide in the
nameplate the field current rating. The field voltage is controlled by the specified RATIO
OUT/IN which defaults to 90%. This is the maximum dc Volts that can be obtained for a given
ac RMS input in a single-phase rectifier, i.e. 370V dc for 415V ac supply. The specified ratio
determines directly the firing angle at which the controller operates and therefore the thermal
effects on the field resistance as well as mains voltage variations are not compensated for. It is
also worth noting that in this mode the field overcurrent alarm is not active (since there is no
current scaling) and therefore this mode is not recommended for use with supplies much greater
than the field voltage rating.
Field Weakening
The field weakening loop accepts a demand for MAX VOLTS (default 100%) and forms the
error signal which is the difference between demand and arm. volts feedback. The error signal is
fed into a Lead/Lag compensator which produces the output of the field weakening loop, i.e. the
field weakening demand. This gets subtracted from the field setpoint (default 100%) to produce
the field demand into the field current loop. A MIN FLD CURRENT parameter (default 10%)
limits the minimum level in the field weakening region.
The Lead/Lag compensator has a dc gain ("emf gain" = Kp), a lead time constant ("emf lead" =
T1) and a lag time constant ("emf lag" = T2).
Note: Field weakening is not possible when running with Armature Volts feedback. Although
field weakening can be enabled in this instance, a software interlock clamps the field
demand at 100% and will not allow the field weakening to reduce it.
Lead/Lag
The slight disadvantage of Lead/Lag { transfer function = Kp * ( 1+sT1 ) / ( 1+sT2 ) }
versus P + I { transfer function = Kp * ( 1+sT ) / sT } is that the DC gain is not "infinity"
and therefore there is a "finite" steady-state error. This is kept sufficiently small for values of
"emf gain" > 0.20 ( i.e. real 20).
The advantage of the Lead/Lag is that it allows greater attenuation at higher frequencies. The
high frequency gain is Kp T1 / T2 and therefore by keeping the ratio T2 / T1 high (generally at
values above 10) the log magnitude is reduced by 20log(T2/T1) for frequencies above 1 / T1.
An extra feedback lead/lag compensator has been added into the arm. volts f/b to minimise the
overshoot in volts. This is particularly useful when accelerating fast through base speed and
therefore increasing the motor bemf at a faster rate than the field current can possibly weaken,
due to the normally large field time constant. The ratio of "bemf fbk lead" / "bemf fbk lag"
should always be greater than 1 to give a "lead" function to allow the field to start weakening
early enough. However, it is not recommended to raise the ratio much higher than 2 to 3 times,
otherwise instability will start creeping in. The absolute setting of the above parameters in
milliseconds depends on the overall field time constant. The default value is set to 1 (100ms /
100ms) which means that the function is disabled.
Standby Field
When the armature current gets quenched, a timer starts timing-out and after a certain delay
("fld quench delay") it will either quench the field totally ("fld quench mode" = "quench") or
will reduce it to 50% of the current or voltage setpoint ("fld quench mode" = "standby"). This
applies to both current and voltage modes.
9-6
Control Loops
Parameter Specification Table
10-1
PARAMETER TABLES
0
1
The headings for the Tag No. table are described below.
Tag
A numeric identification of the parameter. It is used to identify the

source and destinations of internal links.
Name
The parameter name as it appears on the MMI.
MMI Menu
The menu page under which the parameter is stored on the MMI.
CE Block
The Function Block under which the parameter is stored in the

ConfigEd Lite programming software.
Range
This varies with parameter type:

INT
The upper and lower limits of the parameter, indicating the

parameters true, internally-held, number of decimal.
Note: Decimal Places - some internally held parameters
with two decimal places are only displayed with one
decimal place. These parameters are indicated in
the Parameter Description tables. The Range
parameter highlights these with (h).
Mn
Notes
BOOL
0 = FALSE, 1 = TRUE
WORD
0x0000 to 0xFFFF (hexadecimal)
Serial Communications Mnemonic:

Refer to Chapter 14: Serial Communications
Output parameters are not saved in non-vol memory unless noted
otherwise.
Input parameters are saved in non-vol memory unless noted otherwise.
Note 1. This input parameter is not saved in non-volatile memory.
Note 2. This input parameter can only be written to when the drive is
stopped.
Note 3. This input parameter can only be written to when the drive is in
configuration mode.
Note 4. This parameter is reserved
Parameter Types:
Parameters that look like 0x0000 are WORDS
Parameters that have text are BOOLs if they have a range of 0,1
Parameters that have text are WORDS if their range is 0 to greater than 1
All other parameters are INT (integers)
If a parameter can only be written to in Config mode, this implies that the drive is stopped.
10-2
Specification Table: Tag Number Order

Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
a1
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
Ramps
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
a2
NONVOL VERSION
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP DECEL TIME
Ramps
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
a3
CONSTANT ACCEL
Ramps
0:DISABLED
1:ENABLED
a4
RAMP INPUT
Ramps
-105.00 to 105.00 %
a5
RATIO 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
Setpoint Sum 1
-3.0000 to 3.0000
a6
RATIO 2 (A3)
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
-3.0000 to 3.0000
a7
SIGN 1
Setpoint Sum 1
0:NEGATIVE
1:POSITIVE
a8
SIGN 2 (A3)
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
Same as Tag 8
a9
10
ZERO SPD. OFFSET
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
Calibration
-5.00 to 5.00 %
aa
11
STANDSTILL LOGIC
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
Standstill
Same as Tag 4
ab
12
ZERO THRESHOLD
Standstill
0.00 to 100.00 %
ac
13
SPD.INT.TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
Speed Loop
0.001 to 30.000 SECS
ad
14
SPD.PROP.GAIN
Speed Loop
0.00 to 200.00
ae
15
CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
Current Loop
0.00 to 200.00 %
af
16
PROP. GAIN
Current Loop
0.00 to 200.00
ag
17
INT. GAIN
Current Loop
0.00 to 200.00
ah
18
AUTOTUNE
Current Loop
0:OFF
1:ON
ai
19
FIELD FAIL
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
Alarms
0:ENABLED
1:INHIBITED
aj
20
ARMATURE V CAL.
Calibration
0.9800 to 1.1000
ak
21
IR COMPENSATION
Calibration
0.00 to 100.00 %
al
22
ENCODER RPM
Calibration
0 to 6000 RPM
am
23
ANALOG TACH CAL
Calibration
0.9800 to 1.1000
an
24
ENCODER LINES
Calibration
10 to 5000
ao
25
ARMATURE I (A9)
Calibration
0:UNIPOLAR
1:BIPOLAR
ap
26
PROG STOP TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
Stop Rates
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
aq
27
STOP TIME
Stop Rates
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
ar
28
STALL TRIP
Alarms
Same as Tag 19
as
29
STOP ZERO SPEED
Stop Rates
0.00 to 100.00 %
at
Notes
30
ADDITIONAL DEM
Current Loop
-200.00 to 200.00 %
au
31
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
PROFILE
Current Profile
0.00 to 100.00 %
av
32
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
PROFILE
Current Profile
0.00 to 100.00 %
aw
33
IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
PROFILE
Current Profile
0.00 to 200.00 %
ax
34
FIELD FBKSTOP
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 1000
ay
35
FIELD FFRSTOP
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 10000
az
4
4
36
IFFB DELAY
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 255
b0
37
FULL MENUS
MENUS
Menus
Same as Tag 4
b1
39
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Same as Tag 4
b3
40
SYSTEM IO
RESERVED
Unallocated
b4
Output,4
41
SETPOINT 4
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
b5

Range
10-3
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
42
AT CURRENT LIMIT
DIAGNOSTICS
Current Loop
MN
Notes
b6
Output
43
MODULUS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL
OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
Digout 1 (B5)
0:FALSE
1:TRUE
b7
44
MODULUS
Digout 2 (B6)
Same as Tag 43
b8
45
MODULUS
Digout 3 (B7)
Same as Tag 43
b9
46
/ILOOP SUSPEND
RESERVED
Current Loop
47
SPEED FBK SELECT
Speed Loop
0:ARM VOLTS FBK

1:ANALOG TACH
2:ENCODER
3:ENCODER/ANALOG
48
NEG. I CLAMP
Current Loop
-200.00 to 200.00 %
bc
49
ENCODER SIGN
Speed Loop
Same as Tag 8
bd
50
ANIN 1 (A2)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Input 1
be
Output
51
ANIN 2 (A3)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Input 2
bf
Output
52
ANIN 3 (A4)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Input 3
bg
Output
53
ANIN 4 (A5)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Input 4
bh
Output
54
ANIN 5 (A6)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Input 5
bi
Output
55
ANOUT 1 (A7)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Output 1
bj
Output
ba
Output,4
bb
56
ANOUT 2 (A8)
DIAGNOSTICS
Analog Output 2
bk
Output
57
TERMINAL VOLTS
DIAGNOSTICS
Calibration
bl
Output
58
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
Calibration
bm
Output
59
UNFIL.ENCODER
DIAGNOSTICS
Calibration
bn
Output
60
BACK EMF
DIAGNOSTICS
Calibration
bo
Output
61
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
bp
Output
62
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
DIAGNOSTICS
Speed Loop
bq
Output
63
SPEED SETPOINT
DIAGNOSTICS
Speed Loop
br
Output
64
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
DIAGNOSTICS
Speed Loop
bs
Output
65
IaFbk UNFILTERED
DIAGNOSTICS
Current Loop
bt
Output
66
IaDmd UNFILTERED
DIAGNOSTICS
Current Loop
bu
Output
67
ACTUAL POS I LIM
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
bv
Output
68
START (C3)
DIAGNOSTICS
Aux I/O
bw
Output
69
DIGITAL INPUT C4
DIAGNOSTICS
Aux I/O
bx
Output
70
DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIAGNOSTICS
Aux I/O
by
Output
71
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIAGNOSTICS
Digital Input 1
bz
Output
72
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIAGNOSTICS
Digital Input 2
c0
Output
73
DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIAGNOSTICS
Digital Input 3
c1
Output
74
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIAGNOSTICS
Digout 1 (B5)
c2
Output
75
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIAGNOSTICS
Digout 2 (B6)
c3
Output
76
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
DIAGNOSTICS
Digout 3 (B7)
c4
Output
77
AT ZERO SPEED
DIAGNOSTICS
Standstill
c5
Output
78
AT ZERO SETPOINT
DIAGNOSTICS
Standstill
c6
Output
79
AT STANDSTILL
DIAGNOSTICS
Standstill
c7
Output
80
PROGRAM STOP
DIAGNOSTICS
Stop Rates
c8
Output
81
SPEED FBK ALARM
Alarms
Same as Tag 19
c9
82
DRIVE START
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
ca
Output
83
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
DIAGNOSTICS
Unallocated
cb
Output
84
DRIVE ENABLE
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
cc
Output
85
RAMP OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
Ramps
cd
Output
86
SPT SUM OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
Setpoint Sum 1
ce
Output
87
POS. I CLAMP
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
cf
Output
10-4
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
88
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
NEG. I CLAMP
Range
MN
Notes
cg
Output
ch
Output
89
SPEED DEMAND
DIAGNOSTICS
Stop Rates
90
BIPOLAR CLAMPS
Current Loop
Same as Tag 4
91
PROG STOP I LIM
Stop Rates
0.00 to 200.00 %
cj
92
ENCODER ALARM
Alarms
Same as Tag 19
ck
93
IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
PROFILE
Current Profile
0.00 to 200.00 %
cl
94
AUX DIGOUT 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
cm
95
AUX DIGOUT 2
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
cn
ci
96
AUX DIGOUT 3
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
co
97
SOURCE TAG
Digout 1 (B5)
0 to 639
cp
2,3
98
SOURCE TAG
Digout 2 (B6)
0 to 639
cq
2,3
99
SOURCE TAG
Digout 3 (B7)
0 to 639
cr
2,3
100 INPUT 1
Setpoint Sum 1
-200.00 to 200.00 %
cs
101 MIN BS DEAD TIME
RESERVED
Reserved
1 to 6000
ct
102 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
Digital Input 1
0 to 639
cu
2,3
103 VALUE FOR TRUE
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
cv
104 VALUE FOR FALSE
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
cw
105 DESTINATION TAG
Digital Input 2
0 to 639
cx
106 VALUE FOR TRUE
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
cy
107 VALUE FOR FALSE
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
cz
108 DESTINATION TAG
Digital Input 3
0 to 639
d0
109 VALUE FOR TRUE
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
d1
110 VALUE FOR FALSE
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
d2
111 5703 RCV ERROR
Alarms
Same as Tag 19
d3
112 STALL TRIP
ALARM STATUS
Alarms
d4
Output
113 RAMPING
DIAGNOSTICS
Ramps
d5
Output
114 SEQ STATE
RESERVED
Reserved
d6
Output,4
115 HEALTH WORD
ALARM STATUS
Alarms
d7
Output
116 HEALTH STORE
ALARM STATUS
Alarms
d8
Output
117 HEALTH INHIBIT
RESERVED
Unallocated
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
d9
118 RAMP HOLD
Ramps
Same as Tag 18
da
119 I DMD. ISOLATE
Current Loop
Same as Tag 4
db
120 ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
dc
121 CHANGE PASSWORD PASSWORD
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
2,3
2,3
dd
122 HEALTH LED
DIAGNOSTICS
Alarms
de
123 PEEK DATA
SYSTEM::PEEK
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
df
124 PEEK SCALE
SYSTEM::PEEK
-300.00 to 300.00
dg
125 READY
DIAGNOSTICS
Alarms
126 MIN SPEED
Ramps
0.00 to 100.00 %
di
dh
128 ANOUT 1
Aux I/O
-100.00 to 100.00 %
dk
129 ANOUT 2
Aux I/O
-100.00 to 100.00 %
dl
Output
Output
10-5
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
130 MODE
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3

SETUP
System Port P3
0:DISABLED
1:5703 MASTER
2:5703 SLAVE
3:EIASCII
dm
Notes
131 DEADBAND WIDTH
Setpoint Sum 1
0.00 to 100.00 %
dn
132 SETPT. RATIO

SETUP::5703 SUPPORT
5703
-3.0000 to 3.0000
do
133 SETPT. SIGN

SETUP::5703 SUPPORT
5703
Same as Tag 8
dp
134 SOURCE TAG
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
5703
0 to 639
dq
2,3
135 DESTINATION TAG
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
Scaled 5703
Input
0 to 639
dr
2,3
136 FEED FORWARD
Current Loop
0.10 to 50.00
ds
137 DISCONTINUOUS
Current Loop
0.00 to 200.00 %
154 II
RESERVED
Reserved
155 VERSION NUMBER
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)
Unallocated
158 OP STATION ERROR
RESERVED
Op Station
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
161 AUX START
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
eh
162 MIN MMI CYCLE TM
RESERVED
Reserved
A to 1388
ei
163 ILOOP PI MODE
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 2
ej
2,4
164 TOGGLE PERIOD
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
ek
165 TOGGLE REF 1
RESERVED
Reserved
-300.00 to 300.00 %
el
166 SEL. INT/CUR/SPD
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 4
em
2,4
4
dt
ea
Output,4
eb
Output
ee
1,4
167 TOGGLE REF 2
RESERVED
Reserved
-300.00 to 300.00 %
en
168 AUX ENABLE
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
eo
169 FIELD ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS
Field Control
ep
Output
170 FIELD ENABLE
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
Field Control
Same as Tag 4
eq
171 SETPOINT
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD
CONTROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
er
172 INT. GAIN
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
es
173 PROP. GAIN
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
et
174 FLD. WEAK ENABLE
CONTROL::FLD.CURRENT
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
Same as Tag 4
eu
175 EMF LEAD
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
0.10 to 50.00
ev
176 EMF LAG
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
0.00 to 200.00
ew
177 EMF GAIN
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
ex
178 MAX VOLTS
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
ey
179 MIN FLD.CURRENT
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
ez
180 SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
Calibration
0.00 to 100.00 %
181 UNFIL.FIELD FBK
DIAGNOSTICS
Calibration
182 FIELD I CAL.
Calibration
183 FIELD DEMAND
DIAGNOSTICS
Field Control
184 FLD.FIRING ANGLE
DIAGNOSTICS
Field Control
185 FLD.QUENCH DELAY
Field Control
0.0 to 600.0 SECS
f0
f1
0.9800 to 1.1000
Output
f2
f3
Output
f4
Output
f5
10-6
Tag Name
CE Block
Range
MN
186 FLD. QUENCH MODE SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
MMI Menu
Field Control
0:QUENCH
1:STANDBY
f6
Notes
187 RAW INPUT

SETUP::5703 SUPPORT
5703
-300.00 to 300.00 %
f7
188 OVER SPEED LEVEL
Calibration
0.00 to 200.00 %
f8
189 SCALED INPUT

SETUP::5703 SUPPORT
5703
f9
Output,2
190 PEAK HW SLOPE
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to -1
fa
2,4
191 BEMF FBK LEAD
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
10 to 5000
fb
192 BEMF FBK LAG
VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
10 to 5000
fc
193 TICK LENGTH
RESERVED
Reserved
fd
Output,4
194 DISC ADAPT POT
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 10000
fe
195 THRESHOLD (>)
Digout 1 (B5)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
ff
196 THRESHOLD (>)
Digout 2 (B6)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
fg
197 THRESHOLD (>)
Digout 3 (B7)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
fh
198 P3 BAUD RATE

SETUP
0:300
1:600
2:1200
3:2400
4:4800
5:9600
6:19200
fi
199 DELAY
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
Inverse Time
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
fj
2,4
200 RATE
Inverse Time
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
fk
2,4
201 REGEN MODE
Current Loop
0:2Q (NON-REGEN)
1:4Q (REGEN)
fl
202 INT. DEFEAT
Speed Loop
Same as Tag 18
fm
203 INVERSE TIME O/P
DIAGNOSTICS
Inverse Time
fn
Output,2
204 AIMING POINT
Inverse Time
0.00 to 103.00 %
fo
2,4
205 dI/dt
RESERVED
Reserved
0.00 to 200.00 %
fp
206 ENCODER
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
fq
Output
207 SPEED FEEDBACK
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
fr
Output
208 RATIO 0
Setpoint Sum 1
-3.0000 to 3.0000
fs
209 FLD.CTRL MODE
Field Control
0:VOLTAGE CONTROL
1:CURRENT CONTROL
ft
210 FLD.VOLTS RATIO
CONTROL::FLD.VOLTAGE VARS
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
fu
211 SYS HEALTH INHIB
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
fv
2,4
212 OPERATING MODE
DIAGNOSTICS
Jog/Slack
fw
Output
213 ZERO CUR OFFSET
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
fx
214 ZCD THRESHOLD
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
fy
215 G&L POWER METER
RESERVED
Unallocated
fz
Output,4
216 PROG STOP LIMIT
Stop Rates
0.0 to 600.0 SECS
g0
217 STOP LIMIT
Stop Rates
0.0 to 600.0 SECS
g1
218 JOG SPEED 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
Jog/Slack
-100.00 to 100.00 %
g2
219 JOG SPEED 2
Jog/Slack
-100.00 to 100.00 %
g3
221 MMI FILTER T.C.
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
g5
222 PRED STEP
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
g6
2,4
223 SCAN THRESHOLD
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
g7
2,4
224 STALL TRIP DELAY
Calibration
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
g8

Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
225 CRAWL SPEED
Jog/Slack
-100.00 to 100.00 %
g9
226 PEAK HW OFFSET
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
ga
227 AUX JOG
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
gb
10-7
Notes
2,4
228 MODE
Jog/Slack
Same as Tag 43
gc
230 CALIBRATION
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG
INPUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
Analog Input 1
-3.0000 to 3.0000
ge
231 MAX VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gf
232 MIN VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gg
233 CALIBRATION
INPUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
Analog Input 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
gh
234 MAX VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gi
235 MIN VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gj
236 CALIBRATION
INPUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
Analog Input 3
-3.0000 to 3.0000
gk
237 MAX VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gl
238 MIN VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gm
239 CALIBRATION
INPUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
Analog Input 4
-3.0000 to 3.0000
gn
240 MAX VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
go
241 MIN VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gp
242 CALIBRATION
INPUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
Analog Input 5
-3.0000 to 3.0000
gq
243 MAX VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gr
244 MIN VALUE
INPUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
gs
245 % TO GET 10V
OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
Analog Output 1 -300.00 to 300.00 %
gt
246 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
Analog Input 1
0 to 639
gu
2,3
247 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
Analog Input 5
0 to 639
gv
2,3
248 % TO GET 10V
gw
249 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
Analog Input 3
0 to 639
gx
2,3
250 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
Analog Input 4
0 to 639
gy
2,3
251 SOURCE TAG
Analog Output 1 0 to 639
gz
2,3
252 SOURCE TAG
Analog Output 2 0 to 639
h0
2,3
253 TAKE UP 1
Jog/Slack
-100.00 to 100.00 %
h1
254 TAKE UP 2
Jog/Slack
-100.00 to 100.00 %
h2
255 RESET VALUE
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
Raise/Lower
-300.00 to 300.00 %
h3
256 INCREASE RATE
Raise/Lower
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
h4
257 DECREASE RATE
Raise/Lower
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
h5
258 MIN VALUE
Raise/Lower
-300.00 to 300.00 %
h6
259 MAX VALUE
Raise/Lower
-300.00 to 300.00 %
h7
260 RAISE/LOWER DEST
DIAGRAM
Raise/Lower
Output
0 to 639
h8
10-8
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
261 RAISE INPUT
Raise/Lower
Same as Tag 43
h9
262 LOWER INPUT
Raise/Lower
Same as Tag 43
ha
263 STALL THRESHOLD
Calibration
0.00 to 200.00 %
hb
Notes
264 RAISE/LOWER O/P
DIAGNOSTICS
Raise/Lower
hc
Output
265 ANALOG IP OFFSET
RESERVED
Reserved
-30000 to 30000
hd
266 % S-RAMP
Ramps
0.00 to 100.00 %
he
267 POSITION COUNT
RESERVED
Calibration
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
hf
268 MODE
LOOP::ADVANCED::ADAPTION
Advanced
0 to 3
hg
269 SPD BRK1 (LOW)
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
hh
270 SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
hi
271 PROP. GAIN
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00
hj
272 SPD.INT.TIME
Advanced
0.001 to 30.000 SECS
hk
273 POS. LOOP P GAIN
LOOP::ADVANCED
Advanced
-200.00 to 200.00 %
hl
274 I GAIN IN RAMP
LOOP::ADVANCED
Advanced
0.0000 to 2.0000
hm
275 POSITION DIVIDER
RESERVED
Calibration
1 to 30000
hn
276 PLL PROP
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
ho
277 PLL INT
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
hp
278 PLL ERROR
RESERVED
Unallocated
hq
Output,4
279 ARM ENDSTOP
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
hr
2,4
280 HF C/O DISC GAIN
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 10000
hs
281 HF C/O FILTER TC
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
ht
282 BEMF THRESHOLD
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
hu
283 SCAN TC
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
hv
284 ZERO SPD. LEVEL
LOOP::ADVANCED::ZERO SPD.
QUENCH
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
hw
285 ZERO IAD LEVEL
LOOP::ADVANCED::ZERO SPD.
QUENCH
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
hx
286 RAMPING THRESH.
Ramps
0.00 to 100.00 %
hy
287 AUTO RESET
Ramps
Same as Tag 4
hz
288 EXTERNAL RESET
Ramps
Same as Tag 4
i0
289 SETPOINT 1
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
i1
290 SETPOINT 2 (A3)
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
291 SETPOINT 3
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
i3
292 SIGN 0
Setpoint Sum 1
Same as Tag 8
i4
293 RAMP O/P DEST
DIAGRAM
Ramp Output
0 to 639
i5
2,3
294 SPT SUM 1 DEST
DIAGRAM
Setpoint Sum 1
Output
0 to 639
i6
2,3
295 FILTER INPUT
RESERVED
User Filter
-300.00 to 300.00 %
i7
296 FILTER OUTPUT
RESERVED
User Filter
i8
Output,4
297 SPEED ERROR
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
i9
Output
298 CURRENT FEEDBACK
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
ia
Output
299 CURRENT DEMAND
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
ib
Output
300 FIELD I FBK.
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
ic
Output
i2
Output

Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
301 POS. I CLAMP
Current Loop
-200.00 to 200.00 %
id
302 CONTACTOR DELAY
304 LANGUAGE
Stop Rates
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
ie
Menus
0:0 : ENGLISH;1 : Other

1:0 : ENGLISH;1 : Other
ig
Alarms
Same as Tag 43
ih
305 TRIP RESET
306 SOURCE TAG
Standstill
0 to 639
ii
307 EXTERNAL RESET
Raise/Lower
Same as Tag 43
ij
ik
10-9
Notes
2,3,4
308 TACH INPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
309 INPUT 0
Setpoint Sum 1
-200.00 to 200.00 %
il
310 AUTOCAL
RESERVED
Reserved
Same as Tag 4
im
311 IAINST OFFSET
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
in
312 PNO 112
SERIAL LINKS::PNO CONFIG
PNO 112
0 to 639
io
313 PNO 113
PNO 113
0 to 639
ip
314 PNO 114
PNO 114
0 to 639
iq
315 PNO 115
PNO 115
0 to 639
ir
316 PNO 116
PNO 116
0 to 639
is
317 PNO 117
PNO 117
0 to 639
it
318 PNO 118
PNO 118
0 to 639
iu
319 PNO 119
PNO 119
0 to 639
iv
320 PNO 120
PNO 120
0 to 639
iw
321 PNO 121
PNO 121
0 to 639
ix
322 PNO 122
PNO 122
0 to 639
iy
323 PNO 123
PNO 123
0 to 639
iz
324 PNO 124
PNO 124
0 to 639
j0
325 PNO 125
PNO 125
0 to 639
j1
326 PNO 126
PNO 126
0 to 639
j2
327 PNO 127
PNO 127
0 to 639
j3
329 GROUP ID (GID)

SETUP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
System Port P3
0 to 7
j5
330 UNIT ID (UID)

System Port P3
0 to F
j6
332 ERROR REPORT

System Port P3
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
j8
336 CHANGEOVER BIAS
RESERVED
Reserved
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
jc
2,4
jd
Output
337 THERMISTOR STATE
ALARM STATUS
Unallocated
339 VALUE 1
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
jf
340 VALUE 2
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
jg
341 VALUE 3
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
jh
342 VALUE 4
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
ji
343 VALUE 5
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
jj
344 VALUE 6
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
jk
345 VALUE 7
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
jl
346 LOGIC 1
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jm
347 LOGIC 2
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jn
348 LOGIC 3
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jo
349 LOGIC 4
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jp
350 LOGIC 5
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jq
351 LOGIC 6
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jr
352 LOGIC 7
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
js
353 LOGIC 8
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
Same as Tag 18
jt
354 PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
0:UP TO ACTION
1:REQUESTED
ju
355 RAMP RATE
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
jv
Jog/Slack
Output
10-10
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
356 TOTAL I DMD
RESERVED
Speed Loop
Range
357 MAX DEMAND
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
0.00 to 105.00 %
jx
358 MIN DEMAND
LOOP::SETPOINTS
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
jy
359 INVERTED
Digout 1 (B5)
Same as Tag 43
jz
360 INVERTED
Digout 2 (B6)
Same as Tag 43
k0
361 INVERTED
Digout 3 (B7)
Same as Tag 43
k1
362 MODULUS
Analog Output 1 Same as Tag 43
k2
363 MODULUS
Analog Output 2 Same as Tag 43
k3
364 SOURCE TAG
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
Link 1
0 to 639
k4
2,3
365 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 1
Link 1
0 to 639
k5
2,3
366 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 2
Link 2
0 to 639
k6
2,3
367 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 2
Link 2
0 to 639
k7
2,3
368 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 3
Link 3
0 to 639
k8
2,3
369 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 3
Link 3
0 to 639
k9
2,3
370 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 4
Link 4
0 to 639
ka
2,3
371 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 4
Link 4
0 to 639
kb
2,3
372 R/L DELTA
RESERVED
Unallocated
kc
Output,4
373 SYS RAMP DELTA
RESERVED
Unallocated
kd
Output,4
374 SYSTEM RESET
DIAGNOSTICS
Unallocated
ke
Output
375 LIMIT
Setpoint Sum 1
376 DRIVE RUNNING
DIAGNOSTICS
Unallocated
379 VALUE 8
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
380 VALUE 9
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
kk
381 VALUE 10
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
kl
382 VALUE 11
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
km
383 VALUE 12
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
kn
384 VALUE 13
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
ko
385 VALUE 14
SYSTEM::miniLINK
Minilink
-300.00 to 300.00 %
kp
386 FILTER T.C.
RESERVED
Reserved
0 to 20000
387 RAW POS COUNT
RESERVED
Reserved
388 SYNC OFFSET
RESERVED
Reserved
389 PERCENT RPM
RESERVED
Reserved
390 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 11
Link 11
391 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 11
392 ADVANCED
LINKS::LINK 11
0.00 to 200.00 %
MN
Notes
jw
Output,2,4
kf
378 LANG CHECKSUM

-300.00 to 300.00 %
kg
Output
ki
Output
kj
kq
kr
Output,4
ks
kt
Output,4
0 to 639
ku
2,3
Link 11
0 to 639
kv
2,3
Link 11
Same as Tag 18
kw
-30000 to 30000
10-11
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
393 MODE
LINKS::LINK 11
Link 11
0:SWITCH
1:INVERT
2:AND
3:OR
4:SIGN CHANGER
5:MODULUS
6:COMPARATOR
kx
394 AUX.SOURCE
LINKS::LINK 11
Link 11
0 to 639
ky
2,3
395 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 12
Link 12
0 to 639
kz
2,3
396 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 12
Link 12
0 to 639
l0
2,3
397 ADVANCED
LINKS::LINK 12
Link 12
Same as Tag 18
l1
398 MODE
LINKS::LINK 12
Link 12
Same as Tag 393
l2
399 AUX.SOURCE
LINKS::LINK 12
Link 12
0 to 639
l3
2,3
400 PID O/P DEST
DIAGRAM
PID Output
0 to 639
l4
2,3
401 DERIVATIVE TC
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0.000 to 10.000 SECS
l5
402 INT.TIME.CONST
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0.01 to 100.00 SECS
l6
403 FILTER T.C.
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0.000 to 10.000 SECS
l7
404 PROP. GAIN
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0.0 to 100.0
l8
405 POSITIVE LIMIT
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0.00 to 105.00 %
l9
406 NEGATIVE LIMIT
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-105.00 to 0.00 %
la
407 O/P SCALER(TRIM)
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-3.0000 to 3.0000
lb
408 ENABLE
BLOCKS::PID
PID
Same as Tag 4
lc
409 INT. DEFEAT
BLOCKS::PID
PID
Same as Tag 18
ld
410 INPUT 1
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-300.00 to 300.00 %
le
411 INPUT 2
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-300.00 to 300.00 %
lf
412 RATIO 1
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-3.0000 to 3.0000
lg
413 RATIO 2
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-3.0000 to 3.0000
lh
414 DIVIDER 2
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-3.0000 to 3.0000
li
415 PID ERROR
DIAGNOSTICS
PID
lj
Output
416 PID CLAMPED
DIAGNOSTICS
PID
lk
Output
417 PID OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
PID
ll
Output
418 DIVIDER 1
BLOCKS::PID
PID
-3.0000 to 3.0000
lm
419 DIVIDER 1
Setpoint Sum 1
-3.0000 to 3.0000
ln
420 DIVIDER 0
Setpoint Sum 1
-3.0000 to 3.0000
lo
421 MAIN CURR. LIMIT
Current Loop
0.00 to 200.00 %
lp
422 RESET VALUE
Ramps
-300.00 to 300.00 %
lq
423 INPUT 2
Setpoint Sum 1
-200.00 to 200.00 %
lr
Notes
10-12
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
424 LINE SPEED
BLOCKS::DIAMETER CALC.
Diameter Calc.
-105.00 to 105.00 %
ls
Notes
425 MIN DIAMETER
Diameter Calc.
0.00 to 100.00 %
lt
426 MIN SPEED
Diameter Calc.
0.00 to 100.00 %
lu
427 DIAMETER
Diameter Calc.
lv
Output
428 MOD OF LINE SPD
Diameter Calc.
lw
Output
429 MOD OF REEL SPD
Diameter Calc.
lx
Output
430 UNFILT DIAMETER
Diameter Calc.
ly
Output
431 DIAMETER
DIAGRAM
Diameter
0 to 639
lz
2,3
432 TORQUE DEMAND
BLOCKS::TORQUE CALC.
Torque Calc.
-200.00 to 200.00 %
m0
433 TENSION ENABLE
Torque Calc.
Same as Tag 4
m1
434 OVER WIND
Torque Calc.
Same as Tag 4
m2
435 POS. I CLAMP
DIAGRAM
Torque Calc.
0 to 639
m3
2,3
436 NEG. I CLAMP
DIAGRAM
Torque Calc.
0 to 639
m4
2,3
437 REEL SPEED
Diameter Calc.
-105.00 to 105.00 %
m5
438 TAPER
BLOCKS::TAPER CALC.
Taper Calc.
-100.00 to 100.00 %
m6
439 TENSION SPT.
BLOCKS::TAPER CALC.
Taper Calc.
0.00 to 100.00 %
m7
440 TENSION TRIM
BLOCKS::TAPER CALC.
Taper Calc.
-100.00 to 100.00 %
m8
441 TOT.TENS.DEMAND
BLOCKS::TAPER CALC.
Taper Calc.
442 TAPER
DIAGRAM
Taper
443 INPUT 1
BLOCKS::SETPOINT SUM 2
444 INPUT 0
m9
Output
0 to 639
ma
2,3
Setpoint Sum 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
mb
Setpoint Sum 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
mc
445 INPUT 2
Setpoint Sum 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
md
446 RATIO 1
Setpoint Sum 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
me
447 RATIO 0
Setpoint Sum 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
mf
448 DIVIDER 0
Setpoint Sum 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
mg
449 LIMIT
Setpoint Sum 2
0.00 to 200.00 %
mh
450 SETPOINT SUM 2
DIAGRAM
Setpoint Sum 2
Output
0 to 639
mi
2,3
451 SPT SUM OUTPUT
Setpoint Sum 2
mj
Output
452 TAPERED DEMAND
BLOCKS::TAPER CALC.
Taper Calc.
mk
Output
453 RAMP RATE
Diameter Calc.
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
ml
10-13
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
Notes
454 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 5
Link 5
0 to 639
mm
2,3
455 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 5
Link 5
0 to 639
mn
2,3
456 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 6
Link 6
0 to 639
mo
2,3
457 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 6
Link 6
0 to 639
mp
2,3
458 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 7
Link 7
0 to 639
mq
2,3
459 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 7
Link 7
0 to 639
mr
2,3
460 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 8
Link 8
0 to 639
ms
2,3
461 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 8
Link 8
0 to 639
mt
2,3
462 RESET VALUE
Diameter Calc.
0.00 to 100.00 %
mu
463 EXTERNAL RESET
Diameter Calc.
Same as Tag 4
mv
464 OFFSET
mw
465 OFFSET
mx
466 DIVIDER 1
Setpoint Sum 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
my
467 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 9
Link 9
0 to 639
mz
2,3
468 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 9
Link 9
0 to 639
n0
2,3
469 SOURCE TAG
LINKS::LINK 10
Link 10
0 to 639
n1
2,3
470 DESTINATION TAG
LINKS::LINK 10
Link 10
0 to 639
n2
2,3
471 STANDBY FIELD
RESERVED
Reserved
0.00 to 100.00 %
n3
n4
Output
472 SPEED FBK STATE
ALARM STATUS
Unallocated
473 MODE
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0 to 4
n5
474 MIN PROFILE GAIN
BLOCKS::PID
PID
0.00 to 100.00 %
n6
475 PROFILED GAIN
BLOCKS::PID
PID
476 3-PHASE FIELD
RESERVED
Reserved
478 TENS+COMP CALC.
DIAGRAM
Tension & Comp 0 to 639
479 FIX.INERTIA COMP
BLOCKS::TENS+COMP CALC.
Tension & Comp -300.00 to 300.00 %
nb
480 VAR.INERTIA COMP
Tension & Comp -300.00 to 300.00 %
nc
481 ROLL WIDTH/MASS
Tension & Comp 0.00 to 100.00 %
nd
482 FILTER T.C.
Tension & Comp 0 to 20000
ne
483 RATE CAL
Tension & Comp -100.00 to 100.00
nf
484 NORMALISED dv/dt
Tension & Comp -300.00 to 300.00 %
ng
485 INERTIA COMP O/P
Tension & Comp
nh
Same as Tag 4
477 AUTOTUNE
n7
Output
n8
2,4
n9
Output,2
na
2,3
Output
10-14
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
486 TENSION SCALER
Tension & Comp -3.0000 to 3.0000
Range
MN
ni
Notes
487 STATIC COMP
Tension & Comp -300.00 to 300.00 %
nj
488 DYNAMIC COMP
Tension & Comp -300.00 to 300.00 %
nk
489 REWIND
Tension & Comp Same as Tag 4
nl
491 STPT SUM 2 OUT 0
Setpoint Sum 2
nn
Output,2
492 STPT SUM 2 OUT 1
Setpoint Sum 2
no
Output,2
493 OUTPUT
INPUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
Analog Input 2
np
Output,2
494 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4
Dig in C4
0 to 639
nq
2,3
495 DESTINATION TAG
INPUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5
Dig in C5
0 to 639
nr
2,3
496 JOG/SLACK
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
ns
497 ENABLE
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 18
nt
498 LINE SPEED SPT
Tension & Comp -105.00 to 105.00 %
nu
500 TEC OPTION TYPE
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Tec Option
0:NONE
1:RS485
2:PROFIBUS DP
3:LINK
4:DEVICE NET
5:CAN OPEN
6:LONWORKS
7:CONTROLNET
8:MODBUS PLUS
9:ETHERNET
10:TYPE 10
11:TYPE 11
12:TYPE 12
13:TYPE 13
14:TYPE 14
15:TYPE 15
nw
501 TEC OPTION IN 1
Tec Option
0 to -1
nx
502 TEC OPTION IN 2
Tec Option
0 to -1
ny
503 TEC OPTION IN 3
Tec Option
0 to -1
nz
504 TEC OPTION IN 4
Tec Option
0 to -1
o0
505 TEC OPTION IN 5
Tec Option
0 to -1
o1
506 TEC OPTION FAULT
Tec Option
o2
Output
507 TEC OPTION VER
Tec Option
o3
Output
508 TEC OPTION OUT 1
Tec Option
o4
Output
509 TEC OPTION OUT 2
Tec Option
o5
Output

Tag Name
MMI Menu
510 PRODUCT CODE
CE Block
10-15
Range
MN
Notes
0:INVALID
1:DC 4Q 15A
2:DC 2Q 15A
3:DC 4Q 35A
4:DC 2Q 35A
5:DC 4Q 40A
6:DC 2Q 40A
7:DC 4Q 55A
8:DC 2Q 55A
9:DC 4Q 70A
10:DC 2Q 70A
11:DC 4Q 90A
12:DC 2Q 90A
13:DC 4Q 110A
14:DC 2Q 110A
15:DC 4Q 125A
16:DC 2Q 125A
17:DC 4Q 162A
18:DC 2Q 162A
19:DC 4Q 165A
20:DC 2Q 165A
21:DC 4Q 35A D
22:DC 2Q 35A D
23:DC 4Q 70A D
24:DC 2Q 70A D
25:DC 4Q 110A D
26:DC 2Q 110A D
27:DC 4Q 150A D
28:DC 2Q 150A D
29:DC 4Q 180A D
30:DC 2Q 180A D
31:DC 4Q 270A D
32:DC 2Q 270A D
33:DC 4Q 128* 20* D
34:DC 2Q 128* 20* D
35:DC 4Q 1024* 20*D
36:DC 2Q 1024* 20*D
37:DC 4Q 1024* 30*D
38:DC 2Q 1024* 30*D
39:DC 4Q 360A D
40:DC 2Q 360A D
41:DC 4Q 450A D
42:DC 2Q 450A D
43:DC 4Q 720A D
44:DC 2Q 720A D
45:DC 4Q 800A D
46:DC 2Q 800A D
47:DC 4Q 1024* 30*D
48:DC 2Q 1024* 30*D
49:DC 4Q 1200A 20 D
50:DC 2Q 1200A 20 D
51:DC 4Q 1700A 20 D
52:DC 2Q 1700A 20 D
53:DC 4Q 2200A 20 D
54:DC 2Q 2200A 20 D
55:DC 4Q 2700A 20 D
56:DC 2Q 2700A 20 D
57:DC 4Q 1200A 40 D
58:DC 2Q 1200A 40 D
59:DC 4Q 1700A 40 D
60:DC 2Q 1700A 40 D
61:DC 4Q 2200A 40 D
62:DC 2Q 2200A 40 D
63:DC 4Q 2700A 40 D
64:DC 2Q 2700A 40 D
65:DC 4Q 1200A 60 D
66:DC 2Q 1200A 60 D
67:DC 4Q 1700A 60 D
68:DC 2Q 1700A 60 D
69:DC 4Q 2200A 60 D
70:DC 2Q 2200A 60 D
o6
1,2,3
10-16
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
510 PRODUCT CODE
Range
MN
Notes
71:DC 4Q 2700A 60 D
72:DC 2Q 2700A 60 D
73:DC 4Q 1200A 80 D
74:DC 2Q 1200A 80 D
75:DC 4Q 1700A 80 D
76:DC 2Q 1700A 80 D
77:DC 4Q 2200A 80 D
78:DC 2Q 2200A 80 D
79:DC 4Q 2700A 80 D
80:DC 2Q 2700A 80 D
81:DC RETRO 4Q 720A
82:DC RETRO 2Q 720A
83:DC RETRO 4Q 128A
84:DC RETRO 2Q 128A
85:DC HW SCALE 4Q D
86:DC HW SCALE 2Q D
87:DC 2Q 40A
88:DC 4Q 40A
89:DC 4Q 725A
90:DC 2Q 725A
91:DC 4Q 830A
92:DC 2Q 830A
93:DC 4Q 1580A
94:DC 2Q 1580A
95:DC 4Q 275A
96:DC 2Q 275A
97:DC 4Q 380A
98:DC 2Q 380A
99:DC 4Q 500A
100:DC 2Q 500A
o6
1,2,3
511 LOCAL KEY ENABLE
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP-STATION::SET Op Station

UP
Same as Tag 43
o7
512 SETPOINT

UP
0.00 to 100.00 %
o8
513 JOG SETPOINT

UP
0.00 to 100.00 %
o9
514 RAMP ACCEL TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::OPSTATION::LOCAL RAMP
Op Station
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
oa
515 RAMP DECEL TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::OPSTATION::LOCAL RAMP
Op Station
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
ob
516 FORWARD
SETUP PARAMETERS::OPSTATION::START UP VALUES
Op Station
Same as Tag 43
oc
517 LOCAL
Op Station
Same as Tag 43
od
518 PROGRAM
Op Station
Same as Tag 43
oe
519 SETPOINT
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
of
520 JOG SETPOINT
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
og
521 NOM MOTOR VOLTS
Calibration
100 to 875 VOLTS
oh
522 NOT 570 STACK
RESERVED
Reserved
Same as Tag 43
oi
523 ARMATURE CURRENT
Calibration
1.0 to 15.0 AMPS
oj
524 FIELD CURRENT
Calibration
0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
ok
ol
Output
Same as Tag 43
om
525 COAST STOP
DIAGNOSTICS
526 BY-PASS PASSWORD
PASSWORD
Reserved
527 MASTER BRIDGE
Current Loop
on
Output
528 LAST ALARM
ALARM STATUS
Alarms
oo
Output
529 PNO 39
RESERVED
530 PNO 47
RESERVED
531 PNO 55
RESERVED
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
or
532 PNO 63
RESERVED
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
os
533 PNO 71
RESERVED
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
ot
534 PNO 95
RESERVED
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
ou
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
op
oq
Output,4
10-17
Tag Name
MMI Menu
CE Block
Range
MN
Notes
535 REM.SEQ.ENABLE
Aux I/O
Same as Tag 43
ov
536 REM.SEQUENCE
Aux I/O
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
ow
537 SEQ STATUS
Aux I/O
ox
Output
538 CURRENT FBK.AMPS
DIAGNOSTICS
Current Loop
oy
Output,3
539 FIELD I FBK.AMPS
DIAGNOSTICS
Current Loop
oz
Output,3
540 REM TRIP INHIBIT
Alarms
Same as Tag 19
p0
541 REM TRIP DELAY
Alarms
0.1 to 600.0 SECS
p1
542 REMOTE TRIP
ALARM STATUS
Alarms
p2
Output
543 ZERO CAL INPUTS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
0:UP TO ACTION
1:REQUESTED
p3
1,2,3,4
Same as Tag 43
p4
1,2,3
0 to 100
p5
1,2,3
0.000 to 1.000
p7
544 PCODE SAVE

545 PCODE ID
547 SPD.FBK.FILTER
549 SPEED LOOP O/P
DIAGNOSTICS
550 ENABLE 12 PULSE
RESERVED
Speed Loop
0 to 2
p9
Output,2
pa
2,4
551 MASTER BRIDGE
RESERVED
pb
Output,2,4
552 SLAVE BRIDGE
RESERVED
pc
Output,2,4
553 MAX BS DEAD TIME
RESERVED
1 to 6000
pd
554 ENCODER FILTER
0 to 7
pe
556 INERTIA
LOOP::ADVANCED::INERTIA COMP
0.00 to 200.00
pg
557 FILTER
0 to 20000
ph
558 RATE CAL
0.00 to 200.00
pi
559 MAX SPEED
SETUP PARAMETERS::PRESET SPEEDS
0.1 to 3000.0
pj
560 SELECT 1
Same as Tag 43
pk
561 SELECT 2
Same as Tag 43
pl
562 SELECT 3
Same as Tag 43
pm
563 INVERT O/P
Same as Tag 43
pn
564 INPUT 0
-3000.0 to 3000.0
po
565 INPUT 1
-3000.0 to 3000.0
pp
566 INPUT 2
-3000.0 to 3000.0
pq
567 INPUT 3
-3000.0 to 3000.0
pr
568 INPUT 4
-3000.0 to 3000.0
ps
569 INPUT 5
-3000.0 to 3000.0
pt
570 INPUT 6
-3000.0 to 3000.0
pu
571 INPUT 7
-3000.0 to 3000.0
pv
572 PRESET O/P
pw
Output
573 PRESET DEST
DIAGRAM
0 to 639
px
2,3
574 INPUT
SETUP PARAMETERS::SRAMP
-100.00 to 100.00 %
py
575 RATE SELECT
0 to 1
pz
576 ACCEL 0
SETUP PARAMETERS::SRAMP::RATE SET

0
0.00 to 100.00 %
q0
577 DECEL 0

0
0.00 to 100.00 %
q1
578 ACCEL JERK 1

0
0.00 to 100.00 %
q2
579 ACCEL 1

1
0.00 to 100.00 %
q3
580 DECEL 1

1
0.00 to 100.00 %
q4
581 ACCEL JERK 1

1
0.00 to 100.00 %
q5
10-18
Tag Name
MMI Menu
582 AUTO RESET
CE Block
Range
MN
Same as Tag 43
q6
583 EXTERNAL RESET
Same as Tag 43
q7
584 RESET VALUE
-100.00 to 100.00 %
q8
585 QUENCH
Same as Tag 43
q9
586 AT SPEED LEVEL
0.00 to 100.00 %
qa
Notes
587 AT SPEED
qb
Output
588 ACCEL OUTPUT
qc
Output
589 SRAMP OUTPUT
590 SRAMP DEST
DIAGRAM
qd
Output
0 to 639
qe
2,3
591 OVERSHOOT THRESH SETUP PARAMETERS::SRAMP
-100.00 to 100.00 %
qf
592 ERROR THRESH
-100.00 to 100.00 %
qg
593 OUTPUT FPM
qh
Output
594 CURR DECAY RATE
0.00 to 200.00
qi
595 PRESET TORQUE
-200.00 to 200.00 %
qj
596 DECEL JERK 1

0
0.00 to 100.00 %
qk
597 DECEL JERK 1

1
0.00 to 100.00 %
ql
600 LIMIT
Same as Tag 43
601 DELTA
qp
Output
602 INERTIA COMP O/P
qq
Output
603 UNSCALED OUTPUT
qr
Output
qo
604 PRESET T SCALE
605 ARM VOLTS FBK
DIAGNOSTICS
-200.00 to 200.00 %
qs
610 GRAY SCALE
Same as Tag 43
qy
611 ACCEL JERK 2

0
0.00 to 100.00 %
qz
612 ACCEL JERK 2

1
0.00 to 100.00 %
r0
613 DECEL JERK 2

0
0.00 to 100.00 %
r1
614 DECEL JERK 2

1
0.00 to 100.00 %
r2
617 FIELD I THRESH
0.00 to 100.00 %
r5
618 UP TO FIELD
620 INVERT
Same as Tag 43
r8
623 EXTENDED PLL
RESERVED
Same as Tag 43
rb
qt
r6
Output
Output
4
Parameter Table: MMI Menu Order

1
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
FACTORY DEFAULTS
|__MENU
|
|__DIAGNOSTICS
|
|
|__[089] SPEED DEMAND
|
|
|__[207] SPEED FEEDBACK
|
|
|__[297] SPEED ERROR
|
|
|__[549] SPEED LOOP O/P
|
|
|__[299] CURRENT DEMAND
|
|
|__[298] CURRENT FEEDBACK
|
|
|__[538] CURRENT FBK.AMPS
|
|
|__[065] IaFbk UNFILTERED
|
|
|__[066] IaDmd UNFILTERED
|
|
|__[087] POS. I CLAMP
|
|
|__[088] NEG. I CLAMP
|
|
|__[067] ACTUAL POS I LIM
|
|
|__[061] ACTUAL NEG I LIM
|
|
|__[203] INVERSE TIME O/P
|
|
|__[042] AT CURRENT LIMIT
|
|
|__[077] AT ZERO SPEED
|
|
|__[078] AT ZERO SETPOINT
|
|
|__[079] AT STANDSTILL
|
|
|__[113] RAMPING
|
|
|__[080] PROGRAM STOP
|
|
|__[525] COAST STOP
|
|
|__[082] DRIVE START
|
|
|__[084] DRIVE ENABLE
|
|
|__[212] OPERATING MODE
|
|
|__[169] FIELD ENABLED
|
|
|__[183] FIELD DEMAND
|
|
|__[300] FIELD I FBK.
|
|
|__[539] FIELD I FBK.AMPS
|
|
|__[181] UNFIL.FIELD FBK
|
|
|__[184] FLD.FIRING ANGLE
|
|
|__[050] ANIN 1 (A2)
|
|
|__[051] ANIN 2 (A3)
|
|
|__[052] ANIN 3 (A4)
|
|
|__[053] ANIN 4 (A5)
|
|
|__[054] ANIN 5 (A6)
|
|
|__[055] ANOUT 1 (A7)
|
|
|__[056] ANOUT 2 (A8)
|
|
|__[068] START (C3)
|
|
|__[069] DIGITAL INPUT C4
|
|
|__[070] DIGITAL INPUT C5
|
|
|__[071] DIGIN 1 (C6)
|
|
|__[072] DIGIN 2 (C7)
|
|
|__[073] DIGIN 3 (C8)
|
|
|__[074] DIGOUT 1 (B5)
|
|
|__[075] DIGOUT 2 (B6)
|
|
|__[076] DIGOUT 3 (B7)
|
|
|__[264] RAISE/LOWER O/P
|
|
|__[417] PID OUTPUT
|
|
|__[416] PID CLAMPED
|
|
|__[415] PID ERROR
|
|
|__[086] SPT SUM OUTPUT
|
|
|__[085] RAMP OUTPUT
|
|
|__[572] PRESET O/P
|
|
|__[589] SRAMP OUTPUT
|
|
|__[593] OUTPUT FPM
|
|
|__[063] SPEED SETPOINT
|
|
|__[057] TERMINAL VOLTS
|
|
|__[060] BACK EMF
|
|
|__[605] ARM VOLTS FBK
|
|
|__[308] TACH INPUT
|
|
|__[058] UNFIL.TACH INPUT
10-19
10-20

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[206] ENCODER
|
|__[059] UNFIL.ENCODER
|
|__[062] UNFIL.SPD.FBK
|
|__[064] UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
|
|__[083] CONTACTOR CLOSED
|
|__[122] HEALTH LED
|
|__[125] READY
|
|__[376] DRIVE RUNNING
|
|__[374] SYSTEM RESET
|__SETUP PARAMETERS
|
|__RAMPS
|
|
|__[002] RAMP ACCEL TIME
|
|
|__[003] RAMP DECEL TIME
|
|
|__[004] CONSTANT ACCEL
|
|
|__[118] RAMP HOLD
|
|
|__[620] INVERT
|
|
|__[005] RAMP INPUT
|
|
|__[266] % S-RAMP
|
|
|__[286] RAMPING THRESH.
|
|
|__[287] AUTO RESET
|
|
|__[288] EXTERNAL RESET
|
|
|__[422] RESET VALUE
|
|
|__[126] MIN SPEED
|
|__AUX I/O
|
|
|__[161] AUX START
|
|
|__[227] AUX JOG
|
|
|__[168] AUX ENABLE
|
|
|__[094] AUX DIGOUT 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[128] ANOUT 1
|
|
|__[129] ANOUT 2
|
|
|__[496] JOG/SLACK
|
|
|__[497] ENABLE
|
|
|__[535] REM.SEQ.ENABLE
|
|
|__[536] REM.SEQUENCE
|
|
|__[537] SEQ STATUS
|
|__OP-STATION
|
|
|__SET UP
|
|
|
|__[512] SETPOINT
|
|
|
|__[513] JOG SETPOINT
|
|
|
|__[511] LOCAL KEY ENABLE
|
|
|__START UP VALUES
|
|
|
|__[519] SETPOINT
|
|
|
|__[520] JOG SETPOINT
|
|
|
|__[516] FORWARD
|
|
|
|__[518] PROGRAM
|
|
|
|__[517] LOCAL
|
|
|__LOCAL RAMP
|
|
|
|__[514] RAMP ACCEL TIME
|
|
|
|__[515] RAMP DECEL TIME
|
|__JOG/SLACK
|
|
|__[218] JOG SPEED 1
|
|
|__[219] JOG SPEED 2
|
|
|__[253] TAKE UP 1
|
|
|__[254] TAKE UP 2
|
|
|__[225] CRAWL SPEED
|
|
|__[228] MODE
|
|
|__[355] RAMP RATE
|
|__RAISE/LOWER
|
|
|
|
|__[256] INCREASE RATE
|
|
|__[257] DECREASE RATE
|
|
|__[261] RAISE INPUT
|
|
|__[262] LOWER INPUT
|
|
|__[258] MIN VALUE
|
|
|__[259] MAX VALUE
|
|
Reserved

4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__PRESET SPEEDS
|
|__[560] SELECT 1
|
|__[561] SELECT 2
|
|__[562] SELECT 3
|
|__[563] INVERT O/P
|
|__[559] MAX SPEED
|
|__[600] LIMIT
|
|__[610] GRAY SCALE
|
|__[564] INPUT 0
|
|__[565] INPUT 1
|
|__[566] INPUT 2
|
|__[567] INPUT 3
|
|__[568] INPUT 4
|
|__[569] INPUT 5
|
|__[570] INPUT 6
|
|__[571] INPUT 7
|
|__[572] PRESET O/P
|
|__[593] OUTPUT FPM
|__SRAMP
|
|__[574] INPUT
|
|__[575] RATE SELECT
|
|__RATE SET 0
|
|
|__[576] ACCEL 0
|
|
|__[577] DECEL 0
|
|
|__[578] ACCEL JERK 1
|
|
|
|
|__[596] DECEL JERK 1
|
|
|
|__RATE SET 1
|
|
|__[579] ACCEL 1
|
|
|__[580] DECEL 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[582] AUTO RESET
|
|
|
|__[585] QUENCH
|
|__[586] AT SPEED LEVEL
|
|__[587] AT SPEED
|
|__[588] ACCEL OUTPUT
|
|__[589] SRAMP OUTPUT
|
|__[591] OVERSHOOT THRESH
|
|__[592] ERROR THRESH
|__SPECIAL BLOCKS
|
|__PID
|
|
|__[404] PROP. GAIN
|
|
|__[402] INT.TIME.CONST
|
|
|__[401] DERIVATIVE TC
|
|
|__[405] POSITIVE LIMIT
|
|
|__[406] NEGATIVE LIMIT
|
|
|__[407] O/P SCALER(TRIM)
|
|
|__[410] INPUT 1
|
|
|__[411] INPUT 2
|
|
|__[412] RATIO 1
|
|
|__[413] RATIO 2
|
|
|__[418] DIVIDER 1
|
|
|__[414] DIVIDER 2
|
|
|__[408] ENABLE
|
|
|__[409] INT. DEFEAT
|
|
|__[403] FILTER T.C.
|
|
|__[473] MODE
|
|
|__[474] MIN PROFILE GAIN
|
|
|__[475] PROFILED GAIN
|
|__TENS+COMP CALC.
|
|
|__[487] STATIC COMP
|
|
|__[488] DYNAMIC COMP
Reserved
Reserved
10-21
10-22

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
5
4
5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[489] REWIND
|
|
|__[479] FIX.INERTIA COMP
|
|
|__[480] VAR.INERTIA COMP
|
|
|__[481] ROLL WIDTH/MASS
|
|
|__[498] LINE SPEED SPT
|
|
|
|
|__[483] RATE CAL
|
|
|__[484] NORMALISED dv/dt
|
|
|__[485] INERTIA COMP O/P
|
|
|__[486] TENSION SCALER
|
|__DIAMETER CALC.
|
|
|__[424] LINE SPEED
|
|
|__[437] REEL SPEED
|
|
|__[425] MIN DIAMETER
|
|
|__[426] MIN SPEED
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[453] RAMP RATE
|
|
|__[427] DIAMETER
|
|
|__[428] MOD OF LINE SPD
|
|
|__[429] MOD OF REEL SPD
|
|
|__[430] UNFILT DIAMETER
|
|__TAPER CALC.
|
|
|__[438] TAPER
|
|
|__[439] TENSION SPT.
|
|
|__[452] TAPERED DEMAND
|
|
|__[440] TENSION TRIM
|
|
|__[441] TOT.TENS.DEMAND
|
|__TORQUE CALC.
|
|
|__[432] TORQUE DEMAND
|
|
|__[433] TENSION ENABLE
|
|
|__[434] OVER WIND
|
|__SETPOINT SUM 2
|
|
|__[445] INPUT 2
|
|
|__[443] INPUT 1
|
|
|__[444] INPUT 0
|
|
|__[446] RATIO 1
|
|
|__[447] RATIO 0
|
|
|__[466] DIVIDER 1
|
|
|__[448] DIVIDER 0
|
|
|__[449] LIMIT
|
|
|__[451] SPT SUM OUTPUT
|
|
|__[491] STPT SUM 2 OUT 0
|
|
|__[492] STPT SUM 2 OUT 1
|__FIELD CONTROL
|
|__[170] FIELD ENABLE
|
|__[209] FLD.CTRL MODE
|
|__[617] FIELD I THRESH
|
|__[618] UP TO FIELD
|
|__FLD.VOLTAGE VARS
|
|
|__[210] FLD.VOLTS RATIO
|
|__FLD.CURRENT VARS
|
|
|__[171] SETPOINT
|
|
|__[173] PROP. GAIN
|
|
|__[172] INT. GAIN
|
|
|__FLD.WEAK VARS
|
|
|
|__[174] FLD. WEAK ENABLE
|
|
|
|__[175] EMF LEAD
|
|
|
|__[176] EMF LAG
|
|
|
|__[177] EMF GAIN
|
|
|
|__[179] MIN FLD.CURRENT
|
|
|
|__[178] MAX VOLTS
|
|
|
|__[191] BEMF FBK LEAD
|
|
|
|__[192] BEMF FBK LAG
|
|__[185] FLD.QUENCH DELAY
|
|__[186] FLD. QUENCH MODE
|__CURRENT PROFILE
|
|__[032] SPD BRK1 (LOW)

5
5
5
4
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[031] SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
|
|__[093] IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
|
|__[033] IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
|__INVERSE TIME
|
|__[204] AIMING POINT
|
|__[199] DELAY
|
|__[200] RATE
|__STOP RATES
|
|__[027] STOP TIME
|
|__[217] STOP LIMIT
|
|__[302] CONTACTOR DELAY
|
|__[594] CURR DECAY RATE
|
|__[026] PROG STOP TIME
|
|__[216] PROG STOP LIMIT
|
|__[091] PROG STOP I LIM
|
|__[029] STOP ZERO SPEED
|__CALIBRATION
|
|__[039] CONFIGURE ENABLE
|
|__[521] NOM MOTOR VOLTS
|
|__[523] ARMATURE CURRENT
|
|__[524] FIELD CURRENT
|
|__[020] ARMATURE V CAL.
|
|__[021] IR COMPENSATION
|
|__[022] ENCODER RPM
|
|__[024] ENCODER LINES
|
|__[023] ANALOG TACH CAL
|
|__[010] ZERO SPD. OFFSET
|
|__[025] ARMATURE I (A9)
|
|__[180] SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
|
|__[263] STALL THRESHOLD
|
|__[224] STALL TRIP DELAY
|
|__[541] REM TRIP DELAY
|
|__[188] OVER SPEED LEVEL
|
|__[182] FIELD I CAL.
|__INHIBIT ALARMS
|
|__[019] FIELD FAIL
|
|__[111] 5703 RCV ERROR
|
|__[028] STALL TRIP
|
|__[305] TRIP RESET
|
|__[081] SPEED FBK ALARM
|
|__[092] ENCODER ALARM
|
|__[540] REM TRIP INHIBIT
|__CURRENT LOOP
|
|__[421] MAIN CURR. LIMIT
|
|__[016] PROP. GAIN
|
|__[017] INT. GAIN
|
|__[018] AUTOTUNE
|
|__[136] FEED FORWARD
|
|__[137] DISCONTINUOUS
|
|__[030] ADDITIONAL DEM
|
|__[090] BIPOLAR CLAMPS
|
|__[201] REGEN MODE
|
|__[527] MASTER BRIDGE
|
|
|
|__[119] I DMD. ISOLATE
|
|__[015] CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
|__SPEED LOOP
|
|__[014] SPD.PROP.GAIN
|
|__[013]SPD.INT.TIME
|
|__[202] INT. DEFEAT
|
|__[595] PRESET TORQUE
|
|__[604] PRESET T SCALE
|
|__[049] ENCODER SIGN
|
|__[047] SPEED FBK SELECT
|
|__[547] SPD.FBK.FILTER
|
|__[554] ENCODER FILTER
|
|__ADVANCED
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10-23
10-24

6
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
3
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__ADAPTION
|
|
|
|
|__[268] MODE
|
|
|
|
|__[269] SPD BRK1 (LOW)
|
|
|
|
|__[270] SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
|
|
|
|
|__[271] PROP. GAIN
|
|
|
|
|__[272] SPD.INT.TIME
|
|
|
|__[274] I GAIN IN RAMP
|
|
|
|__[273] POS. LOOP P GAIN
|
|
|
|__ZERO SPD. QUENCH
|
|
|
|
|__[284] ZERO SPD. LEVEL
|
|
|
|
|__[285] ZERO IAD LEVEL
|
|
|
|__INERTIA COMP
|
|
|
|
|__[556] INERTIA
|
|
|
|
|__[557] FILTER
|
|
|
|
|__[558] RATE CAL
|
|
|
|
|__[601] DELTA
|
|
|
|
|__[603] UNSCALED OUTPUT
|
|
|
|
|__[602] INERTIA COMP O/P
|
|
|__SETPOINTS
|
|
|
|__[289] SETPOINT 1
|
|
|
|__[009] SIGN 2 (A3)
|
|
|
|__[007] RATIO 2 (A3)
|
|
|
|__[290] SETPOINT 2 (A3)
|
|
|
|__[291] SETPOINT 3
|
|
|
|__[041] SETPOINT 4
|
|
|
|__[357] MAX DEMAND
|
|
|
|__[358] MIN DEMAND
|
|__STANDSTILL
|
|
|__[011] STANDSTILL LOGIC
|
|
|__[012] ZERO THRESHOLD
|
|
|__[306] SOURCE TAG
|
|__SETPOINT SUM 1
|
|
|__[006] RATIO 1
|
|
|__[208] RATIO 0
|
|
|__[008] SIGN 1
|
|
|__[292] SIGN 0
|
|
|__[419] DIVIDER 1
|
|
|__[420] DIVIDER 0
|
|
|__[131] DEADBAND WIDTH
|
|
|__[375] LIMIT
|
|
|__[423] INPUT 2
|
|
|__[100] INPUT 1
|
|
|__[309] INPUT 0
|__PASSWORD
|
|__[120] ENTER PASSWORD
|
|__[526] BY-PASS PASSWORD
|
|__[121] CHANGE PASSWORD
|__ALARM STATUS
|
|__[528] LAST ALARM
|
|__[115] HEALTH WORD
|
|__[116] HEALTH STORE
|
|__[337] THERMISTOR STATE
|
|__[472] SPEED FBK STATE
|
|__[112] STALL TRIP
|
|__[542] REMOTE TRIP
|__MENUS
|
|__[037] FULL MENUS
|
|__LANGUAGE
|__SERIAL LINKS
|
|__TEC OPTION
|
|
|__[500] TEC OPTION TYPE
|
|
|__[501] TEC OPTION IN 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[506] TEC OPTION FAULT
|
|
|__[507] TEC OPTION VER
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

5
5
4
5
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
6
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
5
6
7
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[508] TEC OPTION OUT 1
|
|
|__[509] TEC OPTION OUT 2
|
|__SYSTEM PORT (P3)
|
|
|__P3 SETUP
|
|
|
|__[130] MODE
|
|
|
|__5703 SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
|__[132] SETPT. RATIO
|
|
|
|
|__[133] SETPT. SIGN
|
|
|
|
|__[187] RAW INPUT
|
|
|
|
|__[189] SCALED INPUT
|
|
|
|__BISYNCH SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
|__[329] GROUP ID (GID)
|
|
|
|
|__[330] UNIT ID (UID)
|
|
|
|
|__[332] ERROR REPORT
|
|
|
|__[198] P3 BAUD RATE
|
|
|__UDP XFER (RX)
|
|
|__[155] VERSION NUMBER
|
|__PNO CONFIG
|
|
|__[312] PNO 112
|
|
|__[313] PNO 113
|
|
|__[314] PNO 114
|
|
|__[315] PNO 115
|
|
|__[316] PNO 116
|
|
|__[317] PNO 117
|
|
|__[318] PNO 118
|
|
|__[319] PNO 119
|
|
|__[320] PNO 120
|
|
|__[321] PNO 121
|
|
|__[322] PNO 122
|
|
|__[323] PNO 123
|
|
|__[324] PNO 124
|
|
|__[325] PNO 125
|
|
|__[326] PNO 126
|
|
|__[327] PNO 127
|__SYSTEM
|
|__SOFTWARE
|
|__CONFIGURE I/O
|
|
|
|
|__ANALOG INPUTS
|
|
|
|__ANIN 1 (A2)
|
|
|
|
|__[230] CALIBRATION
|
|
|
|
|__[231] MAX VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[232] MIN VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[246] DESTINATION TAG
|
|
|
|__ANIN 2 (A3)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[234] MAX VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[235] MIN VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[493] OUTPUT
|
|
|
|__ANIN 3 (A4)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[237] MAX VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[238] MIN VALUE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__ANIN 4 (A5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[240] MAX VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[241] MIN VALUE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__ANIN 5 (A6)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[243] MAX VALUE
|
|
|
|
|__[244] MIN VALUE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__ANALOG OUTPUTS
|
|
|
|__ANOUT 1 (A7)
|
|
|
|
|__[245] % TO GET 10V
10-25
10-26

7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
5
6
7
6
7
6
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
5
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
5
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[362] MODULUS
|
|
|__[464] OFFSET
|
|
|__[251] SOURCE TAG
|
|__ANOUT 2 (A8)
|
|
|__[248] % TO GET 10V
|
|
|__[363] MODULUS
|
|
|__[465] OFFSET
|
|
|__[252] SOURCE TAG
|__DIGITAL INPUTS
|
|__DIGITAL INPUT C4
|
|
|
|__DIGITAL INPUT C5
|
|
|
|__DIGIN 1 (C6)
|
|
|__[103] VALUE FOR TRUE
|
|
|__[104] VALUE FOR FALSE
|
|
|
|__DIGIN 2 (C7)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__DIGIN 3 (C8)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__DIGITAL OUTPUTS
|
|__DIGOUT 1 (B5)
|
|
|__[195] THRESHOLD (>)
|
|
|__[043] MODULUS
|
|
|__[097] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|__[359] INVERTED
|
|__DIGOUT 2 (B6)
|
|
|
|
|__[044] MODULUS
|
|
|__[098] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|__[360] INVERTED
|
|__DIGOUT 3 (B7)
|
|
|
|
|__[045] MODULUS
|
|
|__[099] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|__[361] INVERTED
|__CONFIGURE 5703
|
|__[134] SOURCE TAG
|
|__BLOCK DIAGRAM
|
|__[293] RAMP O/P DEST
|
|__[294] SPT SUM 1 DEST
|
|__[400] PID O/P DEST
|
|__[431] DIAMETER
|
|__[442] TAPER
|
|__[450] SETPOINT SUM 2
|
|
|
|__[478] TENS+COMP CALC.
|
|__[260] RAISE/LOWER DEST
|
|__[573] PRESET DEST
|
|__[590] SRAMP DEST
|__INTERNAL LINKS
|
|__LINK 1
|
|
|__[364] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|__LINK 2
|
|
|__[366] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|__LINK 3
|
|
|__[368] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|__LINK 4

7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
7
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[370] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 5
|
|
|
|__[454] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 6
|
|
|
|__[456] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 7
|
|
|
|__[458] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 8
|
|
|
|__[460] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 9
|
|
|
|__[467] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 10
|
|
|
|__[469] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|__LINK 11
|
|
|
|__[390] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[392] ADVANCED
|
|
|
|__[393] MODE
|
|
|
|__[394] AUX.SOURCE
|
|
|__LINK 12
|
|
|
|__[395] SOURCE TAG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[397] ADVANCED
|
|
|
|__[398] MODE
|
|
|
|__[399] AUX.SOURCE
|__RESERVED
|
|__FACTORY USE ONLY
|
|
|__DO NOT ALTER !!
|
|
|
|__[162] MIN MMI CYCLE TM
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[163] ILOOP PI MODE Reserved
|
|
|
|__[164] TOGGLE PERIOD
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[165] TOGGLE REF 1
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[166] SEL. INT/CUR/SPD
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[167] TOGGLE REF 2
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[190] PEAK HW SLOPE
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[226] PEAK HW OFFSET
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[211] SYS HEALTH INHIB
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[194] DISC ADAPT POT
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[193] TICK LENGTH
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[310] AUTOCAL
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[311] IAINST OFFSET
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[213] ZERO CUR OFFSET
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[214] ZCD THRESHOLD
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[221] MMI FILTER T.C.
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[222] PRED STEP
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[223] SCAN THRESHOLD
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[034] FIELD FBKSTOP
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[035] FIELD FFRSTOP
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[036] IFFB DELAY
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[154] II
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[101] MIN BS DEAD TIME
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[553] MAX BS DEAD TIME
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[356] TOTAL I DMD
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[608] phang dg
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[609] phangE_n dg
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[623] EXTENDED PLL
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[276] PLL PROP
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[277] PLL INT
Reserved
|
|
|
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[279] ARM ENDSTOP
Reserved
|
|
|
|__[283] SCAN TC
Reserved
10-27
10-28

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
4
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[280] HF C/O DISC GAIN
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[281] HF C/O FILTER TC
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[282] BEMF THRESHOLD
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[265] ANALOG IP OFFSET
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[388] SYNC OFFSET
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[205] dI/dt
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[336] CHANGEOVER BIAS
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[471] STANDBY FIELD
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[476] 3-PHASE FIELD
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[550] ENABLE 12 PULSE
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[551] MASTER BRIDGE Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[552] SLAVE BRIDGE
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[522] NOT 570 STACK
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[158] OP STATION ERROR
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[040] SYSTEM IO
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[046] /ILOOP SUSPEND
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[114] SEQ STATE
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[117] HEALTH INHIBIT
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[215] G&L POWER METER
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[267] POSITION COUNT
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[275] POSITION DIVIDER
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[387] RAW POS COUNT
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[278] PLL ERROR
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[295] FILTER INPUT
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[296] FILTER OUTPUT
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[372] R/L DELTA
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[373] SYS RAMP DELTA
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[389] PERCENT RPM
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[529] PNO 39
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[530] PNO 47
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[531] PNO 55
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[532] PNO 63
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__[533] PNO 71
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|__P[534] NO 95
Reserved
|
|__PEEK
|
|
|__[123] PEEK DATA
|
|
|__[124] PEEK SCALE
|
|__miniLINK
|
|
|__[339] VALUE 1
|
|
|__[340] VALUE 2
|
|
|__[341] VALUE 3
|
|
|__[342] VALUE 4
|
|
|__[343] VALUE 5
|
|
|__[344] VALUE 6
|
|
|__[345] VALUE 7
|
|
|__[379] VALUE 8
|
|
|__[380] VALUE 9
|
|
|__[381] VALUE 10
|
|
|__[382] VALUE 11
|
|
|__[383] VALUE 12
|
|
|__[384] VALUE 13
|
|
|__[385] VALUE 14
|
|
|__[346] LOGIC 1
|
|
|__[347] LOGIC 2
|
|
|__[348] LOGIC 3
|
|
|__[349] LOGIC 4
|
|
|__[350] LOGIC 5
|
|
|__[351] LOGIC 6
|
|
|__[352] LOGIC 7
|
|
|__[353] LOGIC 8
|__[354] PARAMETER SAVE
|__CONFIGURE DRIVE
|
|
|__[521] NOM MOTOR VOLTS
|
|__[523] ARMATURE CURRENT
|
|__[524] FIELD CURRENT
|
|__[543] ZERO CAL INPUTS
Reserved
|
|__[209] FLD.CTRL MODE

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|__[210] FLD.VOLTS RATIO

|__[421] MAIN CURR. LIMIT
|__[018] AUTOTUNE
|__[047] SPEED FBK SELECT
|__[024] ENCODER LINES
|__[022] ENCODER RPM
|__[049] ENCODER SIGN
|__[013] SPD.INT.TIME
|__[014] SPD.PROP.GAIN
10-29
10-30
Technical Specifications
11-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Details
Operating Temperature
Frame 1 :
Frame 2 :
Frame 3 :
Frame 4 :
Frame 5 :
Frame H :
0C to +45C
0C to +45C
0C to +45C
0C to +40C
0C to +40C
0C to +40C
Operating temperature is defined as the ambient temperature to the immediate surround of the
Converter, when the Converter and other equipment adjacent to it is operating at worst case
conditions.
Output current values should be derated at 1% per degree Centigrade above rated temperature
up to a maximum of 55C.
Storage Temperature
-25C to +55C
Shipping Temperature
-25C to +70 C
Product Enclosure Rating
IP00 (Europe) [Frame 1 unit is IP20]

UL Open Type (North America/Canada)
If the product enclosure is totally enclosed, the exposed metal surface dissipates approximately
50W/m for a 10C temperature rise of internal air above ambient.
Vibration
Test Fc of EN60068-2-6
10Hz<=f<=57Hz sinusoidal 0.075mm amplitude
57Hz<=f<=150Hz sinusoidal 1g
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axis
Altitude
If >500 metres (1650 feet) above sea level, derate Motor Power rating by 1% per 200 metres
(660 feet) to a maximum of 5,000 metres (16,500 feet)
Humidity
Maximum 85% relative humidity at 40C non-condensing
Atmosphere
Non flammable, non corrosive and dust free
Climatic Conditions
Class 3k3, as defined by EN60721-3-3 (1995)
Safety
Europe
North America/Canada
Overvoltage Category
Pollution Degree
EN50178 (1998), when fitted inside a cubicle

UL508C
Overvoltage Category III (3-phase supply), Overvoltage Category II (auxiliary supply)
Pollution Degree 2
EMC Compliance
All models
European Community Directive 89/336/EEC
All models
EN61800-3 (1997) Table 11 : conducted emissions when installed in accordance with the
instructions in Chapter 3. Refer to "Mounting the Converter".
EN61800-3 (1997) Immunity requirements
EN61800-3 (1997) Table 12 Radiated emissions
If fitted with specified

external filters
(except Frame H)
EN61800-3 (1997) restricted distribution: conducted emissions
11-2
Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit
Refer to Chapter 3: Earth Fault Monitoring Systems for circuit breaker details.
Motor HP ratings as NEC Table 430-147: Full Load Current in Amperes, DC Motors
Output Current
@ 150% and
200% *
(A)
Output Current
@ 100%
Continuous *
(A)
Power
@ 500V dc
(kW)
Motor HP
@ 500V dc
(HP)
Field
Current
(A)
Total Losses
@ Full Load
(W)
Symmetrical Fault
Current rms
(kA)
15
15
7.5
57
35
35
15
20
117
40
40
18
25
10
132
10
70
70
30
40
10
234
10
110
110
50
60
10
354
10
165
165
75
100
10
519
10
180
180
80
50
10
570
10
270
270
120
150
10
840
10
380
420
150
200 +
30
1230
18
500
550
225
300 +
30
1590
18
725
800
327
400 +
30
2265
30
830
910
335
500 +
30
2580
30
1740
650
900 +
30
4890
85
1050
1200
550
700
60
3780
100
1450
1700
750
1000
60
5280
100
2000
2200
1000
1250
60
6780
100
2400
2700
1200
1500
60
8280
100
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
1580
Frame H
* The output current figures are given at 100% Continuous (no overload), and with overloads of 150% for 30 seconds or
200% for 10 seconds.
Output current values should be derated at 1% per degree Centigrade above rated temperature up to a maximum of 55C.
Output current values should be derated at an altitude of 500 metres above sea level at a rate of 1% per 200 metres to a
maximum of 5000 metres.
Rated armature voltage : 240V dc
+ These products are suitable for supplies up to 600V ac and armature voltages of 700V dc, hence output power ratings
can be increased by up to 140%
These products are suitable for supplies up to 690V ac and armature voltages of 750V dc, hence output power ratings
can be increased by up to 150%
11-3
Power Supply Details

3-Phase Supply
LV Build
All Frames
110-220V ac 10%, 50/60Hz 5%, line-to-line, ground referenced (TN)

and non-ground referenced (IT)
MV Build
(standard)
All Frames

HV Build
Frame 4
Frame 5

Frame H

Supply Current
(0.9 x Idc) Amps ac rms
Field Supply Current
(1 x Idc) Amps ac rms (build related)
Field Supply Voltage
Build-related
3 Phase Input
3-phase rotation insensitive, no adjustment necessary for frequency change
Auxiliary Power Supply Details

Auxiliary Supply
110-230V 10%, 50-60Hz 10%, single phase, Overvoltage Category II

Where auxiliary cooling fans are used, then the supply is set by the requirement for the fan,
i.e. 115V 10% or 230V 10%.
Refer to the Model No. and Chapter 2: An Overview of the Converter - Understanding the
Product Code
Auxiliary Supply Current
3A ac rms maximum. Nominal current used for power supplies:

0.5A at 115V ac
0.25A at 230V ac
Fan current for integral fans: refer to Cooling, page 11-19.
The remainder is available for driving the AC Contactor
Contactor Output
3A maximum at the auxiliary voltage
11-4
AC Line Choke (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5)

To correctly isolate the 590+ drive from the ac power system, and to protect other equipment
from transients on the power system, always use the recommended external ac line choke (or
alternatively a transformer may achieve the necessary isolation).
Note that the Frame 5 requires two ac line chokes (one in front of each of the paralleled
converters). This provides isolating impedance between the drive and its ac power source. It
also provides the necessary impedance between the paralleled converters, forcing them to
share the total motor current evenly. The Frame 5 drive must still use two ac line chokes when
a transformer is used for isolation, however, the chokes can be of a much lower inductance,
typically 3-5 H.
Drives below 100A Armature Current rating cannot achieve confromance with EN61800-3
Table 11 using only a 50H line choke. Capacitors must be fitted between phase and earth to
achieve conformance.
Armature Current Rating (A)
AC Rating (A)
Inductance (H)
500Vac
600Vac
SSD Drives Part No.

500Vac
600Vac
For use without filters (use with capacitors for armature currents <100A, refer to Chapter 3: "AC Line Choke")
Frame 1
15
13.5
50 H
CO466448U015
35
36
50 H
CO466448U040
40
36
50 H
CO466448U040
Frame 2
70
63
50 H
CO466448U070
110
100
50 H
CO466448U110
165
148.5
50 H
CO466448U165
180
162
50 H
CO055255
270
243
50 H
CO057960
Frame 3
AC Line Chokes @ 2% line impedance for conformance with EN55011 Class A when used with specified filters.
Frame 1
15
13.5
1130 H
CO466449U015
35
36
424 H
CO466449U040
40
36
424 H
CO466449U040
Frame 2
70
63
242 H
CO466449U070
110
100
154 H
CO466449U110
165
148.5
113 H
CO466449U165
180
162
113 H
CO463039
270
243
50 H
CO057960
Frame 3
AC Line Chokes @ 1% line impedance for conformance with EN55011 Class A when used with specified filters.
Frame 4
380
342
30 H
CO466709U038
500
450
25 H
CO466709U050
725
653
20 H
CO466709U073
830
747
15 H
CO466709U083
0831-1200
747
20 H
CO466709U073
0831-1200
(use with transformer only)
747
5 H
CO466709U120
1201-1580
747
15 H
CO466709U083
1201-1580
(use with transformer only)
747
5 H
CO466709U160
Frame 5 (2 chokes required)
11-5
AC Line Choke (Frame H)

Always use the recommended external AC Line Choke.
DC Rating
AC Current
Inductance
SSD Drives Part No.
AC Line Choke @ 2% line impedance.

Frame H
1200
1700
2200
2700
LV
1080A
15H
CO466250U012
HV
1080A
20H
CO466251U012
LV
1620A
10H
CO466250U017
HV
1620A
15H
CO466251U017
LV
1980A
10H
CO466250U022
HV
1980A
15H
CO466251U022
LV
2520A
7.5H
CO466250U027
HV
2520A
10H
CO466251U027
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters

Filters must only be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.
AC supply filter part numbers for conformance with BS EN61800-3 Table 9 (1st Env)
Restricted Distribution and/or BS EN61000-6-4.
Armature Current Rating (A)
Total Filter Watt Loss (W)
SSD Filter Part No.
15
11
1 off CO467844U015
35
16
1 off CO467844U040
40
16
1 off CO467844U040
70
16
1 off CO467844U070
110
18
1 off CO467844U110
165
25
1 off CO467844U165
180
158
1 off CO467844U180
270
50
1 off CO467843U340
380
100
2 off CO467843U340
500
100
2 off CO467843U340
725
150
3 off CO467843U340
830
150
3 off CO467843U340
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
1580 (please contact SSD Drives)
Frame H
1200-2700 (please contact SSD Drives)
11-6
Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5)

For fuses where compliance to UL Standards are required, refer to Chapter 12:
Installing the Converter Requirements for UL Compliance.
Controller
Rating
(A)
Line Fuse Rating

(A)
SSD Part No.
Fuse It @ 600V
(kAs)
Thyristor It
(kAs)
Frame 1
15
25
CS470445U025
0.31
0.72
35
40
CH570044
0.46
0.72
40
40
CH570044
0.46
1.15
70
80
CH570084
2.55
110
160
CH580164
7.5
15
165
200
CH580025
15
19.1
180
200
CH580025
15
19.1
270
500
CH590554
135 (*102)
125
380
550
CH590554
135
240
500
700
CH590075
300
306
725
900
CH590095
670
781
830
1000
CH590016
945
1125
2 x 1000
CH590016
945
1125
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
Frame 5
1580
* A correction factor of 0.75 is applied to 135 @ 600V for 500V operation, hence 102
Power Semiconductor Protection Fuses (Frame H)

For fuses where compliance to UL Standards are required, refer to Chapter 12:
Installing the Converter - Requirements for UL Compliance.
Controller
Rating
(A)
Line Fuse Rating

(A)
SSD Part No.
Limb Fuse Rating
SSD Part No.
1200
500 x 2
CS466260U050
350 x 2
CS466261U035
1700
800 x 2
CS466260U080
550 x 2
CS466261U055
2200
1000 x 2
CS466260U100
700 x 2
CS466261U070
2700
1250 x 2
CS466260U125
900 x 2
CS466261U090
Frame H
* Ferrule fuse 14 x 51mm, for use in ST14 Fuse Holder (CP054175)

We recommend that all 590+ drives are protected by semiconductor fuses.
1200-2700A units are fitted with internal fuses:
the 4Q (590+) units have limb fuses
the 2Q (591+) units have line fuses
11-7
Power Supply Fuses

Power Board
Identification
Fuse Rating
SSD Part No.
FS1, 5x20mm glass slow-blow

(for auxiliary supply, contactor, fan supply)
3A
CH540033

3A
CH540033

3A
CH540033
FS3 and FS4, 5x20mm glass slow-blow

3A
CH540033

3A
CH540033
Fuse Rating
SSD Part No.
10A
CS470407U010
30A
CS470407U030
Frame 1
AH466407 (terminal board)
Frame 2
AH470330
Frame 3
AH385851
Frame 4 & 5
AH466701
Frame H
AH466001
Field Fuses
Identification
Frames 1, 2 & 3
10x38mm
Frame 4 & 5
10x38mm
External field fuses are required for Frame H units.
Earthing/Safety Details
Grounding
Permanent earthing is mandatory on all units because the earth leakage current exceeds 3.5mA
ac/10mA dc under normal operating conditions. Permanent earthing can be made in two ways:
1.
By using a copper conductor of at least 10mm cross-sectional area.
2.
By using a second conductor, through separate terminals electrically parallel to the

protective conductor.
Note: Each conductor itself must meet the local requirements for a protective earth
conductor.
Input Supply Details
(TN) and (IT)
Units with or without external filters are suitable for use on earth referenced (TN) supplies, but
units used with a filter are not recommended for non-earth referenced (IT) supplies..
Earth Leakage Current
>50mA (all models)
11-8
Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs)

User inputs/outputs are IEC1131 compliant.
Digital Input
Digital Output
These outputs are active
high and source current
from the terminal to the
load. Thus the load must
be connected between the
output and the signal
ground. A free-wheel
diode is included in the
output to protect the
output transistor when
switching inductive loads
such as relays.
Analog Input/Output
Terminal blocks A, B, and
C are located on the
control board each block
being a 9 way plug-in
connector. In addition to
terminal blocks A, B and
C, terminal blocks G and
H provide connections
when the two option
modules are fitted on the
control board.
Rated Voltage:
Off Region:
input voltage
input current
Transition Region:
input voltage
input current
On Region:
input voltage
input current
Input Impedance
Sample Time
Digital Output Voltage
Digital Output Current
Output Update Rate
Output Impedance
Source/Sink
Rated Current
Temporary Overload
Overload Protection
Overload Recover
Reverse Voltage Protection
Operating Voltage
Off state leakage current
24V dc
Input Resolution
Output Resolution
Input Impedance
12 Bit plus sign, i.e. 10mV = 0.025% of full scale deflection

10 Bit plus sign, i.e. 10mV = 0.1% of full scale deflection
100k with a 1ms filter for Analog I/P (A3) and 2ms for
others.
10k (signal range -10V to +10V)
10ms (typically), 3ms for Analog I/P 2 (A3)
10%, i.e. maximum recognisable voltage 11V. Analog
Tachogenerator input should be applied to Terminal G3 on
Calibration Option Card only.
10V at 5mA. Short circuit protected
10ms
10%, i.e. maximum output 11V
Input Impedance Limit

Maximum Input Sample Rate
Input Overload Capability
Output Capacity
Output Update Rate
Output Overdrive Capability
minimum -3V, maximum 5V

minimum not defined, maximum 15mA
minimum 5V, maximum 15V
minimum 0.5mA, maximum 15mA
minimum 15V, maximum 30V
minimum 2mA, maximum 15mA
4.7k
10ms
+24V dc
+100mA maximum source
10ms
Negligible up to 50mA load, short circuit protection provided.
Source
0.1A
None
Indefinite
Automatic
Yes
<30V dc
<0.4mA
11-9
Terminal Information - Power Board (Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5)

Note that on Frame 1 and 2 units, L1, L2, L3, A+ and A- terminals are located on a separate
Terminal Board. On Frame 3, 4 & 5 units, they are busbar connections.
Frame 3 units have terminal designations D1 to D8, shown in brackets in the Terminal
Number column of this table.
Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Mains Supply L1
Three phase mains power input, phase reference

Line 1
Refer to Power Supply Details,

page 11-3.
L1
Mains Supply L2

Line 2

page 11-3.
L2
Mains Supply L3

Line 3

page 11-3.
L3
Armature
connection
positive
A+
Converter dc power output, reference Armature

Positive connection to dc motor
Maximum voltage dependent upon

the supply voltage, the ratio being:
Vout is approximately equal to
1.15Vac supply
A+
Armature
connection
negative
A-
Converter dc power output, reference Armature

Negative connection to dc motor
Maximum voltage dependent upon

the supply voltage, the ratio being:
Vout is approximately equal to
1.15Vac supply
A-
Auxiliary N/C
Volt-Free MC
Contact : 1, 2
Used to indicate the status of the main contactor

(L1, L2, L3). See TB4.
1, 2
External field
supply FL1
External single phase ac Line 1 input to field

bridge.
500V ac maximum,
50-60Hz line-to-line
FL1 (D1)
External field
supply FL2
External single phase ac Line 2 input to field

bridge.
500V ac maximum,
FL2 (D2)
This feature
not available
on Frame 1
units
Required AC Input Voltage = 1.11 x Nominal DC

Output.
The field regulator will control the field current
provided that the Nominal DC Output voltage
exceeds the field voltage by at least 10%.
i.e.
VAC = 1.11 x VDC

and
VDC = 1.1 x VFIELD
therefore
VAC = 1.22 x VFIELD
The external AC supply must be fitted with high

speed fuses to protect the field regulator. For
controllers with 10A field capability 10A fuses
should be used.
Note: When using an external ac input it is
important to have the correct phase relationship
on the terminals. The supply must be derived
from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or
indirectly through a transformer. L1 must be
connected to FL1, and L2 to FL2.
Terminal
Number
11-10

Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Terminal
Number
Field Output
F-
DC supply for motor field connections.
0.9 x Vac
F (D3)
The DC output voltage at these terminals will

depend upon the AC supply voltage and the
mode of field control.
Voltage Control
The output voltage will be determined by the ratio
parameter in the field variables. The relationship
between the dc output voltage and AC input
voltage is determined by the equation:-
Vdc =
Vratio x VAC
100
The default value of Vratio is 90% hence the DC

output voltage will be the same as for a full wave
diode rectifier i.e., 90% is maximum output.
Field Output
F+
0.9 x Vac
F+ (D4)
Auxiliary supply
Aux N
Neutral
110-230V
CONTROL
N (D7)
Auxiliary supply
Aux L
Line
110-230V
L (D8)
Main contactor
coil
Con L
Line
Auxiliary Supply Voltage
EXT
These terminals are the mains input connections

for the switch mode power supply and contactor
control relay supply. Refer to the Product Code
(Block 8) for the specified auxiliary voltage. Refer
to Cooling, page 11-19 when using separate ac
fans, (Frame H units).
This terminal is the switched output from the
contactor control relay and is derived from the
auxiliary supply at terminal D8. The output is
internally fused at 3A hence contactor coils
having a high pick-up current must be operated
via a slave relay.
CONTACTOR
3 (D5)
Note: When using a Slave Relay, the contacts of

the Contactor Control Relay are internally
suppressed by a series connected resistor (680
Ohms) and capacitor (33F) to protect the relay
contacts. Users should be aware that when the
Contactor Control Relay is De-energised, a
leakage current of approximately 2mA @ 220V
can be expected and this should be considered
when interfacing to these terminals. Typically,
there could be the energisation of very sensitive
relays.
Main contactor
coil
Con N
Neutral
Auxiliary Supply Voltage
4 (D6)
This terminal is internally connected to the

auxiliary supply neutral and provides a
convenient connection point for the contactor coil
neutral connection.
11-11

Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Thermistor
Therm +
Isolated Thermistor Input - positive
See description
It is good practice to protect DC motors against

sustained thermal overloads by fitting
temperature sensitive resistors or switches in the
field and interpole windings of the machine.
The controller complies with the requirements of
IEC 34-11-2-2 and is suitable for use with
Mark A detectors.
Terminal
Number
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
Th1
(THERM+)
(THERM+ &
THERM ,
found on
Frame 3
units, are
located on a
separate pcb
to the left of
the power
board in the
door
assembly)
These devices have a low resistance (typically

200) up to a reference temperature 125oC).
Above this temperature, their resistance rises
rapidly to greater than 4k. The preferred
installation is for three detectors to be connected
in series between terminals Th1 and Th2.
The 590+ will indicate a motor overtemperature
alarm if the external resistance between Th1 and
Th2 exceeds 3k. The alarm can be reset when
the resistance falls below 750.
Terminals Th1 and Th2 must be jumpered if
overtemperature sensors are not used.
Thermistor
Therm -
Isolated Thermistor Input - negative
See description
Th2
(THERM-)
PE
Protective ground incoming ground
STUDS
PE
Protective ground motor ground
STUDS
PE
Protective ground
STUDS
See description above
11-12
Terminal Information Control Board

This Control Board is common to all 590+ units.
Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Configurable
Terminal
Number
0V (Signal)
Zero Volt Reference
0V
N/A
A1
Analog Input 1
Speed Setpoint No. 1
+10V = Full speed setpoint forward
YES
A2
NO
A3
YES
A4
YES
A5
YES
A6
YES
A7
YES
A8
NO
A9
TERMINAL BLOCK A
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse

Analog Input 2
Aux. Speed Setpoint/

Current Demand
The function of this input is
determined by Digital Input
No. 3 at terminal C8.
C8 open circuit =
Speed Setpoint
+10V= Full speed setpoint forward

-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse in
speed setpoint mode.
+10V = 100% Positive current demand.
-10V = 100% Reverse current demand.
C8 at +24V =
Current Demand
Analog Input 3
Ramped Speed Setpoint
+10V= Full speed setpoint

-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse
Analog Input 4
Aux. Current Clamp -ve
+10V= 200% Positive current demand

-10V = 200% Reverse current clamp
Analog Input 5
Main Current Limit/

Aux. Current Clamp +ve
The function of analog
inputs 4 and 5 is
determined by digital Input
No.1 on terminal C6.
C6 open circuit:
Analog inputs No.5 =
Main Current Limit.
C6 at +24V:
Analog input No. 5 =
Auxiliary Current Clamp
Positive.
Analog Input No. 4 =
Auxiliary Current Clamp
Negative.
Analog Output 1
Speed Feedback
+10V= Full speed feedback forward.

-10V = Full speed feedback reverse.
Analog Output 2
Total Speed Setpoint
Current Meter
Output
Buffered Armature Current

Output
+10V= Full speed feedback forward.

-10V = Full speed feedback reverse.
The output can be selected

as either Bipolar or
Unipolar by the Armature I
parameter.
Bipolar Mode
+10V= 200% output current forward.
-10V = 200% output current reverse.
Unipolar Mode
+10V= 200% output current.
11-13

Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Configurable
Terminal
Number
0V (Signal)
Zero Volt Reference
Not Connected
Not Connected
+10V DC
Reference
User +10V Reference
+10V at 10mA short circuit protected
N/A
B3
-10V DC
Reference
User -10V Reference
-10V at 10mA short circuit protected
YES
B4
Digital Output 1
Zero Speed Detected
+24V at zero speed

(100mA maximum)
YES
B5
+24V when Healthy

(100mA maximum)
YES
B6
+24V when Ready

(100mA maximum)
YES
B7
Program Stop
+24V drive run
NO
B8
When the Program Stop

input is held at +24V, the
drive operates as required
by the inputs. When the
Program Stop is open
circuit or at zero volts, the
controller provides a
controlled or program stop
as defined by the Program
Stop parameters.
0V (o/c) drive program stop
Coast Stop
+24V drive run
NO
B9
When the Coast Stop input

is at +24V, the controller
operates normally. When
the Coast Stop is at zero
volts or open circuit, the
main contactor is open and
the drive no longer
operates. The motor coasts
to rest.
0V (o/c) drive coasts to rest.
TERMINAL BLOCK B
The operating level of this

output can be modified by
the standstill zero threshold
parameter to give the
desired accuracy of
operation
Digital Output 2
Drive Healthy (Drive

Operational)
0V
N/A
B1
B2
This output is true when the

controller is Healthy.
Digital Output 3
Drive Ready
This output is true when the
controller is ready to
function, i.e., locked into
the mains.
Program Stop
Input
Coast Stop Input
Threshold +16V
Threshold +16V
11-14

Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Configurable
Terminal
Number
0V (Signal)
Zero Volt Reference
0V
N/A
C1
External Trip Input
An external interlock or
permissive.
External permissive element should be

connected to C1 to run.
NO
C2
NO
C3
YES
C4
YES
C5
YES
C6
TERMINAL BLOCK C
If not using this feature, connect a

jumper between C1 and C2.
May be used as an unisolated motor
thermal input
Start/Run Input
Jog Input
Enable Input
Digital Input 1
Start/Run
+24V
When an input is applied to

this terminal, the main
contactor will close and the
controller will operate
provided there are no
alarms, program stop/coast
stop signals are high and
the controller is enabled.
When the input is removed
the controller will perform a
regenerative stop to zero
speed. A regenerative stop
can only be achieved by a
4 quad regenerative
controller; the 2 quad nonregenerative controller will
coast to zero speed.
0V (o/c) =
True/Run
Jog
+24V = True/Jog
When the Jog Input is held

at +24V, the drive jogs
provided input C3 is low.
When the Jog Input is
removed the drive will ramp
down to zero obeying the
Jog Ramp Rate.
0V = False/Stop
False/Normal Stop
Threshold + 16V
Threshold +16V
Enable
+24V = True/Enable
The Enable Input provides a

means of electronically
inhibiting controller
operation. If the enable
input is not true all control
loops will be inhibited and
the controller will not
function.
0V = False/Inhibit
Current Clamp Select
+24V = True/Bipolar Clamp
This input alters the

configuration of the current
clamps. With no
connection, i.e., false,
Analog I/P 5 provides a
unipolar current limit.
When true, Analog I/P5 is
the positive current clamp,
Analog I/P 4 is the negative
current clamp
0V = False/Unipolar Clamp
Threshold +16V
Threshold +16V
11-15

Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Digital Input 2
Ramp Hold
+24V = True/Hold
If the input is held true the

S-Ramp output is frozen at
the last value irrespective of
the Ramped Setpoint Input.
When false the S-Ramp
Output follows the Ramped
Setpoint Input with a delay
determined by the
Acceleration and
Deceleration Ramped time
parameters.
0V = False/Ramp
Current Demand Isolate
+24V = True/Current
This input alters the drive

operation from Speed
Control to Current Control.
When digital input No. 3 is
true, analog input No. 2
provides the current
demand and the speed
loop is disconnected.
When false the speed loop
is in control and analog
input No. 2 is an auxiliary
speed setpoint.
0V = False/Speed
+24V
Maximum output current: 200mA
Configurable
Terminal
Number
TERMINAL BLOCK C continued
Digital Input 3
+24V Supply
C7
YES
C8
N/A
C9
Threshold + 16V
Threshold + 16V
Note that the maximum combined

consumption for digital outputs 1, 2 & 3
and C9 should not exceed 300mA.
Some typical loads are given below:
Microtach : 75mA
Relays : 50mA each
Fiber Optic ancillaries : 50mA each
DeviceNetTechnology Box : 50mA
YES
11-16
Terminal Information (Frame H)

These terminals are located externally on the product.
Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Terminal
Number
Three phase supply
Drive supply
L1 - L3
Armature +
Drive output to motor armature
A+
Armature -
Drive output to motor armature
A-
External field supply

(Red Phase)
External single phase ac Line 1 input to field bridge.
FL1
External field supply

(Yellow Phase)
External single phase ac Line 2 input to field bridge.
FL2
Required AC Input Voltage = 1.11 x Nominal DC Output.

The field regulator will control the field current provided that the Nominal DC Output
voltage exceeds the field voltage by at least 10%.
i.e.
VAC = 1.11 x VDC

and
therefore
VDC = 1.1 x VFIELD

VAC = 1.22 x VFIELD
The external AC supply must be fitted with high speed fuses to protect the field
regulator. For controllers with 10A field capability 10A fuses should be used, those
with 20A field capability 20A fuses, etc.
Note: When using an external AC input it is important to have the correct phase
relationship on the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow)
phases directly or indirectly through a transformer. L1 must be connected to FL1, and L2
to FL2.
Field Output
(DC+)
F+
Field Output
(DC-)
F-
The DC output voltage at these terminals will depend upon the AC supply voltage and
the mode of field control. Please refer to the Product Manual for details of the drive
capability and operation.
Maximum drive field output capability is 60A DC.
External Armature
Volts Sense (+)
This connection can be used if a more accurate value of armature voltage is required,
for example a DC line reactor may be fitted. This terminal should be connected directly
to the positive motor armature terminal.
MVA+
External Armature
Volts Sense (-)
This terminal should be connected directly to the negative motor armature terminal (see
above).
MVA-
Auxiliary Supply
Live 110-240V
These terminals are the mains input connections for control supply transformer and
contactor relay supply
Auxiliary Supply
Neutral
Main contactor coil

V AC
This terminal is internally connected to the auxiliary supply neutral and provides a
convenient connection point for the contactor coil neutral connection
Main contactor coil

V AC
This terminal is the switched output from the contactor control relay and is derived from
the auxiliary supply. The output is internally fused at 3A hence contactor coils having a
high pick-up current must be operated via a slave relay.
Note: The contacts of the Contactor Control Relay are suppressed by a series connected
resistor (680 Ohms) and capacitor (22nF) to protect the relay contacts. Users should be
aware that when the contactor Control Relay is De-energised, a leakage current of
approximately 2mA can be expected and this should be considered when interfacing to
these terminals. Typically, there could be the energisation of very sensitive relays.
11-17
Terminal Information Option Boards

Terminal
Description
Terminal Function
Signal Level
Terminal
Number
TERMINAL BLOCK G (SWITCHABLE TACHO CALIBRATION OPTION)

AC Tacho input
AC
G1
AC Tacho input
AC
G2
+ DC Tacho input
+DC
G3
- DC Tacho input
-DC
G4
Tacho Out
Calibrated Tacho Output
P3
(5701 MICROTACH RECEIVE OPTION - PLASTIC)

Signal Input
Microtach fibre optic input
There are no other connections to this option module.

(The 5701 Microtach should be powered by an
external 24V DC at 60mA, 1.4W.)
F1
(5901 MICROTACH OPTION MODULE - GLASS)

Signal Input
Microtach fibre optic input
There are no other connections to this option module.

(The 5901 Microtach should be powered by an
external 24V DC at 125mA, 3W.)
F1
TERMINAL BLOCK G (ENCODER OPTION)

Terminal Block G pinouts will change function depending upon which option board is fitted to the control board. The
configuration supplied as standard is with the Switchable Tacho Calibration Option fitted. Further information on the other
options may be obtained from the relevant Technical Manual.
TECHNOLOGY BOX OPTION (SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS)
Refer to the Technical Manual supplied with the option for details.
Wiring Requirements for EMC Compliance

Power Supply
Wire
Motor Wire
External Filter to Converter Wire
Signal/Control Wire
Unshielded
Shielded/
armored
Replace flying leads with

shielded/armored when >0.6m
Shielded
Segregation
From all other

wiring (clean)
From all other wiring (noisy)
From all other wiring

(sensitive)
Length Limitations
With External Filter
Unlimited
50 metres
As short as possible
25 metres
Both ends
Both ends
Converter end only
Wire Type
(for EMC Compliance)
Shield to Ground
Connection
11-18
Wire Sizes and Termination Tightening Torques

(Frames 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5)
Power cables must have a minimum rating of 1.1 x full load current - EUROPE
Control wiring must have a minimum cross-section area of 0.75mm2 (18AWG)
Terminations
Maximum Tightening
Torque
All Units
A1 A9, B1 B9, C1 C9
Frame 1
A+, AL1, L2, L3
Grounding terminal
F+, FL, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2
Frame 2
0.6-0.8Nm (5-7 lb-in.)

14 AWG
15A, 35A UNITS
1.8Nm (16 lb-in)
8-18 AWG
1.8Nm (16 lb-in)
8-18 AWG
2.0Nm (17 lb-in.)
12 AWG
0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in)
14 AWG
0.5Nm (5.0 lb-in)
12 AWG
A+, AL1, L2, L3

Grounding terminal
F+, FL, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2
A+, AL1, L2, L3
Grounding terminal
F+, FL, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2
A+, AL1, L2, L3
Grounding terminal
F+, FL, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2
A+, AL1, L2, L3
Grounding terminal
F+, FL, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2
Frame 3
A+, AL1, L2, L3
Grounding terminal
D1- D8
THERM+, THERMFrame 4 & 5
A+, AL1, L2, L3
Grounding terminal
FL1, FL2
F+, FAuxiliary supply, contactor and
motor thermistor
Recommended
Wire Size
40A UNITS
8 AWG
8 AWG
6 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
70A UNITS
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
3 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
6 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
6 AWG
0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in)
14 AWG
0.5Nm (5.0 lb-in)
12 AWG
110A UNITS
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
1/0 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
3 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
6 AWG
0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in)
14 AWG
0.5Nm (5.0 lb-in)
12 AWG
165A UNITS
42.4Nm (375 lb-in)
4/0 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
1/0 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
3 AWG
0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in)
14 AWG
0.5Nm (5.0 lb-in)
12 AWG
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
5.6Nm (50 lb-in)
0.8Nm (7.0 lb-in)
0.5Nm (5.0 lb-in)
UL
Maximum Terminal
Aperture Size
(AWG)
EUROPE
Maximum Terminal
Aperture Size (mm2)
12
2.5
8
8
12
12
10
10
2.5
2.5
2/0
2/0
2/0
12
12
70
70
70
2.5
2.5
2/0
2/0
2/0
12
12
70
70
70
2.5
2.5
2/0
2/0
2/0
12
12
70
70
70
2.5
2.5
250 cmil
2/0
2/0
12
12
120
70
70
2.5
2.5
180A, 270A UNITS

11Nm (97 lb-in)
2/0 AWG
11Nm (97 lb-in)
2/0 AWG
6.8Nm (60 lb-in)
2/0 AWG
0.45Nm (4.0 lb-in)
14 AWG
0.45Nm (4.0 lb-in)
14 AWG
380A, 500A, 725A, 830A, 1580A UNITS
23Nm (204 lb-in)
23Nm (204 lb-in)
6.8Nm (60 lb-in)
0.8Nm (7 lb-in)
0.8Nm (7 lb-in)
0.6Nm (5 lb-in)
-
11-19
Termination Tightening Torque (Frame H)

Description
Fixings
Spanner Size
Format
Torque Nm
Drive Mounting Fixings
M12
19mm
Bolt
57.2
Ground studs on back panel
M10
17mm
Nut
32.8
Fuse assy to Phase assy
M10
17mm
Bolt
24
AC Input & DC Output Bus bars
M12
19mm
Nut & Bolt
57.2
Fuse assembly
M12
19mm
Bolt
42
Fuse assembly to CT
M12
19mm
Bolt
42
DC Output terminal panel to side panel M6
10mm
Bolt
6.8
DC Bus bars
M6
10mm
Nut
6.8
I/P terminal assy
M6
10mm
Nut
Lifting Bracket Fixings
M10
17mm
Bolt
24
Cooling Fans
Output Current
(armature)
(A)
Frame
15
35
Frame
40
70
110
165
Frame
180
270
Frame
380
500
725
830
Frame
1580
Maximum
Rating
Ambient 1
(C)
Cooling Method
Number
of Fans
Fan Power
Rating
110/120V ac
Fan Power Rating

220/240V ac
45
45
no fan
Integral Fan
0
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
45
45
45
45
Integral Fan
Integral Fan
Integral Fan
Integral Fan
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
45
45
Intergral Fan
Intergral Fan
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
40
40
40
40
Forced Vent 240cfm (410m/hr) @ 200Pa

1
1
1
1
130W, 10F
130W, 10F
130W, 10F
130W, 10F
140W, 2.5F
140W, 2.5F
140W, 2.5F
140W, 2.5F
40
130W, 10F
(each fan)
140W, 2.5F
(each fan)
40
40
40
40
Separate Fan
Separate Fan
Separate Fan
Separate Fan
2
2
2
2
See note below

See note below
See note below
See note below
See note below

See note below
See note below
See note below
Frame H
1200
1700
2200
2700
Fans supplied with Frame H units have an air flow rate per fan of 850m/hr at 250 Pascal
Fan Ratings:
115V ac 50Hz, 1.67A, 177W, 2750 rpm, motor run capacitor 18F
115V ac 60Hz, 2.21A, 240W, 2660 rpm, motor run capacitor 18F
11-20
Spares List
Common Spares
Control Board
LED Board
Ribbon Cable
Software Version
Part Number
Status *
5.x
AH470372U001
NOT CURRENT
AH465315U001
CM466762U002
7.x
AH470372U002
CURRENT
AH465315U001
CM466762U002
* Do not attempt to upgrade by fitting a later software version Control Board. You may experience hardware compatiblity
problems. If in doubt, contact SSD Drives.
Frame 1
Product
Power Board
Terminal Board
Armature
Thyristor
Field Bridge
Fan
Fan Assy
591P/0015/220/
AH470280U101
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
590P/0015/220/
AH470280U102
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
591P/0035/220/
AH470280U103
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
DL470516 LA466464U001
590P/0035/220/
AH470280U104
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
DL470516 LA466464U001
591P/0015/500/
AH470280U001
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
590P/0015/500/
AH470280U002
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
591P/0035/500/
AH470280U003
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
DL470516 LA466464U001
590P/0035/500/
AH470280U004
AH466407U001
CF470348
CF470349
DL470516 LA466464U001
Product
Power Board
Terminal Board
591P/0040/220/
Frame 2
Armature
Thyristor
Field Bridge
Fan
AH470330U101* -
CF385522U016
CF470349
DL465313 No Sub Assembly
590P/0040/220/
AH470330U102* -
CF385522U016
CF470349
591P/0070/220/
AH470330U101* -
CF385524U016
CF470349
590P/0070/220/
AH470330U102* -
CF385524U016
CF470349
591P/0110/220/
AH470330U101* -
CF385525U016
CF470349
590P/0110/220/
AH470330U102* -
CF385525U016
CF470349
591P/0165/220/
AH470330U101* -
CF470523U095
CF470349
590P/0165/220/
AH470330U102* -
CF470523U095
CF470349
591P/0040/500/
AH470330U001* -
CF385522U016
CF470349
590P/0040/500/
AH470330U002* -
CF385522U016
CF470349
591P/0070/500/
AH470330U001* -
CF385524U016
CF470349
590P/0070/500/
AH470330U002* -
CF385524U016
CF470349
591P/0110/500/
AH470330U001* -
CF385525U016
CF470349
590P/0110/500/
AH470330U002* -
CF385525U016
CF470349
591P/0165/500/
AH470330U001* -
CF470523U095
CF470349
590P/0165/500/
AH470330U002* -
CF470523U095
CF470349
Note:
Fan Assy
* This PCB is a composite assembly and contains a Power Board, a Terminal Board and a CT Board
Frame 3
11-21
Fitted with the 590PXD Door Assembly LA466454U001 containing the Control Board and
Adaptor Board AH466405U001
Product
Power Board
Armature Thyristor Field Bridge
Fan 115V
Fan 230V
591P/0180/220/
AH385851U004
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
590P/0180/220/
AH385851U005
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
591P/0270/220/
AH385851U004
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
590P/0270/220/
AH385851U005
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
591P/0180/500/
AH385851U003
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
590P/0180/500/
AH385851U002
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
591P/0270/500/
AH385851U003
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
590P/0270/500/
AH385851U002
CF057366U014
CF057273U014
DL043707
DL056383
Frame 4
Fitted with the 590PD Door Assembly LA466454U002 containing the Control Board
Product
Power Board
Suppression Board
Trigger Board
Thyristor
591P/0380/220/
590P/0380/220/
AH466701U001
AH466701U001
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466796U016
CF466796U016
591P/0500/220/
590P/0500/220/
AH466701U001
AH466701U001
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466768U016
CF466768U016
591P/0725/220/
590P/0725/220/
AH466701U001
AH466701U001
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466697U016
CF466697U016
591P/0830/220/
590P/0830/220/
AH466701U001
AH466701U001
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466767U016
CF466767U016
591P/0380/500/
590P/0380/500/
AH466701U002
AH466701U002
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466796U016
CF466796U016
591P/0500/500/
590P/0500/500/
AH466701U002
AH466701U002
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466768U016
CF466768U016
591P/0725/500/
590P/0725/500/
AH466701U002
AH466701U002
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466697U016
CF466697U016
591P/0830/500/
590P/0830/500/
AH466701U002
AH466701U002
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466767U016
CF466767U016
591P/0380/600/
590P/0380/600/
AH466701U003
AH466701U003
AH466704U002
AH466704U002
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466796U018
CF466796U018
591P/0500/600/
590P/0500/600/
AH466701U003
AH466701U003
AH466704U002
AH466704U002
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466768U018
CF466768U018
591P/0725/600/
590P/0725/600/
AH466701U003
AH466701U003
AH466704U002
AH466704U002
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466697U018
CF466697U018
591P/0830/600/
590P/0830/600/
AH466701U003
AH466701U003
AH466704U002
AH466704U002
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
CF466767U018
CF466767U018
11-22
Frame 4
Product
Field Thyristor
Field Diode
Fan + Capacitor
Assembly
115V
Fan + Capacitor Assembly

230V
591P/0380/220/
590P/0380/220/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0500/220/
590P/0500/220/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0725/220/
590P/0725/220/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0830/220/
590P/0830/220/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0380/500/
590P/0380/500/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0500/500/
590P/0500/500/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0725/500/
590P/0725/500/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0830/500/
590P/0830/500/
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0380/600/
590P/0380/600/
CF385523U018
CF385523U018
CW464320U018
CW464320U018
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0500/600/
590P/0500/600/
CF385523U018
CF385523U018
CW464320U018
CW464320U018
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0725/600/
590P/0725/600/
CF385523U018
CF385523U018
CW464320U018
CW464320U018
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/0830/600/
590P/0830/600/
CF385523U018
CF385523U018
CW464320U018
CW464320U018
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
Frame 5
Product
Power Board
Suppression Board
Trigger Board
Slave Power
591P/1580/220/
590P/1580/220/
AH466701U001
AH466701U001
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
* AH466706U001
* AH466706U001
591P/1580/500/
590P/1580/500/
AH466701U002
AH466701U002
AH466704U001
AH466704U001
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
* AH466706U002
* AH466706U002
591P/1580/600/
590P/1580/600/
AH466701U003
AH466701U003
AH466704U002
AH466704U002
AH466703U002
AH466703U002
* AH466706U003
* AH466706U003
Note: * This PCB is a composite assembly and contains a Power Board and a Parallel Expansion Board
Frame 5 continued
Product
Thyristor
Field Thyristor
Field Diode
Fan + Capacitor
Assembly
115V
Fan + Capacitor
Assembly
230V
591P/1580/220/ CF466767U016
590P/1580/220/ CF466767U016
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/1580/500/ CF466767U016
590P/1580/500/ CF466767U016
CF385522U016
CF385522U016
CW464320U016
CW464320U016
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
591P/1580/600/ CF466767U018
590P/1580/600/ CF466767U018
CF385523U018
CF385523U018
CW464320U018
CW464320U018
LA466711U001
LA466711U001
LA466711U002
LA466711U002
Frame H
11-23
Fitted with the 590PXD Door Assembly LA466454U001 containing the Control Board and
Adaptor Board AH466405U001
Product
Power Board
Trigger Board
Suppression Board
Snubber Board
591P/1200/500/
590P/1200/500/
AH466001U101
AH466001U101
AH466003U001
AH466003U001
AH466003U003
AH466004U001
AH466004U001
591P/1700/500/
590P/1700/500/
AH466001U101
AH466001U101
AH466003U001
AH466003U001
AH466003U003
AH466004U001
AH466004U001
591P/2200/500/
590P/2200/500/
AH466001U101
AH466001U101
AH466003U101
AH466003U101
AH466003U103
AH466004U101
AH466004U101
591P/2700/500/
590P/2700/500/
AH466001U101
AH466001U101
AH466003U101
AH466003U101
AH466003U103
AH466004U101
AH466004U101
591P/1200/690/
590P/1200/690/
AH466001U001
AH466001U001
AH466003U002
AH466003U002
AH466003U004
AH466004U002
AH466004U002
591P/1700/690/
590P/1700/690/
AH466001U001
AH466001U001
AH466003U002
AH466003U002
AH466003U004
AH466004U002
AH466004U002
591P/2200/690/
590P/2200/690/
AH466001U001
AH466001U001
AH466003U102
AH466003U102
AH466003U104
AH466004U102
AH466004U102
591P/2700/690/
590P/2700/690/
AH466001U001
AH466001U001
AH466003U102
AH466003U102
AH466003U104
AH466004U102
AH466004U102
Frame H continued
Product
Field Assembly
Phase Assembly
Fuses
Fan 110V
591P/1200/500/
590P/1200/500/
LA466030U001
LA466030U001
LA466059U012
LA466059U012
CS466260U050
CS466261U035
DL466242
DL466242
591P/1700/500/
590P/1700/500/
LA466030U001
LA466030U001
LA466059U017
LA466059U017
CS466260U080
CS466261U055
DL466242
DL466242
591P/2200/500/
590P/2200/500/
LA466030U001
LA466030U001
LA466059U022
LA466059U022
CS466260U100
CS466261U070
DL466242
DL466242
591P/2700/500/
590P/2700/500/
LA466030U001
LA466030U001
LA466059U027
LA466059U027
CS466260U125
CS466261U090
DL466242
DL466242
591P/1200/690/
590P/1200/690/
LA466030U002
LA466030U002
LA466059U112
LA466059U112
CS466260U050
CS466261U035
DL466242
DL466242
591P/1700/690/
590P/1700/690/
LA466030U002
LA466030U002
LA466059U117
LA466059U117
CS466260U080
CS466261U055
DL466242
DL466242
591P/2200/690/
590P/2200/690/
LA466030U002
LA466030U002
LA466059U122
LA466059U122
CS466260U100
CS466261U070
DL466242
DL466242
591P/2700/690/
590P/2700/690/
LA466030U002
LA466030U002
LA466059U127
LA466059U127
CS466260U125
CS466261U090
DL466242
DL466242
11-24
Certification for the Converter
12-1
CERTIFICATION FOR THE CONVERTER

2
1
Caution
The integration of this product into other apparatus or systems is not the responsibility of
SSD Drives, with respect to applicability, effectivity, or safety of operation of the other
apparatus or systems.
Requirements for EMC Compliance

All Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) potentially produce electrical emissions which are radiated
into the environment and conducted back into the ac supply. VSDs are inherently immune to
any additional external electrical noise. The following information is provided to maximise the
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) of VSDs and systems in their intended operating
environment, by minimising their emissions and maximising their immunity.
Minimising Radiated Emissions

EN55011/EN55022 radiated emission measurements are made between 30MHz and 1GHz in
the far field at a distance of 10 to 30 metres (32.8 to 98.4 feet). Limits lower than 30MHz or in
close proximity are not specified. Emissions from individual components tend to be additive.
Use a screened/armoured cable between VSD/cubicle and motor containing the motor
protective earth (PE) connection. It should have a 360 screen termination. Earth screen at
both ends connecting to the motor frame and VSD/cubicle backplate. Maintain the screen
integrity using 360 terminations.
Note: Some hazardous area installations may preclude direct earthing at both ends of the
screen, in this case earth one end via a 1F 50Vac capacitor, and the other must be
directly earthed.
Keep unshielded cable as short as possible inside the cubicle.
Always maintain the integrity of the shield.
If the cable is interrupted to insert contactors etc., re-connect the screen using the shortest
possible route.
Keep the length of screen stripped-back as short as possible when making screen
connections.
Ideally use 360 screen terminations using cable glands or `U clips on power screen rails.
If a shielded cable is not available, lay unshielded motor cables in a metal conduit which will act
as a shield. The conduit must be continuous with a direct electrical contact to the VSD and
motor housing. If links are necessary, use braid with a minimum cross sectional area of 10mm2.
Note: Some motor gland boxes, conduit and conduit glands are made of plastic, if this is the
case, then braid must be connected in parallel to maintain screen integrity. In addition at
the motor end, ensure that the screen is electrically connected to the motor frame since
some terminal boxes are insulated from the frame by gasket/paint.
Earthing Requirements
IMPORTANT: Protective earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing.
Protective Earth (PE) Connections

Note: In accordance with installations to EN60204, only one protective earth conductor is
permitted at each VSD protective earth terminal contacting point.
Local wiring regulations may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be
connected locally, i.e. not as specified in these instructions. This will not cause shielding
problems because of the relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection.
12-2

Control/Signal EMC Earth Connections
For compliance with EN60204 and EMC requirements, the 0V/signal ground must be
separately earthed. When a number of units are used in a system, these terminals should be
connected together at a single, local earthing point.
Control and signal cables for the encoder, all analogue inputs, and communications require
screening with the screen connected only at the VSD end. However, if high frequency noise is
still a problem, earth screen at the non VSD end via a 0.1F, 50Vac capacitor.
Note: Connect the screen (at the VSD end) to the VSD protective point, and not to the control
board terminals.
Cabling Requirements
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications for additional Cabling Requirements.
Planning Cable Runs
Use the shortest possible motor cable lengths.
Keep electrically noisy and sensitive cables apart.
Keep electrically noisy and sensitive parallel cable runs to a minimum. Separate parallel
cable runs by at least 0.25 metres (0.8 feet). For runs longer than 10 metres (32.8 feet),
separation should be increased proportionally. For example if the parallel runs were 50m
(164 feet), then the separation would be (50/10) x 0.25m = 1.25m (164/32.8 x 0.8 = 4 feet).
Sensitive cables should cross noisy cables at 90.
Never run sensitive cables close or parallel to the motor cable for any distance.
Never run supply or motor cables in the same bundle as the signal/control and feedback
cables, even if they are screened.
Ensure EMC filter input and output cables are separately routed and do not couple noise
across the filter (i.e. bypass the filter).
Increasing Motor Cable Length

Because cable capacitance and hence conducted emissions increase with motor cable length,
conformance to EMC limits is only guaranteed with the specified ac supply filter option using a
maximum cable length as specified in Chapter 11: Technical Specifications.
Screened/armoured cable has significant capacitance between the conductors and screen which
increases linearly with cable length (typically 200pF/m but varies with cable type and current
rating).
Long cable lengths may have the following undesirable effects:
Producing increased conducted emissions which degrade the performance of the EMC filter
due to saturation.
Causing RCDs (Residual Current Devices) to trip due to increased high frequency earth
current.
Producing increased heating inside the EMC ac supply filter from the increased conducted
emissions.
These effects can be overcome by adding chokes at the output of the VSD.
12-3
EMC Installation Options

The unit, when installed for Class A operation, will be compliant with EN55011 (1991)/
EN55022 (1994) for radiated emissions, as described below.
Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class A)

Note: The installation requirements of local safety standards must be achieved regarding the
safety of electrical equipment for machines.
The unit is installed for Class A operation when mounted inside a cubicle having 10dB
attenuation between 30 and 100MHz (typically the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with
no aperture of dimension greater than 0.15m (0.5 feet), using the recommended ac supply filter
and having met all cabling requirements.
Note: Radiated magnetic and electric fields inside the cubicle will be high and any components
fitted inside must be sufficiently immune.
The VSD, external filter and associated equipment are mounted on to a conducting, metal
mounting panel. Do not use cubicle constructions that use insulating mounting panels or
undefined mounting structures. Cables between the VSD and motor must be screened or
armoured and terminated at the VSD or locally on the back panel.
Single VSD - Single Motor

Apply a single point series earthing strategy for a single VSD mounted in a cubicle as shown.
The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable between
the motor and VSD and be connected to a separate star point earth terminal near the VSD.
Cubicle
Back Panel
VSD
External
Filter
PE
U-clip used to
terminate screen
connection to
the back panel
Choke
*
Star Point Earth
AC Supply
Motor
Metal Work Earth
* As short as possible
(0.3m (1 foot) maximum)
Armoured/screened cable
Use an additional PE conductor where PE is <10mm 2 cross-section
Figure 12-1 EMC and Safety Earthing Cabling
12-4

Star Point Earthing
A star-point earthing policy separates `noisy and `clean earths. Four separate earth busbars
(three are insulated from the mounting panel) connect to a single earth point (star point) near the
incoming safety earth from the main supply. Flexible, large cross-section cable is used to ensure
a low HF impedance. Busbars are arranged so that connection to the single earth point is as
short as possible.
to motor
to motor
screened
U-clip used to terminate screen

connection to the back panel
to motor
screened
Back Panel
VSD
0A
PE
PE
PE
VSD
0D PE
VSD
PLC
Metal Work Earth
PE
0A
0D PE
0A
0D
PE
0D
Doors
Back
Panel
Metal
Work
24V Control
Analogue Clean Earth
Digital Clean Earth

unscreened signals
Dirty Earth
Signal/Control Screen
110V
0A = 0 Volts Analogue
Control
0D = 0 Volts Digital
PE = Protective Earth
f = External Filter
VSD = Variable Speed Drive
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
STAR POINT
all screened signals not
going directly to a VSD
Incoming Safety Earth (PE)
Figure 12-2 Star Point Earthing

1 Clean Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)
Used as a reference point for all signal and control cabling. This may be further subdivided into
an analogue and a digital reference busbar, each separately connected to the star earthing point.
The digital reference is also used for any 24V control.
2 Dirty Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)
Used for all power earths, i.e. protective earth connection. It is also used as a reference for any
110 or 220V control used, and for the control transformer screen.
3 Metal Work Earth Busbar
The back panel is used as this earth busbar, and should provide earthing points for all parts of
the cubicle including panels and doors. This busbar is also used for power screened cables
which terminate near to (10cm/4 inches) the VSD - such as motor cables, braking choppers and
their resistors, or between VSDs. Use U-clips to clamp the screened cables to the back panel to
ensure optimum HF connection.
4 Signal/Control Screen Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)
Used for signal/control screened cables which do not go directly to the VSD. Place this busbar
as close as possible to the point of cable entry. `U clamp the screened cables to the busbars to
ensure an optimum HF connection.
12-5
Sensitive Equipment
The proximity of the source and victim circuit has a large effect on radiated coupling. The
electromagnetic fields produced by VSDs falls off rapidly with distance from the
cabling/cubicle. Remember that the radiated fields from EMC compliant drive systems are
measured at least 10m from the equipment, over the band 30-1000MHz. Any equipment placed
closer than this will see larger magnitude fields, especially when very close to the Converter.
Do not place magnetic/electric field sensitive equipment within 0.25 metres (0.8 feet) of the
following parts of the VSD system:
Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
Input or output chokes/transformers
The cable between VSD and motor (even when screened/armoured)
AC/DC brushed motors (due to commutation)
Relays and contactors (even when suppressed)
From experience, the following equipment is particularly sensitive and requires careful
installation.
Any transducers which produce low level analogue outputs (<1V) , e.g. load cells, strain
gauges, thermocouples, piezoelectric transducers, anemometers, LVDTs
Wide band width control inputs (>100Hz)
AM radios (long and medium wave only)
Video cameras and closed circuit TV
Office personal computers
Capacitive devices such as proximity sensors and level transducers
Mains borne communication systems
Equipment not suitable for operation in the intended EMC environment, i.e. with
insufficient immunity to new EMC standards
12-6
Requirements for UL Compliance

Motor Overload Protection
Note: An external motor overload protective device must be provided by the installer.
The maximum internal overload protection level (current limit) is 150% for 30 seconds and
200% for 10 seconds.
Motor overload protection is provided by means of the thermal device in the motor winding.
This protection cannot be evaluated by UL, hence it is the responsibility of the installer and/or
the local inspector to determine whether the overload protection is in compliance with the
National Electrical Code or Local Code requirements.
Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements

The controller requires branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection requirements must be
in accordance with the latest addition of the National Electrical Code, NEC/NFPA-70.
UL Recognized Component (JFHR2) semiconductor fuses with current ratings and maximum
I2t ratings as specified below must be used in the controller. Refer to the table below for the
recommended fuse manufacturer and part number.
Controller Rating
Input Line Semiconductor Fuses

Ratings
Part No. Gould

2
(HP) 500V
(A)
(Vac)
(A)
I t (A s)
or equivalent*
7.5
15
500
31.3
750
A60Q35
20
35
500
31.3
750
A60Q35
20
40
500
31.3
750
A60Q35
30
70
500
71.6
1300
A50QS80-4R
40
70
500
71.6
1300
A50QS80-4R
50
110
500
111.8
2860
A50QS125-4R
60
110
500
111.8
2860
A50QS125-4R
75
165
500
156.6
7540
A50QS200-4R
100
165
500
156.5
7540
A50QS200-4R
Part No.
Bussmann or
equivalent*
200
380
660
550
135000
170M6809
300
500
660
700
300000
170M6811
400
725
660
900
670000
170M6813
500
830
660
1000
945000
170M6814
900
1580
660
2 x 1000
945000
170M6814
* Other UL Recognized Component (JFHR2) semiconductor fuses may be used in the

controller provided that the voltage, ampere and I2t ratings shown above are not
exceeded.
Note: Semiconductor fuses are acceptable as branch circuit short-circuit protection for
the solid-state motor controllers only.
Table 12-1 Short Circuit Protection Requirements
Short Circuit Ratings

These products are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than (the value
shown in Table 12-2) RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 500V maximum.

Output Ratings
(A)
15
35
40
70
110
165
380
500
725
830
1580
12-7
Short Circuit Rating

RMS Symmetrical Amperes
5,000
5,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
18000
18000
30000
30000
85000
(kW ) 500V
7.5
15
15
30
45
75
150
225
327
335
650
Table 12-2 Short Circuit Ratings
Field Wiring Temperature Rating

Use 75C copper conductors only.
Operating Ambient Temperature

For the operating ambient temperature range, refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications.
Field Wiring Terminal Markings

For the correct field wiring connections that are to be made to each terminal, refer to Chapter 3:
Installing the Converter - Electrical Installation.
Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals

For the correct tightening torque value, refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications.
Field Grounding Terminals

The field grounding terminal(s) is identified with the International Grounding Symbol
(IEC) Publication 417, Symbol 5019.
Field Terminal Kits

UL compliant terminal kits are available for the connection of power wiring for the following
Converter ratings. These terminals must be applied with the correct tooling as described in the
Installation Instructions provided with each terminal kit.
Kit Part Number
Controller
Rating (A)
Number
of Lugs
Purpose
Lugs per
Terminal
Wire Size per Lug
Cable
Ratin
g
LA386000U380
380
3
2
AC
DC
1
1
2 x 4/0 AWG
2 x 250kcmil
230A
255A
LA386000U500
500
3
2
AC
DC
1
1
2 x 300kcmil
2 x 350kcmil
285A
310A
LA386000U725
725
3
4
AC
DC
1
2
2 x 600kcmil
2 x 4/0 AWG
420A
230A
LA386000U830
830
6
4
AC
DC
2
2
2 x 250kcmil
2 x 300kcmil
255A
285A
Note: 1580A controller requires two LA386000U830 kits.
Fuse Replacement Information

For fuse replacement information, refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications.
12-8
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frames 1, 2, 4 & 5)

Main power wiring. Local wiring regulations always take precedence.
Input
Current
(A)
Number of
Conductors
Input
North American
Wire Size
15
13.5
35
28.35
40
Drive
Size
(A)
Output
North American
Wire Size
Output
Current
(A)
Number of
Conductors
12 AWG
15
12 AWG
8 AWG
35
8 AWG
36
8 AWG
40
8 AWG
70
63
1 AWG
70
3 AWG
110
99
1 AWG
110
1/0 AWG
165
148.5
3/0 AWG
165
4/0 AWG
380
342
700 Kcmil
380
750 Kcmil
500
450
1250 Kcmil
500
1500 Kcmil
725
653
3 inch bus bar
725
3 inch bus bar
830
747
3 inch bus bar
830
4 inch bus bar
1580
1427
4 inch bus bar
1580
4 inch bus bar
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 4 & 5
Recommended Wire Sizes (Frame H)

Local wiring regulations always take precedence.
Input
Description
Drive
Size
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Output
Number of
Conductors
North American
Wire Size
Output
Current
(A)
Number of
Conductors
North American
Wire Size
1200
1100
500
1200
500
Main
1700
1550
400
1700
500
Power
2200
2000
600
2200
700
2700
2450
900
2700
700
60
AWG 8
60
AWG 8
Field
60
12-9
European Directives and the CE Mark

The following information is supplied to provide a basic understanding of the EMC and low
voltage directives CE marking requirements. The following literature is recommended for
further information:
Recommendations for Application of Power Drive Systems (PDS), European Council

Directives - CE Marking and Technical Standardisation - (CEMEP)
Available from your local trade association or SSD Drives office
EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems - (SSD Drives)

Available from your local SSD Drives office, part number HA388879
Short Form Overview of European Directives for Variable Speed Drives and Applications (SSD Drives)
Available from your local SSD Drives office, part number HA389770
The European machines and drives manufacturers via their national trade associations have
formed the European Committee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power
Electronics (CEMEP). SSD Drives and other major European drives manufacturers are working
to the CEMEP recommendations on CE marking. The CE mark shows that a product complies
with the relevant EU directives, in our case the Low Voltage Directive and, in some instances,
the EMC Directive.
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive

When installed in accordance with this manual, the 590+ Series Converter is CE marked by SSD
Drives Ltd in accordance with the low voltage directive (S.I. No. 3260 implements this LVD
directive into UK law). An EC Declaration of Conformity (low voltage directive) is included at
the end of this chapter.
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible?

Note: The specified EMC emission and immunity performance of this unit can only be achieved
when the unit is installed to the EMC Installation Instructions given in this manual.
According to S.I. No. 2373 which implements the EMC directive into UK law, the requirement
for CE marking this unit falls into two categories:
1.
Where the supplied unit has an intrinsic/direct function to the end user, then the unit is
classed as relevant apparatus.
2.
Where the supplied unit is incorporated into a higher system/apparatus or machine which
includes (at least) the motor, cable and a driven load but is unable to function without this
unit, then the unit is classed as a component.
Relevant Apparatus - SSD Drives Responsibility

Occasionally, say in a case where an existing fixed speed motor - such as a fan or pump - is
converted to variable speed with an add-on drive module (relevant apparatus), it becomes the
responsibility of SSD Drives to apply the CE mark and issue an EC Declaration of Conformity
for the EMC Directive. This declaration and the CE mark is included at the end of this chapter.
Component - Customer Responsibility
The majority of SSD Drives products are classed as components and therefore we cannot apply
the CE mark or produce an EC Declaration of Conformity in respect of EMC. It is therefore the
manufacturer/supplier/installer of the higher system/apparatus or machine who must conform to
the EMC directive and CE mark.
12-10

Legal Requirements for CE Marking
For compliance in Europe with EN61800-3 Table 11:
The CE marking of drives whose armature current >100A is applicable without

filtering.
The CE marking of drives whose armature current <100A is only applicable with
filtering.
IMPORTANT: Before installation, clearly understand who is responsible for conformance with the EMC
directive. Misappropriation of the CE mark is a criminal offence.
It is important that you have now defined who is responsible for conforming to the EMC
directive, either:
SSD Drives Responsibility
You intend to use the unit as relevant apparatus.
When the specified EMC filter is correctly fitted to the unit following EMC installation
instructions, it complies with the relevant standards indicated in the following tables. The fitting
of the filter is mandatory for the CE marking of this unit to apply.
The relevant declarations are to be found at the end of this chapter. The CE mark is displayed on
the EC Declaration of Conformity (EMC Directive) provided at the end of this chapter.
Customer Responsibility
You intend to use the unit as a component, therefore you have a choice:
1.
To fit the specified filter following EMC installation instructions, which may help you gain
EMC compliance for the final machine/system.
2.
Not to fit the specified filter, but use a combination of global or local filtering and screening
methods, natural migration through distance, or the use of distributed parasitic elements of
the existing installation.
Note: When two or more EMC compliant components are combined to form the final
machine/system, the resulting machine/system may no longer be compliant, (emissions
tend to be additive, immunity is determined by the least immune component). Understand
the EMC environment and applicable standards to keep additional compliance costs to a
minimum.
Applying for CE Marking for EMC

We have supplied a Manufacturers EMC Declaration at the end of this chapter that you can use
as a basis for your own justification of overall compliance with the EMC directive. There are
three methods of demonstrating conformity:
1.
Self-certification to a relevant standard
2.
Third party testing to a relevant standard
3.
Writing a technical construction file stating the technical rationale as to why your final
machine/system is compliant. An EMC competent body must then assess this and issue a
technical report or certificate to demonstrate compliance.
Refer to Article 10(2) of Directive 89/336/EEC.
With EMC compliance, an EC Declaration of Conformity and the CE mark will be issued for
your final machine/system.
IMPORTANT: Professional end users with EMC expertise who are using drive modules and cubicle
systems defined as components who supply, place on the market or install the relevant
apparatus must take responsibility for demonstrating EMC conformance and applying
the CE mark and issuing an EC Declaration of Conformity.
12-11
Which Standards Apply?

The standard applied to this unit covers both:
1.
Emission - these requirements limit the interference caused by operating (this) drive
module.
2.
Immunity - these requirements limit the effect of interference (on this unit) from other
electrical and electronic apparatus.
The following tables indicate the section of standard with which the unit complies, dependent
upon how the unit is installed and used.
Unit used as
Relevant Apparatus
Assuming installation to EMC instructions in this manual
Filter refers to a specified external filter.
Installation
Standard
Radiated RF Emission
2nd
Environment
Conducted RF
Emission
Immunity
filter
no filter
(EMC
compliance
may be
applied for)
enclosure enclosure enclosure enclosure
EN61800-3 (1997)
Table 9
EN61800-3 (1997)
Table 11
EN61800-3 (1997)
2nd Environment
no filter
(EMC
compliance)
EN61800-3 (1997)
Table 12
Table 12-1 Application of Standard
filter
Unit used as a
Component
12-12

STAR T
IS SSD MODULE
RELEVANT APPARATUS
WIT H INT RINSIC FUNCTION
TO END USER (CEMEP
VALIDIT Y FIELD 1)
NO
CEMEP VALIDIT Y FIELDS

2, 3 AND 4
YES
OPTIONAL SSD FILTERS

AVAILABLE T O ASSIST USERS
IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE
EMC DIRECT IVE
WILL T HE SSD PRODUCT
BE INST ALLED
ACCORDING T O T HE
INST ALLAT ION
GUIDELINES
NO
EMC CHARACT ERIST ICS
STAT ED IN MANUAL
YES
FIT THE SPECIFIED
SSD EMC FILT ER
T HE SSD EC DECLARAT ION OF

CONFORMIT Y FOR EMC IS VALID
FOR T HE SPECIFIED ED MODULE
EMC 'CE' MARK CAN BE APPLIED TO SSD

MODULE TO GENERIC EMC STANDARDS:
EMC INSTALLAT ION GUIDELINES

STAT ED IN MANUAL
T HE ED MANUFACTURERS DECLARAT ION

FOR EMC IS VALID FOR T HE SPECIFIED
MODULE WHEN INSTALLED CORRECTLY
A GLOBAL EMC SOLUTION

MAY BE ADVANTAGEOUS
NO EMC 'CE' MARK APPLIED TO SSD MODULE.

EN61800-3 (1997)
SSD = SSD DRIVES LIMIT ED
CEMEP : Refer to Chapter 12, "European Directives and the CE Mark"
RELEVANT APPARATUS
MANUFACT URER/SUPPLIER/INST ALLERS
RESPONSIBILITY T O CONFORM WIT H EMC DIRECTIVE.
SSD EMC CHARACTERIST ICS AND MANUFACT URERS
DECLARATION MAY BE USED AS A BASIS
IN T HE OVERALL PRODUCT JUST IFICAT ION
Figure 12-3 SSD Drives' EMC `CE' Mark Validity Chart
12-13
Certificates
590+
EC DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
Date CE marked first applied: 01/04/01
Issued for
compliance
with the EMC
Directive when
the unit is used
as relevant
apparatus.
EMC Directive
Low Voltage Directive
In accordance with the EEC Directive

In accordance with the EEC Directive
73/23/EEC and amended by 93/68/EEC,
89/336/EEC and amended by 92/31/EEC and
Article 13 and Annex III,
93/68/EEC, Article 10 and Annex 1,
(LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE)
(EMC DIRECTIVE)
We SSD Drives Limited, address as below,
We SSD Drives Limited, address as below,
declare under our sole responsibility that the
above Electronic Products when installed and
above Electronic Products when installed and
operated with reference to the instructions in
the Product Manual (provided with each piece
the Product Manual
of equipment) is in accordance with the relevant (provided with each piece of equipment), is in
clauses from the following standard:accordance with the following standard :BSEN61800-3 (1997)
The drive is CE
marked in
accordance with
the low voltage
directive for
electrical
equipment and
appliances in the
voltage range
when installed
correctly.
EN50178 (1998)
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATIONS
EMC Declaration
Machinery Directive
This is
We
SSD
Drives
Limited,
address
as
below,
provided to aid
The above Electronic Products are components
your
to be incorporated into machinery and may not
be operated alone.
justification for above Electronic Products when installed and
The complete machinery or installation using
EMC
the Product Manual (provided with each piece
this equipment may only be put into service
compliance
of equipment) is in accordance with the
when the safety considerations of the Directive
when the unit
relevant clauses from the following standard:89/392/EEC are fully adhered to.
is used as a
BSEN61800-3
(1997)
Particular reference should be made to
component.
Since the
potential hazards
are mainly
electrical rather
than mechanical,
the drive does not
fall under the
machinery
directive.
EN60204-1 (Safety of Machinery - Electrical However, we do
Equipment of Machines).
supply a
manufacturer's
All instructions, warnings and safety
information of the Product Manual must be declaration for
adhered to.
when the drive is

used (as a
component) in
machinery.
Dr Martin Payn (Conformance Officer)
* For information only
# Compliant with these immunity standards without specified EMC filters.
SSD DRIVES LIMITED

NEW COURTWICK LANE, LITTLEHAMPTON, WEST SUSSEX BN17 7RZ
TELEPHONE: 01903 737000 FAX: 01903 737100
Registered Number: 1159876 England. Registered Office: New Courtwick Lane, Littlehampton, West Sussex BN17 7RZ
File Name: G:\Manuals - Changes\up-to-date - 590+ Integrator Chassis Manual Issue 2\12.doc
ISS:
DATE
06/03/01
DRN: MP
CHKD:
1999 EUROTHERM DRIVES LIMITED
DRAWING NUMBER: HK466800.919

TITLE:
Declarations of Conformity
SHT 1
OF
1 SHTS
12-14
Standard and Optional Equipment
13-1
STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

3
1
Standard Equipment
Power Board Circuit Descriptions
AH470280U001, U002, U003, U004 (Frame 1)
(2 Quad and 4 Quad)
Power supplies for the controller are generated from the single phase auxiliary supply via a
Switched Mode Power Supply. The incoming supply is directly rectified to provide a high
voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor switches this rail on to the primary of a high
frequency transformer, the output of which is rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power
supply rails. The +15V dc rail is monitored via a reference element and a control signal returned
via an opto-isolator to the control element of the high voltage switching transistor. The other dc
rails (-15V & +24V dc) are generated via separate secondary windings which are rectified and
smoothed, with a separate SMPS element providing a regulated +5V dc rail. The SMPS operates
over a0n input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac 10%, 50/60Hz.
TB4
CONN 4
(to control board)
CONN 26
(to heatsink thermistor)
heatsink
TP6
T11
T8
T9
TH 3
("regen" - 4Q)
T12
TP7
TP1
TP3
TP4
TP9
TP8
TP2
TP5
T15
T7
T10
T2
T5
TH 2
("motor" - 2Q)
T6
T3
T4
T1
CONN 24
(to fan 24V dc)
CONN 1
(to terminal board)
TB5
TB8
TB9
CT
CT
LK8
TB7
TB6
LK9
T20
TH1
LK10
RLY1
CONN 2
T21
TB3
Figure 13-1 590+ Power Board 4 Quad (AH470280U001, U002, U003, U004)
13-2

CONN 1
(to power board)
field fuses
FS6
FS5
aux. supply fuse

FS7
TB2
TB1
TB3
Figure 13-2 Terminal Board - AH466407 (Frame 1)

TERMINAL BOARD
POWER BOARD
reverse bridge
L1
armature
voltage
feedback
L2
L3
forward bridge
+
-
AA+
armature
current
feedback
heatsink fan
heatsink
thermistor
heatsink
overtemperature
+24V supply
3 phase
present
FS5
3 phase present
conn 1
coding &
phase
rotation
FS6
coding
phase rotation
field bridge
FF+
DC CT
FS7
control
MC
field current feedback
L
N
3
main contactor pilot
SMPS
+24V
+15V
+5V
0V
-15V
-24V
TH1
TH2
motor
thermistor
isolated motor overtemperature
Figure 13-3 Connection Diagram for Power Board and Terminal Board - AH470280 (Frame 1)
13-3
AH470330 (Frame 2)
(2 Quad and 4 Quad)
over a0n input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac 10%, 50/60Hz.
CONN 29
(to control board)
test points
T4
T1
T6
T3
T2
T5
CONN 30 (heatsink thermistor))
Power Board
CONN 47 (fan)
CONN 46 (fan)
T7
T10
T9
T12
T11
T8
TB 13
SMPS
transformer
CONN 27
CONN 16
FS6
3 phase and
main contactor
coil
FS3
transformer
option
field fuses
aux.
fuse
FS5
CONN 17
CONN 44
TB5
TB6
Terminal Board
Figure 13-4 590+ Power Board 4 Quad (AH470330)
13-4
POWER TERMINALS
suppression
components
AA+
reverse bridge
+
L1
L2
L3
+
forward bridge
0V
armature
voltage
feedback
armature current
feedback
MC coil
TERMINAL BOARD
A1
MC Aux
coding &
phase
rotation
A2
coding
phase rotation
F+
Field
Field
Supply
FFS5
FL1
3 phase
present
FL2
FS6
internal/external
field supply
selector
3 phase present
field bridge
POWER BOARD
DC CT
field
current f/b
heatsink
overtemperature
heatsink
thermistor
conn 1
Vent
Fan
Motor
motor
fan
circuit
breaker
not
fitted
M1/U
M2/V
heatsink
fans
M3/W
+24V supply
shorting
connector
Motor
Thermistor
TH1
motor
thermistor
TH2
isolated motor overtemperature
MC coil
FS7
control
MC
L
N
3
MC coil
main
contactor
pilot
SMPS
+24V
+15V
+5V
0V
-15V
-24V
transfomer option
Figure 13-5 AH470330 (Frame 2)
13-5
AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005 (Frame 3)

(590+ - 4 Quad, 591+ - 2 Quad; Low and High Volt)
switched mode power supply. The incoming supply is directly rectified to provide a high
via an opto-isolator to the control element of the high voltage switching transistor. The 15V dc
rails are generated via separate secondary windings which are rectified, smoothed and stabilised
by linear regulators. The SMPS operates over an input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac 10%,
50/60Hz. The auxiliary supply fuse FS1 provides protection of the high voltage elements.
D1
D3
D2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
F26
F8
F21
F18
F19
F22 F27
F28
FS1
F25
F16
(F-)
(F+)
K
F24
F23
PTR
PTY
0V
+24V
RFI
GND
(F13)
(F17)
(F14)
PLJ
TRANSFORMER
PLK
PLL
PLM
(TH1)
(TH4)
(TH3)
(TH6)
(TH5)
(TH2)
PLN
FS2
FS4
FS3
F9
F15
EX A+
EX AA+
A+
AA-
L1
L2
L3
Figure 13-6 591 Power Board 2 Quad (AH385851U003, U004)
13-6

Heatsink Cooling Fan Connections
When fitted, these fans are connected on the power board to FAN LIVE (F27), FAN
NEUTRAL (F24) and FAN COMMON (F23) as described below:
A single fan must be matched to the auxiliary supply and connected to F27 and F24.
Two fans using a 110/115V auxiliary supply must be connected in parallel to F27 and F24.
Two fans using a 220/240V auxiliary supply must be connected in series to F27 and F24
using F23 as the centre point.
Contactor Supply
The controller requires an ac or dc power
contactor in series with the main power
path to ensure correct power-up
sequencing. This contactor is directly
initiated by the Microcontroller via an
isolating relay which drives the contactor
coil with the same voltage as that of the
auxiliary supply.
This is achieved by the brown wire
connection from COIL LIVE (F28) to
RELAY (F25) and the blue wire
connection from COIL NEUTRAL (F21)
to CONTACTOR RETURN (F26).
However, if an alternative supply for the
contactor coil is required move the brown
wire from F25 to F22 , and move the blue
wire from F21 to F25. The external coil
supply can now be switched using a voltfree contact between terminals D5 and D6.
D5
D6
D7
D8
F26
F21
FS1
F22 F27
F28
F25
F23
D5
D6
F24
D7
D8
F26
F21
FS1
F22 F27
F28
F25
F23
F24
A+
FS2
L2
FS3
Figure 13-7 2 Quad Power Circuit - using AH385851U003, U004 (Frame 3)
FS1
COIL
NEUTRAL
F21
FS4
F28
A- EXA+ EXA-
-100
FAN
COMMON
F23
FAN
NEUTRAL
RLY
POWER
SUPPLY
+24
+15
+5
0
-15
-24
FE2 (F18)
FE1 (F19)
FL2 (F9)
FL1 (F15)
D8
D7
D6
D5
VIOLET
(F15)
FL1
(F8)
FL2
F28
F27
COIL
LIVE
FAN
LIVE
F22
F24
FAN
COMMON
F23
FAN
NEUTRAL
H/S
thermostat
TH6
TH3
G1
GY
POWER
SUPPLY
KR
YELLOW
KY
ORANGE
G2
+
current feedback
-
GR
RED
PLN
RLY
2
PLL
TH4
TH1
ALTERNATIVE WIRING FOR VOLT-FREE CONTACTOR WIRING
FS1
5 6
1
ACCT FIELD
F25
RELAY
COIL NEUTRAL
F21
YELLOW
RED
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
BROWN
1
ACCT PRESENT
VA FEEDBACK
3 PHASE PRESENT
HIGH VOLTAGE CODING
INTERFACE
PHASE ROTATION
A+
F24
FAN
LIVE
F27 F22
COIL
LIVE
F25
RELAY
A-
motor voltage feedback
STANDARD WIRING FOR SWITCHED SUPPLY TO CONTACTOR COIL
D8
D7
D6
L3
SUPPRESSION
CIRCUITS
L1
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
D5
D2
D1
A-
L2
L3
A+
L1
POWER BOARD
+24
+15
+5
0
-15
-24
ORANGE
(F7)
ORANGE
(F6)
GREY
F+
F-
TH2
TH5
D4
D3
13-7
13-8

D1
D3
D2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
F26
F8
F21
F18
F19
F22 F27
F28
FS1
F25
F16
(F-)
(F+)
K
F24
F23
PTR
PTY
0V
+24V
RFI
GND
(F13)
(F17)
(F14)
PLJ
TRANSFORMER
PLK
(TH1)
(TH10)
(TH3)
(TH12)
(TH7)
(TH4)
(TH9)
(TH6)
(TH5)
(TH8)
PLL
PLM
(TH11)
(TH2)
PLN
FS2
FS4
FS3
F9
F15
EX A+
EX AA+
A+
AA-
L1
L2
L3
Figure 13-8 590 Power Board 4 Quad (AH385851U002, U005) - (Frame 3)

A+
FS2
L2
FS3
Figure 13-9 4 Quad Power Circuit - using AH385851U002, U005 (Frame 3)
FS1
COIL
NEUTRAL
F21
FS4
F28
AEXA+ EXA-
-100
RLY
FAN
COMMON
F23
POWER
SUPPLY
+24
+15
+5
0
-15
-24
FE2 (F18)
FE1 (F19)
FL2 (F9)
FL1 (F15)
VIOLET
(F15)
FL1
D8
D7
D6
(F8)
FL2
F28
F27
COIL
LIVE
FAN
LIVE
F22
F24
FAN
COMMON
F23
H/S
thermostat
TH7
TH10
TH6
TH3
G1
GY
POWER
SUPPLY
KR
YELLOW
KY
(F7)
ORANGE
(F6)
GREY
TH9
TH12
ORANGE
+24
+15
+5
0
-15
-24
ORANGE
G2
+
current feedback
-
GR
RED
PLN
FAN
NEUTRAL
RLY
2
PLL
TH4
TH1
ALTERNATIVE WIRING FOR VOLT-FREE CONTACTOR WIRING
FS1
5 6
1
ACCT FIELD
F25
RELAY
COIL NEUTRAL
F21
YELLOW
RED
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
D5
BROWN
1
ACCT PRESENT
VA FEEDBACK
3 PHASE PRESENT
HIGH VOLTAGE CODING
INTERFACE
PHASE ROTATION
A+
F24 FAN
NEUTRAL
FAN
LIVE
F27 F22
COIL
LIVE
F25
RELAY
A-
motor voltage feedback
STANDARD WIRING FOR SWITCHED SUPPLY TO CONTACTOR COIL
D8
D7
D6
L3
SUPPRESSION
CIRCUITS
L1
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
D5
D2
D1
A-
L2
L3
A+
L1
POWER BOARD
F+
F-
TH2
TH5
D4
D3
TH11
TH8
13-9
13-10

AH466701U001, U002, U003 (Frames 4 & 5)
590+ 4 Quad and 591+ 2 Quad; Low, Medium and High Volt
over an input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac 10%, 50/60Hz.
Figure 13-10 590+/591+ Power Board, 4 Quad and 2 Quad (AH466701)
SNUBBER CIRCUITS
FS2
FS1
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
MC
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
MOTOR
FIELD
EXTERNAL
FIELD
SUPPLY
AH466704U001/2
A-
L3
L2
L1
A+
Figure 13-11 4 Quad Power Circuit Frame 4 & 5 Units using AH466701
TH2
TH1
F-
F+
FL2
FL1
F4
F1
FS4
FS3
red
FAN
yellow
CONN2
F6
F3
F5
F2
A- gray
CONN4
A+ red
0V
CONN8
DCCT
FAN
EXTERNAL
FIELD
INTERNAL
FIELD
CONN9
POWERED
CONN3
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK
SMPS
TH9
TH12
TH2
TH5
20 WAY
FIRING
CABLE
CONN17
OVERTEMPERATURE
MOTOR
OVERTEMPERATURE
POWER
SUPPLIES
50 WAY
CONTROL
CABLE
TH11
TH8
MAIN CONTACTOR
PILOT RELAY
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK
ARMATURE
FIELD
THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT
CONN7
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
VOLT-FREE
TH6
TH3
CODING & 3 PHASE PRESENT
TH7
TH10
AH466701U001/2/3
F13
EX A-
FIELD CURRENT
FEEDBACK
resistors
F14
EX A+
CURRENT
FEEDBACK
ACCT.
PRESENT
CONN10
TH4
TH1
G1 K1
A-
A-
TH7
K G
TH4
G K
TH7 TH4
L1
L1
G K
K G
K G
TH8
TH6
G K
TRIGGER BOARD
TH9
K G
G K
TH5
TH11
K G
TH2
G K
TH11 TH2
L3
L3
TH8 TH5
AH466703U002
TH9 TH6
L2
L2
TH12 TH3
AH466703U002
TH3
TH12
TRIGGER BOARD
USED ON THE DUAL-STACK CONFIGURATION
3 PHASE PRESENT
CODING
G K
K G
TH10 TH1
TH1
TH10
A+
A+
13-11
SNUBBER CIRCUITS
FS2
FS1
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
MC
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
MOTOR
FIELD
EXTERNAL
FIELD
SUPPLY
AH466704U001/2
A-
L3
L2
L1
A+
TH2
TH1
F-
F+
FL2
FL1
F4
F1
FS4
FS3
red
FAN
yellow
CONN2
F6
F3
F5
A- gray
F2
CONN4
A+ red
0V
CONN8
DCCT
FAN
EXTERNAL
FIELD
INTERNAL
FIELD
CONN9
POWERED
CONN3
10 WAY
FIRING
CABLE
CONN17
OVERTEMPERATURE
MOTOR
OVERTEMPERATURE
POWER
SUPPLIES
50 WAY
CONTROL
CABLE
MAIN CONTACTOR
PILOT RELAY
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK
ARMATURE
FIELD
THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT
CONN7
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
VOLT-FREE
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK
SMPS
TH2
TH5
CODING & 3 PHASE PRESENT
TH6
TH3
AH466701U001/2/3
F13
EX A-
FIELD CURRENT
FEEDBACK
resistors
F14
EX A+
CURRENT
FEEDBACK
ACCT.
PRESENT
CONN10
TH4
TH1
G1 K1
A-
A+
TH1
K G
TH4
G K
TH1 TH4
L1
K G
TH6
G K
TRIGGER BOARD
TH3
L3
K G
TH5
TH2
G K
TH5 TH2
AH466703U002
TH3 TH6
L2
USED ON THE DUAL-STACK CONFIGURATION
3 PHASE PRESENT
CODING
13-12
Figure 13-12 2 Quad Power Circuit Frame 4 & 5 Units using AH466701
13-13
AH466001U001, U101 (Frame H)

(590+ - 4 Quad and 591+ - 2 Quad; Low and High Volt)
supply rails. The 5V dc rail is monitored via a reference element and a control signal returned
smoothed, with individual linear regulators providing 15V dc rail. The SMPS operates over an
input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac 10%, 50/60Hz.
Swing-frame
Power Board
Field Board
(to 4Q trigger boards)

PL1
PL12
SW1
to control
board
ACCTS
PL13
calibration
switches
SMPS
transformer
TB9
PL2
Power Board
PL4
TB6
to control
board
fuse
microswitch
auxiliary supply
and main contactor
PL3
PL7
PL11
(to field board)
PL6
TB8
PL5
(motor voltage feedback)
coding supply,
phase rotation
and 3-phase present
armature
voltage
feedback
EXT.A-
A-
L3
L2
L1
A+
L3
L2
L1
A+
Power Board
CODING, PHASE ROTATION &

3 PHASE PRESENT
A-
LINE
SUPP.
FS7 FS8 FS9
FS3
FS2
FS1
FIELD
EXT.A+
TRIGGER
0V
0VL
ACCT. PRESENT
TH6
TH3
ribbon
FIELD ASSEMBLY
ACCT.
30 WAY RIBBON TO
TRIGGER BOARDS
FL2
FIELD
AC SUPPLY
FL1
TH4
TH1
G1 K1
TH2
TH5
F-
F+
L1
TH1
TH4
TH1 & 4
TRIGGER
SUPRESSION
L2
TH3
TH6
TH3 & 6
TRIGGER
SUPRESSION
L3
TH5
TH2
TH5 & 2
TRIGGER
SUPRESSION
THA
LOWER
HEAT
SINK
A+
K
THB
UPPER
HEAT
SINK
AA
3 WAY
CONNECTOR
2 WAY
CONNECTOR
13-14
Figure 13-13 2 Quad Power Circuit Frame H Units using AH466001U001
EXT.A-
A-
L3
L2
L1
A+
L3
L2
L1
A+
Figure 13-14 4 Quad Power Circuit Frame H Units using AH466001U001
Power Board
CODING, PHASE ROTATION &

3 PHASE PRESENT
A-
LINE
SUPP.
FS7 FS8 FS9
FS3
FS2
FS1
FIELD
EXT.A+
TRIGGER
LOWER
TRIGGER
UPPER
0V
0VL
TH6
FS6
FS3
TH3
ACCT. PRESENT
TH7
TH10
26 WAY RIBBON TO
TRIGGER BOARDS
ribbon
FIELD ASSEMBLY
ACCT.
26 WAY RIBBON TO
TRIGGER BOARDS
FL2
FIELD
AC SUPPLY
FL1
TH4
FS4
FS1
TH1
G1 K1
TH9
TH12
TH2
FS2
FS5
TH5
F-
F+
TH11
TH8
TH12
TH3
TH1
TH10
L2
TH9
TH6
BLANK
TRIGGER
L1
TH7
TH4
BLANK
TRIGGER
TH3 & 12
TH6 & 9
TH1 & 10
TRIGGER
TH4 & 7
BLANK
TRIGGER
BLANK
TH8
TH5
L3
TH11
TH2
BLANK
TRIGGER
TH5 & 8
TH2 & 11
TRIGGER
BLANK
AC
AC
THA
THB
THB
THA
2 WAY
CONNECTOR
3 WAY
CONNECTOR
3 WAY
CONNECTOR
2 WAY
CONNECTOR
(Slave)
(Master)
(Slave)
(Master)
13-15
13-16
Optional Equipment
Contact your local SSD Drives office to order optional equipment.
Item
Part Number
EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems

An SSD Drives application manual detailing EMC requirements
HA388879
590 Digital Section Control

An SSD Drives application manual detailing the use of the block
diagram to implement open and closed loop control of driven web
section rolls
HA388664
590 Digital Closed Loop Centre Winder

An SSD Drives application manual detailing the use of the block
diagram to implement closed loop centre winders
HA388202
ConfigEd Lite
SSD Drives Windows-based block programming software
Order by name
External AC Supply (RFI) Filter

For Converters without internal filters, on cable runs in excess of 25
metres
Refer to Chapter 11:

External AC Supply
(RFI) Filters for Part
Numbers
Microtach Option Board

Two board types for connecting to a plastic or glass fiber Microtach
encoder
Glass
Plastic
Encoder Option Board
A board to interface to a wire-ended encoder
Tacho Calibration Option Board
A switchable calibration board for interfacing to AC/DC analog
tachogenerators
AH386025U001
AH386025U002
AH387775U001
(universal)
AH385870U001
Comms Option Board (P1) Board

Two board types for supporting EI BYSYNCH or PROFIBUS
communication protocols for connection to other equipment.
EI BYSYNCH (RS422, RS485)
6055/EI00/00
PROFIBUS
6055/PROF/00
LINK
6055/LINK/00
Table 13-1 Optional Equipment
Speed Feedback Option Boards

Each option board below is shown with the correct selection for the
SPEED FBK SELECT parameter.
The selections are ARM VOLTS FBK, ANALOG TACH,
ENCODER and ENCODER/ANALOG.
MMI Menu Map

1
SETUP PARAMETERS
SPEED LOOP
SPEED FBK SELECT
(ARM VOLTS FBK is default and requires no option board).

Microtach Option Board
13-17
ENCODER
There are two kinds of SSD Drives Microtach, each requiring a

different board:
5701/5901 MICROTACH
5701 Microtach (plastic fibre)
OPTION BOARD
5901 Microtach (glass fibre)
If fitted, refer to the Microtach Technical
Manual for further information.
COMMS
Option
Mounting
5701/5901 Microtach
Wire-Ended Encoder Option Board

The board accepts connection from a wire-ended encoder.
If fitted, refer to the Encoder Technical
Manual for further information.
ENCODER
ENCODER
OPTION BOARD
COMMS
Option
Mounting
Wire-ended Encoder
Tacho Calibration Option Board
ANALOG TACH
The board accepts connection from an analog tachogenerator.

If fitted, refer to Chapter 4: "Operating the
Converter" - Speed Feedback Option Boards.
TACHO CALIBRATION
OPTION BOARD
COMMS
Option
Mounting
Analog Tachogenerator
13-18

Combined Tacho and Encoder Feedback
If an analog tachogenerator and digital
encoder are to be used, the Encoder Option
Board receives the digital signal, the analog
signal is routed to Terminals B2 (Tacho) and
B1 (0V). Please refer to SSD Drives
Engineering Department for assistance with
this feature.
ENCODER/ANALOG
ENCODER
OPTION BOARD
COMMS
Option
Mounting
ANALOG
Digital Encoder/Analog Tachogenerator

DIGITAL
Communications Technology
Options
MMI Menu Map
COMMS Option Technology Box
1 SERIAL LINKS
Various protocols are supported, each requiring a different

Technology Box. The type of Technology Box fitted is selected in
the TYPE parameter:
2 TEC OPTION
TEC OPTION TYPE
RS485 (EI BINARY, EI ASCII or MODBUS RTU)

PROFIBUS DP
LINK
DEVICENET
CANOPEN
LONWORKS
The option allows the 590+ Converter to be controlled
as part of a system. The system can also comprise
other SSD Drives products such as the 605 and 584SV
Inverters, or any other equipment using the same
protocol.
Speed
Feedback
Option
Mounting
COMMS
Option
Main Serial Port (P1)
Serial Communications
14-1
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
4
1
Communications Technology Option

The plug-in COMMS Option Technology Box provides a serial data port, allowing Converters
to be linked together to form a network. Using a PLC/SCADA or other intelligent device, this
network can be continuously controlled to provide supervision and monitoring for each
Converter in the system. Refer to the Communications Interface Technical Manual for further
details.
Config Ed Lite
This is SSD Drives Windows-based block programming software. It has a graphical userinterface and drawing tools to allow you to create block programming diagrams quickly and
easily. Contact your local SSD Drives sales office.
System Port (P3)

This port has several uses:
1. ConfigEd Lite: Parameters can be monitored and updated by ConfigEd Lite (or other
suitable PC programming tool)
2. UDP Support: It can be used to upload information from a PC
3. 5703 Support: An SSD Drives' 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit can be connected
The port is an un-isolated RS232, 9600 Baud (default), supporting the standard EI BISYNCH
ASCII communications protocol, contact SSD Drives for further information.
A standard P3 lead is used to connect to the Converter.
P3 Port Pin
1
2
3
4
Lead
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Signal
0V
24V
TX
RX
1234
6-Way Lead to DB9/DB25 Connector

Note: There is 24V present on pin 2 of the P3 port. This may damage your PC or the Converter.
P3 Port Pin
Lead
Female DB9 Pin
Female DB25 Pin
Black
Red
not connected
not connected
Green
Yellow
UDP Support
The P3 port can be used to transfer an ASCII representation of the converter's settings between
the Converter and a host computer.
The transfer uses a simple ASCII file structure and XON / XOFF protocol. This is provided by
most communications packages. Host computers tested include IBM PCs XT/AT, running both
Windows and MSDOS, Psion Organiser 3 and many more.
Transferring data from a host computer to the Converter is defined as Uploading.
Refer to Chapter 6: Programming Your Application - SYSTEM PORT P3 for parameter
details.
14-2
UDP Menu Structure
......SYSTEM PORT (P3)
........P3 SETUP
..........MODE //
..........5703 SUPPORT //
..........P3 BAUD RATE //
........UDP XFER (RX)//
Disable/5703 Setup Mode

Submenu for 5703 parameters
Baud rate for the P3 Port
Transfer Parameters From Host
SYSTEM PORT (P3) Setup

Set MODE parameter (Tag No. 130) to DISABLE (default) using the
MMI
Set P3 BAUD RATE parameter (Tag No. 198) to 9600 (default) using
the MMI
1 Stop bit (fixed)
NO Parity (fixed)
MMI Menu Map

1
SERIAL LINKS
SYSTEM PORT P3
P3 SETUP
MODE
8 bits (fixed)
P3 BAUD RATE
XON/XOFF Handshaking (fixed)
UDP Transfer Procedure

UDP UpLoad (UDP XFER (RX))
This is the transfer of the parameters from the host computer to the Converter. This information
is written directly to EEprom, so all the drive's current settings will
MMI Menu Map
be overwritten.
Connect the Converter to the host using the appropriate lead.
Using a standard communications package prepare the host to
transfer an ASCII file. Remember to set up the host's serial port
first.
SERIAL LINKS
SYSTEM PORT P3
DUMP MMI (TX)
UDP XFER (RX)
UDP XFER (TX)
Set the P3 MODE parameter to DISABLE.

Start uploading on the Converter by selecting UDP XFER (RX) on the MMI and pressing
the UP () key, as instructed.
When the Converter says RECEIVING, begin the file transmission.
The file ends in a :00000001FF which the Converter uses to close the file.
As indicated, reset the Converter by pressing the E key.
14-3
5703 Support
This unit provides the facility to run a line of converters in speed-lock without the use of a 5720
Quadraloc controller; for accurate speed-holding, encoder feedback is required. Ratioed speedlocking is supported, although the unit is not intended to replace the Quadraloc in applications
requiring high accuracy.
A 16-bit speed signal is passed between drives through a fibre-optic link and the P3 port on each
Converter (a port otherwise used only off-line for the upload and download of EEPROM data).
The port operates RS232 compatible signal levels, the 5703/1 converts these signal levels to
fibre optic signals for transmission and from fibre optics to RS232 for reception.
Hardware Description
The 5703/1 is housed in a DIN rail mounted box and is provided with a cable to connect into the
P3 port. The cable is 400mm long to limit transmission errors, the primary unit -to-unit
interconnection is intended to be achieved by a fibre optic cable.
The 5703 unit itself is simply an electric signal-to-light converter and does not alter the signal in
any way, this is achieved within the software data of the Converter.
It is fitted with one fibre optic receiver and two fibre optic transmitters, the fibre optic receiver
has a fixed function to receive data from the preceding unit while the transmitter sends data to
the following unit. The additional transmitter can be used either to re-transmit the incoming
signal or provide a second transmission of the output signal, this gives the unit wide
functionality. When the link is in the normal right hand position, assuming the board is mounted
with the fibre optics downward, the second transmitter repeats the output signal. In the left hand
position it repeats the input signal.
The 5703/1 can be configured to point to any relevant parameter in the block diagram, the
default connections are such that the scaled input is connected to the "additional speed demand"
and the output to the "speed demand".
TRUNKING
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUTS
DRIVE
4-WAY CONNECTOR
4-WAY
CONNECTOR
5703/1
DIN
RAIL
RECEIVER
1
P3 PORT
TRANSMITTER
TRUNKING
PREFORMED 4-WAY CABLE
Figure 14-1 5703/1 Product Outline Drawing
2
TRANSMITTER
14-4
Commissioning the 5703/1
The P3 port is configured for 5703 support using the MMI. The
Converters RS422 serial link will then allow control over the scaling
of the input by an operator station or by a host processor. Refer to
Chapter 15: The Default Application for the block diagram, and
also see Figure 14-2 Wiring Diagram for 5703/1 Speed Repeater
below.
Refer to Chapter 6: Programming Your Application - 5703
SUPPORT for parameter details.
MMI Menu Map

1
SERIAL LINKS
SYSTEM PORT P3
P3 SETUP
5703 SUPPORT
SETPT. RATIO
SETPT. SIGN
5703 INPUT
5703 OUTPUT
The Inputs of the Drive
The speed setpoint from the 5703/1 enters the drive via the P3 port and, after scaling, is added
together with analog inputs 1, 2 and 3 (ramped).
IN BASIC TACHO-FOLLOWER MODE, ALL THE ANALOG INPUTS MUST BE

DISABLED TO PREVENT LOSS OF ACCURACY, yet it may be necessary in some
applications to provide analog inputs for trim signals or inch setpoints:
1. The ramp input may be disabled by taking terminal C7 (Ramp Hold) permanently high; the
ramp is automatically cleared when the drive is quenched, and its output will never move
from (exactly) zero. The ramp input may often be of use in line master drives; but the ramp
should be disabled in slave drives. Note that the P3 setpoint may be passed through the ramp
function; in such a case, the analog input to the ramp (terminal A4) is automatically
disconnected.
2. Analog input 1 (terminal A2) is used for inch setpoints. During normal running, the terminal
is shorted to 0V and the deadband function is used so that no signal at all passes to the
summing junction. The analog inch setpoints are set a little above the threshold of the
deadband so as to give the required inching speeds, forward or backward. Selection between
analog inching and absolutely zero analog input is thus accomplished automatically.
3. Analog input 2 (terminal A3) may be disabled by writing zero to its scaling block; this will
normally be done through the MMI at commissioning, but may be overridden by the serial
link. Alternatively, this input may be used for a local analog trim.
POWER
FROM
DRIVE
0V
PSU
+24V dc
RX
RS232
TO DRIVE
TX
RS232
INPUT
OUTPUT
BUFFER
TIL
FIBRE OPTIC O/P 1

3
2
1
FIBRE OPTIC I/P
3 WAY JUMPER
FIBRE OPTIC O/P 2
Figure 14-2 Wiring Diagram for 5703/1 Speed Repeater
14-5
Error Codes
ERROR REPORT (EE)
The EI-BISYNCH Prime Set contains the EE mnemonic. This is also an output parameter in the
MAIN PORT (P1), AUX PORT (P2) and SYSTEM PORT (P3) function blocks, where the
parameter value can be read and reset. Refer to the COMMS Option Technical Manual for
further details.
The following values are returned if an enquiry (reading information from the Converter) is
performed on this Read/Write parameter.
Writing any value to this parameter will set the value to >00C0. Clearing the last error value
may be useful in seeing a repetitive error re-occurring.
Value
Description
>00C0
No error
>01C7
Invalid mnemonic
>02C2
Checksum (BCC) error
>03C2
Framing or overrun error
>04C8
Attempt to read from a write-only parameter
>05C8
Attempt to write to a read-only parameter
>07C7
Invalid message format
>07C8
Invalid data (encoding error)
>08C8
Data out of range
14-6
The Default Application
15-1
THE DEFAULT APPLICATION

5
1
Block Diagrams
The Converter is supplied with a pre-programmed set of parameters providing for basic speed
control. The following block diagrams show this factory set-up.
If you make any permanent changes to the block diagram, remember to update the non-volatile
memory within the Converter by performing a PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to Chapter 5: The
Operator Station - Saving Your Application.
To return to the default application, refer to Chapter 5: The Operator Station - Menu Shortcuts
and Special Key Combinations.
15-2
The Default Application
The Default Application 15-3

Setpoint Sum 1
Analog Input 1
OUTPUT [246]

100.00 % [231] MAX VALUE
-100.00 % [232] MIN VALUE
100
ANIN 1 (A2) [ 50]
SPT. SUM [ 86]
1.0000
[ 6] RATIO 1
5.00 % [218] JOG SPEED 1
1.0000 [208] RATIO 0
-5.00 % [219] JOG SPEED 2
POSITIVE
[ 8] SIGN 1
0.00V
POSITIVE [292] SIGN 0
-5.00 % [254] TAKE UP 2
10.00 % [225] CRAWL SPEED
OUTPUT [493] 0.00%
100.00 % [234] MAX VALUE

-100.00 % [235] MIN VALUE
ANIN 2 (A3) [ 51]
Analog Ouput 1
OPERATING MODE [212] STOP
Analog Input 2
1.0000 [419] DIVIDER 1
Jog/Slack
0.00%
1.0000 [420] DIVIDER 0
0.00 % [131] DEADBAND
105.00 % [375] LIMIT
5.00 % [253] TAKE UP 1
FALSE [228] MODE
10.00
0.500 s
1.0 SECS [355] RAMP RATE
OFF
0.000
3
0.00 %
POSITIVE
1.0000
0.00 % [423] INPUT 2
0.00 % [100] INPUT 1
0.00 % [309] INPUT 0
0.00V
5703
Ramps
Digital Input 2
OUTPUT [105] 118
0.01 % [106] VALUE TRUE
Analog Input 3
OUTPUT [249]

100.00 % [237] MAX VALUE
-100.00 % [238] MIN VALUE
ANIN 3 (A4) [ 52]
10.0 s
10.0 s
ENABLED
OFF
FALSE
0.00 %
2.50 %
0.50 %
ENABLED
DISABLED
0.00 %
0.00 %
[ 2]
[ 3]
[ 4]
[118]
[620]
[ 5]
[266]
[286]
[287]
[288]
[422]
[126]
RAMP OUTPUT [ 85]

RAMPING [113]
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP DECEL TIME
CONSTANT ACCEL
RAMP HOLD
INVERT
RAMP INPUT
% S-RAMP
RAMPING THRESH.
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
MIN. SPEED
0.00 %
FALSE
0.00V
Current Loop
Digital Input 1
OUTPUT [102] 90
0.01 % [103] VALUE TRUE
Analog Input 5
200.00 % [243] MAX VALUE

-200.00 % [244] MIN VALUE
ANIN 5 (A6) [ 54]
200.00 % [240] MAX VALUE
REMOTE TRIP [542] FALSE
AUTOTUNE [ 18]
ILOOP SUSPEND [ 46]
FALSE
MASTER BRIDGE [527]
OFF
[ 15] CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
110.00 % [421] MAIN CURR. LIMIT
[ 16] PROP GAIN
[ 17] INT. GAIN
12.00 % [137] DISCONTINUOUS
0.00 %
[ 30] ADDITIONAL DEM
DISABLED
[ 90] BIPOLAR CLAMPS
-100.00 %
[ 48] NEG. I CLAMP
Aux I/O
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.00 %
0.00 %
OFF
OFF
FALSE
OFF
OFF
OFF
0x0000
0x0000
STALL TRIP [112] OK

LAST ALARM [528] 0x0000
ENABLED [ 19] FIELD FAIL
ENABLED [111] 5703 RCV ERROR
ENABLED [ 28] STALL TRIP INHIBIT
TRUE [305] TRIP RESET
[521] NOM MOTOR VOLTS
2.0 A
[523] ARMATURE CURRENT
VOLTAGE [209] FIELD CONTROL MODE

90.00% [210] FIELD VOLTAGE RATIO
ARM VOLTS [ 47] SPEED FBK SEL
10.0 s [257] DECREASE RATE
1000 RPM [ 22] ENCODER RPM
FALSE [262] LOWER INPUT

-100.00 % [258] MIN VALUE
100.00 % [259] MAX VALUE
FALSE [307] EXTERNAL RESET
1000 [ 24] ENCODER LINES

POSITIVE [ 49] ENCODER SIGN
DIGOUT 1 (B5) [ 74] OFF
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
125 [ 99] INPUT
FALSE [361] INVERTED
0.00 % [197] THRESHOLD
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
122 [ 98] INPUT
TRUE [ 44] MODULUS
Calibration
TERMINAL VOLTS [ 57] 0.00%
TACH INPUT (B2) [ 58] 0.0%
ENCODER [ 59] 0 RPM
BACK EMF [ 60] 0.00%
FIELD FBK. [181] 0.0%
FIELD ENABLED [169]
DISABLED
1.0000 [ 20] ARMATURE V CAL.
FIELD DEMAND [183]
0.00%
0.00 % [ 21] IR COMPENSATION
[184]
90.00% [210] RATIO OUT/IN
100 V
10.0 s [256] INCREASE RATE
VOLTAGE [209] FLD CTRL MODE IS
FALSE [261] RAISE INPUT
TRUE [ 43] MODULUS
FLD. FIRING ANGLE
[524] FIELD CURRENT
ENABLED [540] REM TRIP INHIBIT
ENABLED [170] FIELD ENABLE
0.2 A
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
77 [ 97] INPUT
Field Control
Configure Drive
ANOUT 2 (A8) [ 56] 0.00 V
ENABLED [ 92] ENCODER ALARM

10.0 SECS [541] REM TRIP DELAY
OUTPUT [264] 0.00%
ENABLED [ 81] SPEED FBK ALARM
DISABLED [119] I DMD. ISOLATE
0.00% [465] OFFSET

FALSE [363] MODULUS
HEALTHY [122] TRUE
0.0 AMPS
READY [125] FALSE
0.0 AMPS
100.00% [248] 10V CAL
TRUE [ 45] MODULUS
Alarms
IF FEEDBACK [539]
0.01 % [109] VALUE TRUE
[ 12] ZERO THRESHOLD
IA FEEDBACK [538]
0.00 % [255] RESET VALUE
OUTPUT [108] 119
2.00%
START (C3) [ 68]

DIGIN (C4) [ 69]
DIGIN (C5) [ 70]
SEQ STATUS [537]
REM SEQUENCE [536]
[161] AUX START
[227] AUX JOG
[168] AUX ENABLE
[ 94] AUX DIGOUT 1
[ 95] AUX DIGOUT 2
[ 96] AUX DIGOUT 3
[128] ANOUT 1
[129] ANOUT 2
[496] JOG/SLACK
[497] ENABLE CURRENT
[535] REM. SEQ. ENABLE
ANOUT 1 (A7) [ 55] 0.00 V
[ 11] STANDSTILL LOGIC
AT STANDSTILL [ 79] FALSE
89 [306] ZERO SETPOINT

DISABLED
HEALTH STORE [116] 0x0000
0.00V
Digital Input 3
0.00 %
FALSE
HEALTH WORD [115] 0x0000
Raise/Lower
AT ZERO SPEED [ 77] FALSE
ANIN 4 (A5) [ 53]
FALSE
-200.00 % [238] MIN VALUE
AT ZERO SETPOINT [ 78] FALSE
100.00 % [301] POS. I CLAMP
10.0 s
60.0 s
1.0 s
0.0
0.1 s
60.0 s
100.00 %
2.00 %
Stop Rates
SPEED DEMAND [ 89]
PROGRAM STOP [ 80]
[ 27] STOP TIME
[217] STOP LIMIT
[302] CONTACTOR DELAY
[594] CURR DECAY RATE
[ 26] PROG STOP TIME
[216] PROG STOP LIMIT
[ 91] PROG STOP I LIM
[ 29] STOP ZERO SPEED
Standstill
FALSE [362] MODULUS
2.00 [136] FEED FORWARD
OUTPUT [250] 48
0.00 %
POSITIVE [133] SETPT. SIGN
0.00 % [464] OFFSET
Analog Output 2
0.00%
ENABLED [201] REGEN MODE
0.0000 [132] SETPT. RATIO
%
%
%
%
63 [252] INPUT
0.00%
3.50 %
0.00%
89 [134] OUTPUT
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
IA DEMAND [66]
Analog Input 4
0.00%
RAW INPUT [187]
IA FEEDBACK [65]
45.00 %
0.00V
SCALED INPUT [189]
100.00 % [245] 10V CAL
OUTPUT [356]
SPEED FEEDBACK [ 62]
SPEED SETPOINT [ 63]
SPEED ERROR [ 64]
[ 14] PROP. GAIN
[ 13] INT. TIME CONST.
[202] INT. DEFEAT
[547] SPEED FBK FILTER
[554] ENCODER FILTER
[289] SETPOINT 1
[ 9] SIGN 2 (A3)
[ 7] RATIO 2 (A3)
SETPOINT 2 (A3) [290]
[291] SETPOINT 3
[ 41] SETPOINT 4
[357] MAX DEMAND
[358] MIN DEMAND
[595] PRESET TORQUE
[604] PRESET T SCALE
0.00 %
0.00 %
105.00 %
-105.00 %
0.00 %
100.00 %
100.00 %
OUTPUT [247] 301
AT CURRENT LIMIT [ 42]
62 [251] INPUT
Speed Loop
100.00% [171] SETPOINT

0.10 [173] PROP. GAIN
1.28 [172] INT. GAIN
DISABLED [174] FLD. WEAK ENABLE
2.00 [175] EMF LEAD
40.00 [176] EMF LAG
0.30 [177] EMF GAIN
10.00% [179] MIN FIELD CURRENT
0.00 DEG
1.0000 [ 23] ANALOG TACH CAL
0.00 % [ 10] ZERO SPD. OFFSET
BIPOLAR [ 25] ARMATURE I (A9)
50.0 % [180] SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
95.00 % [263] STALL THRESHOLD

480.0 s
[224] STALL TRIP DELAY
125.00 % [188] OVERSPEED LEVEL
1.0000 [182] FIELD I CAL
0x0000 [267] POSITION COUNT
1 [275] POSITION DIVIDER
CURRENT PROFILE
100.0 % [ 32] SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
100.0 % [ 31] SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
[185] FLD. QUENCH DELAY
200.0 % [ 93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
QUENCH [186] FLD. QUENCH MODE
200.0 % [ 33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
100.00% [178] MAX VOLTS

100 [191] BEMF FBK LEAD
100 [192] BEMF FBK LAG
0.0 s
Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1


Diameter Calc.
Tension & Comp
Taper Calc.
DIAMETER [427] 0.00%
TAPERED DEMAND [452] 0.00%
MOD OF LINE SPEED [428] 0.00%
TOT. TENS DEMAND [441] 0.00%
MOD OF REEL SPEED [429] 0.00%
UNFILTERED DIAMETER [430] 0.00%
Tec Option
TENS+COMP [478] 0
FAULT [506] NONE
INERTIA COMP O/P [485] 0.00%
0.00 % [438] TAPER
0.00 % [487] STATIC COMP
0.00 % [439] TENSION SPT.
0.00 % [488] DYNAMIC COMP
0.00 % [440] TENSION TRIM
ENABLED [489] REWIND
VERSION [507] 0x0000

OUTPUT 1 [508] 0
OUTPUT 2 [509] 0
NONE [500] TYPE
0.00 % [424] LINE SPEED
0.00 % [437] REEL SPEED
0.00 % [479] FIX. INERTIA COMP
0 [501] INPUT 1
10.00 % [425] MIN DIAMETER
0.00 % [480] VAR. INERTIA COMP
0 [502] INPUT 2
100.00 % [481] ROLL WIDTH/MASS
0 [503] INPUT 3
5.00 % [426] MIN SPEED
PID
PID OUTPUT [417] 0.00%
0.00 % [498] LINE SPEED SPT
0 [504] INPUT 4
DISABLED [463] EXTERNAL RESET
PID CLAMPED [416] FALSE
10 [482] FILTER T.C.
0 [505] INPUT 5
5.0 s [453] RAMP RATE
10.00 % [462] RESET VALUE
PID ERROR [415] 0.00%
1.0 [404] PROP. GAIN

5.00 s [402] INT. TIME CONST.
Setpoint Sum 2
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
100.00 %
SPT SUM OUTPUT [451] 0.00 %

OUTPUT 0 [491] 0.00 %
OUTPUT 1 [492] 0.00 %
[444] INPUT 0
[443] INPUT 1
[445] INPUT 2
[447] RATIO 0
[446] RATIO 1
[448] DIVIDER 0
[466] DIVIDER 1
[449] LIMIT
0.00 % [484] NORMALISED dv/dt
1.0000 [486] TENSION SCALER
100.00% [405] POSITIVE LIMIT
-100.00% [406] NEGATIVE LIMIT
0.2000 [407] O/P SCALER (TRIM)
0.00% [410] INPUT 1
0.00% [411] INPUT 2
1.0000 [412] RATIO 1
1.0000 [413] RATIO 2
1.0000 [418] DIVIDER 1
1.0000 [414] DIVIDER 2
OFF [409] INT. DEFEAT

0 [473] MODE
20.00% [474] MIN PROFILE GAIN
POS. I CLAMP [435] 0
NEG. I CLAMP [436] 0
0x00C0
[332] ERROR REPORT
ENABLED [434] OVER WIND
CELITE (EIASCII)
[130] MODE
0x0000
[329] GROUP ID
0x0000
[330] UNIT ID
Advanced
0 [268] MODE
5.00 % [270] SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)

5.00 [271] PROP. GAIN
0.500 s [272] INT. TIME CONST.
1.0000 [274] I GAIN IN RAMP
miniLINK
Op Station
ERROR REPORT [158]
TRUE [511] LOCAL KEY ENABLE
0.00% [512] SETPOINT
0x0000
0.00% [273] POS. LOOP P GAIN
5.00% [513] JOG SETPOINT
0.50 % [284] ZERO SPD. LEVEL
10.0 SECS [514] RAMP ACCEL TIME
1.50 % [285] ZERO IAD LEVEL
10.0 SECS [515] RAMP DECEL TIME
PNO 112
[312]
0.00 % [339] VALUE 1
PNO 113
[313]
0.00 % [340] VALUE 2
PNO 114
[314]
0.00 % [341] VALUE 3
PNO 115
[315]
0.00 % [342] VALUE 4
PNO 116
[316]
0.00 % [343] VALUE 5
PNO 117
[317]
0.00 % [344] VALUE 6
PNO 118
[318]
0.00 % [345] VALUE 7
PNO 119
[319]
0.00 % [379] VALUE 8
379 PNO 120
[320]
0.00 % [380] VALUE 9
380 PNO 121
[321]
0.00 % [381] VALUE 10
381 PNO 122
[322]
0.00 % [382] VALUE 11
382 PNO 123
[323]
0.00 % [383] VALUE 12
383 PNO 124
[324]
0.00 % [384] VALUE 13
384 PNO 125
[325]
0.00 % [385] VALUE 14
385 PNO 126
[326]
OFF [346] LOGIC 1
[327]
OFF [347] LOGIC 2
OFF [348] LOGIC 3
OFF [349] LOGIC 4
0 [395] INPUT SOURCE
OFF [350] LOGIC 5
0 [399] AUX INPUT SOURCE
OFF [351] LOGIC 6
OFF [352] LOGIC 7
OFF [353] LOGIC 8
PNO 127
System Port P3
0.00 % [432] TORQUE DEMAND

ENABLED [433] TENSION ENABLE
1.00 % [269] SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
PROFILED GAIN [475] 0.0
Torque Calc.
Menus
ENABLED [ 37] FULL MENUS
ENGLISH [304] LANGUAGE
0.100 s [403] FILTER T.C.
0.000 s [401] DERIVATIVE TC
ENABLED [408] ENABLE
10.00 [483] RATE CAL
TRUE
User Filter
OUTPUT [296] 0.00 %
0.00 % [295] INPUT
[516] INITIAL FWD DIRECTION
FALSE [517] INITIAL LOCAL
FALSE [518] INITIAL PROGRAM
0.00% [519] INITIAL SETPOINT
5.00% [520] INITIAL JOG SETPOINT
Link 11
OUTPUT DEST [391] 0
0 [390] INPUT SOURCE
0 [394] AUX INPUT SOURCE

OFF [392] ADVANCED
SWITCH [393] MODE
Link 12
OUTPUT DEST [396] 0
OFF [397] ADVANCED

SWITCH [398] MODE
Diagnostics
SPEED FEEDBACK
SPEED ERROR
CURRENT DEMAND
CURRENT FEEDBACK
POS. I CLAMP
NEG. I CLAMP
ACTUAL POS I LIM
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
DRIVE START
DRIVE ENABLE
FIELD I FBK.
TACH INPUT (B2)
ENCODER
DRIVE RUNNING
CONTACTOR CLOSED
[207]
[297]
[299]
[298]
[ 87]
[ 88]
[ 67]
[ 61]
[ 82]
[ 84]
[300]
[308]
[206]
[376]
[ 83]
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
OFF
DISABLED
0.00 %
0.0 %
0 RPM
FALSE
OFF

Inertia Comp
INERTIA COMP OUTPUT [602] 0.00 %
UNSCALED OUTPUT [603] 0.00 %
DELTA [601] 0.00 %
0.00 [556] INERTIA
0 [557] FILTER
100.00 [558] RATE CAL
Preset
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
100.0
FALSE
FALSE
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PRESET OP (%) [572] 0.00 %

OUTPUT [593] 0.0
[560] SELECT 1
[561] SELECT 2
[562] SELECT 3
[563] INVERT
[559] MAX SPEED

[600] LIMIT
[610] GRAY SCALE
[564] INPUT 0
[565] INPUT 1
[566] INPUT 2
[567] INPUT 3
[568] INPUT 4
[569] INPUT 5
[570] INPUT 6
[571] INPUT 7
SRampl
0.00 %
0
TRUE
FALSE
0.00 %
FALSE
1.00 %
5.00 %
0.50 %
60.00 %
60.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
30.00 %
30.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
20.00 %
[574]
[575]
[582]
[583]
[584]
[585]
[586]
[591]
[592]
[576]
[577]
[578]
[611]
[596]
[613]
[579]
[580]
[581]
[612]
[597]
[614]
OUTPUT [589]
ACCEL OUTPUT [588]
AT SPEED [587]
INPUT
RATE SELECT
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE
QUENCH
AT SPEED LEVEL
OVER SHOOT THRESHOLD
ERROR THRESHOLD
ACCEL 0
DECEL 0
ACCEL 0 JERK 1
ACCEL 0 JERK 2
DECEL 0 JERK 1
DECEL 0 JERK 2
ACCEL 1
DECEL 1
ACCEL 1 JERK 1
ACCEL 1 JERK 2
DECEL 1 JERK 1
DECEL 1 JERK 2
0.00 %
0.00 %
FALSE

Ia
A9
ANALOG O/P 3
ANALOG I/P 5
CURRENT FEEDBACK
Ia
[25]
ARM I (A9)
[301]
A6
ANALOG I/P 4
A5
DIGITAL I/P 1
C6
POS I CLAMP
POS I CLAMP
[15]
I LIMIT (SCALER)
[48]
NEG I CLAMP
[91]
[90]
[32]
[31]
P3 PORT O/P
SETPOINT SIGN
[132]
P3 PORT I/P
[133]
P3 SETPOINT RATIO
x
[187]
RAW I/P
SCALED INPUT
[189]
[8]
RATIO 1
[100]
ANALOG I/P 1
A2
DIVIDER 1
DEADBAND WIDTH
[208]
[9]
[7]
SIGN 2
[309]
RATIO 2
A
B
ANALOG I/P 2
ANALOG O/P 2
A8
[33]
++
+
[13]
+
+
+ +
[14]
CONTACTOR DELAY
RAMP TO ZERO
[290]
-1
NEG I CLAMP
PROGRAM STOP
I MAX BRK 1 (LOW)
INVERSE TIME
I MAX BRK 2 (HIGH)
CURRENT PROFILE
OUTPUT
INT. TIME CONST.

[17]
SPEED LOOP O/P

PROP. GAIN
549]
ADDITIONAL I D
[16]
[30]
+
-
SPEED LOOP PI
SPEED FEEDBACK
DRIVE ENABLE
PROGRAM STOP
SETPOINT 2
INT. GAIN
PROP. GAIN
CURRENT LOOP PI
STOP
PROGRAM STOP I LIMIT
SPEED BRK 1 (LOW)

SPEED BRK 2 (HIGH)
SPEED ERROR
SETPOINT 1
[302]
[292]
SIGN 0
[420]
[419]
RATIO 0
INPUT 0
[289]
DIVIDER 0
A3
SPEED DEMAND
SETPOINT SUM 1 O/P
SIGN 1
A
B
INPUT 1
[131]
SETPOINT 4
INPUT 2
[6]
[93]
P3 OUTPUT
[41]
[423]
-1
BIPOLAR CLAMPS
ACTUAL +Ve I LIMIT
[119]
CURRENT DEMAND
ACTUAL -Ve I LIMIT

[421]
I DEMAND ISOLATE
MAIN I LIMIT
SPEED SETPOINT
ANALOG O/P 1
AT ZERO SETPOINT
A7
DIGITAL I/P 3
[288]
[422]
EXT RESET
[291]
RESET VALUE
SETPOINT 3
C8
[302]
[12]
STANDSTILL
SPEED THRESHOLD
ANALOG I/P 3
A4
DIGITAL I/P 2
C7
[5]
[118]
DIGITAL O/P 1
[2]
RAMP HOLD
[3]
B5
RAMP DECEL TIME
RAMP ACCEL TIME
[266]
CURRENT FEEDBACK
COMP
S RAMP %
AT ZERO SPEED
ENCODER
x
[49]
STALL THRESHOLD
MAX VALUE
ZERO SPEED OFFSET
ENCODER SIGN
[261]
[262]
BACK EMF
[256]
[257]
JOG
JOG & TAKEUP SLACK
KEY
VALUE SET-UP PARAMETER
EXT RESET
RAISE INPUT
LOWER INPUT
RAISE /
LOWER
LOGIC SET-UP PARAMETER
RAISE/LOWER O/P
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
[258]
[23]
ANALOG TACH CAL
[259]
RESET VALUE
[307]
[10]
TACH INPUT
AUX JOG
[255]
[47]
SPEED F/B SELECT
B2
C4
STALLED
[22]
ENCODER
JOG/SLACK
DELAY
ZERO SPEED
RAMPING
ENCODER RPM
ANALOG TACH
STALL TRIP DELAY
AT STANDSTILL
RAMP O/P
S RAMP & JOG/SLACK
RAMP INPUT
I LIMITED
ZERO SETPOINT
MIN VALUE
LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
INCREASE RATE
USER-CONFIGURABLE LINK
DECREASE RATE
[123]
TAG NUMBER
MODE
START
Main Block Diagram

FIELD I CAL
SCALED FIELD
CURRENT FEEDBACK
x
[182]
FIELD I FEEDBACK
[179]
[171]
MIN FIELD
[21]
BACK EMF
IR COMPENSATION
VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK
[172]
EMF LAG
x
[192]
FIELD DEMAND
[176]
BEMF LEAD
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[210]
EMF GAIN
[191]
SCALED
ARMATURE
FIELD SETPOINT
[177]
[175]
BEMF LAG
BEMF FILTER
[173]
EMF LEAD
MAX VOLTS
ARMATURE V CAL
PROP. GAIN
FIELD FIRING ANGLE
FIELD THYRISTOR
FIELD CURRENT PI
FIELD ENABLE
[174]
FIELD WEAK ENABLE
TERMINAL VOLTS
FIELD ENABLE
INT. GAIN
FIRING CONTROL
[209]
[178]
[20]
FIELD WEAKENING PID
[170]
RATIO OUT/IN
FIELD CONTROL MODE
KEY
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
TAG NUMBER
Field Control Block Diagram

KEY
[168]
AUX ENABLE
[11]
ENABLE
ENABLE
C5
DRIVE ENABLE
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
STANDSTILL ENABLE
AT STANDSTILL
LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
FLD.QUENCH MODE
[170]
MC
DIGITAL O/P 3
B7
PHASE
LOCK
USER-CONFIGURABLE LINK
FLD ENABLE
FLD ENABLE
[123]
COAST
STOP
TAG NUMBER
MOTOR OVERSPEED
MISSING PULSE
FIELD OVERCURRENT
READY
FIN TEMPERATURE
MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE
OVERVOLTS
TACH FAIL
DIGITAL O/P 2
B6
ENCODER
HEALTHY
P3 PORT
START
STALL TRIP
STOP
OVERCURRENT TRIP
EXTERNAL TRIP
ACCTS
AUTOTUNE ERROR
AUTOTUNE ABORT
[161]
AUX START
START / RUN
C3
FIELD FAIL
3 PHASE FAILED
PHASE LOCK FAILED
DELAY
S
PROGRAM STOP
B8
MC CLOSED
SIGNAL
R
PROG STOP
MAIN CONTACTOR
COAST STOP
B9
NORMAL STOP
TIMEOUT
AT ZERO SPEED
PROGRAM STOP
TIMEOUT
AT ZERO SPEED
Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram


TACH FAIL
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT

MICROTACH
LINK TEST
INTERFACE
MODULE
AC
AC TACH
INPUT
AC
DC TACH DCINPUT
DC+
ANALOG INPUT 1
ANALOG INPUT 2
ANALOG INPUT 3
ANALOG INPUT 4
ANALOG INPUT 5
+10 VDC REF
0 VDC
-10 VDC REF
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
BUFFERED IA
START/RUN
JOG
ENABLE
DIGITAL INPUT 1
DIGITAL INPUT 2
DIGITAL INPUT 3
THERMISTOR
0 VDC
+24 VDC
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3
RECEIVE
(-)
(+)
0V SCREEN
TRANSMIT
(-)
(+)
0V SCREEN
G1
G2
G3
G4
A3
A4
A5
(2) LINE X (16) CHARACTER

DISPLAY
NONISOLATED
RS232
P3 PORT
E
M
FIRING GATE ARRAY

KEYBOARD
DRIVERS
ANALOG
INPUT
RAM
EEPROM
SYSTEM
EPROM
l I al
A8
ARMATURE CURRENT
FIELD VOLTS
FIELD CURRENT
C3
OVERCURRENT TRIP
C4
MISSING Ia PULSE
C5
C7
INSTANTANEOUS IA
DIGITAL
INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
H1
H2
H3
CODING
PHASE ROTATION
SERIAL LINK PRESENT
(3) PHASE PRESENT
ISOLATED
RS422
SERIAL
LINK
MODULE
P1 PORT
HEALTH
D1
-10V
PROGRAM
STOP
START
AC
D2
FIELD
VOLTS
ISOLATE
-15V
QUENCH
MAIN
CONTACTOR
STACK
SUPPR
ISOLATE &
LEVEL
SHIFT
RUN
NONISOLATED
RS422
SERIAL
P2 PORT
TX -
CAL
ACCT PRESENT
HEAT SINK
SWITCH
H5
H4
L3
Vf
If
PROCESSOR
C9
H6
SCALING
L2
RESET
MAIN
C1
B7
INPUT
L1
ACCT
RECTIFY &
BURDEN
Ia
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
C2
B6
CONTROL
SIGNAL
AVERAGE IA
C8
B5
ARMATURE
ARMATURE VOLTS
ANALOG
OUTPUT
A9
C6
SLAVE
Va
A1
B4
ARMATURE
VOLTS
ISOLATE
Ia
B3
A7
MASTER
PULSE
TRANSFORMERS
A6
RX +
RX -
COAST STOP
Rx
A2
TX +
PROGRAM STOP
Tx
ANALOG
TACH
FEEDBACK
MODULE
D4
FIELD
BRIDGE
+5V +15V
+10 +24
0V
V
V
AC
+
FIELD
D3
D8
POWER SUPPLY
EXTERNAL
FIELD
SUPPLY
D7
L
N
AUX
SUPPLY
B8
PROGRAM STOP
D5
START CONTACTOR
DELAY
B9
CONTROL
RELAY
D6
L
N
STOP
Functional Block Diagram

ISS.
MODIFICATION
ECN No.
DATE
DRAWN
CHK'D
HA466461U002 - Contains Frame 4 and software

version 5.x. Replaces manual HA466461U001.
16158
7/8/01
CM
GR
HA466461U003 - Updated for software version 7.x.

Replaces manual HA466461U002.
17564
15/05/03
CM
GR
17948
(17756)
8/12/03
CM
GR
(15028)
(15909)
(16658)
(16733)
(16753)
(16808)
(16843)
(17130)
(17236)
(17248)
(17615)
Other amendments include:

New filter drawings
New electrical installation details
New function block details
Frame 5 earthing policy changed, pages 3-10 & 3-13.

Vibration details amended, page 11-1
Other minor amendments
HA466461U003 - Various small changes.
18293
4/8/04
CM
GR
Change of company name and logo to SSD Drives Ltd.
18354
1/11/04
CM
GR
Improved warningson motor rotatin during Autotune.

Various small amendments.
18826
07/11/05
CM
GR
FIRST USED ON
MODIFICATION RECORD
DRAWING NUMBER
SHT. 1
ZZ466461U003
OF 1

DC Digital Drive

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DC Digital Drive

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DC Digital Drive

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

590+ Series

Compatible with Version 7.x Software

Copyright 2005 SSD Drives Limited (formerly Eurotherm Drives Limited)

The drive motor must be connected to an appropriate safety earth.

IMPORTANT: Metal parts may reach a temperature of 90 degrees centigrade in operation.

The motor speed may not be controlled

The direction of rotation of the motor may not be controlled

The motor may be energised

How it Works................................................................................................. 2-1

Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 3-1

DC Contactor - External VA Sensing.......................................................................3-23

Fitting the Remote 6901 Operator Station ............................................3-25

Installation Drawings ................................................................................. 3-29

Pre-Operation Checks .................................................................................. 4-1

THE OPERATOR STATION

PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

Trips .............................................................................................................. 7-1

Fault Finding................................................................................................. 7-2

Maintenance ................................................................................................. 8-1

Requirements for EMC Compliance ............................................................ 12-1

Requirements for UL Compliance ............................................................... 12-6

Standard Equipment................................................................................... 13-1

590+ Series DC Digital Converter

Equipment Inspection and Storage

Check for signs of transit damage

Packaging and Lifting Details

About this Manual

certification requirements, CE/UL/c-UL conformance

conformance with local installation requirements

supply and cabling requirements

plan your block diagram programming

enter a password to guard against illicit or accidental changes

learn how to back-up your application data

customise the Operator Station to the application

How the Manual is Organised

Application Block Diagram

590+ Series DC Digital Converter

590+ Series DC Digital Converter

An Overview of the Converter

AN OVERVIEW OF THE CONVERTER

Field Current 5.7A

590+ Series DC Digital Converter

An Overview of the Converter

Fully isolated from power circuit (SELV)

Fully controlled 3-phase thyristor bridge

By Armature Voltage feedback with IR

0.01 % Encoder Feedback with Digital setpoint

High energy MOVs

Fully computerised with first fault latch and

Table 2-1 Control Features

590+ Series DC Digital Converter

An Overview of the Converter

Understanding the Product Code

3 digits identifying the nominal 3 phase ac power, supply voltage:

110 to 220V (10%) 50/60Hz

4 digits describing the mechanical package including livery and mechanical

Mechanical Package Style

Two characters specifying the user interface language:

590+ Series DC Digital Converter